User’s

Manual
UP55A
Program Controller
User’s Manual

IM 05P02C41-01EN

IM 05P02C41-01EN
2nd Edition
 Product Registration
Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products.

YOKOGAWA provides registered users with a variety of information and services.

Please allow us to serve you best by completing the product registration form accessible
from our homepage.

http://www.yokogawa.com/ns/reg/
 Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the UP55A program controller (hereinafter referred to as
UP55A).
This manual describes how to use UP55A functions other than UP55A’s communication
function and ladder sequence function. Please read through this user’s manual carefully
before using the product.
Note that the manuals for the UP55A comprise the following seven documents:

● Printed manual
Manual Name Manual Number Description
This manual describes the basic operation
UP55A Operation Guide
IM 05P02C41-11EN method.
(For Standard model)
It is also contained in the provided CD-ROM.
This manual describes the basic operation
UP55A Operation Guide
IM 05P02C41-15EN method.
(For Detailed model)
It is also contained in the provided CD-ROM.

● Electronic manuals contained in the provided CD-ROM

Manual Name Manual Number Description
UP55A Operation Guide
IM 05P02C41-11EN This is identical to the printed manual.
(For Standard model)
UP55A Operation Guide
IM 05P02C41-15EN This is identical to the printed manual.
(For Detailed model)
This manual. It describes the usage of all
UP55A
IM 05P02C41-01EN functions except the ladder sequence and
User’s Manual
communication functions.
UTAdvanced Series This manual describes how to use UTAdvanced
Communication Interface in Ethernet and serial communications. For
IM 05P07A01-01EN
(RS-485, Ethernet) communication wiring, see the Operation Guide
User’s Manual or User’s Manual.
UTAdvanced Series This manual describes how to use UTAdvanced
Communication Interface in PROFIBUS-DP/DeviceNet/CC-Link
IM 05P07A01-02EN
(Open Network) communications. For communication wiring,
User’s Manual see the Operation Guide or User’s Manual.
LL50A Parameter Setting
This manual describes how to install and
Software Installation IM 05P05A01-01EN
uninstall the LL50A.
Manual
This manual describes how to use the LL50A,
LL50A Parameter Setting ladder sequence function, peer-to-peer
IM 05P05A01-02EN
Software User’s Manual communication, and network profile creating
function.
* User’s Manual can be downloaded from a website.

Target Readers
This guide is intended for the following personnel;
● Engineers responsible for installation, wiring, and maintenance of the equipment.
● Personnel responsible for normal daily operation of the equipment.
Notice
● The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice as a result of
continuing improvements to the instrument’s performance and functions.
● Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy in the preparation of this manual.
Should any errors or omissions come to your attention, however, please inform
Yokogawa Electric’s sales office or sales representative.
● Under no circumstances may the contents of this manual, in part or in whole, be
transcribed or copied without our permission.

2nd Edition : Sep. 2010 (YK)

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2010 Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IM 05P02C41-01EN 
 Trademarks
● Our product names or brand names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation (hereinafter referred to as
YOKOGAWA).
● Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows XP, and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
● Adobe, Acrobat, and Postscript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
● Ethernet is a registered trademark of XEROX Corporation in the United States.
● Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.
● PROFIBUS-DP is a registered trademark of PROFIBUS User Organization.
● DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vender Association, Inc.
● CC-Link is a registered trademark of CC-Link Partner Association (CLPA.)
● We do not use the TM or ® mark to indicate these trademarks or registered
trademarks in this user’s manual.
● All other product names mentioned in this user’s manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.

Safety Precautions
This instrument is a product of Installation Category II of IEC/EN/CSA/UL61010-1 Safety
Standards and Class A of EN61326-1, EN55011 (EMC Standards).

CAUTION
This instrument is an EMC class A product. In a domestic environment, this product
may cause radio interference in which case the user needs to take adequate
measures.

The instrument is a product rated Measurement Category I (CAT.I).

* Measurement Category I (CAT.I)
This category applies to electric equipment that measures a circuit connected to a
low-voltage facility and receives power from stationary equipment such as electric
switchboards.
To use the instrument properly and safely, observe the safety precautions described in
this user’s manual when operating it. Use of the instrument in a manner not prescribed
herein may compromise protection features inherent in the device. We assume no liability
for or warranty on a fault caused by users’ failure to observe these instructions.
This instrument is designed to be used within the scope of Measurement Category I (CAT.
I) and is dedicated for indoor use.

Notes on the User’s Manual

• This user’s manual should be readily accessible to the end users so it can be referred
to easily. It should be kept in a safe place.
• Read the information contained in this manual thoroughly before operating the
product.
• The purpose of this user’s manual is not to warrant that the product is well suited to
any particular purpose, but rather to describe the functional details of the product.

ii IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
The following symbols are used in the product and user’s manuals to indicate safety
precautions:
“Handle with Care” (This symbol is attached to the part(s) of the product to
indicate that the user’s manual should be referred to in order to protect the
operator and the instrument from harm.)

AC

AC/DC

The equipment wholly protected by double insulation or reinforced insulation.

Functional grounding terminal (Do not use this terminal as a protective grounding terminal.)

• In order to protect the system controlled by this product and the product itself, and
to ensure safe operation, observe the safety precautions described in this user’s
manual. Use of the instrument in a manner not prescribed herein may compromise the
product’s functions and the protection features inherent in the device. We assume no
liability for safety, or responsibility for the product’s quality, performance or functionality
should users fail to observe these instructions when operating the product.
• Installation of protection and/or safety circuits with respect to a lightning protector;
protective equipment for the system controlled by the product and the product itself;
foolproof or failsafe design of a process or line using the system controlled by the
product or the product itself; and/or the design and installation of other protective and
safety circuits are to be appropriately implemented as the customer deems necessary.
• Be sure to use the spare parts approved by YOKOGAWA when replacing parts or consumables.
• This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in critical applications that
directly affect or threaten human lives. Such applications include nuclear power
equipment, devices using radioactivity, railway facilities, aviation equipment, air
navigation facilities, aviation facilities, and medical equipment. If so used, it is the
user’s responsibility to include in the system additional equipment and devices that
ensure personnel safety.
• Modification of the product is strictly prohibited.
• This product is intended to be handled by skilled/trained personnel for electric devices.
• This product is UL Recognized Component. In order to comply with UL standards,
end-products are necessary to be designed by those who have knowledge of the
requirements.

WARNING
● Power Supply
Ensure that the instrument’s supply voltage matches the voltage of the power
supply before turning ON the power.
● Do Not Use in an Explosive Atmosphere
Do not operate the instrument in locations with combustible or explosive gases
or steam. Operation in such environments constitutes an extreme safety hazard.
Use of the instrument in environments with high concentrations of corrosive gas
(H2S, SOX, etc.) for extended periods of time may cause a failure.
● Do Not Remove Internal Unit
The internal unit should not be removed by anyone other than YOKOGAWA’s
service personnel. There are dangerous high voltage parts inside. Additionally,
do not replace the fuse by yourself.
● Damage to the Protective Construction
Operation of the instrument in a manner not specified in this user’s manual may
damage its protective construction.

IM 05P02C41-01EN iii
 Warning and Disclaimer
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the
WARRANTY that is provided separately.
• The product is provided on an “as is” basis. YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any
person or entity for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, arising from the use of the
product or from any unpredictable defect of the product.

Notes on Software
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the
software’s merchantability or suitability for any particular purpose, except as specified
in the terms of the separately provided warranty.
• This software may be used on one specific machine only.
• To use the software on another machine, the software must be purchased again
separately.
• It is strictly prohibited to reproduce the product except for backup purposes.
• Store the software CD-ROM (the original medium) in a safe place.
• All reverse-engineering operations, such as reverse compilation or the reverse
assembly of the product are strictly prohibited.
• No part of the product’s software may be transferred, converted, or sublet for use by
any third party, without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA.

Handling Precautions for the Main Unit

• The instrument comprises many plastic components. To clean it, wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth. Do not use organic solvents such as benzene or thinner for cleaning, as
discoloration or deformation may result.
• Keep electrically charged objects away from the signal terminals. Not doing so may
cause the instrument to fail.
• Do not apply volatile chemicals to the display area, operation keys, etc. Do not leave
the instrument in contact with rubber or PVC products for extended periods. Doing so
may result in failure.
• If the equipment emits smoke or abnormal smells or makes unusual noises, turn OFF
the instrument’s power immediately and unplug the device. In such an event, contact
your sales representative.

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), Directive 2002/96/EC

This is an explanation of how to dispose of this product based on Waste Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (WEEE), Directive 2002/96/EC. This directive is only valid in the
EU.

Marking
This product complies with the WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) marking requirement.
This marking indicates that you must not discard this electrical/electronic product in
domestic household waste.

Product Category
With reference to the equipment types in the WEEE directive Annex 1, this product is
classified as a “Monitoring and Control instrumentation” product.
Do not dispose in domestic household waste. When disposing products in the EU,
contact your local Yokogawa Europe B.V. office.

iv IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Checking the Contents of the Package
Unpack the box and check the contents before using the product. If the product is
different from that which you have ordered, if any parts or accessories are missing, or if
the product appears to be damaged, contact your sales representative.

UP55A Main Unit

The UP55A main units have nameplates affixed to the side of the case.
Check the model and suffix codes inscribed on the nameplate to confirm that the product
received is that which was ordered.

No. (Instrument number)

When contacting your sales representative, inform them of this number, too.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 
 Model and Suffix Codes of UP55A (for Standard model)
[Style:S1]
Optional
Model Suffix code suffix Description
code
Program Controller (provided with retransmission output or 15 V DC loop
UP55A power supply, 8 DIs, and 8 DOs) (Power supply: 100-240 V AC)
30 program patterns / 300 program segments (Max. 99 segments per pattern)
Type 1: -0 Standard type
Basic -1 Position proportional type
control -2 Heating/cooling type
0 None
1 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input, 1 additional DI
Type 2:
2 RS-485 communication (Max.19.2 kpbs, 2-wire/4-wire)
Functions (*1)
3 10 additional DOs
4 3 additional aux. analog inputs, 2 DIs and 5 DOs to be deleted
0 None
1 RS-485 communication (Max.38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
Type 3: 2 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
Open networks 3 CC-Link communication (with Modbus master function)
4 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
5 DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function)
-1 English
-2 German
Display language (*2)
-3 French
-4 Spanish
0 White (Light gray)
Case color
1 Black (Light charcoal gray)
Fixed code -00 Always “-00”
Additional direct input (TC and 3-wire/4-wire RTD) and current input to Remote
/DR
(1 additional aux. analog) input, 1 DI to be deleted (*3)
Optional suffix codes /HA Heater break alarm (*4)
/DC Power supply 24 V AC/DC
/CT Coating (*5)
*1: When “3” is specified for the Type 2 code, only “0” can be specified for the Type 3 code.
*2: English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.
*3: When any of “1” or “4” is specified for the Type 2 code, the /DR option can be specified.
*4: When “-0” is specified for the Type 1 code, the /HA option can be specified.
*5: When the /CT option is specified, the UP55A does not conform to the safety standards (UL
and CSA) and CE marking.

vi IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Model and Suffix Codes of UP55A (for Detailed model)
[Style:S1]
Optional
Model Suffix code suffix Description
code
Program Controller (provided with 3 DIs, and 3 DOs) (Power supply: 100-240 V AC)
UP55A
30 program patterns/300 program segments (Max. 99 segments per pattern)
Fixed code -NNN Always “-NNN”
-1 English
Display language -2 German
(*1) -3 French
-4 Spanish
0 White (Light gray)
Case color
1 Black (Light charcoal gray)
-A Analog output (current/voltage pulse)
-R Relay output (c-contact)
Output 1 (*2) (*3) -U Universal output (current/voltage pulse/relay)
-T Triac output
-P Position proportional output
A Analog output (current/voltage pulse)
R Relay output (c-contact)
Output 2 (*2) (*3) U Universal output (current/voltage pulse/relay)
T Triac output
N None
Retransmission output /RT Retransmission output or 15 V DC power supply
Heater break alarm (*3) /HA Heater break alarm
/R1 Remote (1 additional aux. analog) input and 1 additional DI
/U1 1 additional universal input (TC/RTD/DCV/mA)
E1 terminal area (*4) /X1 5 additional DIs
/Y1 5 additional DOs
/W1 2 additional DIs and 2 additional DOs
/A2 1 additional aux. analog input and 1 additional DI
/X2 5 additional DIs
E2 terminal area (*4)
/Y2 5 additional DOs
/W2 2 additional DIs and 2 additional DOs
/CH3 RS485 communication (Max. 38.4 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
/CC3 CC-Link communication (with Modbus master funciton)
/PD3 PROFIBUS-DP communication (with Modbus master function)
/DN3 DeviceNet communication (with Modbus master function)
E3 terminal area (*4) (*5)
/ET3 Ethernet communication (with serial gateway function)
/X3 5 additional DIs
/Y3 5 additional DOs
/W3 2 additional DIs and 2 additional DOs
/A4 1 additional aux. analog input and 1 additional DI
/C4 RS485 communication (Max. 19.2 kbps, 2-wire/4-wire)
/L4 24 V DC loop power supply
1 additional aux. analog input, 1 additional DI, and RS485 communication (Max.19.2
/AC4
E4 terminal area (*4) (*5) kbps, 2-wire)
/LC4 24 V DC loop power supply and RS485 communication (Max.19.2 kbps, 2-wire)
/X4 5 additional DIs
/Y4 5 additional DOs
/W4 2 additional DIs and 2 additional DOs
Power supply /DC Power supply 24 V AC/DC
Additional treatment (*6) /CT Coating
*1: English, German, French, and Spanish can be displayed as the guide display.
*2: For heating/cooling output, both Output 1 and Output 2 should be specified. Not available when Output 2 is “N.” For
position proportional output, specify “-P” for Output 1 and “N” for Output 2.
*3: The /HA option can be specified only when the code for Output 1 and 2 is “-AN”, “-RN”, “-UN” or “-TN.”
*4: Only one option is available for each terminal area of E1 to E4.
*5: The /L4 and /LC4 options for E4 terminal area can be specified only when the E3 terminal area option is not specified
or specified any of /CH3, /X3, /Y3 or /W3.
*6: When the /CT option is specified, the UP55A does not conform to the safety standards (UL and CSA) and CE
marking.

IM 05P02C41-01EN vii
 Coating Treatment
(1) HumiSeal coating treatment
Apply HumiSeal coating to the printed circuit board assembly.
Do not apply HumiSeal coating to the following parts: connector, gold-plated contact
area, relay part, RJC device, and in the vicinity of the push switch/LED lamp.
(2) Apply terminal coating to the gold-plated contact area on the printed circuit board.

Notes
▪ There are two treatments as described above, but we do not guarantee their
effectiveness.
We do not supply any test data on these treatments.
▪ Do not apply any treatment to the screw terminal area on the back side of the
instrument.

Accessories
The product is provided with the following accessories according to the model and suffix
codes. Check that none of them are missing or damaged.
1 2

No. Product Name Quantity Remark

1 Brackets 2 For fixing the upper and lower parts
2 Terminal cover 1 For UP55A: L4502XP
3 Unit label 1 Part number: L4502VZ
4 Tag label 1 Part number: L4502VE (Only when ordered.)
Single-loop control (A3 size, x7) (Standard model
5 Operation Guide 1
only)
6 User’s Manual (CD-ROM) 1 Contains all manuals (Standard model only)

viii IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Accessory (sold separately)
The following lists an accessory sold separately.

• LL50A Parameter Setting Software

Model Suffix code Description
LL50A -00 Parameter Setting Software

• Terminal cover
For model UP55A: UTAP001

For UP55A

• User’s Manual (A4 size)

* User’s Manual can be downloaded from a website.
• User’s Manual (CD-ROM), Model: UTAP003
* Contains all manuals.

IM 05P02C41-01EN ix
 Symbols Used in This Manual

This symbol is used on the instrument. It indicates the possibility of injury to the user or
damage to the instrument, and signifies that the user must refer to the user’s manual for
special instructions. The same symbol is used in the user’s manual on pages that the
user needs to refer to, together with the term “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”

WARNING
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user,
and indicates precautions that should be taken to prevent such occurrences.

CAUTION
Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause injury to the user or damage to
the instrument or property and indicates precautions that should be taken to prevent such
occurrences.

Note
Identifies important information required to operate the instrument.

Indicates related operations or explanations for the user’s reference.

[ ]
Indicates a character string displayed on the display.

Setting Display
Indicates a setting display and describes the keystrokes required to display the relevant
setting display.

Setting Details
Provides the descriptions of settings.

Description
Describes restrictions etc. regarding a relevant operation.

How to Open an Electronic Manual

The provided CD-ROM contains PDF files of the manuals. Place this CD-ROM in the
PC’s CD-ROM drive; the Startup Window appears. Click on the relevant manual name to
open the selected manual.
If the Startup Window does not appear, select My Computer and double click on
UT_manual to open the manual concerned in the English directory.

 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 How to Use This Manual
For the ladder sequence and communication functions, see the respective manuals. This
user’s manual is organized into Chapters 1 to 19 as shown below.

Chapter Title and Description

Introduction to Functions
1
Describes the main functions of the UP55A.
UP55A Operating Procedures
2
Describes the flow from unpacking to regular operations.
Part Names
3
Describes part names and functions on the front panel.
Basic Operation
4
Describes basic operation of the UP55A.
Quick Setting Function
5
Describes the minimum necessary settings for operation.
Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations
6
Describes monitoring displays of regular operations and operation.
Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions
7
Describes PV input, remote input, and advanced secondary control input.
Control Functions
8
Describes basic control and advanced control.
Program Pattern Functions
9
Describes program pattern functions
Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions
10
Describes output functions.
Alarm Functions
11
Describes alarm output and status output.
Contact Input/Output Functions
12
Describes contact input/output functions.
Display, Key, and Security Functions
13
Describes display, user function key and security functions.
Parameter Initialization
14
Describes the initialization to factory default values and to user default values.
Power Failure Recovery Processing/Power Frequency Setting/Other Settings
15 Describes operations performed after momentary power interruption and power
failures.
Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections
16
Describes troubleshooting, maintenance, periodic inspections, and disposal.
Installation and Wiring
17
Describes installation and wiring.
Parameters
18
Provides parameter maps.
Specifications
19
Provides the UP55A specifications.

IM 05P02C41-01EN xi
Blank Page
 1
Contents
2
Introduction.............................................................................................................................i
Target Readers.......................................................................................................................i 3
Notice .................................................................................................................................i
Trademarks........................................................................................................................... ii 4
Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ ii
Handling Precautions for the Main Unit................................................................................ iv 5
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), Directive 2002/96/EC........................ iv
Checking the Contents of the Package.................................................................................v 6
Model and Suffix Codes of UP55A (for Standard model)..................................................... vi
Model and Suffix Codes of UP55A (for Detailed model)..................................................... vii 7
Symbols Used in This Manual...............................................................................................x
How to Use This Manual...................................................................................................... xi 8
Chapter 1 Introduction to Functions 9
1.1 Quick Setting Function...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Input/Output Function........................................................................................................ 1-2
1.3 Control Functions.............................................................................................................. 1-4
10
1.4 Program Pattern Functions............................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Display and Key Functions................................................................................................ 1-8
11
1.6 Ladder Sequence Function............................................................................................... 1-9
1.7 Communication Functions............................................................................................... 1-10
12
1.8 Definition of Main Symbols and Terms............................................................................ 1-14
13
Chapter 2 UP55A Operating Procedures
2.1 UP55A Operating Procedures........................................................................................... 2-1 14
Chapter 3 Part Names 15
3.1 Names and Functions of Display Parts............................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Names and Functions of Keys.......................................................................................... 3-4 16
3.3 List of Display Symbols..................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4 Brief Description of Setting Details (Parameters)............................................................... 3-9 17
Chapter 4 Basic Operation
4.1 Overview of Display Switch and Operation Keys.................................................................... 4-1
18
4.2 How to Set Parameters..................................................................................................... 4-5
19
Chapter 5 Quick Setting Function
5.1 Setting Using Quick Setting Function............................................................................... 5-1 App
5.2 Restarting Quick Setting Function..................................................................................... 5-6
Index
Chapter 6 Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Operation Display Transitions in Single-loop Control, Cascade Primary-loop Control,
Loop Control with PV switching, and Loop Control with PV auto-selector................ 6-1
Standard Type......................................................................................................................6-2
Position Proportional Type....................................................................................................6-4
Heating/cooling Type............................................................................................................6-6
6.1.2 Operation Display Transitions in Cascade Control.............................................. 6-8
Standard Type......................................................................................................................6-8
Position Proportional Type..................................................................................................6-12
Heating/cooling Type..........................................................................................................6-16

IM 05P02C41-01EN xiii
Contents

6.1.3 Details of the Operation Display........................................................................ 6-20

6.2 Performing and Canceling Auto-tuning............................................................................ 6-26
6.3 Adjusting PID Manually................................................................................................... 6-29
6.4 Setting Alarm Setpoint..................................................................................................... 6-34
6.5 Selecting Program Pattern Number (PTNO.).................................................................. 6-35
Selecting by PTN Key.........................................................................................................6-35
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-35
6.6 Switching Operation Modes............................................................................................ 6-36
6.6.1 Operation Display Switching Diagram............................................................... 6-36
6.6.2 Switching to PROG Operation........................................................................... 6-37
Selecting by RUN Key........................................................................................................6-37
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-37
6.6.3 Switching to RESET Operation.......................................................................... 6-38
Selecting by RST Key.........................................................................................................6-38
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-38
6.6.4 Enabling/Disabling Hold Mode of Program Operation....................................... 6-40
Selecting by MODE Key.....................................................................................................6-40
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-40
Hold Operation in Soak Segment.......................................................................................6-41
Hold Operation in Ramp Segment......................................................................................6-41
6.6.5 Excuting Advance.............................................................................................. 6-42
Selecting by MODE Key.....................................................................................................6-42
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-42
6.6.6 Switching between AUTO and MAN.................................................................. 6-44
Selecting by MODE Key.....................................................................................................6-44
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-44
6.6.7 Switching to Local Operation............................................................................. 6-46
Selecting by MODE Key.....................................................................................................6-46
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-46
6.6.8 Switching to Remote Operation......................................................................... 6-47
Selecting by MODE Key.....................................................................................................6-47
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-47
6.6.9 Switching between Local (LSP) and Cascade................................................... 6-48
Selecting by MODE Key.....................................................................................................6-48
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-48
6.7 Selecting Start-of-program Pattern Number.................................................................... 6-49
Selecting by MODE Key.....................................................................................................6-49
Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter............................................................................6-49
6.8 Fast-forwarding Program Pattern.................................................................................... 6-51
Performing by MODE Key..................................................................................................6-51
Performing by Operation Mode Parameter.........................................................................6-51
6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode...................... 6-52
Changing SP in HOLD Operation.......................................................................................6-52
Changing TSP in HOLD Operation.....................................................................................6-53
Changing R.TIM in HOLD Operation..................................................................................6-53
Modifying Target Setpoint in Soak Segment.......................................................................6-55
Modifying Target Setpoint in Ramp Segment.....................................................................6-55
Modifying Final Target Setpoint (TSP) in Soak Segment....................................................6-56
Modifying Final Target Setpoint (TSP) in Ramp Segment..................................................6-56
Decreasing Segment-time in Soak Segment......................................................................6-57
Increasing Segment-time in Soak Segment.......................................................................6-58
Decreasing Segment-time in Ramp Segment....................................................................6-59
Increasing Segment-time in Ramp Segment......................................................................6-59
6.10 Changing Program Pattern during Program Operation......................................................................... 6-60
6.11 Manipulating Control Output during Manual Operation......................................................................... 6-61

xiv IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Contents

6.12 Releasing On-State (Latch) of Alarm Output................................................................... 6-62

1

Chapter 7 Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions 2

7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input......................... 7-1
7.1.1 Setting Input Type, Unit, Range, Scale, and Decimal Point Position................... 7-1 3
7.1.2 Setting Burnout Detection for Input...................................................................... 7-5
7.1.3 Setting Reference Junction Compensation (RJC) or External Reference 4
Junction Compensation (ERJC).......................................................................... 7-6
7.1.4 Correcting Input Value......................................................................................... 7-7 5
(1) Setting Bias and Filter.....................................................................................................7-7
(2) Setting Square Root Extraction and Low Signal Cutoff Point..........................................7-9 6
(3) Setting 10-segment Linearizer.......................................................................................7-10
7.1.5 Setting Ratio bias/filter....................................................................................... 7-12 7
7.2 Setting Input Sampling Period (Control Period).............................................................. 7-13
7.3 Using 4-wire RTD as PV Input........................................................................................ 7-14
8
7.4 Using Larger, Smaller, Average, or Difference of Two to Four Inputs as PV .................. 7-15
7.5 Setting Remote Input Method.......................................................................................... 7-16
7.6 Adjusting PV Range for Loop Control with PV Switching or Loop Control with PV
9
Auto-selector........................................................................................................................ 7-17
7.7 Setting PV Switching Methods of Loop Control with PV Switching................................. 7-18
10

Chapter 8 Control Functions 11

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)........................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Single-loop Control, Single-loop Heating/cooling Control, and Single-loop 12
Position Proportional Control............................................................................... 8-1
n Single-loop Control Function Block Diagram....................................................................8-2 13
n Single-loop Heating/cooling Control Function Block Diagram..........................................8-4
n Single-loop Position Proportional Control Function Block Diagram..................................8-6 14
8.1.2 Cascade Primary-loop Control............................................................................. 8-9
n Cascade Primary-loop Control Function Block Diagram.................................................8-10
15
8.1.3 Cascade Control, Cascade Heating/cooling Control, and Cascade Position
Proportional Control........................................................................................... 8-13
n Cascade Control Function Block Diagram......................................................................8-15
16
n Cascade Heating/cooling Control Function Block Diagram............................................8-16
n Cascade Position Proportional Control Function Block Diagram....................................8-19 17
8.1.4 Loop Control with PV Switching, Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV
Switching, and Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Switching.............. 8-21 18
n Loop Control with PV Switching Function Block Diagram...............................................8-22
n Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Switching Function Block Diagram.....................8-25 19
n Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Switching Function Block Diagram............8-27
8.1.5 Loop Control with PV Auto-selector, Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV App
Auto-selector, and Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Auto-selector... 8-29
n Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (2 inputs) Function Block Diagram.........................8-31
Index
n Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (2 inputs) Function Block Diagram......8-33
n Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (2 inputs) Function Block Diagram.....8-35
n Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (4 inputs) Function Block Diagram.........................8-36
n Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (4 inputs) Function Block Diagram......8-39
n Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (4 inputs) Function Block Diagram.....8-41
8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)............................................................................................. 8-42
8.2.1 PID Control........................................................................................................ 8-43
8.2.2 ON/OFF Control (1 point of hysteresis / 2 points of hysteresis)........................ 8-44
8.2.3 Heating/cooling Control..................................................................................... 8-46
8.2.4 PD Control (Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded).................... 8-51
8.3 Setting PID Control Mode (ALG)..................................................................................... 8-52

IM 05P02C41-01EN xv
Contents

8.4 Switching PID.................................................................................................................. 8-54

8.4.1 Switching PID According to Target Setpoint Number (SPNO)........................... 8-54
8.4.2 Switching PID According to PV.......................................................................... 8-55
8.4.3 Switching PID According to SP.......................................................................... 8-56
8.4.4 Switching PID According to Target SP............................................................... 8-58
8.4.5 Switching PID According to Deviation (Reference Deviation)............................ 8-60
8.4.6 Setting Hysteresis at Time of PID Switch.......................................................... 8-61
8.4.7 Switching PID Irrespective of Operation Mode.................................................. 8-61
8.4.8 Switching PID by Contact Input......................................................................... 8-61
8.5 Suppressing Overshoot (Super Function)....................................................................... 8-62
8.6 Suppressing Hunting (Super2 Function)......................................................................... 8-64
8.7 Suppressing Integral Action (Anti-reset Wind-up)................................................................... 8-66
8.8 Performing Non-linear PID Control.................................................................................. 8-67
8.9 Adjusting Auto-tuning Operation .................................................................................... 8-68
8.10 Setting SP Limiter............................................................................................................ 8-69
8.11 Setting Program Time Unit.............................................................................................. 8-70
8.12 Forcing Local Setpoint (LSP) to Track Program Setpoint or Remote Setpoint (SP Tracking)... 8-71
8.13 Setting Controller Action at Power ON (Restart Mode).......................................................................8-72
8.14 Setting Time between Powering on Controller and Starting Control (Restart Timer)...... 8-73

Chapter 9 Program Pattern Functions

9.1 Setting the Setting Method of Program Pattern................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 Setting the Program Pattern Using the Segment Time........................................ 9-2
9.1.2 Setting the Program Pattern using the Ramp-rate and Segment Time............... 9-3
9.1.3 Setting the Program Time Unit............................................................................. 9-5
9.2 PID Selection Method........................................................................................................ 9-6
9.2.1 Segment PID Selection........................................................................................ 9-6
9.2.2 Zone PID Selection.............................................................................................. 9-7
9.2.3 Local PID Selection............................................................................................. 9-7
9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)................................................................ 9-8
9.3.1 Starting operation at starting target setpoint (SSP) (STC=SSP)......................... 9-8
9.3.2 Ramp-prioritized PV start (STC=RAMP).............................................................. 9-9
9.3.3 Time-prioritized PV start (STC=TIME)............................................................... 9-13
9.3.4 Starting operation at local target setpoint (STC=LSP)....................................... 9-15
9.3.5 Starting operation at remote setpoint (STC=RSP)............................................ 9-17
9.4 Setting the Wait Functions.................................................................................................. 9-18
9.4.1 Program Wait at Segment End.......................................................................... 9-18
9.4.2 Program Wait in the Middle of a Segment......................................................... 9-21
9.5 Setting the Segment Repetition...........................................................................................................9-22
9.6 Operation with Linked Program Patterns........................................................................ 9-23
9.7 Setting Event Functions.......................................................................................................................9-26
9.7.1 PV Event............................................................................................................ 9-27
9.7.2 Time Event......................................................................................................... 9-28
9.7.3 Local Event........................................................................................................ 9-30
9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching.......................................................................................9-31
9.8.1 Switching for continuation (JC=CONT).............................................................. 9-31
9.8.2 Hold-on switching (JC=HOLD)........................................................................... 9-33
9.8.3 Local-mode switching (JC=LOCAL)................................................................... 9-35
9.8.4 Remote-mode switching (JC=REM).................................................................. 9-37
9.8.5 Segment switching (the controller switches to a local setpoint when the
segment is completed after release) (JC=W.SL1 to W.SL5)............................. 9-39

xvi IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Contents

9.8.6 Segment switching (the controller switches to a remote setpoint when the
1
segment is completed after release) (JC=W.SR1 to W.SR5)............................ 9-40
9.9 Setting Program Pattern-2 Retransmission.........................................................................................9-41
2
9.10 Setting Starting time of program operation..........................................................................................9-42
9.11 Setting the Program Pattern Number Clearance............................................................. 9-43 3
9.12 Program Pattern End Signal................................................................................................................9-44
9.13 Editing the Prgram Pattern.............................................................................................. 9-45 4
9.13.1 Checking the Number of Remaining Segments................................................. 9-45
9.13.2 Checking the Number of Segments in specified pattern.................................... 9-45 5
9.13.3 Copying a Program Pattern............................................................................... 9-46
9.13.4 Adding and Deleting Segment in Program Patterns.......................................... 9-46 6
9.13.5 Deleting the Program Pattern............................................................................ 9-47
9.13.6 List of the Error Code......................................................................................... 9-47 7
9.14 Synchronized Program Pattern Operation...................................................................... 9-48
9.14.1 Synchronized Operation During Switching Between Segments........................ 9-48 8
9.14.2 Synchronized Operation of Program Pattern Progression................................. 9-51
9
Chapter 10 Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions
10.1 Setting Control Output Type............................................................................................ 10-1 10
10.2 Setting Control Output Cycle Time.................................................................................. 10-5
10.3 Setting Limiter to Control Output..................................................................................... 10-6
11
10.4 Disabling Output Limiter in MAN mode........................................................................... 10-7
10.5 Setting Velocity Limiter to Control Output........................................................................ 10-8
10.6 Reducing 4-20 mA Current Output to 0 mA (Tight Shut Function).................................. 10-9
12
10.7 Setting ON/OFF Control Hysteresis.............................................................................. 10-10
10.8 Canceling Offset of PV and SP (Manual Reset)............................................................ 10-12
13
10.9 Setting Hysteresis and Dead Band for Heating/cooling Control Output........................ 10-13
10.10 Setting Hysteresis and Dead Band for Position Proportional Control Output................ 10-15
14
10.11 Setting Retransmission Output Terminal, Type, and Scales.......................................... 10-16
10.12 Setting Preset Output Value.......................................................................................... 10-19 15
10.12.1 Setting Output Value in RESET Mode (Preset Output).................................... 10-19
10.12.2 Setting Output Value When Switched to MAN Mode (Manual Preset Output).......... 10-20 16
10.12.3 Setting Output Value When Error Occurs (Input Error Preset Output)............ 10-21
10.13 Setting 10-segment Linearizer for Output..................................................................... 10-22 17
10.14 Changing Current Output Range................................................................................... 10-24
10.15 Setting Split Computation Output Function................................................................... 10-25 18
10.16 Adjusting Motor-operated Valve Position (Position Proportional Output)...................... 10-27
10.16.1 Setting Valve Operation Mode......................................................................... 10-28 19
10.16.2 Adjusting Valve Position Automatically............................................................ 10-28
10.16.3 Adjusting Valve Position Manually................................................................... 10-29 App
10.16.4 Setting Valve Traveling Time (Estimating Type)............................................... 10-30
10.16.5 Selecting Feedback Input (Resistor/Current)................................................... 10-30 Index
10.17 Using 15 V DC Loop Power Supply.............................................................................. 10-31

Chapter 11 Alarm Functions

11.1 Setting Alarm Type...........................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Setting Number of Alarm Groups to Use........................................................................11-15
11.3 Setting Hysteresis to Alarm Operation...........................................................................11-16
11.4 Delaying Alarm Output (Alarm Delay Timer)..................................................................11-17
11.5 Setting Alarm Output to Control Relay Terminal.............................................................11-18
11.6 Setting Alarm Action According to Operation Mode........................................................11-19
11.7 Setting Heater Break Alarm............................................................................................11-20

IM 05P02C41-01EN xvii
Contents

Chapter 12 Contact Input/Output Functions

12.1 Setting Contact Input Function........................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.1 Setting Contact Input Function.......................................................................... 12-1
12.1.2 Changing Contact Type of Contact Input..........................................................12-11
12.2 Setting Contact Output Function................................................................................... 12-12
12.2.1 Setting Function of Contact Output.................................................................. 12-12
12.2.2 Changing Contact Type of Contact Output...................................................... 12-19

Chapter 13 Display, Key, and Security Functions

13.1 Setting Display Functions................................................................................................ 13-1
13.1.1 Setting Active Color PV Display Function.......................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 Masking Arbitrary Display Value in Operation Display....................................... 13-4
13.1.3 Registering SELECT Display (Up to 5 Displays)............................................... 13-5
13.1.4 Changing Event Display.................................................................................... 13-6
13.1.5 Registering SELECT Parameter Display (Up to 10 Displays)........................... 13-7
13.1.6 Setting Bar-graph Display Function................................................................... 13-8
13.1.7 Masking Least Significant Digit of PV Display................................................. 13-10
13.1.8 Setting Economy Mode.....................................................................................13-11
13.1.9 Selecting the Initial Operation Display that Appears at Power ON.................. 13-12
13.1.10 Setting Message Function............................................................................... 13-13
13.1.11 Switching Guide Display Language................................................................. 13-13
13.1.12 Changing Guide Scroll Speed......................................................................... 13-14
13.1.13 Turning Guide Display ON/OFF....................................................................... 13-14
13.1.14 Setting Automatic Return to Operation Display............................................... 13-14
13.1.15 Setting Brightness and Contrast Adjustment of LCD and Display Update Cycle... 13-15
13.2 Assigning Function to User Function............................................................................. 13-16
13.3 Setting Security Functions............................................................................................. 13-19
13.3.1 Setting a Password.......................................................................................... 13-19
13.3.2 Setting Parameter Display Level..................................................................... 13-19
13.3.3 Locking (Hiding) Parameter Menu Display...................................................... 13-20
13.3.4 Key Lock.......................................................................................................... 13-22
13.3.5 Setting Display/Non-display of Operation Display........................................... 13-22
13.3.6 Prohibiting Writing via Communication............................................................ 13-23
13.4 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition and Version...................................................... 13-24
13.4.1 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition............................................................ 13-24
13.4.2 Confirmation of Version................................................................................... 13-29

Chapter 14 Parameter Initialization

14.1 Initializing Parameter Settings to Factory Default Values................................................ 14-1
14.2 Registering and Initializing User Default Values.............................................................. 14-2
14.2.1 Registering as User Setting (Default) Values.................................................... 14-2
14.2.2 Initializing to User Setting (Default) Values........................................................ 14-2

Chapter 15 Power Failure Recovery Processing / Power Frequency Setting /

Other Settings
15.1 Remedies if Power Failure Occurs during Operations.................................................... 15-1
15.2 Power Frequency Setting................................................................................................ 15-2

Chapter 16 Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

16.1 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1.1 Troubleshooting Flowchart................................................................................. 16-1
16.1.2 Errors at Power On............................................................................................ 16-2
xviii IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Contents

16.1.3 Errors during Operation..................................................................................... 16-4

1
16.2 Maintenance.................................................................................................................. 16-15
16.2.1 Cleaning........................................................................................................... 16-15
2
16.2.2 Packaging when Shipping the Product for Repair........................................... 16-15
16.2.3 Replacing Parts............................................................................................... 16-15 3
16.3 Periodic Maintenance . ................................................................................................. 16-16
16.4 Disposal......................................................................................................................... 16-17 4
Chapter 17 Installation and Wiring 5
17.1 Installation Location......................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Mounting Method............................................................................................................. 17-3 6
17.3 External Dimensions and Panel Cutout Dimensions....................................................................17-4
17.4 Wiring.............................................................................................................................. 17-5 7
17.4.1 Important Information on Wiring........................................................................ 17-5
17.4.2 PV Input Wiring.................................................................................................. 17-7 8
17.4.3 Remote (Auxiliary Analog) Input Wiring............................................................. 17-8
17.4.4 Control Output (Relay, Triac, Current, and Voltage Pulse) Wiring................... 17-10 9
17.4.5 Valve Position Output and Feedback Input Wiring.......................................... 17-12
17.4.6 Contact Input Wiring........................................................................................ 17-13 10
17.4.7 Contact Output Wiring..................................................................................... 17-17
17.4.8 Retransmission Output Wiring ........................................................................ 17-20
11
17.4.9 15 V DC Loop Power Supply Wiring................................................................ 17-20
17.4.10 24 V DC Loop Power Supply Wiring (for Detailed model)............................... 17-20
17.4.11 Heater Break Alarm Wiring.............................................................................. 17-21
12
17.4.12 RS-485 Communication Interface Wiring........................................................ 17-22
17.4.13 Coordinated Operation Wiring......................................................................... 17-24
13
17.4.14 Peer-to peer Communication Wiring................................................................ 17-26
17.4.15 Ethernet Communication Interface Wiring....................................................... 17-28
14
17.4.16 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Interface Wiring............................................ 17-30
17.4.17 DeviceNet Communication Interface Wiring.................................................... 17-32 15
17.4.18 CC-Link Communication Interface Wiring........................................................ 17-34
17.4.19 Power Supply Wiring....................................................................................... 17-36 16
17.5 Attaching and Detaching Terminal Cover...................................................................... 17-37
17
Chapter 18 Parameters
18.1 Parameter Map................................................................................................................ 18-1 18
18.2 List of Parameters........................................................................................................... 18-8
18.2.1 Operation Parameters....................................................................................... 18-8 19
18.2.2 Setup Parameters............................................................................................ 18-21
App
Chapter 19 Specifications
19.1 Hardware Specifications.................................................................................................. 19-1
Index
19.1.1 Input Specifications............................................................................................ 19-2
19.1.2 Analog Output Specifications............................................................................. 19-4
19.1.3 Step Response Time Specifications.................................................................. 19-4
19.1.4 Relay Contact Output Specifications................................................................. 19-4
19.1.5 Triac Output Specifications (for Detailed model)............................................... 19-5
19.1.6 Position Proportional Output Specifications....................................................... 19-5
19.1.7 Retransmission Output Specifications............................................................... 19-5
19.1.8 15 V DC Loop Power Supply Specifications...................................................... 19-5
19.1.9 Contact Input Specifications.............................................................................. 19-5
19.1.10 Transistor Contact Output Specifications........................................................... 19-6
19.1.11 Heater Break Alarm Specifications.................................................................... 19-6
IM 05P02C41-01EN xix
Contents

19.1.12 24 V DC Loop Power Supply Specifications (for Detailed model)..................... 19-6

19.1.13 Safety and EMC Standards............................................................................... 19-7
19.1.14 Construction, Installation, and Wiring................................................................ 19-7
19.1.15 Power Supply Specifications and Isolation ....................................................... 19-8
19.1.16 Environmental Conditions.................................................................................. 19-9

Appendix Input and Output Table................................................................................

Appendix 1 Input and Output Table (for Standard model)..................................................... App-1
Appendix 2 Input and Output Table (for Detailed model)...................................................... App-4

Revision Information

xx IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 1 Introduction to Functions
1
1.1 Quick Setting Function

Introduction to Functions
The Quick setting function is a function to easily set the basic function of the controller.

Buy and Check the contents.

Unpacking

Installation Installation and Wiring: Chapter 17

and Wiring Install and wire a controller, and then turn on the
power.

Setup Q: What should I do to perform control immediately?

First, I want to set the input, output and program
pattern.

A: Use the Quick setting function to perform the

setup easily.
Quick setting function: Chapter 5
For creating program pattern, see chapter 9, or
Operation Guide.

Operation Q: How do I determine the PID?

A: Use Auto-tuning to perform the tuning easily.

Auto-tuning: Section 6.2

IM 05P02C41-01EN 1-1
 1.2 Input/Output Function

PV Input
PV input is a universal input to arbitrarily set the type and range for the thermocouple (TC),
resistance-temperature detector (RTD), and DC voltage/current.
► Chapter 7 Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

TC Current
mV
V
mA
Voltage pulse

RTD

Relay contact / Triac

2-wire
trans-
Motor-operated valve
mitter

Control Output
Control output (OUT) is a universal output to arbitrarily set the type for the current,
voltage pulse, and relay/triac. Heating/cooling control and Position proportional control
are possible by specifying the suffix code for the control.
Position proportional control is used exclusively for the motor-operated valve.
Heating/cooling control is for two output type of heat and cool.
► Chapter 10 Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

TC
Current
mV
V
mA
Voltage pulse

RTD

Relay contact / Triac

2-wire
trans-
mitter Motor-operated valve

Remote Input
Remote input (RSP) is external analog signal used for remote setpoint.
► Chapter 7 Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

Add direct input (optional suffix code /DR or /U1) to the remote input to use the 4-wire
RTD as PV input. The LL50A Parameter Setting Software is required.

PV
4-wire
RTD

1-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 1.2 Input/Output Function

Auxiliary Analog Input 1

Two auxiliary analog inputs can be used separately from PV input (PV) and remote input
(RSP).

Introduction to Functions
► Chapter 7 Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

Retransmission Output
Retransmission output outputs a PV input value (PV), target setpoint (SP), control output
value (OUT) and the like as an analog signal to, for example, the recorder.
► Chapter 10 Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

External device such as recorder etc.

UP55A

Current

Contact Input
Up to 23 contact inputs can be incorporated. The operation modes can be switched.
PID control and sequence control can be performed simultaneously using the ladder
sequence function.
The contact input can be specified with other suffix codes. For details, see the table of
Model and Suffix Codes.
► Chapter 12 Contact Input/Output Functions

Contact Output
Up to 23 contact outputs can be incorporated. Contact output can output events such as
alarms.
PID control and sequence control can be performed simultaneously using the ladder
sequence function.
The contact output can be specified with other suffix codes. For details, see the table of
Model and Suffix Codes.
► Chapter 9 Program Pattern Functions, Chapter 11 Alarm Functions

24 V DC Loop Power Supply

24 V DC loop power supply can be supplied to 2-wire transmitter.
► 17.4.10 24 V DC Loop Power Supply Wiring

UP55A

2-wire transmitter

IM 05P02C41-01EN 1-3
 1.3 Control Functions

Control Mode
The UP55A are controllers equipped with 5 control modes. Some control modes require
a remote input (RSP) terminal.
For the auxiliary functions of control modes, see the respective sections.

Control mode schematic diagram Description

PV “Single-loop control” provides the basic control
Single-loop function having one control computation unit.
control ► 8.1.1 Single-loop Control, Single-loop
Heating/cooling Control, and Single-loop
PID Position Proportional Control

OUT
“Cascade primary-loop control” sets up a
PV
controller as the primary-loop controller when
Cascade two controllers are used for Cascade control. It
primary-loop RSP DI
is used in connection with “Cascade secondary-
control loop control.” It provides the output tracking
PID function and FAIL output to the secondary-loop
controller.
Remote input (RSP) terminal is required for
Primary OUT output tracking input
FAIL ► 8.1.2 Cascade Primary-loop Control
Cascade
Switch PV
to AUTO
RSP

PID

Secondary RET DO
TRK
OUT
SP output
PV1 PV2 (RSP) “Cascade control” uses two control computation
Cascade control units and permits Cascade control using just a
single controller.
Remote input (RSP) terminal is required for
PID1
Loop-2 PV input.
► 8.1.3 Cascade Control, Cascade Heating/
PID2 cooling Control, and Cascade Position
Proportional Control

OUT
PV1 PV2 (RSP) “Loop control with PV switching” uses two PV
Loop control inputs, which are switched according to input
with contact signals or measurement ranges.
PV switching DI Remote input (RSP) terminal is required for
Loop-2 PV input.
► 8.1.4 Loop Control with PV Switching,
PID Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV
Switching, and Position Proportional Loop
Control with PV Switching
OUT

1-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 1.3 Control Functions
1
Control mode schematic diagram Description
PV2 PV3 PV4 “Loop control with PV auto-selector” automatically
PV1 (RSP) (AIN2) (AIN4) selects or calculates the max. value, the min.

Introduction to Functions
Loop control value, the average, or difference (of PV1 and PV2)
with of two to four PV inputs.
PV auto-selector SELECT Remote input (RSP) terminal and auxiliary analog
input terminal are required for the inputs 2, 3, and 4.
► 8.1.5 Loop Control with PV Auto-selector,
PID Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Auto-
selector, and Position Proportional Loop
Control with PV Auto-selector
OUT

PID Control
PID control is a general control using the PID control-related parameters.
► 8.2.1 PID Control
Recorder UP55A
Alarms
Retransmission
output

TC
4-20 mA DC
Electric
furnace

SCR
Thyristor

Heating/cooling Control
Heating/cooling control is available only for Heating/cooling type.
In Heating/cooling control, the controller outputs the result of control computation after
splitting it into heating-purpose and cooling-purpose signals.
► 8.2.3 Heating/cooling Control
UP55A

Cooling (relay signal)

Heating
(4-20 mA DC signal) PV
Heating unit
Cooling
water
SCR
Thyristor

TC

IM 05P02C41-01EN 1-5
1.3 Control Functions

Position Proportional Control

Position proportional control is available only for Position proportional type. It is used
exclusively for the motor-operated valve.
► 10.16 Adjusting Motor-operated Valve Position (Position Proportional Output)
UP55A

H (direct) or L (reverse)
contact signal
Control motor

Position signal
TC

Air
Motor-operated valve

Furnace Gas
Burner

1-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 1
1.4 Program Pattern Functions

Introduction to Functions
The program pattern function allows performing a program operation by changing the
setpoint in conjunction with the time according to the preset program pattern.
A program pattern consists of multiple segments.
A program pattern can be created by setting the final target setpoint, segment time, PV
event, time event, and the like.
The use of the program pattern-2 retransmission function allows creating a program
pattern for retransmission.
► Chapter 9 Program Pattern Functions

Setpoint

Seg. 1 Seg. 2 Seg. 3 Seg. 4 Seg. 5 Seg. 6

TSP TSP
Soak
TM.RT

Ramp
Ramp Soak
TSP TM.RT
Soak TSP

TSP
Ramp PV

TM.RT TIME TIME TIME

SSP

Time
S.PID S.PID S.PID S.PID S.PID S.PID

PV event 1 PV high PV high PV high PV high PV low PV low

Time event 1 On Off Off On Off Off On Off Off

Time event 2 Off On Off On Off On

Time event 3 On Off

Pattern end オン

The display symbols of the parameters, TSP (Final target setpoint), TIME (Segment
time setting), and S.PID (Segmet PID number selection) are the same in each
segment. However, the segment can be recognized by the number displayed on the
Symbol display.

Symbol (parameter) Description

SSP (Starting target setpoint) SP at the time when the program pattern starts
TSP (Final target setopoint) Final target setpoint for the segment
TIME (Segment time setting) Determines whether to set the segment by TIME or TM.RT
TM.RT (Segment ramp-rate setting) Time to reach TSP
SEG.T (Segment setting method) Time or ramp-rate to reach TSP

IM 05P02C41-01EN 1-7
 1.5 Display and Key Functions
Employing a 14-segment, active color LCD greatly increases the monitoring and
operating capabilities.

Active Color PV Display (display color change)

The active color PV display function changes the PV display color (red or white) when
abnormality occurs in PV etc.
► 13.1.1 Setting Active Color PV Display Function

Normal Abnormal

Guide Display
The guide is displayed on PV display when setting parameters. This guide can be turned
on/off with the MODE key.
The scrolling guide is displayed
when setting parameters.

Multilingual Guide Display

English, German, French, or Spanish can be displayed in Guide display.
► 13.1.11 Switching Guide Display Language

Parameter Display Level

To intended use of the operator, the display level of the parameter can be set.
► Chapter 18 Parameters

User Function Keys

The UP55A has user function keys (RUN, RST, MODE, and PTN).
Assign a function to a user function key to use it as an exclusive key.
► 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key

1-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 1
1.6 Ladder Sequence Function

Introduction to Functions
To use the ladder sequence function, it is necessary to create a ladder program using
LL50A Parameter Setting Software and download it to a controller.
► Ladder sequence function: LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual

Ladder program

IM 05P02C41-01EN 1-9
 1.7 Communication Functions
The UP55A can use RS-485 communication, Ethernet communication, PROFIBUS-DP
communication, DeviceNet communication, and CC-Link communication by specifying
the suffix code and optional suffix code for each communication.
► UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface (RS-485, Ethernet) User’s Manual
► UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface (Open Network) User’s Manual

RS-485 Communication (Modbus communication, PC link communication, and

Ladder communication)
The UP55A can communicate with PCs, PLCs, touch panels, and other devices.
PC

RS-232C/ Model: ML2 of YOKOGAWA is recommended.

RS-485
converter
Up to 31 connected slaves with a maximum length of 1200m

Ethernet Communication (Modbus/TCP)

The UP55A can be connected to IEEE802.3-compliant network (10BASE-T/100BASE-
TX). A serial gateway function can increase the number of connected controllers.

Distance from hub to controller: Within 100 m

Host computer Number of cascade connections on hub:
Max. 4 stages (10BASE-T)
Hub Ethernet Max. 2 stages (100BASE-TX)

Modbus/TCP
LAN
connnection

Serial gateway function

RS-485 communication Up to 31 connected slaves with a maximum length of 1200m
Modbus/RTU

1-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 1.7 Communication Functions

PROFIBUS-DP Communication 1
The UP55A can be used as the slave devices for PROFIBUS-DP communication. Read-
out of PV, operation or alarm status, and SP setting can be done by accessing the

Introduction to Functions
remote I/O on the master unit of PROFIBUS-DP.
PLC

PROFIBUS-DP Master

PROFIBUS-DP communication

PROFIBUS-DP Slave / Modbus Master

Modbus/RTU communication
Max. 1200 m, number of connected slaves: 31

Modbus Slave Modbus Slave Modbus Slave Modbus Slave

DeviceNet Communication
The UP55A can be used as the slave devices for DeviceNet communication. Read-out of
PV, operation or alarm status, and SP setting can be done by accessing the remote I/O
on the master unit of DeviceNet.
PLC

DeviceNet Master

DeviceNet communication

DeviceNet Slave / Modbus Master

Modbus/RTU communication
Max. 1200 m, number of connected slaves: 31

Modbus Slave Modbus Slave Modbus Slave Modbus Slave

IM 05P02C41-01EN 1-11
1.7 Communication Functions

CC-Link Communication
The UP55A can be used as the slave devices for CC-Link communication. Read-out of
PV, operation or alarm status, and SP setting can be done by accessing the remote I/O
on the master unit of CC-Link.
PLC

CC-Link Master

CC-Link communication

CC-Link Slave / Modbus Master

Modbus/RTU communication
Max. 1200 m, number of connected slaves: 31

Modbus Slave Modbus Slave Modbus Slave Modbus Slave

Peer-to-peer Communication
In Peer-to-peer communication, controllers send and receive process data each other
and share data. However, ladder program creation using LL50A Parameter Setting
Software is necessary.
► Ladder program: LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual
Controller No. 1 to 4 can transmit and receive data. Controller No. 5 to 32 can only receive data.

• • • • • • • • • •

1 2 4 15 32
Max. 32 controllers

Coordinated Operation
A system of coordinated operation is configured with a master controller and a number of
slave controllers. The slave controllers are set to operate in the same way as the master
controller. Therefore you do not have to create a communication program.
Master
Master: UP or UT controller
Slave: UT controller only

Up to 31 connected slaves with a maximum length of 1200m

Slave Slave Slave Slave

1-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 1.7 Communication Functions

Light-loader Communication 1
Use the LL50A to set parameters and create ladder programs. Attach the adapter to the
front of the controller to communicate.

Introduction to Functions
► Light-loader function: LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual

LL50A Parameter Setting Software

Light-loader
adapter

To USB terminal
Dedicated cable

Maintenance Port Communication (Power supply is not required for the

UP55A)
Maintenance port is used to connect with the dedicated cable when using LL50A
Parameter Setting Software (sold separately). The parameters can be set without
supplying power to the UP55A. Likewise, the ladder program and the program pattern
can also be downloaded.
LL50A Parameter Setting Software

To USB terminal

Dedicated cable

CAUTION
When using the maintenance port, do not supply power to the controller. Otherwise, the
controller does not work normally.
If power is supplied to the controller while the cable is connected, or the cable is
connected to the controller already turned on, unplug the cable and turn on the controller
again. The controller returns to the normal condition.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 1-13
 1.8 Definition of Main Symbols and Terms

Main Symbol
PV: Measured input value
SP: Target setpoint
OUT: Control output value
RSP: Remote setpoint

PRG, PROGRAM: Start of Program operation

RST, RESET: Stop of Program operation
LOC, LOCAL: Start of Local operation
REM, REMOTE: Start of Remote operation
HLD, HOLD: Pause of program operation
ADV, ADVANCE: Advance of segment
A/M: AUTO/MAN
AUTO: Automatic
MAN: Manual
LSP/CAS: Local(LSP)/cascade in Cascade control
CAS, CASCADE: Cascade operation

E1, E2, E3, and E4: Terminal areas

► 17.4 Wiring

Engineering Units
Input range (scale): the PV range low limit is set to 0%, and the high limit is set to 100%
for conversion.
Input range (scale) span: the PV range span is set to 100% for conversion.

In this manual, the parameter setting range is described as the “input range” and “input
range span.” This means that engineering units are required to be set. Set a temperature
for temperature input.

The following describes a conversion example.

When the PV input range is 100 to 600°C, 0% of the PV range is equivalent to 100°C,
50% of the PV range is equivalent to 350°C, and 100% of the PV range is equivalent to
600°C.
100% of the PV range span is equivalent to 500°C.
20% of the PV range span is equivalent to 100°C.
Minimum value of PV input range Maximum value of PV input range
100°C 350°C 600°C

0% of PV input range 50% of PV input range 100% of PV input range

100% of PV input range span = 500°C

The above applies to the scale for voltage and current input.

1-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 2 UP55A Operating Procedures

2.1 UP55A Operating Procedures

2

UP55A Operating Procedures

Installation Install and wire a controller.
and Wiring Installation and Wiring: Chapter 17

Power ON

Use NO
Quick setting
function?

YES
Control mode setup Section 8.1

Control type setup Section 8.2

Control mode: Single-loop control only

Control type setup

Input/output setup Quick setting function:
Chapter 5 Input setup Section 7.1

Position Position
YES YES
proportional proportional
type? type?
NO For Position proportional type NO
Valve position Output setup
calibration

Programming Set the program pattern.

Other setup Set the other parameters as necessary.

PID tuning Adjust PID using auto-tuning or manually in PID control.

Tuning: 6.2 Performing/Canceling Auto-tuning
6.3 Adjusting PID Manually

Operation Monitoring and control of regular operations

Regular operations: Chapter 6

IM 05P02C41-01EN 2-1
Blank Page
Chapter 3 Part Names

3.1 Names and Functions of Display Parts

Part Names
See the next page.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 3-1
3.1 Names and Functions of Display Parts

UP55A

(9) Deviation indicator (1) PV display

(2) Group display (4) Data display

(Pattern number)
(3) Symbol display
(10) Status indicator
(5) Bar-graph display
(Event, alarm)
(11) Security indicator
(6) Event indicator

(12) Ladder operation indicator (7) Key navigation indicator

(13) Loop 2 indicator (8) Parameter display level

indicator

(2) + (3) + (4) : Setpoint display

3-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 3.1 Names and Functions of Display Parts

No. in figure Name Description

Displays PV.
Displays an error code if an error occurs.
PV display
(1) Displays the scrolling guide in the Menu Display and
(white or red)
Parameter Setting Display when the guide display ON/
OFF is set to ON.
3
1 to 30 represent pattern numbers in the Operation
Group display
Display.

Part Names
(2) (pattern number)
Displays a group number (1 to 8 or R) and terminal area (E1
(green)
to E4) in the Parameter Setting Display.
Symbol display
(3) Displays a parameter symbol.
(orange)
(4) Data display (orange) Displays a parameter setpoint and menu symbol.
Displays the event status and the segment position in the
Operation Display. (Default values: Time event status,
Bar-graph display
Alarm status)
(5) (event, alarm)
Displays control output value (OUT) and measured input
(orange)
value (PV).
The data to be displayed can be set by the parameter.
Event indicator Lit when the PV events occur.
(6)
(orange) Event displays can be set by the parameter.
Key navigation
Lit or blinks when the Up/Down or Left/Right arrow key
(7) indicator
operation is possible.
(green)
Displays the setting conditions of the parameter display
level function.
Parameter display
Parameter display level EASY PRO
(8) level indicator
Easy setting mode Lit Unlit
(green)
Standard setting mode Unlit Unlit
Professional setting mode Unlit Lit
Displays the status of increment, constancy, and
decrement of the program setpoint.
Program monitor
(9) : Lit when a program setpoint is increasing.
(green)
: Lit when a program setpoint is constant.
: Lit when a program setpoint is decreasing.
Displays the operating conditions and control status.
Display Description
HLD Lit when in remote mode (HOLD).
CAS Lit when in cascade mode (CAS).
Lit when in program operation mode
Status indicator (PRG).
(10)
(green and red) PRG PRG lamp is blinking while the
Starting time of program operation is
available.
RST Lit when in reset mode (RST).
Lit when in manual mode (MAN).
MAN
Blinks during auto-tuning.
Lit if a password is set. The setup parameter settings are
(11) Security indicator (red)
locked.
Ladder operation
(12) Lit while the ladder program operation is executed.
indicator (green)
Lit when the control mode is Cascade control.
In the Operation Display, the LP2 lamp is lit while the
Loop 2 indicator Loop-2 data is displayed on Setpoint display.
(13 (LP2 lamp) In the Parameter Setting Display, the LP2 lamp indicates
(green) the loop of displayed menu symbol or parameter symbol.
The LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 menu symbol or
parameter symbol is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 3-3
 3.2 Names and Functions of Keys
UP55A

(4) Light-loader interface (1) DISPLAY key

(2) PARAMETER key

(3) SET/ENTER key

(5) User function keys Up/Down/Left/Right arrow keys

3-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 3.2 Names and Functions of Keys

No. in figure Name Description

Used to switch the Operation Displays.
Press the key in the Operation Display to switch the
(1) DISPLAY key provided Operation Displays.
Press the key in the Menu Display or Parameter Setting
Display to return to the Operation Display.
3
Hold down the key for 3 seconds to move to the Operation
Parameter Setting Display.

Part Names
Hold down the key and the Left arrow key simultaneously
for 3 seconds to move to the Setup Parameter Setting
(2) PARAMETER key
Display.
Press the key in the Parameter Setting Display to return
to the Menu Display. Press the key once to cancel the
parameter setting (setpoint is blinking).
SET/ENTER key
Press the key in the Menu Display to move to the
Parameter Setting Display of the Menu. Press the key in
the Parameter Setting Display to transfer to the parameter
setting mode (setpoint is blinking), and the parameter can
be changed. Press the key during parameter setting mode
to register the setpoint.
SET/ENTER key Up/Down/Left/Right arrow keys
(3) Up/Down/ Left/Right Press the Left/Right arrow keys in the Menu Display to
arrow keys switch the Displays.
Press the Up/Down/Left/Right arrow keys in the Parameter
Setting Display to switch the Displays.
Press the Up/Down arrow keys during parameter setting
mode (setpoint is blinking) to change a setpoint.
Press the Left/Right arrow keys during parameter setting
mode (setpoint is blinking) to move between digits
according to the parameter.
It is the communication interface to the adapter cable
(4) Light-loader interface when setting and storing parameters via PC. The LL50A
Parameter Setting Software (sold separately) is required.
PTN key: Press the RUN key for 1 second while an
operation display is shown starts the controller.
RST key: Press the RST key for 1 second while an
operation display is shown stops the controller.
MODE key: Presents a display for switching between the
HOLD, ADVANCE, PROG, RESET, LOCAL, REMOTE
RUN key and AUTO/MAN. In order to change the operation
RST key mode, press the SET/ENTER key while the setpoint is
(5)
MODE key blinking.
PTN PTN key: A program pattern number can be selected
during the operation except the program pattern
operation. (The program pattern number displayed
on the Group display blinks.) When the PTN key is
pressed while the program pattern number is blinking,
the blinking stops.
Users can assign functions to the key using parameters.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 3-5
3.2 Names and Functions of Keys

Maintenance Port (Power supply is not required for the UP55A).

The maintenance port is used to connect with the dedicated cable when using LL50A
Parameter Setting Software (sold separately). The parameters can be set without
supplying power to the UP55A.

Maintenance port

Upper surface

UP55A

CAUTION
When using the maintenance port, do not supply power to the controller. Otherwise, the
controller does not work normally.
If power is supplied to the controller while the cable is connected, or the cable is
connected to the controller already turned on, unplug the cable and turn on the controller
again. The controller returns to the normal condition.

3-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 3.3 List of Display Symbols
The following shows the parameter symbols, menu symbols, alphanumeric of guide, and
symbols which are displayed on the UP55A. 3
Figure (common to all display area)

Part Names
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PV display (14 segments): Alphabet

A B C D E F

G H I J K L

M N O P Q R

S T U V W X

Y Z

Symbol display and Data display (11 segments): Alphabet

A B C D E F

c (lower-case)

G H I J K L

M N O P Q R

S T U V W X

Y Z

IM 05P02C41-01EN 3-7
3.3 List of Display Symbols

Group display (7 segments): Alphabet

A B C D E F

G H I J K L

M N O P Q R

S T U V W X
None

Y Z

PV display (14 segments): Symbol

Space - / ‘ ,

3-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 3.4 Brief Description of Setting Details (Parameters)
This manual describes the Setting Details as follows in addition to the functional
Description. 3
Setting Details

Part Names
(Display Example)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Set a display value of setpoint of
PV alarm, SP alarm, deviation
alarm, output alarm, or velocity
Alarm-1 to -8 alarm.
A1 to A8 EASY AL
setpoint -19999 to 30000 (Set a value
within the input range.)
Decimal point position depends on
the input type

(1) Parameter symbol: Symbol displayed on Symbol display on the front panel.

(2) Name: Parameter name

(3) Display level: Indicates the parameter display level.

(4) Setting range: Parameter setting range

(5) Menu symbol: Indicates the menu to which the parameter belongs.
: Operation parameter
: Setup parameter

Parameter Display Level

Display level Description
Easy setting mode: The minimum Corresponding parameters are displayed in
EASY
necessary parameters are displayed. all modes.
Corresponding parameters are displayed only
in Standard setting mode and Professional
Standard setting mode: The wider setting mode.
range of parameters than those Parameter display level indicators "EASY"
STD
shown in Easy setting mode are and "PRO" are unlit in Standard setting
displayed. mode.
*: "STD" is the symbol used in this manual
only.
Professional setting mode: All Corresponding parameters are displayed only
PRO
parameters are displayed. in Professional setting mode.

Note
For more intelligible display operation of parameters and the references, see Chapter 18,
"Parameter Map."

IM 05P02C41-01EN 3-9
Blank Page
Chapter 4 Basic Operation

4.1 Overview of Display Switch and Operation Keys

The following shows the transition of Operation Display, Operation Parameter Setting
Display, and Setup Parameter Setting Display. The “Operation Parameter Setting
Display” has the parameters for setting the functions necessary for the operation. The
“Setup Parameter Setting Display” has the parameters for setting the basic functions of
4
the controller.
Power ON

Basic Operation
Operation Display
Operation Display: See Chapter 6.
Remaining Remaining Remaining Repetition Program Pattern
SP Display TSP Display Segment-time Display OUT Display Segment-time Display Display Display

Operation Display corresponding

to the function is displayed.
+
Press the keys Press the key *1* Return to the Operation Display from
for 3 seconds. Same as *1. for 3 seconds. the Parameter Setting Display

Setup Parameter Setting Display Operation Parameter / Program Parameter Setting Display
Parameters for setting the basic Parameters for setting the functions
functions of the controller necessary for the operation
The Menu Display and Parameter Setting Display The Menu Display and Parameter Setting Display
are changed in a circular pattern. are changed in a circular pattern.

CTL Menu Display ・・ VER Menu Display END Display MODE Menu Display PROG Menu Display ・
・・・ END Display

・・
・

・
・

・
・・

・・

・・

・・
・・

・・

END Display END Display END画面 END画面 END画面

In the Setup Parameter Setting Display, In the Operation Parameter Setting Display,
＋
press the keys press the keys
for 3 seconds for 3 seconds
to move to the Operation Parameter Setting Display. to move to the Setup Parameter Setting Display.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 4-1
4.1 Overview of Display Switch and Operation Keys

The display pattern of the UP55A is as follows; the Menu Display and Parameter Setting
Display.
For the Operation Display, see Chapter 6, “Monitoring and Control of Regular
Operations.”

Display Description
The Menu Display is segmented by the function and optional terminal position.
The scrolling guide for the menu is displayed on PV display. The guide display
can be turned on/off with the MODE key.

Menu Display of Operation Parameter

The scrolling guide for the menu is displayed.

OPE.M is displayed. Menu symbol is displayed.

Menu Display Group number or Terminal area is displayed.
Lit while Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

Menu Display of Setup Parameter

The scrolling guide for the menu is displayed.

SET.M is displayed. Menu symbol is displayed.

Group number or Terminal area is displayed.

4-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 4.1 Overview of Display Switch and Operation Keys

Display Description
The following is the Display for displaying and setting a parameter.
The parameters have three types of display levels; Easy setting mode,
Standard setting mode, and Professional setting mode. The parameters to be
displayed can be limited according to the setting of the parameter display level.
The scrolling guide for the parameter is displayed on PV display. The guide
display can be turned on/off with the MODE key.
4
Parameter Setting Display (Example of Operation Parameter Setting Display)
The scrolling guide for the parameter is displayed.

Basic Operation
Parameter
Setpoint is displayed.
Setting Display Parameter symbol is displayed.
Group number or Terminal area is displayed.
Lit while Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

Parameter Setting Display (Example of Program Parameter Setting Display)

Parameter symbol is displayed.
This guide can be turned on/off with the MODE key.

Segment number is displayed. Setpoint is displayed.

Pattern number is displayed.

Display Shown at the End (the Lowest Level) of the Parameter Setting Display
As shown in the figure below, the END Display is shown to indicate the end of the Menu
Display and Parameter Setting Display. There are no setting items.
The scrolling guide of END is displayed.

END is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 4-3
4.1 Overview of Display Switch and Operation Keys

Basic Key Operation Sequence

● To move to the Setup Parameter Setting Display
Hold down the PARAMETER key and the Left arrow key simultaneously for 3 seconds.

+
Hold down the keys
for 3 seconds.

● To move to the Operation Parameter Setting Display

Hold down the PARAMETER key for 3 seconds.

Hold down the key

for 3 seconds.

● To move to the Operation Display

Press the DISPLAY key once.

4-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 4.2 How to Set Parameters
The following operating procedure describes an example of setting alarm setpoint (A1).

Operation

1. Hold down the PARAMETER key for 3 seconds in the Operation Display to call up 4
the [MODE] Menu Display.

Basic Operation

2. Press the Right arrow key to display the [AL] Menu Display.

3. Press the SET/ENTER key to display the [A1] Parameter Setting Display.

4. Press the SET/ENTER key to blink the setpoint.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 4-5
4.2 How to Set Parameters

5. Press the Up or Down arrow key to change the setpoint.

(Change the setpoint using the Up/Down arrow keys to increase and decrease
the value and the Left/Right arrow keys to move between digits.)

6. Press the SET/ENTER key to register the setpoint (the setpoint stops blinking).

7. Press the PARAMETER key once to return to the Menu Display. Press the
DISPLAY key once to return to the Operation Display.

This completes the setting procedure.

How to Cancel Parameter Setting

To cancel parameter setting when a parameter is being set (setpoint is blinking), press
the PARAMETER key once.

4-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 4.2 How to Set Parameters

How to Set Parameter Setpoint

Numeric Value Setting

Basic Operation
1. Display the Parameter Setting Display.

2. Press the SET/ENTER key to move to the

setting mode (the setpoint blinks).

3. Press the Left arrow key to move one digit to

the left.(Press the Right arrow key to move one
digit to the right.)

4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to change the

setpoint. Press the Up arrow key when 9 is
displayed to move one digit to the left. Press
the Down arrow key when 0 is displayed to
move one digit to the right.

5. Press the SET/ENTER key to register the

setpoint.

Selection Data Setting

1. Display the Parameter Setting Display.

2. Press the SET/ENTER key to move to the

setting mode (the setpoint blinks).

3. Press the Up arrow key to change the setpoint

(press the Down arrow key to change the
setpoint).
4 . Press the SET/ENTER key to register the
setpoint.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 4-7
4.2 How to Set Parameters

Time (minute.second) Setting

Example of 17 minutes 59 seconds

1. Display the Parameter Setting Display.

2. Press the SET/ENTER key to move to the
setting mode (the setpoint blinks).

3. Press the Left arrow key to move one digit to

the left.(press the Right arrow key to move one
digit to the right.)

4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to change the

setpoint. Press the Up arrow key when 5 is
displayed to move one digit to the left. Press
the Down arrow key when 0 is displayed to
move one digit to the right.

5. Press the SET/ENTER key to register the

setpoint.

4-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 5 Quick Setting Function

5.1 Setting Using Quick Setting Function

Description
The Quick setting function is a function to easily set the basic function of the controller.
The Quick setting function starts when the power is turned on after wiring.

The Quick setting function can be used only when the control mode is Single-loop
control. In other control modes, set the functions without using the Quick setting function.
5

Quick Setting Function

The following lists the items to set using the Quick setting function.
(1) Control type (PID control, Heating/cooling control, etc.)
(2) Input function (PV input, range, scale (at voltage/current input), etc.)
(3) Output function (control output type and cycle time)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 5-1
5.1 Setting Using Quick Setting Function

Flowchart of Quick Setting Function

Power ON
Decide whether or not to use the Quick setting function.

Press the UP or Down arrow key to select YES.

Press the SET/ENTER key to start the Quick setting function.

Press the UP or Down arrow key to select NO.

Press the SET/ENTER key not to start the Quick setting function.
The Operation Display is displayed.

「NO」

Select YES.
Select NO.
Press the SET/ENTER key. Press the SET/ENTER key.
The Quick setting function is started.

The parameter CNT (control type) * If NO is selected and the

is displayed first. parameter IN (PV input type) is set
to OFF, the Quick setting function
Setting Method
(1) Press the Up or Down arrow key to starts when the power is turned on
display a parameter to set. again.
(2) Press the SET/ENTER key.
(The setpoint blinks).
(3) Press the UP or Down arrow key to
change a setpoit.
(4) Press the SET/ENTER key to
register the setpoint.
(The setpoint stops blinkng.)

Each parameter is displayed in turn.

See Setting Details described later.

Finally EXIT is displayed.

Select YES and press the
SET/ENTER key to complete the
setup of basic functions.
The Operation Display is displayed.
Select NO to continue the Quick
setting functionn.

Operation Display

PV is displayed.

SP is displayed.

5-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 5.1 Setting Using Quick Setting Function

Setting Example
Set the following parameters to set to PID control, thermocouple Type K (range: 0.0 to
500.0ºC), and current control output. No need to change the parameters other than the
following parameters.

Set QSM = YES to enter the quick setting mode.

(1) Set CNT = PID.

(2) Set IN = K1.
(3) Set UNIT = C (initial value). 5
(4) Set RH = 500.0.
(5) Set RL = 0.0.

Quick Setting Function

(6) Set OT = 00.02

Set EXIT = YES to quit the quick setting mode.

The Operation Display is shown.

Setting Details
Control Type
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PID: PID control
ONOF: ON/OFF control (1 point of
hysteresis)
CNT Control type EASY CTL
ONOF2: ON/OFF control (2 points
of hysteresis)
H/C: Heating/cooling control
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
► Control type: 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 5-3
5.1 Setting Using Quick Setting Function

Input Function
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
K1: -270.0 to 1370.0 ºC / -450.0 to 2500.0 ºF
K2: -270.0 to 1000.0 ºC / -450.0 to 2300.0 ºF
K3: -200.0 to 500.0 ºC / -200.0 to 1000.0 ºF
J: -200.0 to 1200.0 ºC / -300.0 to 2300.0 ºF
T1: -270.0 to 400.0 ºC / -450.0 to 750.0 ºF
T2: 0.0 to 400.0 ºC / -200.0 to 750.0 ºF
B: 0.0 to 1800.0 ºC / 32 to 3300 ºF
S: 0.0 to 1700.0 ºC / 32 to 3100 ºF
R: 0.0 to 1700.0 ºC / 32 to 3100 ºF
N: -200.0 to 1300.0 ºC / -300.0 to 2400.0 ºF
E: -270.0 to 1000.0 ºC / -450.0 to 1800.0 ºF
L: -200.0 to 900.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1600.0 ºF
U1: -200.0 to 400.0 ºC / -300.0 to 750.0 ºF
U2: 0.0 to 400.0 ºC / -200.0 to 1000.0 ºF
W: 0.0 to 2300.0 ºC / 32 to 4200 ºF
IN PV input type EASY
PL2: 0.0 to 1390.0 ºC / 32.0 to 2500.0 ºF
P2040: 0.0 to 1900.0 ºC / 32 to 3400 ºF
WRE: 0.0 to 2000.0 ºC / 32 to 3600 ºF
JPT1: -200.0 to 500.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1000.0 ºF
JPT2: -150.0 to 150.0 ºC / -200.0 to 300.0 ºF
PT1: -200.0 to 850.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1560.0 ºF
PT2: -200.0 to 500.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1000.0 ºF
PT3: -150.00 to 150.00 ºC / -200.0 to 300.0 ºF
0.4-2V: 0.400 to 2.000 V
1-5V: 1.000 to 5.000 V
PV
4-20: 4.00 to 20.00 mA
0-2V: 0.000 to 2.000 V
0-10V: 0.00 to 10.00 V
0-20 : 0.00 to 20.00 mA
-1020: -10.00 to 20.00 mV
0-100: 0.0 to 100.0 mV
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
-: No unit
UNIT PV input unit EASY
- -: No unit
- - -: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
Maximum value of Depends on the input type.
RH EASY
PV input range - For temperature input -
Set the temperature range that
is actually controlled. (RL<RH)
- For voltage / current input -
Set the range of a voltage /
current signal that is applied.
Minimum value of The scale across which the
RL EASY
PV input range voltage / current signal is actually
controlled should be set using
the maximum value of input
scale (SH) and minimum value
of input scale (SL). (Input is
always 0% when RL=RH.)
Note1: W:W-5% Re/W-26% Re(Hoskins Mfg. Co.). ASTM E988
WRE: W97Re3-W75Re25

5-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 5.1 Setting Using Quick Setting Function

Input Function (Continued)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: No decimal place
PV input scale 1: One decimal place
SDP decimal point EASY 2: Two decimal places
position 3: Three decimal places
4: Four decimal places PV
Maximum value of
SH EASY
PV input scale -19999 to 30000, (SL<SH),
SL
Minimum value of
EASY
| SH - SL | ≤ 30000 5
PV input scale
► Input setting: 7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

Quick Setting Function

Output Function
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Control output or Heating-side
control output (Lower two digits)
00: OFF
01: OUT terminals (voltage pulse)
02: OUT terminals (current)
03: OUT terminals (relay/triac)
04: OUT2 terminals (voltage pulse)
05: OUT2 terminals (current)
06: OUT2 terminals (relay/triac)
OT Output type selection EASY
Cooling-side control output (Upper
two digits)
00: OFF
01: OUT terminals (voltage pulse) OUT
02: OUT terminals (current)
03: OUT terminals (relay/triac)
04: OUT2 terminals (voltage pulse)
05: OUT2 terminals (current)
06: OUT2 terminals (relay/triac)
Control output cycle
time
Heating-side control
CT EASY
output cycle time
0.5 to 1000.0 s
(in Heating/cooling
control)
Cooling-side control
CTc EASY
output cycle time
► Output type: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type
► Cycle time: 10.2 Setting Control Output Cycle Time

IM 05P02C41-01EN 5-5
 5.2 Restarting Quick Setting Function
Once functions have been built using the Quick setting function, the Quick setting
function does not start even when the power is turned on. The following methods can be
used to restart the Quick setting function.

● Set the parameter QSM (Quick setting mode) to ON and turn on the power again.
● Set the parameter IN (PV input type) to OFF and turn on the power again.

CAUTION
The parameters related to the range or scale are initialized if the input type is
changed.
Changing the control mode (CTLM) allows you to restart the Quick setting function.
However, be careful because some parameters will be initialized.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
IN PV input type EASY OFF: Disable PV
OFF: Disable
QSM Quick setting mode EASY SYS
ON: Enable

5-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 6 Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

6.1.1 Operation Display Transitions in Single-loop Control, Cascade Primary-
loop Control, Loop Control with PV switching, and Loop Control with PV
auto-selector
► Display/Non-display of Operation Display: 13.3.5 Setting Display/Non-display of Operation Display
► Registration of SELECT Display: 13.1.3 Registering SELECT Display (Up to 5 displays)

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

See the next page.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-1
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Standard Type

SP Display
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

SP Display
(When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON).)
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "L.SP" during remote-mode operation.
LP2 lamp is lit.

TSP Display
(When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON).)
Displays during program operation.
LP2 lamp is lit.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

OUT Display
(OUT can be changed in MAN mode.)

PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
6-2 displayed. IM 05P02C41-01EN

Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

 Remaining Repetition Display
Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
6
Alarm 8: Off

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Heater Break Alarm-1 Current Display (display only)
(Only for Heater break alarm option)

Heater Break Alarm-2 Current Display (display only)

(Only for Heater break alarm option)

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-3
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Position Proportional Type

SP Display
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

SP Display
(When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON).)
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "L.SP" during remote-mode operation.
LP2 lamp is lit.

TSP Display
(When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON).)
Displays during program operation.
LP2 lamp is lit.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Valve Position Display (display only)

Position Proportional Computation Output Display

(Factory default: non-display)

PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

6-4 Program Pattern Display IM 05P02C41-01EN
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.
 Segment Number Display
When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

6
Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)
(Factory default: non-display)

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: Off

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-5
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Heating/cooling Type

SP Display
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

SP Display
(When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON).)
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "L.SP" during remote-mode operation.
LP2 lamp is lit.

TSP Display
(When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON).)
Displays during program operation.
LP2 lamp is lit.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Heating/cooling OUT Display

(OUT can be changed in MAN mode.)
C: cooling-side output, H: heating-side output

PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
6-6 displayed. IM 05P02C41-01EN

Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

 Remaining Repetition Display
Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
0: On, 1: On 6
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: Off

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Analog Input Displays (display only)
(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-7
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

6.1.2 Operation Display Transitions in Cascade Control

► Display/non-display of Operation Display: 13.3.5 Setting Display/Non-Display of Operation Display
► Registration of SELECT Display: 13.1.3 Registering SELECT Display (Up to 5 Displays)
Standard Type
When the operation mode is Cascade (CAS):

Loop-1 SP Display
PV display: Loop-1 PV
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Loop-2 OUT Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-1 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-1 OUT Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-1 OUT

Loop-1 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV

Loop-2 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

6-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Soak and ramp display
Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
 Segment Number Display
When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.
6

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)
(Factory default: non-display)
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: Off

Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display) LP2 lamp is lit.
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: On

Heater Break Alarm-1 Current Display (display only)

(Only for Heater break alarm option)
PV display: Loop-1 PV

Heater Break Alarm-2 Current Display (display only)

(Only for Heater break alarm option)
PV display: Loop-1 PV

Loop-1/Loop-2 PV Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-1 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-9
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

When the operation mode is LOC(LSP):

Loop-1 SP Display
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Loop-2 SP Display
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-2 OUT Display

(OUT can be changed.)
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-1 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV

Loop-2 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
6-10 Can be changed by parameter PTSL. IM 05P02C41-01EN

Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

 Remaining Repetition Display
Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
0: On, 1: On 6
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: Off

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)
(Factory default: non-display) LP2 lamp is lit.
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: On

Loop-1 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV

Loop-2 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-2/Loop-1 PV Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-2 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-1 PV

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-11
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Position Proportional Type

When the operation mode is Cascade (CAS):

Loop-1 SP Display
PV display: Loop-1 PV
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Valve Position Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-1 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Position Proportional Computation Output Display

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-1 OUT Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-1 OUT

Loop-1 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV

Loop-2 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
6-12 operation mode is PROG. IM 05P02C41-01EN

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
 Segment Number Display
When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.
6

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)
(Factory default: non-display)
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: Off

Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display) LP2 lamp is lit.
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: On

Loop-1/Loop-2 PV Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-1 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-13
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

When the operation mode is LOC(LSP):

Loop-1 SP Display
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Loop-2 SP Display
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Valve Position Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Position Proportional Computation Output Display

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-1 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV

Loop-2 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

6-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.
 Segment Number Display
When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

6
Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)
(Factory default: non-display)

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: Off

Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display) LP2 lamp is lit.
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: On

Loop-2/Loop-1 PV Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-2 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-1 PV

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-15
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Heating/cooling Type
When the operation mode is Cascade (CAS):

Loop-1 SP Display
PV display: Loop-1 PV
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Loop-2 Heating/cooling OUT Display

(OUT can be changed.)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
C: cooling-side OUT, H: heating-side OUT
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-1 OUT Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-1 OUT

Loop-1 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV

Loop-2 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-1 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
6-16 When pattern number is IM 05P02C41-01EN
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.
 Segment Number Display
When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.
6
Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

(Factory default: non-display)
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: On

Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display) LP2 lamp is lit.
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: On

Loop-1/Loop-2 PV Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-1 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-17
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

When the operation mode is LOC(LSP):

Loop-1 SP Display
Displays "SSP" during reset-mode.
Displays "L.SP" during local-mode operation.
Displays "R.SP" during remote-mode operation.

TSP Display
Displays during program operation.

Remaining Segment-time Display

Displays during program operation.

Loop-2 SP Display
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-2 Heating/cooling OUT Display

(OUT can be changed.)
PV display: Loop-2 PV
C: cooling-side OUT, H: heating-side OUT
LP2 lamp is lit.

Loop-1 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV

Loop-2 PID Number Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV display: Loop-2 PV
LP2 lamp is lit.

Segment Number Display

When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
6-18 Can be changed by parameter PTSL. IM 05P02C41-01EN

Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
 Segment Number Display
When the pattern number is 0, 0/0 is displayed.

6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

Remaining Repetition Display

Dispalys the number of remaining repetitions (R.CYC) on Setpoint display.
This display is displayed only when the repeat function is set and the
operation mode is PROG.

Soak and ramp display

Program Pattern Display
program pattern (overview)
When pattern number is
0, pattern is not
displayed.
Can be changed by parameter PTSL.

6
Loop-1 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)
(Factory default: non-display)

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: Off

Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display (display only)

(Factory default: non-display) LP2 lamp is lit.
0: On, 1: On
Ex.: Alarm 5: Off, Alarm 6: On, Alarm 7: On,
Alarm 8: On

Loop-2/Loop-1 PV Display (display only)

PV display: Loop-2 PV
Setpoint display: Loop-1 PV

Analog Input Displays (display only)

(Factory default: non-display)
PV: PV analog input,
RSP: RSP analog input (E1-terminal area),
AIN2: AIN2 analog input (E2-terminal area),
AIN4: AIN4 analog input (E4-terminal area)
(Only for each aux. analog input)

SELECT Displays 1 to 5
(Displayed only when SELECT Display is registered.
(The figure on the left is the example of
the parameter A1 (alarm-1 setpoint).)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-19
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

6.1.3 Details of the Operation Display

The following is the Operation Display types and each display and operation description.

PV display

Setpoint display

Operation Display Display and operation description

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).
Setpoint display: Displays and changes target setpoint (SP).

Symbol Program setpoint

Program pattern number (PTNO.)

The Display is switched to the SP Display if the operation mode is

switched to AUTO, CAS, LOC, or REM when other Operation Display is
shown.

When the operation mode is remote (REM lamp is lit):

SP Display
Symbol Remote setpoint
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

The figure below is displayed while the right arrow key is held down on
SP Display.

Program setpoint
The number of segments included
in the selected program pattern.
The segment number for which
operation is in progress.
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays final target setpoint (TSP).

TSP Display
Symbol Final target setpoint
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

6-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

(Continued)
Operation Display Display and operation description
PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).
Setpoint display: Displays remaining segment-time.

Remaining
Segment-time
Display
Symbol Remaining segment-time
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays control output value and changes control 6
output value in MAN mode.

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Symbol Control output
Program pattern number (PTNO.)
Displays the valve's feedback input value (at 0 to 100% valve opening) in
Position proportional control.
The Display is switched to the OUT Display if the operation mode is
switched to MAN when other Operation Display is shown.
The Display is switched to the OUT Display while auto-tuning is
performed.

[OUT Change Operation]

OUT Display The control output value can be changed with the Up or Down arrow key
(Valve Position in MAN mode (MAN lamp is lit).
The control output value is changed by direct operation (without pressing
Display) the SET/ENTER key), and cannot be changed by moving between digits
using the Left and Right arrow keys.
In Position proportional control and in MAN mode, the valve opens as
long as the Up arrow key is being pressed, and closes as long as the
Down arrow key is being pressed.
In Two-position two-level control, main setting-side output and sub-
setting-side output can be manipulated individually.

When in RESET mode (RST lamp is lit):

Symbol Preset output

Program pattern number (PTNO.)
Preset output value is displayed in RESET mode.
Preset output values cannot be changed by OUT change operation.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-21
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

(Continued)
Operation Display Display and operation description
PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).
Setpoint display: Displays heating-side and cooling-side control output
value and changes control output value in MAN mode.

Heating-side
control output
Symbol of
heating side
Cooling-side control output
Symbol of cooling side

Program pattern number (PTNO.)

When the control output value is less than 100%, one digit is displayed
to the right of the decimal point. When the control output value is equal
to or more than 100%, no digits are displayed to the right of the decimal
point.
The display is switched to the Heating/cooling OUT Display if the
operation mode is switched to MAN when other Operation Display is
shown.
An interruption is displayed while auto-tuning is performed.

[OUT Change Operation]

Heating/cooling
In MAN mode (MAN lamp is lit) pressing the Up arrow key causes the
OUT Display cooling-side output to decrease, and the heating-side output to increase.
Pressing the Down arrow key causes the cooling-side output to increase,
and the heating-side output to decrease.
The control output value is changed by direct operation (without pressing
the SET/ENTER key), and cannot be changed by moving between digits
using the Left and Right arrow keys.

When in RESET mode (RST lamp is lit):

Heating-side
control output
Symbol of
heating side
Cooling-side control output
Symbol of cooling side

Program pattern number (PTNO.)

Heating-side or cooling-side preset output value is displayed in RESET

mode.
Preset output values cannot be changed by OUT change operation.
Loop-2 output value is always displayed in Cascade control.

6-22 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

(Continued)
Operation Display Display and operation description
PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).
Setpoint display: Displays PID number currently being used.

PID Number
Display
Symbol PID number
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays the segment number for which operation is in 6
progress / the number of segments included in the selected program
pattern.

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Segment Number
Display Symbol The segment number for which
operation is in progress /
the number of segments included
in the selected program pattern.

Program pattern number (PTNO.)

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays the remaining repetition.

Remaining
Repetition Display
Symbol Remaining
repetition
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays program pattern

Program pattern (overview) Period (.)

This symbol is
Program pattern number (PTNO.) displayed after the
final segment.

Program Pattern The Soak and ramp display can be displayed by parameter PTSL.
Display

Soak and ramp display Period (.)

This symbol is
Program pattern number (PTNO.) displayed after the
final segment.
Program pattern display can be scrolled using Up/Down/Left/Right arrow
key. When the SET/ENTER key is pressed, the Program Pattern Display
returns to the former position.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-23
6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

(Continued)
Operation Display Display and operation description
PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).
Setpoint display: Displays alarm-5 to -8 status.

Alarm-5 to -8
Symbol Alarm-8 status
Status Display Alarm-7 status
Alarm-6 status
Alarm-5 status
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

The following is the Display shown when the control mode is cascade.
PV display: Displays Loop-1 PV input.
Setpoint display: Displays Loop-2 PV input.

When the control mode is Cascade control and the operation mode is
cascade (CAS lamp is lit):
Loop-1 PV input

Symbol of PV2 Loop-2 PV input

Program pattern number (PTNO.)

PV1/PV2 Display PV display: Displays Loop-2 PV input.

Setpoint display: Displays Loop-1 PV input.

When the control mode is Cascade control and the operation mode is
Local (LSP):
Loop-2 PV input

Symbol of PV1 Loop-1 PV input

Program pattern number (PTNO.)
LP2 lamp is lit
(indicates the loop shown on PV display).

6-24 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operation Displays

(Continued)
Operation Display Display and operation description
PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).
Setpoint display: Displays PV, RSP, AIN2, or AIN4 analog input value.

AIN2 auxiliary analog input value

Symbol AIN2 input

Analog Input
Program pattern number (PTNO.)
Display
6
AIN4 auxiliary analog input value

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Symbol AIN4 input
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays position proportional computation output value
(internal computed value).

Position
Proportional
Computation Internal
Symbol
computed value
Output Display Program pattern number (PTNO.)

Can be changed in MAN mode. The valve opens or closes so that the
valve’s feedback input value reaches the setpoint.

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays measured heater current.

Heater Break Alarm

Current Display
Heater break current
Symbol measured value
Program pattern number (PTNO.)

SELECT Display is for registering frequently-used parameters from

Parameter Setting Display, and for displaying them on Operation
Display so that the parameter settings can be easily changed in normal
operation.

PV display: Displays measured input value (PV).

Setpoint display: Displays and changes the registered parameter.

SELECT Display The following is the display example when the parameter A1 (alarm-1
setpoint) is registered.

Symbol Alarm setpoint

Program pattern number (PTNO.)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-25
 6.2 Performing and Canceling Auto-tuning

Setting Display
Operation Mode Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The operation
mode is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The operation mode is
displayed.)

The parameter AT is displayed when the operation mode is

AUTO.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
1: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the PID of
group 1.
2: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the PID of
group 2.
3: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the PID of
group 3.
4: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the PID of
group 4.
AUTO-tuning
AT EASY 5: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning MODE
switch
result is stored in the PID of
group 5.
6: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the PID of
group 6.
7: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the PID of
group 7.
8: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the PID of
group 8.
R: Tuning result is stored in the PID
for reference deviation.
SP bias in auto- -100.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
AT.BS PRO TUNE
tuning span (EUS)
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

CAUTION
Set the operation mode to AUTO and PRG/LOC/REM to perform auto-tuning.

Lamp Status
Status STOP lamp CAS lamp MAN lamp
During auto-tuning Unlit Unlit Blinking

6-26 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.2 Performing and Canceling Auto-tuning

In Cascade control, perform Loop-2 auto-tuning in AUTO and RUN modes, then Loop-1
auto-tuning in Cascade and RUN modes.
Lamp Status
Status STOP lamp CAS lamp MAN lamp
During auto-tuning of Loop-2 Unlit Unlit Blinking
During auto-tuning of Loop-1 Unlit Lit Blinking

Description
Auto-tuning is a function with which the controller automatically measures the process
characteristics and sets PID constants, which are control-related parameters, to optimum 6
values for the setpoint. Auto-tuning temporarily executes ON/OFF control, calculates
appropriate PID constants from response data obtained, and sets these constants.

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

CAUTION
Do not perform auto-tuning for the following processes.
Tune PID manually.
● Processes with fast response such as flow rate control and pressure control.
● Processes which do not allow the output to be turned on and off even
temporarily.
● Processes which prohibit output changes at control valves (or other actuators).
● Processes in which product quality can be adversely affected if PV values
fluctuate beyond their allowable ranges.

Auto-tuning in progress
MAN lamp blinkng

SP
Temperature

ON
Control
output OFF

Time
ON/OFF control PID control using PID
constants calculated from
the AT results
AT = Started

When SP bias in auto-tuning is set

Auto-tuning in progress
MAN lamp blinkng
SP
SP bias in auto-tuning
SP+AT.BS (negative setpoint)
Temperature

ON
Control
output OFF

Time
ON/OFF control PID control using PID
constants calculated from
the AT results
AT = Started

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-27
6.2 Performing and Canceling Auto-tuning

Tuning Point and Storage Location of Tuning Results

The tuning point when performing auto-tuning is the target setpoint that is currently used
for control computation.
PID constants after the tuning are stored in the PID group that is specified when
performing auto-tuning.
Operation
AT setpoint Tuning point Storage location
mode
P, I, and D of the PID group specified in
Program / Setpoint that is currently AT.
1 to 8, R
Local used In Heating/cooling control: P, I, D, Pc, Ic,
and Dc
P, I, and D of the PID group specified in
AT.
Remote 1 to 8, R Remote setpoint
In Heating/cooling control: P, I, D, Pc, Ic,
and Dc
When the setpoint of AT is “R,” the AT result is stored in the PID group for reference
deviation.
When performing auto-tuning in AT setpoint "R", set the parameter ZON to other than 0,
and set the parameter RDV to other than 0.

Auto-tuning cannot be performed when the control type (CNT) is as follows.

• ON/OFF control (1 point of hysteresis)
• ON/OFF control (2 points of hysteresis)

In addition, auto-tuning cannot be performed in the following cases (no error indication).
• Input error occurs. (Input burnout, ADC error, etc.)
• The operation mode is RESET.
• The operation mode is MAN.
• Output limiter setpoint at auto-tuning: AT.OL≥AT.OH

Start and Stop of Auto-tuning

Start and stop of auto-tuning can be set by parameter setting, communication, or contact
input.
Auto-tuning is stopped in the following cases.
• Switch to MAN
• Switch to RESET
• The parameter AT is set to OFF.
• Power failure
• Auto-tuning is not finished even after the time-out detection time is elapsed.

The time-out detection time is about 24 hours.

When the auto-tuning error occurs, the error code is shown in the Operation Display.
Press any key to erase it.

► Auto-tuning time output limiter: 8.9 Adjusting Auto-tuning Operation

6-28 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.3 Adjusting PID Manually

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > Right arrow key (to [PID] Menu
Display ) > SET/ENTER key (The setting parameter is
displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting parameter is
displayed.)

In the Setting Display for the PID parameters, Displays can

6
be arbitrarily switched using the Up, Down, Left or Right arrow
key. Pressing the Left or Right arrow key changes the group.

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

(The group number is displayed on Group display.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.0 to 999.9%
Proportional band
When 0.0% is set, it operates as
Heating-side
0.1%.
P proportional band EASY
Heating-side ON/OFF control
(in Heating/cooling
applies when 0.0% in Heating/
control)
cooling control
Integral time
Heating-side
OFF: Disable
I integral time (in EASY
1 to 6000 s
Heating/cooling
control)
Derivative time
PID
Heating-side
OFF: Disable
D derivative time (in EASY
1 to 6000 s
Heating/cooling
control)
0.0 to 999.9%
Cooling-side Cooling-side ON/OFF control
Pc EASY
proportional band applies when 0.0% in Heating/
cooling control
Cooling-side OFF: Disable
Ic EASY
integral time 1 to 6000 s
Cooling-side OFF: Disable
Dc EASY
derivative time 1 to 6000 s
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

There are eight groups of PID parameters.

In Cascade control, both Loop 1 and Loop 2 have eight groups.

The PID parameters can be selected by using the following two methods:

(1) Segment PID number selection

(2) Zone PID selection
(3) Local PID selection
► Selection by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Selection by each Zone: 8.4 Switching PID

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-29
6.3 Adjusting PID Manually

Description

Description and Tuning of Proportional Band

The proportional band is defined as the amount of change in input (or deviation), as a
percent of span, required to cause the control output to change from 0% to 100%.
Because a narrower proportional band gives greater output change for any given
deviation, it therefore also makes the control performance more susceptible to oscillation.
At the same time, a narrower proportional band reduces the offset.
Reducing the proportional band to its smallest limit (proportional band = 0%) results in
ON/OFF control.
(Example of
reverse action) SP Wide proportional band Narrow proportional band
Deviation
SP SP
100%
Output (%)

Output (%)

Output (%)
P = 100%
P = 50%
P = 0%

0% (ON/OFF)
Proportional band Deviation Deviation
Total span

Output = 100 e P: Proportional band

P e: Deviation

To fine-tune a proportional band obtained using auto-tuning, or to manually tune the

proportional band:
• Work from larger to smaller numbers (wider to narrower).
• If cycling appears, that means that the proportional band is too narrow.
• Proportional band tuning cannot cancel an offset.

P is too small.
Temperature

SP

P is moderate. Offset

P is too big.
Time

• If P is too small, oscillation will appear in the measured temperature.

► Offset: 10.8 Canceling Offset of PV and SP (Manual Reset)

6-30 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.3 Adjusting PID Manually

Description and Tuning of Integral Time

The integral action (I action) is a function that will automatically diminish the offset
(steady-state deviation) that is inherently unavoidable with proportional action alone.
The integral action continuously increases or decreases the output in proportion to the
time integral of the deviation (the product of the deviation and the time that the deviation
continues.)
The integral action is normally used together with proportional action as proportional-
plus-integral action (PI action).
The integral time (I) is defined as the time required to develop, when a stepwise change
in deviation is imposed, an output change due to integral action that is exactly equal to
the change due to proportional action. The longer the integral time set, the slower the
change in output; the smaller the time, the faster the output changes.
6
100 1 e : Deviation
∫ edt

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Output = e+
P T1 TI : Integral time

Deviation

P = 100%

Small integral time

Large integral time

Output change due to I action

Output (%)
(On-time ratio)
Output change due to P action

Integral Time
time

To manually tune the integral time

• The main goal is to reduce the offset.
• Adjust from longer time to shorter time.
• If you see an oscillation at a longer period than that seen when the proportional band
is too narrow, then you have made the integral time too short.
Temperature

SP

Time

• If I is too short, long-period oscillation will appear in

the measured temperature.

Use the manual reset (MR) to cancel an offset when the integral action is disabled.
► Manual reset: 10.8 Canceling Offset of PV and SP (Manual Reset)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-31
6.3 Adjusting PID Manually

Description and Tuning of Derivative Time

If the control object has a large time constant or dead time, the corrective action will
be too slow with proportional action or proportional-plus-integral action alone, causing
overshoot. However, even just sensing whether the deviation is on an increasing or a
decreasing trend and adding some early corrective action can improve the controllability.
Thus the derivative action (D action) is action that changes the output in proportion to the
deviation derivative value (rate-of-change).
The derivative time is defined as the time required with PD action to develop, when a
constant-slope change in deviation is imposed, an output change due to derivative action
that is exactly equal to the change due to proportional action.

Output = 100 e + TD d e e : Deviation

P dt TD: Derivative time

Deviation

P = 100%

Large Output change due to P action
derivative time
Output (%)
(On-time ratio) Small
derivative time Output change due to D action

Derivative Time
time

To manually tune the derivative time

• Adjust from shorter time to longer time.
• If you see a short-period oscillation, the time is too long.
The longer the derivative time set, the stronger the corrective action, and the more likely
the output will become oscillatory. Oscillations due to derivative action are characterized
by a short period.
D = OFF should always be used when controlling fast-responding inputs such as
pressure and flow rate, or inputs characterized by rapid fluctuation, such as optical
sensors.
Temperature

SP
Time

• If D is too large, short-period oscillation will appear in

the measured temperature.

6-32 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.3 Adjusting PID Manually

Manual PID Tuning Procedure

(1) In principle, auto-tuning must be used.
(2) Tune PID parameters in the order of P, I, and D. Adjust a numeric slowly by
observing the result, and keep notes of what the progress is.
(3) Gradually reduce P from a larger value. When the PV value begins to oscillate, stop
tuning and increase the value somewhat.
(4) Also gradually reduce I from a larger value. When the PV value begins to oscillate (with
long period), stop tuning and increase the value somewhat.
(5) Gradually increase D from a smaller value. When the PV value begins to oscillate (with
short period), stop tuning and lower the value slightly.

Reference Values for Manual Tuning of Temperature, Pressure, and Flow Rate
6
Setting range
Initial value for tuning (reference)
(reference)

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

P 100 to 300% 200%
Pressure I 5 to 30 s 15 s
D OFF OFF
P 100 to 240% 150%
Flow rate I 8 to 30 s 20 s
D OFF OFF
P 1 to 20% 5%
Temperature
(electric I 180 to 600 s 240 s
furnace)
D 1/4 to 1/6 of I 60 s

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-33
 6.4 Setting Alarm Setpoint

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > Right arrow key (to [SP] Menu
Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting parameter is
displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting parameter is
displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Set a display value of setpoint of
PV alarm, SP alarm, deviation
alarm, output alarm, or velocity
Alarm-1 to -8 alarm.
A1 to A8 EASY SP
setpoint -19999 to 30000 (Set a value
within the input range.)
Decimal point position depends on
the input type
ALNO. Number of alarms PRO 1 to 8 CTL
Note 1: The initial value of the parameter ALNO. is “4.” Four alarm setpoint parameters are
displayed for each SP group.
Note 2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

Description
These alarms work irrespective of the operation mode.
Each alarm type has eight alarm setpoints.
In Cascade control, each alarm type has eight setpoints for Loop 1 and Loop 2,
respectively.
Alarm-related parameter Number of settings
Alarm type 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)
PV velocity alarm time setpoint 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)
Alarm hysteresis 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)
Alarm delay timer 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)
Alarm setpoint 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)

► Alarm type: Chapter 11 Alarm Functions

6-34 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.5 Selecting Program Pattern Number (PTNO.)
Selecting by PTN Key

Setting Display

6
PRG lamp
is unlit.

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

When the PTN key is pressed, the program pattern number

is blinking.
Press the Up or Down arrow key to select the pattern
number.
Press the SET/ENTER key to register the pattern number.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Program pattern 0: Not select program pattern
PTNO. EASY MODE
number selection 1 to 30

Description
Before starting program operation, select the program pattern number to execute.
When a program pattern is not created, or when program operation is being performed,
the program pattern number cannot be selected.

Selecting the program pattern number can be performed by any of the following:
(1) PTN key (The PTN key action can be changed by a parameter)
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input
(4) Communication
► Selection by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-35
 6.6 Switching Operation Modes
6.6.1 Operation Display Switching Diagram

Program (3) Hold-mode

(1)
operation (4)
operation
(*1)

(1) (2)

(5)
(1) (1) (6)

Reset (2) Local-mode (5) Remote-mode

(5) operation (6) operation

(2)
(6)
(2) (6)
(5)

(1) Press RUN key for 1 s.

(2) Press RST key for 1 s. *1: For another operation, when select
(3) Press MODE key, select HOLD=ON and press SET/ENT key. ADV=ON and starts program
(4) Press MODE key, select HOLD=OFF and SET/ENT key. operation. In this case, the segment
(5) Press MODE key, select LOC=ON and press SET/ENT key. is advanced.
(6) Press MODE key, select REM=ON and press SET/ENT key.

6-36 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.2 Switching to PROG Operation

Selecting by RUN Key

Setting Display

PRG lamp is lit 6

in PROG mode.

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Press RUN key for 1 s.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
RESET: Stop of program operation
PROG: Start of program operation
LOCAL: Start of local-mode
MODE Operation mode EASY MODE
operation
REM: Start of remote-mode
operation

Description
Program pattern operation can be performed after selecting the program pattern number
(except for 00).
Switching to PROG Operation can be performed by any of the following:
(1) RUN key (Factory default: PROG)
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input
(4) Communication
(5) MODE key (Can be used when the user function key is not set to "PROG".)
After switching is performed by the above (2) or (5), the display is switched to SP Display.
► Switch by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-37
6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.3 Switching to RESET Operation

Selecting by RST Key

Setting Display

RST lamp is lit in

RESET mode.

Press RST key for 1 s.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
RESET: Stop of program operation
PROG: Start of program operation
LOCAL: Start of local-mode
MODE Operation mode EASY MODE
operation
REM: Start of remote-mode
operation

Description
Local operation and Remote operation are also stopped.
Switching to RESET can be performed by any of the following:
(1) RST key
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input
(4) Communication
(5) MODE key (Can be used when the user function key is not set to "RESET".)
After switching is performed by the above (2) or (5), the display is switched to SP Display.
► Switch by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Switch by user function key: 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key

6-38 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.6 Switching Operation Modes

Switch Output action

PROG→RESET The control output bumps.
RESET→PROG
RESET→LOCAL The control output does not bump (bumpless).
RESET→REM

Output
Control output

Preset output
6
PROG → RESET RESET → PROG

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

► Preset output value: 10.12.1 Setting Output Value in STOP Mode (Preset Output)

The PV event and time event are disabled in RESET mode (OFF).

Operation Display in RESET and RUN Modes

The preset output value is displayed in RESET mode.
When the zone PID selection parameter (ZON) is set to segment PID selection, the
preset output value for the PID group number 1 is output. When the zone PID selection
parameter (ZON) is set to other than segment PID selection, the preset output value
for the PID group number for which zone control is performed is output. And when the
zone PID selection parameter (ZON) is set to the PID number selection for local-mode
operation, the PID parameter is selected by the PID number which is specified in the
parameter L.PID (Local PID number selection).

Operation Display in RESET and PROG Modes in Heating/cooling Control

In RESET mode in Heating/cooling control, the display is as follows. The cooling-side
preset output is displayed on the left and heating-side preset output is displayed on the
right.

Lamp Status
Status RST lamp
Operation start (PROG) Unlit
Operation Stop (RESET) Lit

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-39
6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.4 Enabling/Disabling Hold Mode of Program Operation

Selecting by MODE Key

Setting Display

HLD lamp is lit in

HOLD mode.

Each time you press the key,

Operation modes is switched.
• Display HOLD ON (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.
HLD lamp is lit.
• Display HOLD OFF (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.
HLD lamp is unlit.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Pause/cancel Display during program operation.
release of ON: Pause
HOLD EASY MODE
program OFF: Cancel release (Program
operation operation restart)

Description
HOLD switching can be performed during program operation.
HOLD switching can be performed by any of the following:
(1) MODE key
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input (Can be excute only for pause of program operation)
(4) Communication
After switching is performed by the above (1) or (2), the display is switched to SP Display.
► Switch by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

6-40 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.6 Switching Operation Modes

The hold operation function allows pausing the progress of the program pattern.
The hold operation stops the segment time and the time of the time event. As a result,
the segment time and the time of the time event are extended by the amount of the
holding time.
Releasing the hold state restarts the segment time and the time of the time event from
the time when they were stopped. When the hold state is released, the action can be
checked in the Deviation indicator (Program monitor display) on the front panel.
The hold operation function allows pausing the time. Control during the hold operation
is performed using the setpoint at the time when the hold operation starts. The time
event keeps the state and the PV event continues the action at the time when the hold
operation starts.
► 6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode 6
Hold Operation in Soak Segment

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5 Seg.6

Program pattern before

excuting hold operation.

Time delayed by timer stops

Time
Hold interval
（Timer stops） Seg：Segment

On
Time event
Off
Hold interval
（Timer stops）
Time delayed by timer stops

Hold Operation in Ramp Segment

Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5 Seg.6

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5 Seg.6

Program pattern before

excuting hold operation.

Program pattern after

excuting hold operation.

Time
Hold interval
Seg：Segment
On
Time event
Off
Hold interval
（Timer stops）
Time delayed by timer stops

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-41
6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.5 Excuting Advance

Selecting by MODE Key

Setting Display

Each time you press the key,

Operation modes is switched.
Display ADV ON (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: -
Display during program operation.
Advance of
ADV. EASY Set as “ADV = ON” to advance MODE
segment
from the current segment to the
next segment.

Description
Advance switching can be performed during program operation.
Advance switching can be performed by any of the following:
(1) MODE key
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input
(4) Communication
After switching is performed by the above (1) or (2), the display is switched to SP Display.
► Switch by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

6-42 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.6 Switching Operation Modes

Executing Advance advances the program to the next segment, irrespective of the
junction code (JC).
Advance is performed as follows depending on the segment to execute and the operating
state.

• When executing Advance in the last segment:

The program switches to Reset operation (when JC=CONT), Local operation, or
Remote operation depending on the junction code (JC).

• When executing Advance in the repeat cycle end segment:

The program performs a repeat operation.
6
• When executing Advance during the hold operation:
The program releases the hold state and restarts program pattern operation from the

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

next segment.

Executing Advance shortens the segment time of the segment for which operation is in
progress and the time of the event.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-43
6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.6 Switching between AUTO and MAN

Selecting by MODE Key

Setting Display
From Auto to Man

MAN lamp is lit in

MAN mode. (The
lamp is lit after the
switching
operation is
completed.)
Each time you press the key,
Operation modes is switched.
Display MODE MAN (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.

From Man to Auto

MAN lamp is unlit

in MAN mode.
(The lamp is unlit
after the switching
operation is
completed.)
Each time you press the key,
Operation modes is switched.
Display MODE AUTO (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
AUTO/MAN AUTO: Automatic mode
A.M EASY MODE
switch MAN: Manual mode

6-44 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.6 Switching Operation Modes

Description
AUTO/MAN switching can be performed by any of the following:
(1) MODE key
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input
(4) Communication

When the above (1) or (2) is used to switch AUTO to MAN and MAN to AUTO, the
display is switched to OUT Display and SP Display, respectively.

AUTO MAN 6

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

When the contact input (status) is ON, operation cannot be performed by keystroke or
communication.
When the contact input is OFF, and the setting is switched by keystroke or
communication, the last switching operation is performed.
► Switch by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Switch by user function key: 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key

Switch Output action

Holds the control output value from AUTO mode.
The control output value can be bump to the manual preset output value by the
AUTO→MAN
setting of parameter MPO.
The output value can be changed in manual mode.
The control output value does not bump (bumpless). Does not work when
MAN→AUTO
Integral time (I) = OFF.
► Switch from AUTO to MAN, and MPON: 10.12.2 Setting Output Value When Switched to MAN
Mode (Manual Preset Output)

Operation Display in AUTO and MAN Modes

“OUT” is displayed on Symbol display and “Output value” is displayed on Data display in
MAN mode. (The OUT Display is shown.)

SP Display is shown in AUTO mode.

Operation Display in AUTO and MAN Modes in Heating/cooling Control

In MAN mode, the Display is as follows. Symbol “C” represents the cooling side and “H”
represents the heating side. The value on the right of each symbol is the output value.

Lamp Status
Status MAN lamp
Automatic operation (AUTO) Unlit
Manual operation (MAN) Lit

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-45
6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.7 Switching to Local Operation

Selecting by MODE Key

Setting Display

HLD, CAS, PRG,

or RST lamp is
unlit in LOC
mode.
(The lamp is unlit
after the switching
operation is
completed.)
Each time you press the key,
Operation modes is switched.
Display MODE LOC (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
RESET: Stop of program operation
PROG: Start of program operation
LOCAL: Start of local-mode
MODE Operation mode EASY MODE
operation
REM: Start of remote-mode
operation

Description
Local operation is controlled by the local target setpoint (LSP). The local event can be
enabled, while the time event is disabled.
Switching to Local can be performed by any of the following:
(1) MODE key
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input
(4) Communication
After switching is performed by the above (1) or (2), the display is switched to SP Display.
► Switch by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

6-46 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.8 Switching to Remote Operation

Selecting by MODE Key

Setting Display

HLD, CAS, PRG, or 6

RST lamp is unlit in
REM mode.
(The lamp is unlit

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

after the switching
operation is
completed.)

Each time you press the key,

Operation modes is switched.
Display MODE REM (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PROG: Start of program operation
RESET: Stop of program operation
LOCAL: Start of local-mode
MODE Operation mode EASY MODE
operation
REM: Start of remote-mode
operation

Description
Remote operation is controlled by the remote setpoint (RSP). The local event can be
enabled, while the time event is disabled.
Switching to Local can be performed by any of the following:
(1) MODE key
(2) Operation mode parameter
(3) Contact input
(4) Communication
After switching is performed by the above (1) or (2), the display is switched to SP Display.
► Switch by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-47
6.6 Switching Operation Modes

6.6.9 Switching between Local (LSP) and Cascade

Selecting by MODE Key

Setting Display

CAS lamp is lit in

CAS mode.
(The lamp is lit after
operation right.)

Each time you press the key,

Operation modes is switched.
Display MODE CAS (blinking), and press the SET/ENTER key.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Local (LSP) / LSP: Local (LSP
L.C EASY MODE
cascade switch CAS: Cascade

Description
Local (LSP) and Cascade can be switched when the control mode is set to cascade
control.
When the switching is completed using the above method, the screen is switched to SP
Display.

6-48 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.7 Selecting Start-of-program Pattern Number

Selecting by MODE Key

Setting Display

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Every time you press the MODE key, the operation

mode is switched.
Display SST (start-of-program segment number),
and press the SET/ENTER key.

Selecting by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Start-of-program
SST EASY 1 to 99 MODE
segment number

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-49
6.7 Selecting Program Pattern Number

Description
Program operation starts from the set segment number.
When the operation mode is switched to reset (RST), local (LOC), or remote (REM)
operation, or when power is turned on, the segment number automatically returns to 1.

Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

When STC=2
C

Current PV
When STC=1
B Start from B

A When STC=0
Start from A

Time
Starting program operation at Seg.3
Seg.: Segment

6-50 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.8 Fast-forwarding Program Pattern
Performing by MODE Key

Setting Display

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Every time you press the MODE key, the

operation mode is switched.
Display P.FWD (fast-forwarding), and press the
SET/ENTER key.

Performing by Operation Mode Parameter

Setting Display
Parameter Setting Display Operation Display > PARAMETER key for 3 seconds (to
[MODE] Menu Display) > SET/ENTER key (The setting
parameter is displayed.) > Down arrow key (The setting
parameter is displayed.)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Fast-forwarding
1: Normal, 2: Twice, 5: Five
P.FWD of program EASY MODE
times,10: Ten times
operation

Description
This function is used to make sure that the program pattern is set correctly. It fast
forwards only the segment time and the time of the time event. When the fast-forwarding
function is executed, when the operation mode is switched to local, remote, or reset
operation, or when power is turned on, P.FWD returns to 1 (normal).
Other functions (alarm delay timer, PV velocity alarm, output velocity limiter, and ladder
program time) work at normal speed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-51
 6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time
(R.TIM) in HOLD-mode
Changing SP in HOLD Operation
Operation

HLD lamp
is lit

1. Display the SP Display, switch to HOLD mode.

See “6.6.4 Enabling/Disabling Hold Mode of
Program Operation.”

2. Press the SET/ENTER key to move to the

setting mode (the setpoint blinks).

3. Press the Left arrow key to move one digit to

the left. (Press the Right arrow key to move
one digit to the right.)

4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to change the

setpoint. Press the Up arrow key when 9 is
displayed to move one digit to the left. Press
the Down arrow key when 0 is displayed to
move one digit to the right.

5. Press the SET/ENTER key to register the

setpoint.

The figure right is displayed while the right arrow key is

held down on SP Display.
(1) The number of segments included in the selected (2) (1)
program pattern.
(2) The segment number for which operation is in
progress.

6-52 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

Changing TSP in HOLD Operation

Operation

HLD lamp
is lit

1. Display the TSP Display, switch to HOLD

mode. See “6.6.4 Enabling/Disabling Hold
6
Mode of Program Operation.”

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

2. Press the SET/ENTER key to move to the
setting mode (the setpoint blinks).

3. Press the Left arrow key to move one digit to

the left. (Press the Right arrow key to move
one digit to the right.)

4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to change the

setpoint. Press the Up arrow key when 9 is
displayed to move one digit to the left. Press
the Down arrow key when 0 is displayed to
move one digit to the right.

5. Press the SET/ENTER key to register the

setpoint.

Changing R.TIM in HOLD Operation

Operation

HLD lamp
is lit

1. Display the Remaining Segment-time Display,

switch to HOLD mode. See “6.6.4
Enabling/Disabling Hold Mode of Program
Operation.”

2. Press the SET/ENTER key to move to the

setting mode (the setpoint blinks).

3. Press the Left arrow key to move one digit to

the left. (Press the Right arrow key to move
one digit to the right.)

4. Press the Up or Down arrow key to change the

setpoint. Press the Up arrow key when 9 is
displayed to move one digit to the left. Press
the Down arrow key when 0 is displayed to
move one digit to the right.

5. Press the SET/ENTER key to register the

setpoint.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-53
6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

Description
The current setpoint (hold SP), final target setpoint (TSP), and remaining segment time
can be changed during the hold operation.
The value changed during the hold operation is temporary. When the program is
operated again, it is operated according to the original program pattern. To operate the
program using the changed value, the original program pattern needs to be changed.

The following shows conditions that can be changed during the hold operation.
Segment setting method Segment time setting Segment ramp-rate setting
(SEG.T)
Segment condition Soak Ramp Soak Ramp
Hold SP √ √ N/A N/A
Final target setpoint √ √ N/A N/A
Remaining segment-time √ √ √ N/A
√: Available, N/A: Not avialable

When the segment ramp-rate setting is selected in the segment setting method (SEG.T),
the hold operation is enabled, while the hold SP and final target setpoint (TSP) cannot be
changed.

6-54 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

Modifying Target Setpoint in Soak Segment

When the hold SP is changed in the soak segment, the final target setpoint (TSP) is also
changed. When the hold state is released, the program pattern operation restarts from
the changed setpoint.
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Program
Changed pattern after
changing the
the target
setpoint setpoint 6

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Current
setpoint
TSP after changing
TSP before changing
Program pattern before
changing the setpoint

Time
On
Time event
Off
Hold interval Time delayed by timer stops
（Timer stops） TSP：Final target setpoint
Seg：Segment

Modifying Target Setpoint in Ramp Segment

When the hold SP is changed in the ramp segment and the hold state is released, the
program pattern operation restarts from the changed setpoint towards the final target
setpoint (TSP).
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Changed Program
the target pattern after
setpoint changing the
setpoint

Current
setpoint
SP after changing

Increased
segment time

Time
On
Time event
Off

Hold interval Time delayed by timer stops

（Timer stops）
TSP：Final target setpoint
Seg：Segment

The hold SP is set to the same value as TSP by SET/ENTER key, and when the hold
SP is changed again, TSP is changed. (Same as Modifying Target Setpoint in Soak
Segment)
IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-55
6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

Modifying Final Target Setpoint (TSP) in Soak Segment

The final target setpoint (TSP) can be changed in the soak segment.
When the hold state is released, the program pattern operation restarts towards the
changed final target setpoint (TSP).
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Program pattern
before changing
the setpoint
Current
setpoint Program
TSP after pattern after
changing changing the
TSP before setpoint
changing

Time
On TSP after changing
Time event
Off

Hold interval Time delayed by timer stops

（Timer stops） TSP：Final target setpoint
Seg：Segment

Modifying Final Target Setpoint (TSP) in Ramp Segment

When the final target setpoint (TSP) is changed in the ramp segment and the hold state
is released, the program pattern operation restarts towards the changed final target
setpoint (TSP).
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2

Seg.1 Seg.2

TSP before
changing

TSP after
Current changing
setpoint

Time
On
Time event
Off
Time delayed by timer stops
Hold interval
（Timer stops）
TSP：Final target setpoint
Seg：Segment

6-56 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

Decreasing Segment-time in Soak Segment

The remaining segment time from the time when the hold state is released can be
changed during the hold operation.
When the remaining segment time is changed in the soak segment and the hold state is
released, the program pattern operation restarts from the changed segment time.
When the segment time is increased, the segment time and the time of the time event
are extended by the increased amount of time.
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

6
Segment pattern

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

before the
segment time is
increased

Current
setpoint

Increased Segment pattern

remaining after the segment
segment-time time has been
increased

Time
On
Time event
Off

Hold interval Time delayed by timer stops

（Timer stops） TSP：Final target setpoint
Time-event increased by a
increment of segment time. Seg：Segment

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-57
6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

Increasing Segment-time in Soak Segment

The remaining segment time from the time when the hold state is released can be
changed during the hold operation.
When the remaining segment time is changed in the soak segment and the hold state is
released, the program pattern operation restarts from the changed segment time.
When the segment time is decreased, the segment time and the time of the time event
are shortened by the decreased amount of time.
When the on time or off time of the time event is larger than the changed remaining
segment time, the program works according to the changed remaining segment time.
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Segment pattern
after the segment Segment pattern
time has been before the
decreased segment time is
decreased
Current
setpoint

Time delayed by timer stops

Decreased remaining
segment-time

Time

TSP：Final target setpoint

On Seg：Segment
Time event
Off Hold interval
（Timer stops） Time-event decreased by a
decrement of segment time.

6-58 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

Decreasing Segment-time in Ramp Segment

The remaining segment time from the time when the hold state is released can be
changed during the hold operation.
However, the ramp-rate for the changed program setpoint changes.
When the remaining segment time is changed in the ramp segment and the hold state is
released, the program pattern operation restarts from the changed segment time.
When the segment time is increased, the segment time and the time of the time event
are extended by the increased amount of time.
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5 6

Segment pattern
before the

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

segment time is
increased

Segment pattern
Current after the segment
setpoint time has been
increased

Increased
remaining
segment-time

Time
On
Time event
Off
Hold interval
（Timer stops）Time delayed by timer stops
Time-event increased by a TSP：Final target setpoint
increment of segment time. Seg：Segment

Increasing Segment-time in Ramp Segment

The remaining segment time from the time when the hold state is released can be
changed during the hold operation.
However, the ramp-rate for the changed program setpoint changes.
When the remaining segment time is changed in the ramp segment and the hold state is
released, the program pattern operation restarts from the changed segment time.
When the segment time is decreased, the segment time and the time of the time event
are shortened by the decreased amount of time.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-59
 6.10 Changing Program Pattern during Program Operation

Description
The program pattern can be changed during the program operation in Program
Parameter Setting Display.
Unlike changing during the hold operation, changing the program pattern in Program
Parameter Setting Display saves the changed setpoint. However, even if the parameter
of the segment in process is changed, it is not reflected in operation. It is reflected from
the next operation.
In hold mode operation, it is reflected when TSP of segment is changed.
The change of the Hold-SP is reflected after release of the HOLD-mode.

► Changing Hold SP: 6.9 Changing SP, TSP, or Remaining Segment-time (R.TIM) in HOLD-mode

The program pattern cannot be changed via communication during the program
operation.

6-60 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 6.11 Manipulating Control Output during Manual Operation

Operation

MAN lamp is lit. 6

Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Press the Up arrow key to increase

control output.
Press the Down arrow key to decrease
control output.
In Heating/cooling control,
press the Up arrow key to decrease cooling-side control output and to increase heating-side control output;
press the Down arrow key to increase cooling-side control output and to decrease heating-side control output.

Description
In MAN mode, the control output is manipulated by direct key operation. (The value
changed using the Up or Down arrow key is output as is.)
Manipulation of the control output is not possible in RESET mode (the RST lamp is lit).
Output manipulation differs depending on the ON or OFF setting of the control output
limiter (OH, OL).
► 10.4 Disabling Output Limiter in MAN mode

OUT Display

Feedback input value is displayed in Position proportional control.

Heating/cooling OUT Display

The heating/cooling control output is manipulated simultaneously on both the heating
and cooling sides.
In MAN mode, the display is as follows. The symbol “C” represents the cooling side, and
“H” the heating side. The value on the right of each symbol is the output value.

When the control output low limit is set to “SD” while the control output type is 4 to 20
mA, the control output value can be lowered down to 0 mA.
► 10.6 Reducing 4-20 mA Current Output to 0 mA (Tight Shut Function)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 6-61
 6.12 Releasing On-State (Latch) of Alarm Output

Description
Alarm latch can be released by any of the following.
(1) User function key (RUN, RST, PTN, MODE)
(2) Communication
(3) Contact input
For the switching operation by using the above, the last switching operation is performed.

Releasing the alarm latch function releases all of the latched alarm outputs.
By factory default, the function is not assigned to the user function key and contact input.
Assign and use the function in accordance with the reference sections below.

► Release by user function key: 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key
► Release by contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Release via communication: UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface User’s Manual

6-62 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 7 Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input,

and Auxiliary Analog Input
7.1.1 Setting Input Type, Unit, Range, Scale, and Decimal Point Position

Description
The figure below describes the case of PV input. The remote input and auxiliary analog
input can be set in the same way.

Example of Temperature Input

The figure below is an example of setting Type K thermocouple and a measurement
range of 0.0 to 800.0 ºC. 7
-270.0°C 1370.0°C
Input type

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

Set a range to be
PV input range
controlled.
RL = 0.0°C RH = 800.0°C
Minimum value of PV input range Maximum value of PV input range

Example of Voltage and Current Inputs

The figure below is an example of setting 2-4 V DC and a scale of 0.0 to 50.0 m³/h.
1V 2V 4V 5 V (input signal)

RL = 1.000 Input type RH = 5.000

RL = 2.000 PV input range RH = 4.000

Set a range to be
PV input scale
controlled.
SL = 0.0 m³/h SH = 50.0 m³/h
Minimum value of PV input scale Maximum value of PV input scale

When using 1-5 V DC signal as is, set RH = 5.000 V, RL = 1.000 V, SDP=1, and SH =
50.0, and SL=0.0.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-1
7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
K1: -270.0 to 1370.0 ºC / -450.0 to 2500.0 ºF
K2: -270.0 to 1000.0 ºC / -450.0 to 2300.0 ºF
K3: -200.0 to 500.0 ºC / -200.0 to 1000.0 ºF
J: -200.0 to 1200.0 ºC / -300.0 to 2300.0 ºF
T1: -270.0 to 400.0 ºC / -450.0 to 750.0 ºF
T2: 0.0 to 400.0 ºC / -200.0 to 750.0 ºF
B: 0.0 to 1800.0 ºC / 32 to 3300 ºF
S: 0.0 to 1700.0 ºC / 32 to 3100 ºF
R: 0.0 to 1700.0 ºC / 32 to 3100 ºF
N: -200.0 to 1300.0 ºC / -300.0 to 2400.0 ºF
E: -270.0 to 1000.0 ºC / -450.0 to 1800.0 ºF
L: -200.0 to 900.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1600.0 ºF
U1: -200.0 to 400.0 ºC / -300.0 to 750.0 ºF
U2: 0.0 to 400.0 ºC / -200.0 to 1000.0 ºF
W: 0.0 to 2300.0 ºC / 32 to 4200 ºF
PV input type EASY (Note1) PV
PL2: 0.0 to 1390.0 ºC / 32.0 to 2500.0 ºF
P2040: 0.0 to 1900.0 ºC / 32 to 3400 ºF
WRE: 0.0 to 2000.0 ºC / 32 to 3600 ºF
IN JPT1: -200.0 to 500.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1000.0 ºF
JPT2: -150.0 to 150.0 ºC / -200.0 to 300.0 ºF
PT1: -200.0 to 850.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1560.0 ºF
PT2: -200.0 to 500.0 ºC / -300.0 to 1000.0 ºF
PT3: -150.00 to 150.00 ºC / -200.0 to 300.0 ºF
0.4-2V: 0.400 to 2.000 V
1-5V: 1.000 to 5.000 V
4-20: 4.00 to 20.00 mA
0-2V: 0.000 to 2.000 V
0-10V: 0.00 to 10.00 V
0-20 : 0.00 to 20.00 mA
-1020: -10.00 to 20.00 mV
0-100: 0.0 to 100.0 mV
RSP remote input type
EASY RSP
(Note2) 0.4-2V: 0.400 to 2.000 V
AIN2 aux. analog input 1-5V: 1.000 to 5.000 V
EASY AIN2
type 0-2V: 0.000 to 2.000 V
0-10V: 0.00 to 10.00 V
AIN4 aux. analog input
EASY 0-125: 0.000 to 1.250 V AIN4
type

PV input unit EASY -: No unit PV

RSP remote input unit EASY C: Degree Celsius RSP
AIN2 aux. analog input -: No unit
UNIT EASY AIN2
unit - -: No unit
- - -: No unit
AIN4 aux. analog input
EASY F: Degree Fahrenheit AIN4
unit
Note1: W: W-5% Re/W-26% Re(Hoskins Mfg. Co.). ASTM E988
WRE: W97Re3-W75Re25
Note2: Standart model: For remote input with the optional suffix code /DR, RSP remote input type is
same as PV input type.
Detailed model: When the optional suffix code /U1 is specified, RSP remote input type is
same as PV input type.

7-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

(Continued)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Depends on the input type.
- For temperature input -
Set the temperature range
Maximum value of PV
EASY that is actually controlled. PV
input range
(RL<RH)
- For voltage / current input -
Set the range of a voltage
/ current signal that is
applied.
The scale across which the
voltage / current signal is
Maximum value of RSP actually controlled should
EASY RSP
remote input range be set using the maximum
RH
(Physical value of input scale (SH) 7
quantity) and minimum value of input
scale (SL). (Input is always

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

0% when RL = RH.)
Depends on the input type.
Set the range of a voltage signal
Maximum value of AIN2
EASY that is applied. AIN2
aux. analog input range
The scale across which the
voltage signal is actually
controlled should be set using
the maximum value of input scale
Maximum value of AIN4
EASY (SH) and minimum value of input AIN4
aux. analog input range
scale (SL). (Input is always 0%
when RL = RH.)
Minimum value of PV
EASY PV
input range
Minimum value of RSP
RL EASY RSP
remote input range
(Physical Same as RH
quantity) Minimum value of AIN2
EASY AIN2
aux. analog input range
Minimum value of AIN4
EASY AIN4
aux. analog input range
PV input scale decimal
EASY PV
point position
RSP remote input scale 0: No decimal place
EASY 1: One decimal place RSP
SDP decimal point position
2: Two decimal places
(Scaling) AIN2 aux. analog input scale
EASY 3: Three decimal places AIN2
decimal point position 4: Four decimal places
AIN4 aux. analog input scale
EASY AIN4
decimal point position
Maximum value of PV
EASY PV
input scale
Maximum value of RSP
EASY RSP
SH remote input scale -19999 to 30000, (SL<SH),
(Scaling) Maximum value of AIN2 | SH - SL | ≤ 30000
EASY AIN2
aux. analog input scale
Maximum value of AIN4
EASY AIN4
aux. analog input scale

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-3
7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Minimum value of PV
EASY PV
input scale
Minimum value of RSP
EASY RSP
SL remote input range -19999 to 30000, (SL<SH),
(Scaling) Minimum value of AIN2 | SH - SL | ≤ 30000
EASY AIN2
aux. analog input scale
Minimum value of AIN4
EASY AIN4
aux. analog input scale
Note 1: For remote input with the optional suffix code /DR, setting range for RSP remote input type
is same as that for PV input type.
When the optional suffix code /U1 is specified, RSP remote input type is same as PV input
type.
Note 2: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.

IN, UNIT, RH, and RL described above are the parameters to be used for processing
before the input ladder calculation program.
The following parameters are used for processing after the input ladder calculation
program.
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
-: No unit
P.UNI Control PV input unit
- -: No unit
- - -: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
0: No decimal place
STD 1: One decimal place MPV
Control PV input
P.DP 2: Two decimal places
decimal point position
3: Three decimal places
4: Four decimal places
Maximum value of
P.RH
control PV input range -19999 to 30000, (P.RL<P.RH),
Minimum value of | P.RH - P.RL | ≤ 30000
P.RL
control PV input range
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

7-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

7.1.2 Setting Burnout Detection for Input

Description
The input value when input burnout occurs can be determined.
The input value is 105.0% of the input range when the upscale is set, and -5.0% of the
input range when the downscale is set.
Burnout detection is activated for TC, RTD, and standard signal (0.4–2 V or 1–5 V).
For standard signal, burnout is determined to have occurred if it is 0.1 V or less for the
range of 0.4–2 V and 1–5V, or if it is 0.4 mA or less for the range of 4–20 mA.

When input burnout occurs, the error preset output (EPO) is output as control output.
► Input error preset output: 10.12.3 Setting Output Value When Error Occurs (Input Error Preset
Output) 7

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PV input burnout action STD PV
RSP remote input
STD OFF: Disable RSP
bumout action
BSL AIN2 aux. analog input UP: Upscale
STD DOWN: Downscale AIN2
burnout action
AIN4 aux. analog input
STD AIN4
burnout action
Note 1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-5
7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

7.1.3 Setting Reference Junction Compensation (RJC) or External Reference

Junction Compensation (ERJC)

Description
Reference Junction Compensation (RJC)
When TC input is selected, presence/absence of input reference junction compensation
can be set.
Usually input values are compensated with the RJC function provided for the controller.
However, if it is necessary to rigorously compensate the values with a device other than
the function of the controller, for example with a zero-compensator, the RJC function of
the controller can be turned off.

External Reference Junction Compensation (ERJC)

For TC input, a temperature compensation value for external device can be set.
The external RJC can be used only when RJC = OFF.

UP55A
Terminal block
TC Compensating lead wire
Furnace

UP55A
Normal wiring
Terminal block

TC
Furnace
Example:
Setting parameters
RJC = OFF,
ERJC = 25.0°C
Compensating lead wire

Set the temperature in the

Installed in an area where area using ERJC parameter.
ambient temperature is
fixed to 25°C.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PV input reference
PRO PV
junction compensation
OFF: RJC OFF
RJC RSP remote input
ON: RJC ON
reference junction PRO RSP
compensation
PV input external RJC
PRO PV
setpoint
ERJC -10.0 to 60.0°C
RSP remote input
PRO RSP
external RJC setpoint
Note 1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.

7-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

7.1.4 Correcting Input Value

(1) Setting Bias and Filter

Description
PV Input Bias
The PV input bias allows bias to be summed with input to develop a measured value for
display and control use inside the controller.
This function can also be used for fine adjustment to compensate for small inter-
instrument differences in measurement reading that can occur even if all are within the
specified instrument accuracies.
PV input bias is used for normal operation.
7
PV input value + PV input bias = PV value inside the controller

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

Temperature sensed Compensation Estimated material
by thermocouple value temperature

PV Input Filter
If input noise or variations cause the low-order display digits to fluctuate so that the
displayed value is difficult to read, a digital filter can be inserted to smooth operation.
This filter provides a first-order lag calculation, which can remove more noise the larger
the time constant becomes. However, an excessively large time constant will distort the
waveform.
PV input filter is used for normal operation.
Actual input With a small time constant With a large time constant

Filtering for 2 sec

Input

Filtering for 10 sec

Analog Input Bias

Analog input bias is used to correct sensor-input characteristics, compensating lead wire
errors, and so on.

Analog Input Filter

The analog input filter is used to remove noise from an input signal. This filter provides
a first-order lag calculation, which can remove more noise the larger the time constant
becomes. However, an excessively large time constant will distort the waveform.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-7
7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
-100.0 to 100.0% of PV
BS PV input bias EASY
input range span (EUS) PVS
FL PV input filter EASY OFF, 1 to 120 s

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PV analog input bias PRO PV
RSP analog input bias PRO -100.0 to 100.0% of each RSP
A.BS
AIN2 aux. analog input bias PRO input range span (EUS) AIN2
AIN4 aux. analog input bias PRO AIN4
PV analog input filter PRO PV
RSP analog input filter PRO RSP
A.FL OFF, 1 to 120 s
AIN2 aux. analog input filter PRO AIN2
AIN4 aux. analog input filter PRO AIN4
Note 1: BS, FL; In Cascade control, PV input terminal is for Loop 1 and RSP remote input terminal
is for Loop 2. The LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
Note 2: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.

7-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

(2) Setting Square Root Extraction and Low Signal Cutoff Point
Description
This calculation is used to convert, for example, a differential pressure signal from a
throttling flow meter such as an orifice and nozzle into a flow-rate signal. There is no
hysteresis for low signal cutoff point.

Output Output

Low signal cutoff Low signal cutoff

point is variable. point is variable. 7
Input Input
Output = Input Output = Input

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

The slope equals “1” at levels below The slope equals “0” at levels below
the low signal cutoff point (A.SR=1). the low signal cutoff point (A.SR=2).

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PV analog input square root
PRO PV
extraction
OFF: No square root extraction.
RSP analog input square
PRO 1: Compute the square root. RSP
root extraction
A.SR (The slope equals “1.”)
AIN2 aux. analog input
PRO 2: Compute the square root. AIN2
square root extraction
(The slope equals “0.”)
AIN4 aux. analog input
PRO AIN4
square root extraction
PV analog input low signal
PRO PV
cutoff
RSP analog input low signal
PRO RSP
cutoff
A.LC 0.0 to 5.0%
AIN2 aux. analog input low
PRO AIN2
signal cutoff
AIN4 aux. analog input low
PRO AIN4
signal cutoff
Note 1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.
Note 2: Each parameter is displayed when the input type is voltage or current.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-9
7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

(3) Setting 10-segment Linearizer

Description
A total of up to four 10-segment linearizers can be used for the input unit and output unit.
For the position used by a ten-segment linearizer, see the function block diagram.
► Function block diagram: 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
► Output Linearizer: 10.13 Setting 10-segment Linearizer for Output

10-segment Linearizer Bias

This function is used to correct an input signal affected by sensor deterioration. The
corrected values are obtained by adding the corresponding bias values to each of the 11
points of optionally set input values.
When 10-segment linearizer input is A1 or less, B1 is to be added. When 10-segment
linearizer input is A11 or more, B11 is to be added.

10-segment Corrected value

linearizer output (Actual input +
10-segment linearizer bias)

Actual input
-5.0 to 105.0%

B6

10-segment linearizer bias

B5
B3 B4 105.0%
-5.0%
A9 A10 A11 10-segment
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A8 linearizer input
A7
-5.0 to 105.0%

10-segment Linearizer Approximation

This function is used when the input signal and the required measurement signal have a
non-linear relationship, for example, when trying to obtain the volume from a sphere tank
level. As shown in the figure below, the output values can be optionally set to 11 points of
the optionally set input values.
When the 10-segment linearizer input is A1 or less, the value of extended line between
B1 and B2 is output. Moreover, when the input is A11 or more, the value of extended line
between B10 and B11 is output.
10-segment
linearizer output
B5 to B11 are equalized to B4.
B4
-5.0 to 105.0%

Output range
after
ten-segment
linearizer B3
approximation
B2

B1
A5 to A11 are
equalized to A4.

-5.0% A1 A2 A3 A4 A11 105.0%

10-segment
Actual input range linearizer input
-5.0 to 105.0%

7-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

Setting Details
Parameter
Name Display level Setting range Menu symbol
symbol
OFF: Disable
PV: PV analog input
RSP: RSP analog input
10-segment AIN2: AIN2 analog input
Group 1, 2: STD
PYS linearizer AIN4: AIN4 analog input
Group 3, 4: PRO
selection PVIN: PV input
OUT: OUT analog output
OUT2: OUT2 analog output
RET: RET analog output
10-segment -66.7 to 105.0% of input range PYS1
Group 1, 2: STD
A1 to A11 linearizer (EU) PYS2
Group 3, 4: PRO
input Output linearizer: -5.0 to 105.0% PYS3 7
10-segment linearizer bias: -66.7 PYS4
to 105.0% of input range span
10-segment (EUS)

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

Group 1, 2: STD
B1 to B11 linearizer 10-segment linearizer
Group 3, 4: PRO
output approximation: -66.7 to 105.0%
of input range (EU)
Output linearizer: -5.0 to 105.0%
10-segment 0: 10-segment linearizer bias
Group 1, 2: STD
PMD linearizer 1: 10-segment linearizer
Group 3, 4: PRO
mode approximation
Note1: When each parameter is displayed, the group number (1 to 4) is displayed on Group display.

Parameters are set in the following order.

(1) PYS: Specifies where the 10-segment linearizer function is used.
Setpoints PV, RSP, AIN2, and AIN4 function before the input ladder calculation
section.
Setpoint PVIN functions after the input ladder calculation section.
► Where the 10-segment linearizer function is used; Function block diagrams in 8.1 Setting
Control Mode (CTLM)

(2) PMD: Specifies whether to use it as a 10-segment linearizer bias or a 10-segment

linearizer approximation.
(3) A1 to A11, B1 to B11: Sets the 10-segment linearizer input and 10-segment linearizer
output.
For the input range and input range span, the range varies depending on where the
10-segment linearizer is used.
PV input and PV analog input: PV input range or PV input range span
RSP analog input: RSP remote input range or RSP remote input range span
AIN2 auxiliary analog input: AIN2 auxiliary analog input range or AIN2 auxiliary
analog input range span
AIN4 auxiliary analog input: AIN4 auxiliary analog input range or AIN4 auxiliary
analog input range span

Note
• Set the 10-segment linearizer so that it increases monotonically.
• If the same setpoint is set for the two or more parameters of 10-segment linearizer selection
(PYS), a smaller group number is used.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-11
7.1 Setting Functions of PV Input, Remote Input, and Auxiliary Analog Input

Initial value of eatch control mode

Control mode Group-1 PYS Goup-2 PYS Group-3 and -4 PYS
Single-loop control PV OFF OFF
Cascade primary-loop control PV OFF OFF
Cascade control PV RSP OFF
Loop control with PV switching PV OFF OFF
Loop control with PV auto-selector PVIN OFF OFF

7.1.5 Setting Ratio bias/filter

Description
Ratio bias computing performs ratio computation and bias addition for remote setpoints.

SP = Remote input x Remote input ratio (RT) + Remote input bias (RBS)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
RT Remote input ratio STD 0.001 to 9.999
100.0 to 100.0% of PV
RBS Remote input bias STD SPS
input range span (EUS)
RFL Remote input filter STD OFF, 1 to 120 s
Note 1: In Cascade control, PV input terminal is for Loop 1 and RSP remote input terminal is for
Loop 2. The LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

7-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.2 Setting Input Sampling Period (Control Period)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Input sampling period 100: 100 ms
SMP STD CTL
(control period) 200: 200 ms

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-13
 7.3 Using 4-wire RTD as PV Input

Description
To use the 4-wire RTD, the optional suffix code /DR is required for remote input. Or the
optional suffix code /U1 is reauired.

Normally, PV terminal input is used as PV.

When RSP terminal is used as PV, use the ladder program of LL50A Parameter Setting
Software (sold separately) to switch the functions of the PV terminal and RSP terminal.
► LL50A Parameter Setting Software: LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual

PV terminal input is used as PV. PV terminal input is used as RSP.

RSP terminal input is used as RSP. RSP terminal input is used as PV.

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal

PV RSP PV RSP

Input ladder program Input ladder program

PV input RSP input PV input RSP input

LOCAL LOCAL
RESET RESET
PATTERN PATTERN
REMOTE REMOTE

PID PID

OUT OUT

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
3-W: 3-wire system
RTD.S RTD wiring system STD RSP
4-W: 4-wire system

7-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.4 Using Larger, Smaller, Average, or Difference
of Two to Four Inputs as PV
Description
Loop control with PV auto-selector function automatically selects or calculates the larger,
smaller, average, or difference of multiple (two to four) inputs and uses the result as PV.

The larger, smaller, and average are automatically computed based on the specified
number of inputs.
For the input difference, the difference between input 1 and input 2 is computed.

Input 1: PV terminal input

Input 2: RSP terminal input
7
Input 3: AIN2 auxiliary analog input
Input 4: AIN4 auxiliary analog input

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

► Function block diagram for Loop control with PV auto-selector; 8.1.5 Loop Control with PV Auto-
selector, Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Auto-selector, and Position Proportional Loop
Control with PV Auto-selector

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Max. value
1: Min. value
Input computation
PV.AS STD 2: Ave. value
selection
3: Input 1 - Input 2
4: Input 2 - Input 1 MPV
2: Use Input 1 and Input 2
3: Use Input 1, Input 2, and
PV.NU Number of inputs STD
Input 3
4: Use 4 inputs

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-15
 7.5 Setting Remote Input Method

Description
There are two methods for remote input: analog input and communication.
Decide which to use among two methods in advance.
Analog input: Remote setting using external analog signal (RSP terminal)
Communication: Remote setting via external communication.
Analog input COM
RMS

LOCAL
RESET
REMOTE PATTERN

Control computation

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
RSP: Via remote (auxiliary
RMS Remote input method STD analog) input SPS
COM: Via communication
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

7-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.6 Adjusting PV Range for Loop Control with PV
Switching or Loop Control with PV Auto-selector
Description
Loop control with PV switching and Loop control with PV auto-selector need to determine
the PV range for control if the measurement ranges of two input signals are different.

The figure below is an example of setting PV input range of 0 to 200ºC, RSP terminal
input of 100 to 800ºC, and control PV range of 0 to 800ºC.
► Block diagram of Loop control with PV switching: 8.1.4 Loop Control with PV Switching,
Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Switching, and Position Proportional Loop Control with PV
Switching
7
Control PV range PV input range to be controlled

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

(P.RL) (P.RH)

RSP input
(SL or RL) Group display: E1 (SH or RH)
Two input ranges

PV input

(RL or SL) (RH or SH)

0 100 200 800ºC

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
-: No unit
P.UNI Control PV input unit STD
- -: No unit
- - -: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
0: No decimal place
1: One decimal place MPV
Control PV input
P.DP STD 2: Two decimal places
decimal point position
3: Three decimal places
4: Four decimal places
Maximum value of
P.RH STD -19999 to 30000,
control PV input range
(P.RL<P.RH),
Minimum value of
P.RL STD | P.RH - P.RL | ≤ 30000
control PV input range
Note1: Set the input ranges for two inputs consecutively. Set the control PV ranges (P.RL, P.RH)
within the actual input range.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-17
 7.7 Setting PV Switching Methods of Loop Control
with PV Switching
Description
PV switching method of Loop control with PV switching can be set when the control
mode is Loop control with PV switching.
► Block diagram of Loop control with PV switching: 8.1.4 Loop Control with PV Switching,
Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Switching, and Position Proportional Loop Control with PV
Switching
Input 1: PV terminal input
Input 2: RSP terminal input

Switching within the Temperature Range (Low-temperature side) (Parameter PV.2C=0)

This method automatically switches PV within the range of input switching PV high limit
and low limit.
It should be selected in case where a sudden change in PV must be avoided.

PV rising process

Input 2
(High-temperature side)

PV.HL
PV

PV.LL
Input 1
(Low-temperature side)

Time

PV = Input 1 During switching PV = Input 2

PV falling process
PV
Input 2
(High-temperature side)
PV.HL

PV.LL
Input 1
(Low-temperature side)

Time

PV = Input 2 During switching PV = Input 1

When input 1 ≤ PV.LL, PV=Input 1.

When PV.LL < Input 1 < PV.HL

Input 1 – PV.LL Input 1 – PV.LL
PV = 1 – • Input 1 + • Input 2
PV.HL – PV.LL PV.HL – PV.LL

When PV.HL ≤ Input 1, PV=Input 2.

7-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.7 Setting PV Switching Methods of Loop Control with PV Switching

Switching within the Temperature Range (High-temperature side) (Parameter PV.2C=3)

This method automatically switches PV within the range of input switching PV high limit
and low limit.
It should be selected in case where a sudden change in PV must be avoided.

PV rising process

PV
Input 2
(High-temperature side)
PV.HL

PV.LL
Input 1
(Low-temperature side)
7
Time

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

PV = Input 1 During switching PV = Input 2

PV falling process

PV
Input 2
(High-temperature side)
PV.HL

PV.LL
Input 1
(Low-temperature side)

Time

PV = Input 2 During switching PV = Input 1

When input 2 ≤ PV.LL, PV=Input 1.

When PV.LL < Input 2 < PV.HL

Input 2 – PV.LL Input 2 – PV.LL
PV = 1 – • Input 1 + • Input 2
PV.HL – PV.LL PV.HL – PV.LL

When PV.HL ≤ Input 2, PV=Input 2.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-19
7.7 Setting PV Switching Methods of Loop Control with PV Switching

Switching at the Input Switching PV High Limit (Parameter PV.2C=1)

This method automatically switches two inputs at switching point (input switching PV high
limit)
It should be selected in case where a sudden change in PV is allowed.
Control output will change smoothly (i.e., without any bumps) when PV switches.
Hysteresis (0.5% of PV range span) is provided around the switching point.

PV rising process
PV
Input 2
(High-temperature side)
PV.HL

Hysteresis Input 1
(Low-temperature side)

Time

PV = Input 1 PV = Input 2

PV falling process

PV

Input 2
(High-temperature side)
PV.HL

Input 1 Hysteresis
(Low-temperature side)
Time

PV = Input 1 PV = Input 2

When input 1 < PV.HL – 0.5% of PV input range span, PV=Input 1.

When PV.HL ≤ Input 1, PV=Input 2.

7-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 7.7 Setting PV Switching Methods of Loop Control with PV Switching

Switching by Contact Input (Parameter PV.2C=2)

This method switches two inputs by contact input ON/OFF.
When the contact input is OFF, PV = Input 1 (low-temperature side).
When the contact input is ON, PV = Input 2 (high-temperature side).
Input 2
(High-temperature side)
PV

Input 1
(Low-temperature
side)

Time
7
Input 1 Input 2 Input 1 Input 2

Input (PV, Remote, and Auxiliary Analog) Functions

Contact ON
input OFF

The function is assigned to DI16 for the factory default when switched by DI.
Control output will change smoothly (i.e., without any bumps) when PV switches.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Switch based on low limit of
temperature range
Input switching action 1: Switch using the parameter
PV.2C (in Loop control with STD PV.HL
PV switching) 2: Switch using DI
3: Switch based on high limit of
temperature range MPV
Input switching PV high
PV.HL limit (in Loop control STD
0.0 to 100.0% of control PV
with PV switching)
input range (EU), (PV.HL>PV.
Input switching PV low
LL)
PV.LL limit (in Loop control STD
with PV switching)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 7-21
Blank Page
Chapter 8 Control Functions

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

8.1.1 Single-loop Control, Single-loop Heating/cooling Control, and Single-
loop Position Proportional Control

Setting Details
Parameter
Name Display level Setting range Menu symbol
symbol
SGL: Single-loop control
CAS1: Cascade primary-loop
control
CAS: Cascade control
CTLM Control mode STD CTL
PVSW: Loop control with PV
switching
PVSEL: Loop control with PV auto-
8
selector

Control Functions
CAUTION
• Some parameters will be initialized if the control mode (CTLM) is changed.
• When using the ladder program, the control mode cannot be changed.

Description
These control modes provide the basic control function having one control computation
unit.

Single-loop control can be used for Standard type or Heating/cooling type controller.
Single-loop heating/cooling control can be used for Heating/cooling type controller.
Single-loop position proportional control can be used for Position proportional type
controller.
► PID control: 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

Up to four 10-segment linearizer approximation/10-segment linearizer biases can be

used for the input unit or output unit.

The Function block diagram describes only the basic functions.

Parameter symbols in the Function block diagram describe representative parameters.

For the functions and parameters which are not described in Function block diagram, see
the following.
► Contact input assignment: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Contact output assignment: 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function
► Contact output assignment to retransmission output terminal: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type
► Analog output range change: 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-1
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-2
n Single-loop Control Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model)
Remote input can be used when (for Detailed model)
optional suffix code /R1. DI16 is equipped when optional suffix code /R1.
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional suffix code /X4.
(for Standard model)
Remote input can be used when (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Communication DI16 is equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
*1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 0, 1, or 3.
PV input Remote input
DeviceNet, CC-Link Contact inputs

PV RSP *1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of remote-mode operation
Start of local-mode operation
Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT

Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL
Program pattern
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS selection
(Select a
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC number during a
RESET state.)
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameters Setting Software User’s Manual.

Remote input filter RFL

COM

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn Anaolog input LSP PTNO.

SSP L.PID
PV input bias BS RMS
Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

PV display SP display
Control computation
IM 05P02C41-01EN

CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL

Input error preset output EPO
Normal
When sensor burnout occurs
Manual preset output MPON

Manual operation

Output limiter OH, OL OLMT

MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO RUN

LOC
RST RESET RUN REM
RESET/RUN switch
DO11 to DO15 are assinged
* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT, PV event 4 to 8, and DO31 to
Output terminal assignment OT other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output. DO35 are assinged Time event
6 to 10.
OUT retransmission output Equipped as standard
O1RS RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /HA For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
Heater break alarm 24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

HAL1 HAL2 LPS OUT OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

Heater break Heater break

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

alarm 1 alarm 2 Relay Current or voltage pulse Current
(Current when retransmission output)
Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-3

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-4
n Single-loop Heating/cooling Control Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model)
(for Detailed model)
Remote input can be used when
optional suffix code /R1. DI16 is equipped when optional suffix code /R1.
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional suffix code /X4.
(for Standard model) (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Remote input can be used when Communication DI16 is equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4. *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 0, 1, or 3.
PV input Remote input
DeviceNet, CC-Link Contact inputs

PV RSP *1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of remote-mode operation
Start of local-mode operation
Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT

Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL Program pattern
selection
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS
(Select a
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC number during a
RESET state.)
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameters Setting Software User’s Manual.

Remote input filter RFL

COM

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn Analog input LSP PTNO.

RMS SSP L.PID
PV input bias BS
Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

PV display SP display
Control computation
IM 05P02C41-01EN

CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Manual preset output MPON

Manual operation

MAN AUTO
A/M

Heating/cooling computation
Manual output is prioritized even if
sensor burnout occurs in MAN.
Input error preset output EPO Heating-side output limiter Cooling-side output limiter Input error preset output EPO
OH, OL OHc, OLc
Normal Normal
Heating-side preset output When sensor When sensor Cooling-side preset output
PO burnout occurs RUN RUN burnout occurs POc
RESET RUN LOC LOC RUN RESET
REM REM
RST RESET/RUN switch RST RESET/RUN switch DO11 to DO15 are assinged
* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT, PV event 4 to 8, and DO31 to
Output terminal assignment OT DO35 are assinged Time event
other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output.
6 to 10.
OUT retransmission output OUT2 retransmission output Equipped as standard
O1RS O2RS RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L Split computation OU2.H OU2.L

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

Heating-side Heating-side Cooling-side Cooling-side

output output output output

LPS OUT OUT OUT2 OUT2 RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Relay Current or Current or Relay Current
voltage pulse voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) (Current when retransmission output) Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-5

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-6
n Single-loop Position Proportional Control Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model)
Remote input can be used when (for Detailed model)
optional suffix code /R1. DI16 is equipped when optional suffix code /R1.
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional suffix code /X4.
(for Standard model)
(for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Remote input can be used when Communication DI16 is equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4. *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 0, 1, or 3.
PV input Remote input
DeviceNet, CC-Link Contact inputs

PV RSP *1 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of remote-mode operation
Start of local-mode operation
Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT

Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL Program pattern
selection
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS
(Select a
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC number during a
RESET state.)
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

Remote input filter RFL

COM

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn Analog input LSP PTNO.

SSP L.PID
PV input bias BS RMS
Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

PV display SP display
Control computation
IM 05P02C41-01EN

CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL

Input error preset output EPO In Estimating-type position proportional control, the limiter function
does not work on output operation.
Normal
When sensor burnout occurs The reverse-signal relay turns on when being limited by low limit.
The direct-signal relay turns on when being limited by high limit.
In Manual operation, the relay turns on while the
or key is pressed. Output limiter does not work.
Manual operation

MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO
RUN
RST LOC DO11 to DO15 are assinged
RESET RUN
REM PV event 4 to 8, and DO31 to
RESET/RUN switch DO35 are assinged Time event
6 to 10.
Equipped as standard Equipped as standard
OUT retransmission output RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
Position Proportional Computation Output cannot be calculated by ladder program. O1RS RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 HYS 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop Signal comparison
DB PMD An, Bn PMD An, Bn
power supply L relay H relay

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
( key) ( key) Split computation Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
OU.H OU.L RET.H

FBIN VALV

LPS OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25
Relay output
Feedback input
Direct/reverse signal

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Valve position sliding
M Motor-operated valve
Current Current

resistor or current Terminal Parameter Function

Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-7

Control Functions 8
8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Intentionally blank

8-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

8.1.2 Cascade Primary-loop Control

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SGL: Single-loop control
CAS1: Cascade primary-loop
control
CAS: Cascade control
CTLM Control mode STD CTL
PVSW: Loop control with PV
switching
PVSEL: Loop control with PV
auto-selector

CAUTION 8
• Some parameters will be initialized if the control mode (CTLM) is changed.

Control Functions
• When using the ladder program, the control mode cannot be changed.

Description
Cascade primary-loop control sets up a controller as the primary-loop controller when
two controllers are used for Cascade control.
It provides the output tracking function and FAIL output to the secondary-loop controller.

Cascade primary-loop control can be used for Standard type or Heating/cooling type
controller.
► PID control: 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

Up to four 10-segment linearizer approximation/10-segment linearizer biases can be

used for the input unit or output unit.

The Function block diagram describes only the basic functions.

Parameter symbols in the Function block diagram describe representative parameters.

For the functions and parameters which are not described in Function block diagram, see
the following.
► Contact input assignment: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Contact output assignment: 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function
► Contact output assignment to retransmission output terminal: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type
► Analog output range change: 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-9
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-10
n Cascade Primary-loop Control Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
Remote input can be used when (for Detailed model) DI16 is equipped when
optional suffix code /A2. Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model) (for Standard model) (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Remote input can be used when Communication Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. DI16 is equipped when
suffix code: Type 2 = 4. Output tracking input suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
*1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP,
PV input Aux. analog (remote) input (from Loop-2 controller) Contact inputs
DeviceNet, CC-Link

PV AIN2 *1 RSP DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

(from Loop-2 controller)

Start of local-mode operation
Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT

Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL Input range/scale RH, RL SDP SH, SL

Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC

Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

Program pattern selection

Remote input filter RFL DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
The function is assigned to each DIs at factory default.
COM Switch between the ON
LSP and OFF states of each
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn Aux. input PTNO.
SSP L.PID
contact inputs to select
PV input bias BS RMS from program pattern
Reset Local target setpoint numbers.
PV input filter FL (Select a number during
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern a RESET state.)
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

Program pattern selection

PV display SP display DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional suffix code /X4.
The function is assigned to each DIs at factory default.
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Input error preset output EPO Output limiter OH, OL

Normal
When sensor
Manual preset output MPON burnout occurs

Manual operation

Output limiter OH, OL OLMT Output tracking input

MAN AUTO
A/M
Output limiter OH, OL

Preset output PO OFF ON Output tracking switch (Tracking at ON)

RUN RUN LOC
RST RESET REM
RESET/RUN switch

DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time

event 6 to 10.
Equipped as standard
RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias

(to Loop-2 controller)

24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
PV event 1

PV event 2

FAIL
RET.H RET.L

LPS OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Current Current
(to Loop-2 controller)
Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-11

Control Functions 8
8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Intentionally blank

8-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

8.1.3 Cascade Control, Cascade Heating/cooling Control, and Cascade

Position Proportional Control

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SGL: Single-loop control
CAS1: Cascade primary-loop
control
CTLM Control mode STD CAS: Cascade control CTL
PVSW: Loop control with PV switching
PVSEL: Loop control with PV auto-
selector

8
CAUTION
• Some parameters will be initialized if the control mode (CTLM) is changed.

Control Functions
• When using the ladder program, the control mode cannot be changed.

Description
These control modes use two control computation units and permits Cascade control
using just a single controller.

Cascade control can be used for Standard type or Heating/cooling type controller.
Cascade heating/cooling control can be used for Heating/cooling type controller.
Cascade position proportional control can be used for Position proportional type
controller.
► PID control and Heating/cooling control: 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

Up to four 10-segment linearizer approximation/10-segment linearizer biases can be

used for the input unit or output unit.

The Function block diagram describes only the basic functions.

Parameter symbols in the Function block diagram describe representative parameters.

For the functions and parameters which are not described in Function block diagram, see
the following.
► Contact input assignment: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Contact output assignment: 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function
► Contact output assignment to retransmission output terminal: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type
► Analog output range change: 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-13
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-14
n Cascade Control Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) For the model with optional suffix code /U1: (for Detailed model)
Remote input can be used when Remote input with direct input DI16 is equipped when
optional suffix code /A2. (E1-terminal area) can be used (for Detailed model) optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model) when optional suffix code /U1. Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Remote input can be used when However, DI16 is to be deleted. (for Standard model) DI16 is equipped when
suffix code: Type 2 = 4. Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
Loop-1 PV input Aux. analog (remote) input Communication Loop-2 PV input Contact inputs
For the model with optional suffix code /DR:
Remote input with direct input
PV AIN2 *1 (E1-terminal area) can be used RSP DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16
when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4,

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

and with optional suffix code /DR.

Start of local-mode operation

Input type IN Input type IN However, DI16 is to be deleted. Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT
*1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP,
SDP SDP SDP
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL DeviceNet, CC-Link Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Program pattern selection Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix Square root extraction A.SR A.LC
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC
code: Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL The function is assigned to each DIs at Analog input filter A.FL
factory default.
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

Switch between the ON and OFF states of

each contact inputs to select from PV input bias BS **
Remote input filter RFL COM program pattern numbers.
(Select a number during a RESET state.) PV input filter FL **

PMD An, Bn Aux. input LSP PTNO.

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
SSP L.PID
RMS Program pattern selection
PV input bias BS Reset Local target setpoint DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
PV input filter FL Ratio bias computation suffix code /X4.
RST LOC Program pattern The function is assigned to each DIs at
RT
REM RUN TSP S.PID factory default.
RBS
TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

Switch to AUTO when
PV display SP display Loop-1 PV input burnout
or A/D error occurs.
Loop-1 control computation CNT ALG **
Loop-2 local target setpoint LSP
CAS L.PID
LSP/CAS LSP
CAS LSP

Output limiter OH, OL LSP/CAS LOCAL (ON) / CASCADE (OFF) switch

Preset output PO
IM 05P02C41-01EN

SP limiter SPH, SPL **

RUN
LOC
RST RESET RUN REM RESET/RUN switch

SP display PV display
Tracking signal (Tracking when not in Cascade)
Loop-2 control computation
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL **

Input error preset output EPO
Normal
When Loop-2 sensor burnout occurs ** Loop-2 parameters.
Manual preset output MPON **

Manual operation
** **
Output limiter OH, OL OLMT
MAN CAS, AUTO
A/M
**
Preset output PO ** RUN
LOC
RST RESET RUN REM

RESET/RUN switch
* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT,
Output terminal assignment OT other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output.
Equipped as standard
OUT retransmission output
O1RS
RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /HA For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 PMD An, Bn
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
Heater break alarm 24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

HAL1 HAL2 LPS OUT OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

Heater break Heater break DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time event 6 to 10.
alarm 1 alarm 2 Relay Current or Current
voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key

* The LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

8-15

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-16
n Cascade Heating/cooling Control Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) For the model with optional suffix code /U1: (for Detailed model)
Remote input can be used when DI16 is equipped when
optional suffix code /A2. Remote input with direct input optional suffix code /R1.
(E1-terminal area) can be used (for Detailed model)
(for Standard model) Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. (for Standard model)
when optional suffix code /U1. DI16 is equipped when
Equipped as standard Remote input can be used when However, DI16 is to be deleted. (for Standard model)
suffix code: Type 2 = 4 suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary.
Loop-1 PV input Aux. analog (remote) input Communication Loop-2 PV input Contact inputs
For the model with optional suffix code /DR:
Remote input with direct input
PV AIN2 *1 (E1-terminal area) can be used RSP DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16
when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4,

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

and with optional suffix code /DR.
Input type Input type

Start of local-mode operation

Input type IN IN However, DI16 is to be deleted. IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT
*1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP,
SDP SDP SDP
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL DeviceNet, CC-Link Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Program pattern selection Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix Square root extraction A.SR A.LC
code: Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL The function is assigned to each DIs at Analog input filter A.FL
factory default.
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

Switch between the ON and OFF states of

each contact inputs to select from PV input bias BS **
Remote input filter RFL COM program pattern numbers.
(Select a number during a RESET state.) PV input filter FL **

PMD An, Bn Aux. input LSP PTNO.

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias SSP L.PID
RMS Program pattern selection
PV input bias BS Reset Local target setpoint DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
PV input filter FL Ratio bias computation suffix code /X4.
RST LOC Program pattern The function is assigned to each DIs at
RT factory default.
REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS
TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

Switch to AUTO when
PV display Loop-1 PV input burnout
SP display
or A/D error occurs.
Loop-1 control computation CNT ALG **
Loop-2 local target setpoint LSP
CAS L.PID
LSP/CAS LSP
CAS LSP
LSP/CAS LOCAL (ON) / CASCADE (OFF) switch
Output limiter OH, OL
Preset output PO
IM 05P02C41-01EN

SP limiter SPH, SPL **

RUN
LOC
RST STOP RUN REM

SP display PV display
Tracking signal (Tracking when not in Cascade)
Loop-2 control computation
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Manual preset output MPON

**
Manual operation

MAN CAS, AUTO

A/M
**
Manual output is prioritized even if Heating/cooling computation
sensor burnout occurs in MAN.
** Loop-2 parameters.
Input error preset output EPO Heating-side output limiter Cooling-side output limiter Input error preset output EPO
OH, OL OHc, OLc
Normal Normal
Heating-side preset output When Loop-2 sensor ** ** When Loop-2 sensor Cooling-side preset output
burnout occurs RUN RUN burnout occurs
PO POc
RST LOC LOC RST
** RESET RUN RUN RESET **
REM REM
RESET/RUN switch RESET/RUN switch
* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT,
Output terminal assignment OT other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output.

OUT retransmission output OUT2 retransmission output Equipped as standard

O1RS O2RS RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L Split computation OU2.H OU2.L
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

Heating-side Heating-side Cooling-side Cooling-side

output output output output

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

LPS OUT OUT OUT2 OUT2 RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time event 6 to 10.

Relay Current or Current or Relay Current
voltage pulse voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) (Current when retransmission output)
Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key

* The LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

8-17

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-18
n Cascade Position Proportional Control Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) For the model with optional suffix code /U1: (for Detailed model)
Remote input can be used when DI16 is equipped when
Remote input with direct input (for Detailed model)
optional suffix code /A2. optional suffix code /R1.
(E1-terminal area) can be used Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary.
(for Standard model) when optional suffix code /U1. (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Remote input can be used when (for Standard model) DI16 is equipped when
However, DI16 is to be deleted.
suffix code: Type 2 = 4. Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
Loop-1 PV input Aux. analog (remote) input Communication Loop-2 PV input Contact inputs
For the model with optional suffix code /DR:
Remote input with direct input
PV AIN2 *1 (E1-terminal area) can be used RSP DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16
when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4,

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

and with optional suffix code /DR.

Start of local-mode operation

Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

However, DI16 is to be deleted.
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT
*1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP,
SDP SDP SDP
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL DeviceNet, CC-Link Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Program pattern selection Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix Square root extraction A.SR A.LC
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC
code: Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL The function is assigned to each DIs at Analog input filter A.FL
factory default.
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

Switch between the ON and OFF states of

each contact inputs to select from PV input bias BS **
Remote input filter RFL COM program pattern numbers.
(Select a number during a RESET state.) PV input filter FL **

Aux. input LSP PTNO.

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn
SSP L.PID
RMS Program pattern selection
PV input bias BS Reset Local target setpoint DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
PV input filter FL Ratio bias computation suffix code /X4.
RST LOC Program pattern The function is assigned to each DIs at
RT TSP S.PID factory default.
REM RUN
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

Switch to AUTO when
PV display SP display Loop-1 PV input burnout * An external analog signal can
or A/D error occurs. be used for Loop-2 SP. Use
Loop-1 control computation CNT ALG * ** the ladder program of LL50A
Loop-2 local target setpoint LSP
Parameter Setting Software
CAS L.PID to build the function.
LSP/CAS LSP
CAS LSP

Output limiter OH, OL LSP/CAS LOCAL (ON) / CASCADE (OFF) switch

Preset output PO
SP limiter SPH, SPL **
IM 05P02C41-01EN

RUN
LOC
RST RESET RUN REM RESET/RUN switch

PV display
Tracking signal (Tracking when not in Cascade) SP display
Loop-2 control computation
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL In Estimating-type position proportional control, the limiter function
Input error preset output EPO does not work on output operation.
**
Normal The reverse-signal relay turns on when being limited by low limit.
When Loop-2 sensor burnout occurs The direct-signal relay turns on when being limited by high limit.
In Manual operation, the relay turns on while the or key is pressed.
** Loop-2 parameters.
Output limiter does not work.
Manual operation
MAN CAS, AUTO
A/M
**
Preset output PO RUN
** LOC
RST RESET RUN REM
RESET/RUN switch

Equipped as standard Equipped as standard

OUT retransmission output RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
O1RS RTS
Position Proportional Computation Output cannot be calculated by ladder program.

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4

HYS 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop Signal comparison
DB PMD An, Bn PMD An, Bn
power supply L relay H relay

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
( key) ( key) Split computation Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
OU.H OU.L RET.H RET.L

FBIN VALV

LPS OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Relay output
Feedback input
Direct/reverse signal DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time event 6 to 10.

M Motor-operated valve
Current Current

Valve position sliding

Terminal Parameter Function
resistor or current Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key

* The LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

8-19

Control Functions 8
8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Intentionally blank

8-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

8.1.4 Loop Control with PV Switching, Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV

Switching, and Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Switching

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SGL: Single-loop control
CAS1: Cascade primary-loop
control
CAS: Cascade control
CTLM Control mode STD CTL
PVSW: Loop control with PV
switching
PVSEL: Loop control with PV
auto-selector

8
CAUTION

Control Functions
• Some parameters will be initialized if the control mode (CTLM) is changed.
• When using the ladder program, the control mode cannot be changed.

Description
These control modes use two PV inputs, which are switched according to input contact
signals or measurement ranges.

Loop control with PV switching can be used for Standard type or Heating/cooling type
controller.
Heating/cooling loop control with PV switching can be used for Heating/cooling type
controller.
Position proportional loop control with PV switching can be used for Position proportional
type controller.
► PID control and Heating/cooling control: 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

Description about Loop control with PV switching

► PV range: 7.6 Adjusting PV Range for Loop Control with PV Switching
► Switching action: 7.7 Setting PV Switching Methods of Loop Control with PV Switching

Up to four 10-segment linearizer approximation/10-segment linearizer biases can be

used for the input unit or output unit.

The Function block diagram describes only the basic functions.

Parameter symbols in the Function block diagram describe representative parameters.

For the functions and parameters which are not described in Function block diagram, see
the following.
► Contact input assignment: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Contact output assignment: 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function
► Contact output assignment to retransmission output terminal: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type
► Analog output range change: 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-21
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-22
n Loop Control with PV Switching Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
(for Detailed model) Remote input can be used when DI16 is equipped when
Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. optional suffix code /A2. optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model) (for Standard model)
(for Standard model)
Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. DI16 is equipped when
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) Remote input can be used when
suffix code: Type 2 = 4. suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
PV input 1 PV input 2 For the model with optional suffix code /DR: Aux. analog (remote) input Contact inputs
Remote input with direct input
(E1-terminal area) can be used
PV RSP when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4, AIN2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16
and with optional suffix code /DR.
However, DI16 is to be deleted.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of local-mode operation
Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT For the model with optional suffix code /U: Input unit UNIT
SDP SDP Remote input with direct input SDP
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL (E1-terminal area) can be used SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS when optional suffix code /U1. Analog input bias A.BS
However, DI16 is to be deleted.
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC

Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

RSP terminal input (ON)/PV terminal input (OFF) switch

PV switching
PV.2C PV.HL PV.LL *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, Program pattern selection
P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL DeviceNet, CC-Link DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix
code: Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
COM
Remote input filter RFL The function is assigned to each DIs at
factory default.

Switch between the ON and OFF

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn Aux. input LSP PTNO. states of each contact inputs to
RMS
SSP L.PID select from program pattern
PV input bias BS numbers.
Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL (Select a number during a RESET
Ratio bias computation Program pattern state.)
RST LOC
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL Program pattern selection

DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
IM 05P02C41-01EN

suffix code /X4.

PV display SP display The function is assigned to each DIs at
factory default.
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL

Input error preset output EPO
Normal
When sensor burnout occurs Sensor burnout occurs when PV or RSP input burnout occurs.
Manual preset output MPON However, burnout is not detected if input is not connected.

Manual operation

Output limiter OH, OL OLMT

MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO RUN

LOC
RST RESET RUN REM
RESET/RUN switch

* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT, DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time
Output terminal assignment OT
other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output. event 6 to 10.
OUT retransmission output Equipped as standard
O1RS RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /HA For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 PMD An, Bn
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
Heater break alarm 24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

HAL1 HAL2 LPS OUT OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

Heater break Heater break

alarm 1 alarm 2

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Relay Current or Current
voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output)
Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-23

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-24
n Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Switching Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
(for Detailed model) Remote input can be used when DI16 is equipped when
Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. optional suffix code /A2. optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model) (for Standard model) (for Standard model)
Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. For the model with optional suffix code /DR: Remote input can be used when DI16 is equipped when
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area)
Remote input with direct input suffix code: Type 2 = 4. suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
PV input 1 PV input 2 (E1-terminal area) can be used Aux. analog (remote) input Contact inputs
when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4,
and with optional suffix code /DR.
PV RSP However, DI16 is to be deleted. AIN2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

For the model with optional suffix code /U1:

Start of local-mode operation

Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Remote input with direct input
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT (E1-terminal area) can be used Input unit UNIT
SDP SDP when optional suffix code /U1. SDP
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL However, DI16 is to be deleted. Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC

Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

RSP terminal input (ON)/PV terminal input (OFF) switch

PV switching
PV.2C PV.HL PV.LL *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, Program pattern selection
P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL DeviceNet, CC-Link DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix
COM code: Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
Remote input filter RFL The function is assigned to each DIs at
factory default.

Switch between the ON and OFF

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn Aux. input LSP PTNO. states of each contact inputs to
SSP L.PID select from program pattern
PV input bias BS RMS
Reset Local target setpoint numbers.
PV input filter FL
(Select a number during a RESET
Ratio bias computation Program pattern state.)
RST LOC
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL Program pattern selection

DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
IM 05P02C41-01EN

suffix code /X4.

PV display The function is assigned to each DIs at
SP display factory default.
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Manual preset output MPON

Manual operation
MAN AUTO
A/M

Manual output is prioritized even if Heating/cooling computation

sensor burnout occurs in MAN.

Input error preset output EPO Heating-side output limiter Cooling-side output limiter Input error preset output EPO
OH, OL OHc, OLc
When sensor Normal Normal When sensor
Heating-side preset output Cooling-side preset output
burnout occurs RUN RUN burnout occurs
PO POc
RESET RUN LOC LOC RUN RESET
REM REM
RST
RESET/RUN switch RESET/RUN switch

Output terminal assignment OT * After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT, DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time
other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output. event 6 to 10.
OUT retransmission output OUT2 retransmission output Equipped as standard
O1RS O2RS RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L Split computation OU2.H OU2.L
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

Heating-side Heating-side Cooling-side Cooling-side

output output output output

LPS OUT OUT OUT2 OUT2 RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Relay Current or Current or Relay Current
voltage pulse voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) (Current when retransmission output) Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-25

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-26
n Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Switching Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
(for Detailed model) Remote input can be used when DI16 is equipped when
Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. optional suffix code /A2. optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model)
(for Standard model) (for Standard model)
Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. For the model with optional suffix code /DR:
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) Remote input can be used when DI16 is equipped when
Remote input with direct input suffix code: Type 2 = 4. suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
PV input 1 PV input 2 (E1-terminal area) can be used Aux. analog (remote) input Contact inputs
when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4,
and with optional suffix code /DR.
PV RSP However, DI16 is to be deleted. AIN2 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

For the model with optional suffix code /U1:

Start of local-mode operation

Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Remote input with direct input
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT (E1-terminal area) can be used Input unit UNIT
SDP SDP when optional suffix code /U1. SDP
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL However, DI16 is to be deleted. Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC

Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

RSP terminal input (ON)/PV terminal input (OFF) switch

PV switching
PV.2C PV.HL PV.LL *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, Program pattern selection
P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL DeviceNet, CC-Link DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix
COM code: Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
Remote input filter RFL The function is assigned to each DIs at
factory default.

Switch between the ON and OFF

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn Aux. input LSP PTNO. states of each contact inputs to
RMS
SSP L.PID select from program pattern
PV input bias BS numbers.
Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL (Select a number during a RESET
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern state.)
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

Program pattern selection
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
IM 05P02C41-01EN

suffix code /X4.

The function is assigned to each DIs at
PV display SP display factory default.
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL In Estimating-type position proportional control, the limiter function
does not work on output operation.
Input error preset output EPO The reverse-signal relay turns on when being limited by low limit.
The direct-signal relay turns on when being limited by high limit.
Normal
When sensor burnout occurs
In Manual operation, the relay turns on while the
or key is pressed. Output limiter does not work.
Manual operation

MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO
RUN
LOC
RST RESET RUN
REM
RESET/RUN switch
Equipped as standard Equipped as standard
OUT retransmission output RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
Position Proportional Computation Output cannot be calculated by ladder program. O1RS RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
HYS
24 V loop Signal comparison
DB PMD An, Bn PMD An, Bn
power supply L relay H relay
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
( key) ( key) Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
OU.H OU.L RET.H RET.L

FBIN VALV

LPS OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25
Relay output
Feedback input
Direct/reverse signal DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time event 6 to 10.

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Valve position sliding M Motor-operated valve Current Current

resistor or current Terminal Parameter Function

Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-27

Control Functions 8
8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Intentionally blank

8-28 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

8.1.5 Loop Control with PV Auto-selector, Heating/cooling Loop Control with

PV Auto-selector, and Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Auto-
selector

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SGL: Single-loop control
CAS1: Cascade primary-loop
control
CAS: Cascade control
CTLM Control mode STD CTL
PVSW: Loop control with PV
switching
PVSEL: Loop control with PV
auto-selector
8

Control Functions
CAUTION
• Some parameters will be initialized if the control mode (CTLM) is changed.
• When using the ladder program, the control mode cannot be changed.

Description
These control modes automatically select or calculate the larger, the smaller, the
average, or difference of multiple (two to four) PV inputs for control.

Loop control with PV auto-selector can be used for Standard type or Heating/cooling type
controller.
Heating/cooling loop control with auto-selector can be used for Heating/cooling type
controller.
Position proportional loop control with auto-selector can be used for Position proportional
type controller.
► PID control and Heating/cooling control: 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

Description about Loop control with PV auto-selector

► Input selection: 7.4 Using Larger, Smaller, Average, or Difference of Two to Four Inputs as PV

Up to four 10-segment linearizer approximation/10-segment linearizer biases can be

used for the input unit or output unit.

The Function block diagram describes only the basic functions.

Parameter symbols in the Function block diagram describe representative parameters.

For the functions and parameters which are not described in Function block diagram, see
the following.
► Contact input assignment: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Contact output assignment: 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function
► Contact output assignment to retransmission output terminal: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type
► Analog output range change: 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-29
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-30
n Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (2 inputs) Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. DI16 is equipped when optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model) DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional suffix code /X4.
For the model with optional suffix code /DR:
Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) Remote input with direct input DI16 is equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
(E1-terminal area) can be used DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 0, 1, or 3.
PV input 1 PV input 2 when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4, Contact inputs
and with optional suffix code /DR.
However, DI16 is to be deleted.
PV RSP DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

For the model with optional suffix code /U1:

Start of remote-mode operation

Start of local-mode operation
Start of program operation
Remote input with direct input

Stop of program operation

Input type IN Input type IN
(E1-terminal area) can be used
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT when optional suffix code /U1.
SDP SDP However, DI16 is to be deleted.
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Program pattern
SH, SL SH, SL
selection
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS
(Select a
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC number during a
RESET state.)
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

PV auto-selector (Max., Min., Ave., Diff.) PV.AS

P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL

PMD An, Bn
*1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP,
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias LSP PTNO.
DeviceNet, CC-Link SSP L.PID
PV input bias BS COM
RMS Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

IM 05P02C41-01EN

PV display SP display
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL

Input error preset output EPO
Normal
When sensor Sensor burnout occurs when PV or RSP input burnout occurs.
MPON
burnout occurs However, burnout is not detected if input is not conncted.
Manual preset output

Manual operation

Output limiter OH, OL OLMT

MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO
RUN
RST RESET RUN LOC
REM
RESET/RUN switch

* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT,

Output terminal assignment OT other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output. DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time event
6 to 10.
OUT retransmission output Equipped as standard
O1RS RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /HA For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
Heater break alarm 24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L
Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

HAL1 HAL2 LPS OUT OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

Heater break Heater break

alarm 1 alarm 2 Relay Current or Current

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-31

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-32
n Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (2 inputs) Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. DI16 is equipped when optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model) DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional suffix code /X4.
Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. For the model with optional suffix code /DR: (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) Remote input with direct input DI16 is equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
PV input 1 PV input 2 (E1-terminal area) can be used DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 0, 1, or 3.
when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4, Contact inputs
and with optional suffix code /DR.
PV RSP However, DI16 is to be deleted. DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of remote-mode operation
For the model with optional suffix code /U1:

Start of local-mode operation

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input type IN Input type IN
Remote input with direct input
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT (E1-terminal area) can be used
SDP SDP when optional suffix code /U1.
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL However, DI16 is to be deleted. Program pattern
SH, SL SH, SL
selection
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS
(Select a
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC number during a
RESET state.)
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

PV auto-selector (Max., Min., Ave., Diff.) PV.AS

P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, LSP PTNO.
DeviceNet, CC-Link SSP L.PID
PV input bias BS COM
RMS Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

IM 05P02C41-01EN

PV display SP display
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Manual preset output MPON

Manual operation
MAN AUTO
A/M Sensor burnout occurs when PV or RSP
input burnout occurs.
However, burnout is not detected if input
Heating/cooling computation
Manual output is prioritized even if is not conncted.
sensor burnout occurs in MAN.

Input error preset output EPO Heating-side output limiter Cooling-side output limiter Error preset output EPO
OH, OL OHc, OLc
Normal Normal
Heating-side preset output When sensor When sensor Cooling-side preset output
PO burnout occurs RUN RUN burnout occurs
RESET RUN LOC LOC RUN RESET RST
REM REM
RST RESET/RUN switch RESET/RUN switch
* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT,
Output terminal assignment OT
other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output.
OUT retransmission output OUT2 retransmission output Equipped as standard
O1RS O2RS RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L Split computation OU2.H OU2.L

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

Heating-side Heating-side Cooling-side Cooling-side

output output output output

LPS OUT OUT OUT2 OUT2 RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25

DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time event 6 to 10.

Relay Current or Current or Relay Current

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

voltage pulse voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) (Current when retransmission output)
Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-33

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-34
n Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (2 inputs) Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary. DI16 is equipped when optional suffix code /R1.
(for Standard model) DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional suffix code /X4.
Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. For the model with optional suffix code /DR: (for Standard model)
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) DI16 is equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
Remote input with direct input
PV input 1 PV input 2 (E1-terminal area) can be used DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code: Type 2 = 0, 1, or 3.
when suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4, Contact inputs
and with optional suffix code /DR.
PV RSP However, DI16 is to be deleted. DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of remote-mode operation
For the model with optional suffix code /U1:

Start of local-mode operation

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input type IN Input type IN
Remote input with direct input
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT (E1-terminal area) can be used
DP DP when optional suffix code /U1.
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL However, DI16 is to be deleted. Program pattern
SH, SL SH, SL
selection
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS
(Select a
Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC number during a
RESET state.)
Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

PV auto-selector (Max., Min., Ave., Diff.) PV.AS

P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, LSP PTNO.
DeviceNet, CC-Link SSP L.PID
PV input bias BS COM
RMS Reset Local target setpoint
PV input filter FL
Ratio bias computation RST LOC Program pattern
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

IM 05P02C41-01EN

PV display SP display
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL

Input error preset output EPO In Estimating-type position proportional control, the limiter function
does not work on output operation.
Normal The reverse-signal relay turns on when being limited by low limit.
When sensor
burnout occurs The direct-signal relay turns on when being limited by high limit.
In Manual operation, the relay turns on while the
or key is pressed. Output limiter does not work. Sensor burnout occurs when PV or RSP input burnout occurs.
Manual operation However, burnout is not detected if input is not conncted.

MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO
RUN
RST RESET RUN LOC
REM
RESET/RUN switch
Equipped as standard Equipped as standard
OUT retransmission output RET retransmission output PV event, Time event, Alarm
Position Proportional Computation Output cannot be calculated by ladder program. O1RS RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4

HYS 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop Signal comparison
DB PMD An, Bn PMD An, Bn
power supply L relay H relay
( key) ( key) Split computation

Time event 1

Time event 2

Time event 3

Time event 4

Time event 5
Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
OU.H RET.H RET.L

FBIN VALV

LPS OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25
Relay output
Feedback input DO31 to DO35 are assinged Time event 6 to 10.
Direct/reverse signal

M Current Current

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

Motor-operated valve
Valve position sliding
resistor or current Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-35

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-36
n Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (4 inputs) Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary.
(for Detailed model)
For the model with optional suffix code /U1:
DI16 is equipped when
Refer to the function block diagram of
optional suffix code /R1.
Loop control with PV auto-selector (2 inputs).
Necessary for Loop control with PV auto-selector for 3 inputs or 4 inputs DI26 and DI46 are equipped when
(for Standard model) Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. optional suffix code /A2 and /A4.
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model)
For the model with optional suffix code /DR: (for Standard model)
When optional suffix code /A2 When optional suffix code /A4
Refer to the function block diagram of DI16 is equipped when
(for Standarded model) (for Standarded model) suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
Loop control with PV auto-selector (2 inputs). When suffix code: Type 2 = 4
When suffix code: Type 2 = 4 DI26 and DI46 are equipped when
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) Aux. analog input (E2-terminal area) Aux. analog input (E4-terminal area) suffix code: Type 2 = 4.
PV input 1 PV input 2 PV input 3 PV input 4 Contact inputs

PV RSP AIN2 AIN4 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI26 DI46

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of local-mode operation
No function is

Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN
assigned to
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT DI16, DI26,
SDP SDP SDP SDP and DI46.
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC

Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

PV auto-selector (Max., Min., Ave., Diff.) PV.AS

P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL Program pattern selection
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code:
Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
Can be used when suffix code: Type 2 = 4 and The function is assigned to each DIs at
not in Loop control with PV auto-selector for 4 inputs. factory default.
However, use the LL50A to set remote input.
Switch between the ON and OFF
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, LSP PTNO. states of each contact inputs to
DeviceNet, CC-Link SSP L.PID select from program pattern
PV input bias BS COM numbers.
RMS Reset Local target setpoint
(Select a number during a RESET
PV input filter FL
Program pattern state.)
Ratio bias computation RST LOC
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
IM 05P02C41-01EN

RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL Program pattern selection

DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
suffix code /X4.
The function is assigned to each DIs at
PV display SP display factory default.
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL

Error preset output EPO
Normal
When sensor Sensor burnout occurs when PV, RSP, AIN2, or AIN4 input burnout occurs.
Manual preset output MPON burnout occurs However, burnout is not detected if input is not conncted.

Manual operation

Output limiter OH, OL OLMT

MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO
RUN
RST RESET RUN LOC
REM
RESET/RUN switch

* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT,

Output terminal assignment OT other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output.

OUT retransmission output Equipped as standard

O1RS RET retransmission output PV event
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /HA For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
Heater break alarm 24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L
Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

HAL1 HAL2 LPS OUT OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3

Heater break Heater break

alarm 1 alarm 2 Relay Current or Current
voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-37

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-38
n Heating/cooling Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (4 inputs) Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary.
(for Detailed model)
For the model with optional suffix code /U1: DI16 is equipped when
Refer to the function block diagram of optional suffix code /R1.
Loop control with PV auto-selector (2 inputs). DI26 and DI46 are equipped when
Necessary for Loop control with PV auto-selector for 3 inputs or 4 inputs
optional suffix code /A2 and /A4.
(for Standard model) Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary.
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model) (for Standard model)
For the model with optional suffix code /DR: When optional suffix code /A2 When optional suffix code /A4 DI16 is equipped when
Refer to the function block diagram of suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
(for Standard model) (for Standard model)
Loop control with PV auto-selector (2 inputs). DI26 and DI46 are equipped when
When suffix code: Type 2 = 4 When suffix code: Type 2 = 4
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) Aux. analog input (E2-terminal area) Aux. analog input (E4-terminal area) suffix code: Type 2 = 4.
PV input 1 PV input 2 PV input 3 PV input 4 Contact inputs

PV RSP AIN2 AIN4 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI26 DI46

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of local-mode operation
Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN No function is
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT assigned to
SDP SDP SDP SDP DI16, DI26,
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL and DI46.
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC

Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

PV auto-selector (Max., Min., Ave., Diff.) PV.AS

P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL Program pattern selection
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code:
Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
The function is assigned to each DIs at
factory default.
Switch between the ON and OFF
PMD An, Bn *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, LSP states of each contact inputs to
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PTNO.
DeviceNet, CC-Link SSP L.PID select from program pattern
PV input bias BS COM numbers.
RMS Reset Local target setpoint
(Select a number during a RESET
PV input filter FL
Program pattern state.)
Ratio bias computation RST LOC
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
IM 05P02C41-01EN

RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL

Program pattern selection
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
suffix code /X4.
PV display SP display The function is assigned to each DIs at
factory default.
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Manual preset output MPON

Manual operation
MAN AUTO
A/M

Heating/cooling computation
Manual output is prioritized even if Sensor burnout occurs when PV, RSP, AIN2, or AIN4 input burnout occurs.
sensor burnout occurs in MAN. However, burnout is not detected if input is not conncted.
Input error preset output EPO Heating-side output limiter Cooling-side output limiter Input error preset output EPO
OH, OL OHc, OLc
When Loop-2 sensor Normal Normal When Loop-2 sensor
Heating-side preset output Cooling-side preset output
PO burnout occurs RUN RUN burnout occurs POc
RST RESET RUN LOC LOC RUN RESET RST
REM REM
RESET/RUN switch RESET/RUN switch
* After the control output terminal is specified by the parameter OT,
Output terminal assignment OT other current output terminals can be used as retransmission output.

OUT retransmission output OUT2 retransmission output Equipped as standard

O1RS O2RS RET retransmission output PV event
RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
24 V loop PMD An, Bn
power supply Split computation OU.H OU.L Split computation OU2.H OU2.L
Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
RET.H RET.L
Heating-side Heating-side Cooling-side Cooling-side
output output output output

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

LPS OUT OUT OUT2 OUT2 RET AL1 AL2 AL3

Relay Current or Current or Relay Current

voltage pulse voltage pulse
(Current when retransmission output) (Current when retransmission output) Terminal Parameter Function
Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-39

Control Functions 8
 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
8-40
n Position Proportional Loop Control with PV Auto-selector (4 inputs) Function Block Diagram
(for Detailed model) Optional suffix code /R1 is necessary.
(for Detailed model)
For the model with optional suffix code /U1: DI16 is equipped when
Refer to the function block diagram of optional suffix code /R1.
Loop control with PV auto-selector (2 inputs). Necessary for Loop control with PV auto-selector for 3 inputs or 4 inputs DI26 and DI46 are equipped when
(for Standard model) Suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4 is necessary. optional suffix code /A2 and /A4.
(for Detailed model) (for Detailed model) (for Standard model)
For the model with optional suffix code /DR: When optional suffix code /A2 When optional suffix code /A4 DI16 is equipped when
Refer to the function block diagram of suffix code: Type 2 = 1 or 4.
(for Standard model) (for Standard model)
Loop control with PV auto-selector (2 inputs). DI26 and DI46 are equipped when
When suffix code: Type 2 = 4 When suffix code: Type 2 = 4
Equipped as standard Aux. analog (remote) input (E1-terminal area) Aux. analog input (E2-terminal area) Aux. analog input (E4-terminal area) suffix code: Type 2 = 4.
PV input 1 PV input 2 PV input 3 PV input 4 Contact inputs

PV RSP AIN2 AIN4 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI16 DI26 DI46

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

when DI changes from OFF to ON.

Start of local-mode operation
Start of program operation

Stop of program operation

Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN Input type IN
No function is
Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT Input unit UNIT assigned to
SDP SDP SDP SDP DI16, DI26,
Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL Input range/scale RH, RL
SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL SH, SL and DI46.
Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS Analog input bias A.BS

Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC Square root extraction A.SR A.LC

Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL Analog input filter A.FL

10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn

Input ladder calculation program (signal goes to the control computation as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

PV auto-selector (Max., Min., Ave., Diff.) PV.AS

P.UNI P.DP P.RH, P.RL Program pattern selection
DI41 to DI45 are equipped when suffix code:
Type 2 = 0, 1 or 3.
The function is assigned to each DIs at
factory default.
Switch between the ON and OFF
10-seg. linearizer approx./bias PMD An, Bn *1: RS-485, Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, LSP PTNO. states of each contact inputs to
DeviceNet, CC-Link SSP L.PID select from program pattern
PV input bias BS COM numbers.
RMS Reset Local target setpoint
(Select a number during a RESET
PV input filter FL
Ratio bias computation Program pattern state.)
RST LOC
RT REM RUN TSP S.PID
IM 05P02C41-01EN

RBS TIME RAMP

SP limiter SPH, SPL Program pattern selection

DI41 to DI45 are equipped when optional
suffix code /X4.
PV display The function is assigned to each DIs at
SP display factory default.
Control computation CNT ALG
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Output limiter OH, OL In Estimating-type position proportional control, the limiter function does not
work on output operation.
Input error preset output EPO The reverse-signal relay turns on when being limited by low limit.
Normal The direct-signal relay turns on when being limited by high limit.
When sensor
burnout occurs Sensor burnout occurs when PV, RSP, AIN2, or AIN4 input burnout occurs.
In Manual operation, the relay turns on while the
However, burnout is not detected if input is not conncted.
or key is pressed. Output limiter does not work.
Manual operation
MAN AUTO
A/M

Preset output PO
RUN
RST RESET RUN LOC
REM
RESET/RUN switch
Equipped as standard Equipped as standard
OUT retransmission output RET retransmission output PV event
Position Proportional Computation Output cannot be calculated by ladder program. O1RS RTS

Output ladder calculation program (signal goes to the output as is when without ladder program). For ladder program, see the LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual.

For optional suffix code /L4 or /LC4 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias 10-seg. linearizer approx./bias
HYS
24 V loop Signal comparison
DB PMD An, Bn PMD An, Bn
power supply L relay H relay
( key) ( key) Split computation Split computation

PV event 1

PV event 2

PV event 3
OU.H OU.L RET.H RET.L

8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)

FBIN VALV

LPS OUT RET AL1 AL2 AL3

Relay output
Feedback input
Direct/reverse signal

Valve position sliding

M Motor-operated valve
Current Current

resistor or current Terminal Parameter Function

Legend
Analog signal Contact signal Front panel key
8-41

Control Functions 8
 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)
The following table shows combination of Standard type, Heating/cooling type, Position
proportional type and control type (CNT).
Suffix code: Type 1
Control type Heating/cooling Position
Standard type
type proportional type
PID control √ √ √
ON/OFF control
√ √ N/A
(1 point of hysteresis)
ON/OFF control
√ √ N/A
(2 points of hysteresis)
Heating/cooling control N/A √ N/A
√: Available, N/A: Not available

The following table shows combination of control type (CNT) and control mode (CTLM).
Control mode (CTLM)
Control type
SGL CAS1 CAS PVSW PVSEL
PID control √ √*1 √ √ √
ON/OFF control
√*1 N/A N/A N/A N/A
(1 point of hysteresis)
ON/OFF control
√*1 N/A N/A N/A N/A
(2 points of hysteresis)
Heating/cooling control √*2 N/A √*2 √*2 √*2
√: Available, N/A: Not available
*1: Cannot be selected for Position proportional type.
*2: Can be selected only for Heating/cooling type.

The following table shows combination of control type (CNT) and output type.
Output type
Control type Time Position
Current ON/OFF
proportional proportional
output output
output output
PID control √ √ N/A √
ON/OFF control
√ N/A √ N/A
(1 point of hysteresis)
ON/OFF control
√ N/A √ N/A
(2 points of hysteresis)
Heating/cooling control √ √ √ N/A
√: Available, N/A: Not available
► Output type: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type

8-42 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

8.2.1 PID Control

Description
PID control is a general control using control-related parameters PID.
PID should be obtained by adjusting manually or by auto-tunings at SP during program
pattern operation, local target setpoint, or remote setpoint.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PID: PID control
ONOF: ON/OFF control (1 point of
hysteresis)
CNT Control type EASY CTL
ONOF2: ON/OFF control (2 points
of hysteresis) 8
H/C: Heating/cooling control
Proportional band 0.0 to 999.9%
Heating-side When 0.0% is set, it operates as

Control Functions
P proportional band EASY 0.1%.
(in Heating/cooling Heating-side ON/OFF control applies
control) when 0.0% in Heating/cooling control.
Integral time
Heating-side
OFF: Disable
I integral time (in EASY
1 to 6000 s
Heating/cooling
control)
Derivative time
Heating-side PID
OFF: Disable
D derivative time (in EASY
1 to 6000 s
Heating/cooling
control)
0.0 to 999.9%
Cooling-side
Pc EASY Cooling-side ON/OFF control applies
proportional band
when 0.0% in Heating/cooling control.
Cooling-side OFF: Disable
Ic EASY
integral time 1 to 6000 s
Cooling-side OFF: Disable
Dc EASY
derivative time 1 to 6000 s
MR Manual reset EASY -5.0 to 105.0%
Note 1: The PID number (1 to 8, or R) is displayed on Group display while the parameter P, I, D, Pc,
Ic, Dc, or MR is displayed.
Note 2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
Note 3: The parameter CNT of Loop 2 displays PID and H/C.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-43
8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

8.2.2 ON/OFF Control (1 point of hysteresis / 2 points of hysteresis)

Description
ON/OFF control compares the SP and PV and outputs an on or off signal according to
the positive or negative deviation (PV – SP). Hysteresis can be set in the vicinity of the
on/off output operating point.
If the SP and PV become close and the polarity of the deviation reverses frequently,
the on/off output will cycle repeatedly. The life of the output relay will therefore be
dramatically shortened.
In such a case, set a wider hysteresis so that the relay’s frequent on/off output (chattering)
will not occur.

When the control type (CNT) is set to “ONOF,” one point of hysteresis can be set to the
operating point.
When the control type (CNT) is set to “ONOF2,” two points of hysteresis (deviation
positive hysteresis and deviation negative hysteresis) can be set to the operating point.

1 point of hysteresis
Hysteresis
ON
Control
output OFF

PV SP

Hysteresis PV

SP
Temperature
ON ON ON
Control
output OFF OFF

(Example of reverse action)

2 points of hysteresis
HY.LO HY.UP

ON
Control
output OFF

PV SP

HY.UP PV

SP
Temperature
ON ON ON
Control
output OFF OFF

HY.LO
(Example of reverse action)

8-44 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PID: PID control
ONOF: ON/OFF control (1 point of
hysteresis)
CNT Control type EASY CTL
ONOF2: ON/OFF control (2 points
of hysteresis)
H/C: Heating/cooling control
Hysteresis (in
ON/OFF control,
or Position
In ON/OFF control: 0.0 to 100.0%
proportional
of PV input range span (EUS)
control)
HYS EASY In Heating/cooling control or
Heating-side
Position proportional control: 0.0
ON/OFF control
to 100.0%
hysteresis (in
Heating/cooling
PID 8
control)
Upper-side

Control Functions
HY.UP hysteresis (in ON/ EASY
OFF control) 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Lower-side span (EUS)
HY.LO hysteresis (in ON/ EASY
OFF control)
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, or R) is displayed on Group display while the parameter HYS,
HY.UP or HY.LO is displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-45
8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

8.2.3 Heating/cooling Control

Description
Heating/cooling control can be used only for Heating/cooling type.
In Heating/cooling control, the controller outputs the result of computation after splitting it
into heating-purpose and cooling-purpose signals. PID control or ON/OFF control can be
selected for each of the heating side and the cooling side.
Set the heating-side proportional band to “0” to perform ON/OFF control on the heating
side. Set the cooling-side proportional band to “0” to perform ON/OFF control on the
cooling side.
PV SP COM

Control computation Manual control output

0 to 100%

Heating/cooling computation

0 to 50% 50 to 100%

Cooling-side output limiter Heating-side output limiter

Cooling-side control output Heating-side control output

0 to 100% 0 to 100%

Details of Heating/cooling Control

In Heating/cooling control, PID control or ON/OFF control can be selected for each of the
heating side and the cooling side.
Set the proportional band to “0” to perform ON/OFF control.
The following describes the combination of heating side and cooling side.

When Both the Heating Side and Cooling Side are in PID Control
The following shows the formula and operation example.

DB
HOUT = ( OUT – – 50% ) × 2
2
DB P
COUT = ( 50% – OUT – )×2×
2 Pc
*: OUT: control output, HOUT: heating-side control output,
COUT: cooling-side control output, P: heating-side proportional band,
Pc: cooling-side proportional band, and DB: dead band

8-46 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

Positive Dead Band

Cooling-side control output (%) Heating-side control output (%)

100% 100%
Heating-side
Cooling-side control output
control output high limit
high limit (OH)
(OHc)

Dead Dead
band band
(DB) (DB)

0% 0%

0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100% 8

Control computation output
(OUT)

Control Functions
Negative Dead Band
Cooling-side control output (%) Heating-side control output (%)

100% 100%
Heating-side
Cooling-side control output
control output high limit
high limit (OH)
Dead
(OHc) band
Dead
(DB)
band
(DB)

0% 0%

0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Control computation output
(OUT)

CAUTION
• Set the ratio of the heating-side proportional band (P) to the cooling-side
proportional band (Pc) to within 1 to 5.
• Setting the heating-side or cooling-side integral time (I or Ic) to “OFF” results in
the integral time of both sides being set to “OFF.”

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-47
8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

When the Heating Side is in ON/OFF Control and the Cooling Side is in PID Control:
The following shows the formula and operation example.

Output turns on when

DB HYS
HOUT = OUT > ( 50% + + )
2 2
Other than this case, maintain current state.
DB
COUT = ( 50% – OUT – )×2
2
*: OUT: control output, HOUT: heating-side control output,
COUT: cooling-side control output, DB: dead band, and
HYS: heating-side hysteresis

Positive Dead Band

Cooling-side control output (%) Heating-side control output (%)

100% 100%

Cooling-side
control output
high limit
(OHc)

Dead
Dead band band
(DB) (DB)

0% 0%

0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Control computation output
Hysteresis (HYS)
(OUT)

Negative Dead Band

Cooling-side control output (%) Heating-side control output (%)

100% 100%
Dead band
Cooling-side (DB)
control output
high limit
(OHc)

Dead band
(DB)

0% 0%

0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Control computation output
(OUT) Hysteresis (HYS)

8-48 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

When the Heating Side is in PID Control and the Cooling Side is in ON/OFF Control:
The following shows the formula and operation example.
DB
HOUT = ( OUT – – 50% ) × 2
2
Output turns on when
DB HYSc
COUT = OUT < ( 50% – – )
2 2
Output turns off when
DB HYSc
OUT > ( 50% + + )
2 2
Other than these cases, maintain current state.
*: OUT: control output, HOUT: heating-side control output,
COUT: cooling-side control output, DB: dead band, and
HYSc: cooling-side hysteresis
8
Positive Dead Band
Cooling-side control output (%) Heating-side control output (%)

Control Functions
100% 100%
Heating-side
control output
high limit
(OH)

Dead band Dead band

(DB) (DB)

0% 0%

0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Control computation output
Hysteresis (HYSc) (OUT)

Negative Dead Band

Cooling-side control output (%) Heating-side control output (%)

100% 100%
Heating-side
control output
high limit
Dead band Dead band (OH)
(DB) (DB)

0% 0%

0% 50% 100% 0% 50% 100%

Control computation output
Hysteresis (HYSc) (OUT)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-49
8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

When both the Heating Side and Cooling Side are in ON/OFF Control:
The following shows the operation example.
Cooling-side hysteresis (HYSc) ON

Neutral (OFF)
50%

ON
Heating-side hysteresis (HYS)

Positive dead band (DB)

Dead Band (DB)

In Heating/cooling control, the positive dead band denotes the zone where none of the
heating-side and cooling-side outputs are presented. The negative dead band denotes
the zone where both of the heating-side and cooling-side outputs are presented.
Output (%) Output (%)
100 100

Cooling-side Heating-side Cooling-side Heating-side

output output output output

0 0

0 50 100(%) 0 50 100(%)
Positive dead band Negative dead band
Value of control output before split into Value of control output before split into
heating- and cooling-side outputs heating- and cooling-side outputs

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PID: PID control
ONOF: ON/OFF control (1
point of hysteresis)
CNT Control type EASY CTL
ONOF2: ON/OFF control (2
points of hysteresis)
H/C: Heating/cooling control
Hysteresis (in ON/OFF
In ON/OFF control: 0.0 to
control, or Position
100.0% of PV input range span
proportional control)
(EUS)
HYS Heating-side ON/OFF EASY
In Heating/cooling control or
control hysteresis
Position proportional control:
(in Heating/cooling
0.0 to 100.0%
control) PID
Cooling-side ON/OFF
HYSc EASY 0.0 to 100.0%
control hysteresis
Output dead band In Heating/cooling control:
(in Heating/cooling -100.0 to 50.0%
DB EASY
control or Position In Position proportional control:
proportional control) 1.0 to 10.0%
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, or R) is displayed on Group display while the parameter HYS,
HYSc, or DB is displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

8-50 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)

8.2.4 PD Control (Stable Control in Which a Setpoint is not Exceeded)

Description
This control type performs control in which integral action (I action) is excluded from PID
action.
Set the integral time (I or Ic) to OFF.
It is useful when stable control in which a setpoint is not exceeded is desired for integral
processes in which constant flows are delivered.
The following shows the PID control computation formula.

 d 
OUT = 100 e + Td • ∆PV  + MR
P  dt

where OUT: control output, e: deviation (PV-SP), P: proportional band, Td: derivative time,
∆PV: PVn-PVn-1 (n-1: value before one control period), and MR: manual reset
8
The following table shows combination of PD control and control mode (CTLM).
Control mode (CTLM)

Control Functions
SGL CAS1 CAS PVSW PVSEL
PD control √ N/A √ √ √
√: Available, N/A: Not available

The following table shows combination of PD control and output method.

Output method
Time Position
Current ON/OFF
proportional proportional
output output
output output
PD control √ √ N/A √
√: Available, N/A: Not available

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.0 to 999.9%
P Proportional band EASY
When 0.0% is set, it operates as 0.1%.
OFF: Disable PID
D Derivative time EASY
1 to 6000 s
MR Manual reset EASY -5.0 to 105.0%
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, or R) is displayed on Group display while the parameter P,
D, or MR is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-51
 8.3 Setting PID Control Mode (ALG)

Description
There are two PID control modes: standard PID control mode and fixed-point control
mode.
Select a PID control computation formula shown in the following table according to the
control mode or operation mode.

Single-loop Control, Cascade Primary-loop Control, Loop Control with PV Switching,

Loop Control with PV Auto-selector
Operation mode
Program
Program
operation (when Local operation Remote operation
operation
in hold operation) LOC+AUTO REM+AUTO
PRG+AUTO
PRG+AUTO
PV derivative type PV derivative type
Standard PID Deviation derivative Deviation derivative
(output bump at SP (output bump at SP
control mode type type
change) change)
PV derivative type PV derivative type PV derivative type PV derivative type
Fixed-point
(output bump at SP (output bumpless at (output bumpless at (output bump at SP
control mode
change) SP change) SP change) change)

Cascade Control
Operation mode
Primary-loop
Program
Program
operation (when Local operation Remote operation
operation
in hold operation) LOC+CAS REM+CAS
PRG+CAS
PRG+CAS
PV derivative type PV derivative type
Standard PID Deviation derivative Deviation derivative
(output bump at SP (output bump at SP
control mode type type
change) change)
PV derivative type PV derivative type PV derivative type PV derivative type
Fixed-point
(output bump at SP (output bumpess at (output bump at SP (output bump at SP
control mode
change) SP change) change) change)

Operation mode
Seconary-loop
Local operation Cascade operation
LSP+AUTO CAS+AUTO
PV derivative type
Standard PID Deviation derivative
(output bump at SP
control mode type
change)
PV derivative type PV derivative type
Fixed-point
(output bumpess at (output bump at SP
control mode
SP change) change)

PV Derivative Type PID

This is a PID control method in which the derivative action works only on the PV.
It can also eliminate output bump due to SP changing operation in Local mode.
The following shows the PV derivative type PID control computation formula.

 d ΔPV 
OUT = 100 e + 1
P  Ti ∫ e • dt + Td dt
• 

where OUT: control output, e: deviation (PV-SP), P: proportional band, Ti: integral time,
Td: derivative time, and ∆PV: PVn-PVn-1 (n-1: value before one control period)

8-52 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.3 Setting PID Control Mode (ALG)

PV Derivative Type PID (output bump at SP change)

SP

PV OUT

PV Derivative Type PID (output bumpless at SP change)

SP

PV OUT

Deviation Derivative Type PID

The PID control method in which derivative action works for the deviation value = PV – 8
SP.
The derivative action works for a SP change, so this method is useful for cases like

Control Functions
Cascade secondary-loop control where the SP-following capability is important.
The following shows the deviation derivative type PID control computation formula.

 d e
OUT = 100  e + 1
P  Ti ∫ e • dt + Td dt
• 

where OUT: control output, e: deviation (PV-SP), P: proportional band, Ti: integral time,
and Td: derivative time

SP

PV OUT

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Standard PID control mode
ALG PID control mode PRO CTL
1: Fixed-point control mode.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-53
 8.4 Switching PID
8.4.1 Switching PID According to Target Setpoint Number (SPNO)

Description
The segment PID selection selects a group of PID parameters according to switching
segment of the program pattern.
The segment PID number selection (S.PID) can be set for each segment.
For the operation except the program pattern operation, the PID parameter is selected by
the PID number which is specified in the parameter L.PID (Local PID number selection).

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
Zone PID 2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON STD CTL
selection by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
Segment PID
S.PID EASY 1 to 8 PROG
number selection
Local PID
L.PID EASY 1 to 8 LOC
number selection
PID number
PID EASY 1 to 8 MODE
(display only)
Note 1: A currently-used PID number is displayed for the parameter PID.

8-54 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.4 Switching PID

8.4.2 Switching PID According to PV

Description
The PID switching according to PV is a function that switches between the groups of PID
parameters according to the PV.
The maximum number of PID groups to be switched is 8. (Set RP1 to RP7.)
This function is useful for reactors in which the chemical reaction gain changes
depending on the temperature.

The figure below shows an example of dividing the PV input range from the maximum
value to the minimum value into seven zones by reference points 1 to 6. (Set RP1 to
RP6.)
If the PV is currently positioned at this point,
control is based on the PID of group 6.
8
Maximum value of PV input range

Control Functions
PID of group 7
Reference point 6
PID of group 6
Reference point 5
PID of group 5
Reference point 4
PID of group 4
Reference point 3
Reference point 2 PID of group 3
PID of group 2
Reference point 1
PID of group 1
Minimum value of PV input range
Change in PV

The PV input range can be divided into the number of zones that is set in the reference
point.
Hysteresis at the time of zone switch can be set.
► Setpoint PD: 8.4.6 Setting Hysteresis at Time of Zone Switch

Reference deviation can be set at the same time.

► Reference deviation: 8.4.5 Switching PID according to Deviation (Reference Deviation)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
Zone PID 2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON STD CTL
selection by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Reference point (EU)
RP1 to RP7 STD ZONE
1 to 7 (RP1 ≤ RP2 ≤ RP3 ≤ RP4 ≤ RP5
≤ RP6 ≤ RP7)
PID number 1 to 8, R: PID group for reference
PID EASY MODE
(display only) deviation
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
Note2: A currently-used PID number is displayed for the parameter PID.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-55
8.4 Switching PID

8.4.3 Switching PID According to SP

Description
The zone PID selection by SP switches between the groups of PID parameters according
to the SP. The maximum number of PID groups to be switched is 8. (Set RP1 to RP7)

The figure below shows the example of switching the group of PID parameters according
to the SP. It shows an example of dividing the PV input range from the maximum value to
the minimum value into five zones by reference points 1 to 4. (Set RP1 to RP4.)
SP

Maximum value of
PV input range
(PID of group 5)

Reference point 4

(PID of group 4)

Reference point 3

SP (PID of group 3)

Reference point 2
(PID of group 2)

Reference point 1

(PID of group1)
Minimum value of
PV input range Time

PID No. to be selected PID of group 1 PID of group 3 PID of grop 2 PID of group 5

PID of group 2 PID of group 3

PID of group 4

The PV input range can be divided into the number of zones that is set in the reference
point.

Reference deviation can be set at the same time.

► Reference deviation: 8.4.5 Switching PID according to Deviation (Reference Deviation)

8-56 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.4 Switching PID

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
Zone PID 2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON STD CTL
selection by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Reference point 1 (EU)
RP1 to RP7 STD ZONE
to 7 (RP1 ≤ RP2 ≤ RP3 ≤ RP4 ≤ RP5
≤ RP6 ≤ RP7)

PID number 1 to 8, R: PID group for reference

PID
(display only)
EASY
deviation
MODE 8
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
Note2: A currently-used PID number is displayed for the parameter PID.

Control Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-57
8.4 Switching PID

8.4.4 Switching PID According to Target SP

Description
The zone PID selection by target SP switches between the groups of PID parameters
according to the target SP.

The figure below shows the example of switching the group of PID parameters according
to the target SP. It shows an example of dividing the PV input range from the maximum
value to the minimum value into five zones by reference points 1 to 4. (Set RP1 to RP4.)

SP

Maximum value of
PV input range
(PID of group 5)
800ºC
Reference point 4

(PID of group 4)

Reference point 3

Target SP
(PID of group 3)

350ºC
Reference point 2

250ºC (PID of group 2)

Reference point 1
Current SP
100ºC
(PID of group 1)

Minimum value of
PV input range Time

PID No. to be selected PID of group 1 PID of group 3 PID of group 2 PID of group 5

Target SP is Target SP is Target SP is

changed from changed from changed from
100ºC to 350ºC 350ºC to 250ºC 250ºC to 800ºC

The PV input range can be divided into the number of zones that is set in the reference
point.

Reference deviation can be set at the same time.

► Reference deviation: 8.4.5 Switching PID according to Deviation (Reference Deviation)

8-58 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.4 Switching PID

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
Zone PID 2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON STD CTL
selection by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Reference point 1 (EU)
RP1 to RP7 STD ZONE
to 7 (RP1 ≤ RP2 ≤ RP3 ≤ RP4 ≤ RP5
≤ RP6 ≤ RP7)
PID number 1 to 8, R: PID group for reference
PID EASY MODE
(display number) deviation
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
8
Note2: A currently-used PID number is displayed for the parameter PID.

Control Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-59
8.4 Switching PID

8.4.5 Switching PID According to Deviation (Reference Deviation)

Description
The zone PID selection by deviation switches between the groups of PID parameters
according to the amount of deviation.
This function is called “reference deviation.”
In the fixed point control, if the actual amount of deviation exceeds the setpoint of the
reference deviation, the controller automatically changes to the PID parameter group
(PID of group R) set for the zone. If the actual amount of deviation becomes smaller than
the setpoint of reference deviation, the controller changes to the PID parameter group
appropriate for the zone.
For example, if the deviation is large, PV can be reached more rapidly to SP by
increasing the proportional gain (i.e., narrowing the proportional band). Switching PID
according to deviation is effective when ZON is set to 1, 2, 4. The zone PID selection by
reference deviation has priority over other zone PID selections.

Maximum value of
PV input range
PV
Reference point 2

Reference deviation (RDV)

Reference deviation (RDV)

SP
Reference point 1

Minimum value of
PV input range

PID No. to be selected PID of group R PID of group R PID of group 2

PID of group 2 PID of group R: PID for reference deviation

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
Zone PID 2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON STD CTL
selection by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
OFF: Disable
Reference
RDV STD 0.0 + 1 digit to 100.0% of PV input ZONE
deviation
range span (EUS)
PID number 1 to 8, R: PID group for reference
PID EASY MODE
(display only) deviation
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
Note2: A currently-used PID number is displayed for the parameter PID.

8-60 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.4 Switching PID

8.4.6 Setting Hysteresis at Time of PID Switch

Description
When the zone PID selection is selected, hysteresis at time of each zone switch can be
set.
The following shows the operation example of hysteresis at time of zone switch.
PV

Reference point 1
Hysteresis

0.5% of PV input range span
8

Control Functions
PID of group 1 PID of group 2 PID of group 1 PID of group 2

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Zone PID switching 0.0 to 10.0% of PV input
RHY STD ZONE
hysteresis range span (EUS)
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

8.4.7 Switching PID Irrespective of Operation Mode

Description
When the local PID selection is selected (ZON = 5), the PID group set in the local PID
number selection (L.PID) is used, irrespective of the operation mode.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
Zone PID 2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON STD CTL
selection by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
Local PID
L.PID EASY 1 to 8 LOC
number selection
PID number
PID EASY 1 to 8 MODE
(display only)
Note 1: A currently-used PID number is displayed for the parameter PID.

8.4.8 Switching PID by Contact Input

Description

Setting Details
► Contact input assignment: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-61
 8.5 Suppressing Overshoot (Super Function)

Description
The Super function monitors the deviation for evidence that there is a danger of
overshoot, and on sensing such danger automatically changes the setpoint temporarily
to a somewhat lower value (sub-SP).
Once the danger of overshoot appears diminished, the function returns the effective SP
gradually to the true SP. “Fuzzy ratiocination” techniques are employed in the algorithms
used to change the SP to the lower temporary value, and to return it gradually to the true
SP.

Operation Diagram

PV

Sub-SP

Original SP

PV

Time
Start of
fuzzy inference

Control System Block Diagram

SP selector
SP
SP PID PV
setting Process
computation

Sub-SP
Target Manipulated variable
SP Sub-SP
setting

8-62 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.5 Suppressing Overshoot (Super Function)

Example of Overshoot Suppression Control for Setpoint Changes

Temperature

Temperature

Time Time
SUPER is not used SUPER is used

Example of Overshoot Suppression Control for Ramp-to-soak Transition

8
Temperature

Temperature

Control Functions
Sub-SP

Time Time

SUPER is not used SUPER is used

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
1: Overshoot suppressing function
(normal mode)
2: Hunting suppressing function
SC Super function EASY (stable mode) TUNE
3: Hunting suppressing function
(response mode)
4: Overshoot suppressing function
(strong suppressing mode)
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

The setting SC=4 is effective compared with SC=1. However, the hunting may occur until
the PV reaches SP. Use it as usage.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-63
 8.6 Suppressing Hunting (Super2 Function)

Description
The Super2 function suppresses the hunting effect of the controller without re-tuning the
PID parameters.
Hunting means the PV becomes unstable and oscillates around SP.
PV SP PV
SUPER2 = ON

Hunting

● In hunting condition, the Super2 function selects the output from process model as PV
signal.
● The process model removes a factor of dead time from the actual process.
● The real process is under the open-loop condition.
● After hunting is suppressed, the Super2 function selects real PV signal, and carry out
the standard feedback control.

+ OUT PV
PID control Process
SP
–

CPV Process
model
PV

Effects of Super2
Load change

PV SP PV
SUPER2 = ON

Hunting

Temperature change
PV
PID parameters are set at this condition. SUPER2 = ON

Hunting

8-64 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.6 Suppressing Hunting (Super2 Function))

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
1: Overshoot suppressing function
(normal mode)
2: Hunting suppressing function
SC Super function EASY (stable mode) TUNE
3: Hunting suppressing function
(response mode)
4: Overshoot suppressing function
(strong suppressing mode).
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

Set SC=2 when there are a lot of disturbances, and much hunting occurs.
Set SC=3 when SP is changed frequently. Hunting suppressing effect is smaller than that
of SC=2, however, responsiveness is good. 8
The Super function (SC=2 and 3) does not work in direct action.

Control Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-65
 8.7 Suppressing Integral Action (Anti-reset Wind-up)

Description
Where there is a large deviation at the start of the control operation, for example, integral
outputs are accumulated and the PV exceeds the SP, thereby causing the output to
overshoot. To avoid this, the controller provides an anti-reset wind-up function for
suppressing an extreme integral output by stopping PID computations. Same applies to
the case of undershoot.
PID computations stop
100 PID computations restart
OH
OH: Output high limit
Output (%)

0
Time

SP
PV
PV Deviation band (AR):
the ratio of (PV–SP) to proportional band
Time

The parameter AR sets the point (by deviation band (%)) to restart the PID computation
that is suspended by the controller’s anti-reset windup function. PID computation restarts
when the deviation band has decreased to the AR setpoint. When the parameter AR is
set to AUTO, the controller automatically determines the point at which to restart the PID
computation.
\PV – SP \
Deviation band (= Setpoint of AR) = × 100 (%)
Proportional band

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
AR Anti-reset windup STD AUTO, 50.0 to 200.0% TUNE
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

8-66 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.8 Performing Non-linear PID Control

Description
If a deviation (E) is smaller than the non-linear control gap width (GW), it is computed as
a proportional added the non-lenear control gain (GG).

Proportional Band (CPB) = Proportional Band (P) / GG

* | E | ≤ GW / 2
However, CPB is limited by 0.1 to 999.9%.

OUT PV
100% EU(100%)
8
OUT PV

Control Functions

GW SP=EU(50%)

0% EU(0%)

Control output will change smoothly (i.e., without any bumps) when CPB switches.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF, 0.0%+1digit to 50.0%
GW Non-linear control gap width PRO of PV input range span
(EUS) TUNE
GG Non-linear control gain PRO 0.001 to 1.000
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-67
 8.9 Adjusting Auto-tuning Operation

Description
Auto-tuning Type
“Normal” of auto-tuning type requires a rapidly rising PID constant. This type is useful for
processes that allow some overshooting.
On the other hand, “stable” of auto-tuning type requires a slowly rising PID constant.

Auto-tuning Output Limiter

When executing auto-tuning, the control output high and low limits can be set.
When the control output low limit > AT.OL, or AT.OH < control output high limit, auto-
tuning is limited by the control output low or high limit.
In Heating/cooling control, AT.OH and AT.OL do not work.

Note
In time proportional output, the output is turned on and off irrespective of the upper/lower limit.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Normal
AT.TY Auto-tuning type STD
1: Stability
Output high limit in
AT.OH PRO TUNE
auto-tuning -5.0 to 105.0% (Disabled in
Output low limit in Heating/cooling control)
AT.OL PRO
auto-tuning
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

► SP bias in auto-tuning: 6.2 Performing and Canceling Auto-tuning

8-68 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.10 Setting SP Limiter

Description
The SP high and low limits can be set to restrict the SP to the operating range between
those limits whether in PROG (program), LOC (local), or REM (remote) mode. They
works to the SP of all SP groups.
In Cascade control, the SP high and low limits can be set for both Loop1 and Loop 2.
(%)
100.0

High limit of SP

8
Actual SP

Operating range of actual SP

Control Functions
Low limit of SP

SPL SPH
0.0
0.0 100.0(%)
Setting range

► SP group: 6.2 Setting Target Setpoint

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SPH SP high limit STD 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
MPV
SPL SP low limit STD (EU), (SPL<SPH)

Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-69
 8.11 Setting Program Time Unit

Description
The program time unit is applied to the segment time (TIME), segment ramp-rate (TM.
RT), wait time (WT.TM1 to WT.TM5), time event (T.ON1 to T.ON16 and T.OF1 to T.OF16),
and starting time of program operation (S.TM).

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
HH.MM: hour.minute (when the
segment ramp-rate setting is
selected in the segment setting
method (SEG.T), HH.SS
means "per 1 hour.")
TMU Program time unit EASY CTL
MM.SS: minute.second (when the
segment ramp-rate setting is
selected in the segment setting
method (SEG.T), HH.SS
means "per 1 minute.")

8-70 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.12 Forcing Local Setpoint (LSP) to Track Program
Setpoint or Remote Setpoint (SP Tracking)
Description
SP tracking function is the function to force the local setpoint (LSP) to track the program
setpoint or remote setpoint when the operation mode is switched from program (PROG)
or remote (REM) to local (LOC) mode.
The function is effective to prevent abrupt PV changes.
SP tracking enabled SP tracking disabled

LSP LSP

8
PV
Program Program
SP or PV SP or

Control Functions
Remote SP Remote SP
Time Time
PROG or REM → LOCAL mode switch PROG or REM → LOCAL mode switch

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SPT SP tracking selection STD OFF, ON SPS
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-71
 8.13 Setting Controller Action at Power ON (Restart Mode)

Description
For details, see Chapter 15, “Power Failure Recovery Processing.”

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CONT: Continue action set before
power failure. (Continue operation
mode.)
MAN: Start from MAN. (Continue
operation mode.)
R.MD Restart Mode STD SYS
RESET: Start from AUTO and RESET.
Outputs the preset output value.
Set how the controller should recover
from a power failure of 5 seconds or
more.
Operation mode: PROG, RESET, LOCAL, REMOTE

The preset output (PO) is output in MAN or RESET mode.

8-72 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 8.14 Setting Time between Powering on Controller
and Starting Control (Restart Timer)
Description
The time between power on and the instant where controller starts control computation
can be set.

Operation start time = Operating time of controller initialization after power on.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
R.TM Restart Timer STD 0 to 10 s SYS

Control Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 8-73
Blank Page
Chapter 9 Program Pattern Functions

9.1 Setting the Setting Method of Program Pattern

The segment setting method refers to an action control method within a segment.
The segment setting method is common to all program patterns.

Segment time can be selected between the two criteria below.

• Segment time setting
• Segment ramp-rate setting

CAUTION
If the Segment Setting Method (SEG.T) parameter is changed, the program patterns
created and stored so far will be all cleared (initialized) !! Be careful.

Setting Details 9
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol

Program Pattern Functions

symbol level
Segment setting TIME: Segment time setting
SEG.T EASY CTL
method TM.RT: Segment ramp-rate setting

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-1
9.1 Setting the Setting Method of Program Pattern

9.1.1 Setting the Program Pattern Using the Segment Time

Description
The segment time criterion bases segment operation on the target setpoint (TSP) and
the segment time (TIME.)
The target setpoint is the control target to be attained at segment end, whereas the
segment time is the time duration from the start of that segment to the end.
PV
n=1 to 99
Final target setpoint：TSP

Segment-n
operation
Target setpoint of last segment
(Start target setpoint if
program just started)

Segment time
(The unit of time is
TIME determined by “TMU”.)

Time

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Final target 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
TSP EASY
setpoint (EU) (Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
-: Unregistered PROG
Segment time
TIME EASY 0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or
setting
“minute.second”)
Note 1: When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is
also displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

If the setting is 0.00, the program advances to the next segment after one control period.
Use the parameter TMU to set the time unit. (Common in the instrument.)
When setting the program pattern via communication, set the time in minutes when the
time unit is set to hour.minute and set the time in seconds when the time unit is set to
minute.second.

9-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.1 Setting the Setting Method of Program Pattern

9.1.2 Setting the Program Pattern using the Ramp-rate and Segment Time

Description
The segment ramp time criterion bases segment operation on the target setpoint (TSP)
and the segment ramp-rate (TM.RT.)
Ramp time in segment ramp-up or ramp-down is expressed as an amount of change
(between target setpoints) per hour or per minute.
The unit of time is selected with parameter TMU. When segment is set for soaking at a
constant target setpoint, ramp time expresses the time duration of the segment.

Segment time during soak operations

When the target setpoint of the current segment is the same as that of the last segment,
soak operations are performed for the current segment.
The time duration of the soak segment is set with the ramp time parameter TM.RM.
PV
n=1 to 99
9
Target setpoint of last segment Segment-n
(Start target setpoint if operation

Program Pattern Functions

program just started)
Final target setpoint：TSP

TM.RT

Time

Segment time during ramp-up operations

When the target setpoint of the current segment is higher than that of the last segment,
ramp-up operations are performed for the current segment.
During ramp-up, the amount of change (between target setpoints) per hour or per minute
is set with the ramp time parameter TM.RM.
PV
n = 1 to 99
Final target setpoint：TSP
Segment-n
operation
Target setpoint of last segment
(Start target setpoint if
program just started)
TM.RT Segment ramp-rate
(The unit of time is
determined by “TMU”.)

Time

“TM.RT” sets the amount

of change in this area per
TM.RT hour or per minute.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-3
9.1 Setting the Setting Method of Program Pattern

Segment time during ramp-down operations

When the target setpoint of the current segment is lower than that of the last segment,
ramp-down operations are performed for the current segment.
During ramp-down, the amount of change (between target setpoints) per hour or per
minute is set with the ramp time parameter TM.RM.
PV

Target setpoint of last segment n = 1 to 99

(Start target setpoint if
program just started) TM.RT

Segment-n
operation Final target setpoint：TSP

Time

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Final target 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
TSP EASY
setpoint (EU) (Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
-: Unregistered
Ramp: 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input
PROG
Segment ramp- range span (EUS) / 1 hour or 1
TM.RT EASY
rate setting minute
Soak: 0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.
minute” or “minute.second”)
Note 1: When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is
also displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

If it is set to 0.0% of the input range span, or the segment time 0.00, the program moves
to the next segment after one control period.
Use the parameter TMU to set the time unit. (Common in the instrument.)
When setting the program pattern via communication, set the time in minutes when the
time unit is set to hour.minute and set the time in seconds when the time unit is set to
minute.second.

When program pattern-2 retransmission is selected, priority is given to the conditions for
the program pattern for control.
When the control program pattern is set to ramp and the retransmission program pattern
is set to soak, the program pattern is set by the ramp. When the control program pattern
is set to soak and the retransmission program pattern is set to ramp, the program pattern
is set by the time.

Segment for control Segment for Segment time (TM.RT) TSP action for
retransmission retransmission
Ramp Ramp Ramp setting -
Ramp Soak Ramp setting Soak action during the
time to reach the control
TSP
Soak Ramp Time setting Ramp action according
to the time setting
Soak Soak Time setting -

9-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.1 Setting the Setting Method of Program Pattern

9.1.3 Setting the Program Time Unit

Description
The program time unit is applied to the segment time (TIME), segment ramp-rate (TM.
RT), wait time (WT.TM1 to WT.TM5), time event (T.ON1 to T.ON16 and T.OF1 to T.OF16),
and starting time of program operation (S.TM).

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
HH.MM: hour.minute (when the
segment ramp-rate setting is
selected in the segment setting
method (SEG.T), HH.SS
means "per 1 hour.")
TMU Program time unit EASY CTL
MM.SS: minute.second (when the
segment ramp-rate setting is
selected in the segment setting 9
method (SEG.T), HH.SS
means "per 1 minute.")

Program Pattern Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-5
 9.2 PID Selection Method
There are two PID selection methods. One is segment PID number selection and the
other is zone PID selection. When segment PID number selection is selected, the PID
number is set for each segment, and when zone PID selection is selected, the zone is
set and the PID constant is selected. The factory default is zone PID selection.

9.2.1 Segment PID Selection

Description
Segment PID control automatically switches PID settings to those set for each segment
of the program pattern (in programmed operations.)
The PID number is set for each segment at the same time as when the program pattern
is set.
during ramp-up and rampdown.
The following example shows how PID settings change in segment PID control.
PV Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5 Seg.6 Seg.7
1000
If the program is currently at
segment No. 5, control is
based on the PID constants
500 set for PID No. 1.

PID of goup 2 PID of group 1 PID of group 3

S.PID=2 S.PID=1 S.PID=3
Seg.: Segment
S.PID: Segment PID number

► Segment PID Selection: 8.4 Switching PID

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON Zone PID selection EASY CTL
by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
Segment PID
S.PID EASY 1 to 8 PROG
number selection

9-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.2 PID Selection Method

9.2.2 Zone PID Selection

Description
Zone PID control automatically switches PID settings according to PV.
Zone PID control is used with reactors that change chemical reaction gain according to
temperature.
For the function and setting ranges, see “8.4 Switching PID.”

► Segment PID Selection: 8.4 Switching PID

9.2.3 Local PID Selection

Description
When local PID selection is selected, the program works according to the PID group
number set in the local PID number selection (L.PID).
Available only for the L.PID when ZON = 0 or 5. If set to “Local PID selection,” local PID 9
is selected irrespective of the operation modes.

Program Pattern Functions

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection
by PV)
2: Zone PID selection (selection
ZON Zone PID selection EASY CTL
by target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection
by SP)
5: Local PID selection
Set a PID group number to use.
1 to 8
* Available only for the L.PID
Local PID PID when ZON = 0 or 5.
L.PID EASY LOC
number selection * If set to “Local PID selection,”
local PID is selected
irrespective of the operation
modes.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-7
 9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)
9.3.1 Starting operation at starting target setpoint (SSP) (STC=SSP)

Description
The start target setpoint is the target setpoint at which programmed operation starts.
When selected as the start condition, the target setpoint can be changed from the
starting target setpoint (SSP) to the target setpoint (TSP.) This change is made totally
independent of PV, using the (TSP - SSP)/TIME ramp.
Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

Program pattern
for control
TSP

Program pattern
SSP for retransmission

SSP
TSP

Program operation start (PRG) Time

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Starting target
SSP EASY (EU)
setpoint
(Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
SSP: Program operation begins
with the starting target setpoint. PROG
RAMP: Ramp-prioritized PV start
STC Start code EASY
TIME: Time-prioritized PV start
LSP: Local-mode start
RSP: Remote-mode start
Note 1: When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is
also displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

9-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

9.3.2 Ramp-prioritized PV start (STC=RAMP)

Description
Example of a soak segment for segment No. 2 of the control program pattern

When ramp-prioritized PV start is the selected start condition, the control program pattern
ramp is the start trigger. The control program pattern contains points C1, D1 and E1.
The retransmission program pattern will start at the same time as the control program
pattern does. For example, if C1 is the selected start point for the control program
pattern, C2 will be that for the retransmission program pattern.
Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3 Segment 4

a A1 Program pattern
B1 for control
b
9
C1

Program Pattern Functions

c
Program pattern
TSP B2 A2 for retransmission
d
D1
SSP C2

E1 D2
e
E2
SSP
Program operation start (PRG) Time

Program start point is determined by the control PV as follows.

PV at start Operation-starting point for Operation-starting point for
control retransmission
a C1 C2
b C1 C2
c C1 C2
d D1 D2
e E1 (SSP) E2 (SSP)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-9
9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

Example of a soak segment for segment No. 3 of the control program pattern

When ramp-prioritized PV start is the selected start condition, the control program pattern
ramp is the start trigger. The control program pattern contains points A1 to E1.
The retransmission program pattern will start at the same time as the control program
pattern does. For example, if A1 is the selected start point for the control program
pattern, A2 will be that for the retransmission program pattern.
Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

a
A1 Program pattern
for control
TSP
b
B1
c
C1

d
D1
SSP Program pattern
C2 B2 A2 for retransmission
E1
e D2

E2
Program operation start (PRG) Time

Program start point is determined by the control PV as follows.

PV at start Operation-starting point for Operation-starting point for
control retransmission
a A1 A2
b B1 B2
c C1 C2
d D1 D2
e E1 (SSP) E2 (SSP)

9-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

Example of no soak segment in control program pattern

When ramp-prioritized PV start is the selected start condition, the control program pattern
ramp is the start trigger. The control program pattern contains points A1 to E1.
For some PV, the program advances through the segments up to the point at which
the ramp is reversed. When PV is set to point a, the program advances through the
segments up to the point A1 at which the ramp is reversed.

Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

a TSP
A1

b
B1
c
C1
Program pattern
for control
9
d
D1

Program Pattern Functions

SSP Program pattern
C2 B2 A2 for retransmission
E1
e D2

E2
Program operation start (PRG) Time

PV at start Operation-starting point for Operation-starting point for

control retransmission
a A1 A2
b B1 B2
c C1 C2
d D1 D2
e E1 (SSP) E2 (SSP)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-11
9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

Example of programs with only ramp-up segments

When Ramp-prioritized PV start is the selected start condition, the control program
pattern ramp is the start trigger. The control program pattern contains points A1 to E1.
For some PV, the program advances through the segments up to the point at which the
ramp is reversed.
The retransmission program pattern will start at the same time as the control program
pattern does. For example, if B1 is the selected start point for the control program
pattern, B2 will be that for the retransmission program pattern.
When the program operation starting point is set to A1, program operation is performed
for one control period, and program operation ends according to the junction code (JC)
for segment 2.
Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2
a TSP
A1
Program pattern
for control
b
B1
c
C1

d
D1
A2
SSP
C2 B2 Program pattern
E1 for retransmission
e D2

E2
Program operation start (PRG) Time

PV at start Operation-starting point for Operation-starting point for

control retransmission
a A1 A2
b B1 B2
c C1 C2
d D1 D2
e E1 (SSP) E2 (SSP)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Starting target
SSP EASY (EU)
setpoint
(Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
SSP: Program operation begins
with the starting target setpoint. PROG
RAMP: Ramp-prioritized PV start
STC Start code EASY
TIME: Time-prioritized PV start
LSP: Local-mode start
RSP: Remote-mode start
Note 1: When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is
also displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

9-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

9.3.3 Time-prioritized PV start (STC=TIME)

Description
With Time-prioritized PV starts, operation start is triggered by segment time, which sets
the time from the PV at program start to the target setpoint (TSP) of segment 1.

CAUTION
Time-prioritized PV start (STC=TIME) cannot be selected when the segment setting
method (SEG.T) is Segment ramp-rate (TM.RT.)

The segment ramps are determined by the segment time (TIME.)

The control program pattern will start at PV.
The retransmission program pattern will start at the SSP.

Ramp rate = (Target setpoint (TSP) - PV) / Segment time 9

The start point of control program pattern will be a point a - e. Because the

Program Pattern Functions

retransmission program pattern will start at the same point as the control program pattern
does, it will start at SSP. Even though segment 2 is set to ramp, program operation starts
from segment 1.
Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

a
Program pattern
b for control

c TSP Program pattern
for retransmission
SSP
d
TSP
SSP

Time
Program operation start (PRG)

PV at start Operation-starting point for Operation-starting point for

control retransmission
a a SSP for retransmission
b b SSP for retransmission
c c SSP for retransmission
d d SSP for retransmission
e e SSP for retransmission

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-13
9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Starting target
SSP EASY (EU)
setpoint
(Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
SSP: Program operation begins
with the starting target setpoint. PROG
RAMP: Ramp-prioritized PV start
STC Start code EASY
TIME: Time-prioritized PV start
LSP: Local-mode start
RSP: Remote-mode start
Note 1: When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is
also displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

9-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

9.3.4 Starting operation at local target setpoint (STC=LSP)

Description
When selected as the start condition, the target setpoint can be changed from the
local target setpoint (LSP) to the target setpoint (TSP.) This change is made totally
independent of PV, using the (TSP - LSP)/TIME ramp.
Local-mode start (STC=LSP) cannot be selected when the segment setting method (SEG.
T) is Segment ramp-rate (TM.RT.)
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3

TSP

TSP

9
Local target
TSP Program pattern

Program Pattern Functions

setpoint (LSP) in
SSP for control
Local operation
(for control) Program pattern
SSP for retransmission
Local target
setpoint (LSP) in
Local operation (for
retransmission)
Program operation start (LOC → PRG) Time

Seg.: Segment

(1) When LSP and SSP are different

Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3

TSP

TSP
Local target
setpoint (LSP) in
Local operation

Program pattern
for control
TSP

SSP

Program operation start (LOC → PRG) Time

Seg.: Segment

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-15
9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

(2) When LSP and SSP are different

Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3

TSP
Program pattern
for control
TSP
Local target
setpoint (LSP) in
Local operation

SSP TSP

Program operation start (LOC → PRG) Time

Seg.: Segment

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Starting target
SSP EASY (EU)
setpoint
(Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
SSP: Program operation begins
with the starting target setpoint. PROG
RAMP: Ramp-prioritized PV start
STC Start code EASY
TIME: Time-prioritized PV start
LSP: Local-mode start
RSP: Remote-mode start
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Local target
LSP EASY (EU) LOC
setpoint
(Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
Note 1: When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is
also displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

9-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.3 Setting the Program Starting Conditions (STC)

9.3.5 Starting operation at remote setpoint (STC=RSP)

Description
When selected as the start condition, the target setpoint can be changed from the
local target setpoint (LSP) to the target setpoint (TSP.) This change is made totally
independent of PV, using the (TSP - RSP)/TIME ramp.
Remote-mode start (STC=RSP) cannot be selected when the segment setting method
(SEG.T) is Segment ramp-rate (TM.RT.)
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3

TSP

TSP

9

Remote setpoint
TSP Program pattern
(RSP) in Remote

Program Pattern Functions

SSP for control
operation (for
control) Program pattern
Local target SSP for retransmission
setpoint (LSP) in
Local operation
(for control)
Time
Program operation start (LOC → PRG)
Seg.: Segment

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
Starting target
SSP EASY (EU)
setpoint
(Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
SSP: Program operation begins
with the starting target setpoint. PROG
RAMP: Ramp-prioritized PV start
STC Start code EASY
TIME: Time-prioritized PV start
LSP: Local-mode start
RSP: Remote-mode start
Note 1: When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is
also displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-17
 9.4 Setting the Wait Functions
9.4.1 Program Wait at Segment End

Description
Program wait at segment end makes the program wait at segment end if PV has not
attained the target setpoint.
The program will advance to the next segment the moment that the measured input
attains the wait zone.
If the measured input does not attain the wait zone within the wait time, the program will
advance to the next segment the moment the wait time elapses.

• Operation when the measured input attains the wait zone before the wait time
elapses
From when the wait operation starts, if the measured input attains the wait zone, the wait
state is changed to the operating state and the program advances to the next segment.
During the wait state, the program timer is stopped, therefore the time event value is
held.
Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2

TSP
Upper-side wait zone
Lower-side wait zone

The moment that the PV attains the wait zone,

the program advances to the next segment.

PV

Time
Wait time
Wait operation TSP: Final target setpoint
Seg.: Segment

On
Time event
Off
Timer stops

9-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.4 Setting the Wait Functions

• Operation when the measured input does not attain the wait zone within the wait
time
If the wait time elapses before the measured input attains the wait zone, the wait state
is changed to the operating state and the program advances to the next segment the
moment that the wait time elapses. This happens even if the measured input has not
attained the wait zone.
TSP
Upper-side wait zone
Lower-side wait zone

Though PV has not attained the wait zone,

the program advances to the next segment
PV the moment that the wait time elapses.

Time
Wait operation Wait time 9

Program Pattern Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-19
9.4 Setting the Wait Functions

Setting Details
Parameter Display Menu
Name Setting range
symbol level symbol
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller holds the
end-of-segment setpoint when the segment is
completed, to perform control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the segment
is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the
segment is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching between
segments.
JC Junction code STD W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment interval.
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a local setpoint when
the segment is completed after release.) (5
groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a remote setpoint when PROG
the segment is completed after release.) (5
groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the end of
a specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be deleted.
WT.SW1 to Wait function OFF: Disable
STD
WT.SW5 ON/OFF 1 to 5 ON: Enable
WT.UP1 to Upper-side wait
STD
WT.UP5 zone 1 to 5
0.0 to 10.0% of PV input range (EU)
WT.LO1 to Lower-side wait
STD
WT.LO5 zone 1 to 5
OFF: No function
0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or “minute.
second”)
WT.TM1 to
Wait time 1 to 5 STD * Available only for the wait time at the
WT.TM5
segment switching.
* Use the parameter TMU to set the time
unit. (Common in the instrument.)
Program time HH.MM: hour.minute CTL
TMU EASY
unit MM.SS: minute.second

The table below shows which JC parameter settings correspond to which set of the wait
zone parameter (WZ.UP1 to WZ.UP5, WZ.LO1 to WZ.LO5) and wait time parameter (WT.
TM1 to WT.TM5.)
Setting value of JC
W.SW1 W.SW2 W.SW3 W.SW4 W.SW5
WT.TM1 WT.TM2 WT.TM3 WT.TM4 WT.TM5
WZ.UP1 WZ.UP2 WZ.UP3 WZ.UP4 WZ.UP5
WZ.LO1 WZ.LO2 WZ.LO3 WZ.LO4 WZ.LO5

Setting value of JC
W.IV1 W.IV2 W.IV3 W.IV4 W.IV5
WZ.UP1 WZ.UP2 WZ.UP3 WZ.UP4 WZ.UP5
WZ.LO1 WZ.LO2 WZ.LO3 WZ.LO4 WZ.LO5

9-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.4 Setting the Wait Functions

9.4.2 Program Wait in the Middle of a Segment

Description
When the wait operation is set so that the program waits in the middle of the segment,
the wait state is automatically engaged and the program is delayed if PV drifts outside
of a preset wait zone. This wait zone is set with respect to the current target setpoint. If
PV returns within the wait zone, the wait state is changed to the operating state and the
program resumes running.
Wait time (WT.TM1 to WT.TM5) is disabled in the middle of a segment.
Setpoint

Seg.1

Upper-side wait zone

Lower-side wait zone 9
Original target setpoint

Program Pattern Functions

PV

Time
Wait operation
Seg.: Segment

On
Time event
Off
Timer stops

Setting Details
► 9.4.1 Wait during switching between segments

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-21
 9.5 Setting the Segment Repetition

Description
Repeat functions enable you to repeat successive segments in a program pattern a
multiple number of times.
To use the repeat operation, set the repeat cycle start segment number, repeat cycle end
segment number and number of repeat cycles.
One set of repeat operation can be set for each program pattern.
Setpoint

Segment 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 8

When STC is set to SSP start (STC =

SSP start), repeat operation starts from
Repetition zone
the final target setpoint (TSP) for segment
5. When the time-prioritized PV start or
ramp-prioritized PV start is selected,
repeat operation starts from PV.

Time
Number of repeat cycles = 1

Repeat cycle start segment Repeat cycle end segment

number (R.STRT) = 3 number (R.END) = 6

When the ramp-prioritized PV start is selected, the start code (STC) setting for the repeat
cycle start segment becomes enabled.

When time-prioritized PV start or ramp-prioritized PV start is set in the start code (STC),
the start code (STC) setting applies to the repeat operation start.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0 to 999, CONT (The controller
Number of repeat indefinitely repeats the segment
R.CYCL STD
cycles specified by the R.STRT and
R.END parameters.)
PROG
Repeat cycle start
R.STRT STD
segment number 1 to 99
Repeat cycle end 1 ≤ R.STRT ≤ R.END ≤ 99
R.END STD
segment number

9-22 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.6 Operation with Linked Program Patterns

Description
The pattern-link function allows linking multiple patterns and running them as one
program pattern. The start code (STC) setting for the link destination applies to the
starting target setpoint (SST) for the link destination.
When the program starts at the link destination, the start-of-program segment number
(SST) becomes disabled.
When a pattern does not exist at the link destination, the junction code (JC) works in the
same way as with CONT. When pattern-link is set for the segment in the middle of the
program pattern, a link to the specified pattern is established after the set segment.

The following shows an example of linking the program patterns 2 and 5 (pattern-link).
However, the start code (STC) is set to SSP start.
Setpoint Setpoint
9
Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5 Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5

Program Pattern Functions

Program pattern 1 Program pattern 2

Link
(A)
(B)

Time Time
* Linking the point (A) to the point (B) like the above Seg.: Segment
example disables the operation for Seg. 5 of the
program pattern 1.

Link the point (A) of the program pattern 1 to the point (B) of the program pattern 2 (pattern-link).

Pattern-link

Setpoint

(A) and (B)

Time

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-23
9.6 Operation with Linked Program Patterns

The following shows an example of linking the program patterns 2 and 5 (pattern-link).
However, the start code (STC) is set to RAMP (Ramp-prioritized PV starat.)
Setpoint Setpoint

Segment 1 2 3 4 5 6 Segment 1 2 3 4 5 6

JC of segment 6 = PLK.5

Time Time
Pattern 2 Pattern 5

Pattern-link

Setpoint

Time

Pattern 2 Pattern 5

When ramp-prioritized PV start is selected, the start code (STC) setting for pattern 5 becomes enabled
at the time when pattern 5 starts.

9-24 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.6 Operation with Linked Program Patterns

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the
controller holds the end-of-
segment setpoint when the
segment is completed, to perform
control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the
controller switches to a local
setpoint when the segment is
completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the
controller switches to a remote
setpoint when the segment is
completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during
switching between segments.
W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment
JC Junction code STD
interval.
PROG 9
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching
(the controller switches to a

Program Pattern Functions

local setpoint when the segment
is completed after release.) (5
groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching
(the controller switches to a
remote setpoint when the segment
is completed after release.) (5
groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1
to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to
the end of a specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to
be deleted.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-25
 9.7 Setting Event Functions
The event functions allow outputting an alarm at a preset time under the process of
program operation, or turning on the contact output after a specified time elapses. There
are two types of event action. One is PV event and the other is time event.
Two types of event action, PV event and time event, can be registered with the program
operation, and one type of event action, local event, can be registered with the local
operation.
Up to 8 PV events and up to 16 time events can be set for one program pattern, and up
to 8 local events can be set for local operation.
The event action for program operation starts at the time when the segment for which the
event action is set starts.

9-26 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.7 Setting Event Functions

9.7.1 PV Event

Description
The PV event is a function to output defined PV alarms, deviation alarms and others
which are related to the program.
If SP tracking is enabled when the program operation is completed, the registered PV
event together with the target setpoint will be tracked for local event and the event
function will be continued. If SP tracking is disabled, the PV event and the target setpoint
will be switched to the preset local event.
The PV event is set for each segment.
The PV event does not have a stand-by action and latch action.
The PV event action and hysteresis action are the same as the alarm action.

► PV Event, Hysteresis: 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Setting Details
Parameter Display
9
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable

Program Pattern Functions

(Energized)
1: PV high limit,
2: PV low limit,
3: SP high limit,
4: SP low limit,
5: Deviation high limit,
6: Deviation low limit,
7: Deviation high and low limits,
8: Deviation within high and low limits,
9: Target SP high limit,
10: Target SP low limit,
PV.TY1 to PV event-1 to
STD 11: Target SP deviation high limit,
PV.TY8 -8 type
12: Target SP deviation low limit,
13: Target SP deviation high and low
limits,
PROG
14: Target SP deviation within high and
low limits,
15: OUT high limit,
16: OUT low limit,
17: Cooling-side OUT high limit,
18: Cooling-side OUT low limit
* Add 100 for "de-energized". For
example, when the PV high limit is
de-energized, the setting is 101.
Set a display value of setpoint of PV
alarm, SP alarm, deviation alarm, or
output alarm.
PV.EV1 to PV event-1 to
STD -19999 to 30000 (Set a value within the
PV.EV8 -8 setpoint
input range.)
Decimal point position depends on the
input type.
The hysteresis setpoint of PV event or
Local event is set to the parcentage of
EHY1 to Event-1 to -8
STD 0.0 to 100.0%. ALRM
EHY8 hysteresis
The setting value (%) is for the PV input
range span or output span.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-27
9.7 Setting Event Functions

9.7.2 Time Event

Description
The time event function allows starting the timer at the time when segment operation
starts and turning on the contact output at the time when the set time has elapsed.
The on time and off time for the time event are set within the segment time. When the
set time is outside the range of the segment time, the event action at the set time is not
performed.
The event information at the time when the segment ends varies depending on the time
event starting condition setting for the next segment.
The time event is set for each segment.
The time event turns off at the time when the program operation ends, the local operation
starts, the remote operation starts, and during the reset operation.
Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2 Segment 3

Time
On
Time event 1
Off

On time On time On time

Off time

On
Time event 2
Off

Off time Off time Off time

On time On time

On
Time event 3
Off

Off time

On time On time

9-28 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.7 Setting Event Functions

Time event action when start code (STC) is set to ramp-prioritized PV start
When operation is started in the middle of the segment by the start code (STC), the event
action starts in the event setting state at the time when operation should have started, on
the assumption that the set event action has been performed by that time.
Setpoint

Segment 1 Segment 2

PV

Time
On
Time event 1
Off

OFF start

9
On
Time event 2
Off

Program Pattern Functions

ON start

On
Time event 3
Off

OFF start

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
TME1 to Start condition of ON: Start ON state
STD
TME16 time event 1 to 16 OFF: Start OFF state
T.ON1 to On time of time -: Unregistered
STD
T.ON16 event 1 to 16 0.01 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or
“minute.second”)
* Available only within the
segment time. PROG
* OFF when the operation mode
T.OF1 to Off time of time
STD is changed to the mode except
T.OF16 event 1 to 16
the program operation.
* Use the parameter TMU to set
the time unit.
(Common in the instrument.)
HH.MM: hour.minute
TMU Program time unit EASY CTL
MM.SS: minute.second

When the off time and on time for the time event coincide in the same segment, priority is
given to the off state.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-29
9.7 Setting Event Functions

9.7.3 Local Event

Description
The local event is enabled during local operation.
The local event does not have a stand-by action and latch action.
The local event action and hysteresis action are the same as the alarm action.

► PV Event, Hysteresis: 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
(Energized)
1: PV high limit,
2: PV low limit,
3: SP high limit,
4: SP low limit,
5: Deviation high limit,
6: Deviation low limit,
7: Deviation high and low limits,
8: Deviation within high and low
limits,
9: Target SP high limit,
10: Target SP low limit,
L.TY1 to Local event-1 to -8
STD 11: Target SP deviation high limit,
L.TY8 type
12: Target SP deviation low limit,
13: Target SP deviation high and
low limits,
LOC
14: Target SP deviation within high
and low limits,
15: OUT high limit,
16: OUT low limit,
17: Cooling-side OUT high limit,
18: Cooling-side OUT low limit
* Add 100 for "de-energized".
For example, when the PV
high limit is de-energized, the
setting is 101.
Set a display value of setpoint of
PV alarm, SP alarm, deviation
alarm, or output alarm.
L.EV1 to Local event-1 to -8
STD -19999 to 30000 (Set a value
L.EV8 setpoint
within the input range.)
Decimal point position depends on
the input type
The hysteresis setpoint of PV
event or Local event is set to the
EHY1 to Event-1 to -8
STD parcentage of 0.0 to 100.0%. ALRM
EHY8 hysteresis
The setting value (%) is for the PV
input range span or output span.

9-30 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching
Segment end condition can be set for each segment. End condition can be set so that
the program advances automatically to the next segment.

Use the program parameter “JC” to specify the program segment-end conditions.
► Wait operation: 9.4 Setting the Wait Functions

9.8.1 Switching for continuation (JC=CONT)

Description
If program continue (JC=CONT) is selected as the segment end condition, the program
advances to the next segment and operation continues when the current segment ends.
If it is set for the last segment in the program, the program stops (resets) at the end of
that segment. At the end of the last segment, the start setpoint is taken as the target
setpoint. 9
Example of program continue as the segment end condition

Program Pattern Functions

Setpoint n = 1 to 99

Segment n-1 Segment n

Target setpoint of Segment n

Target setpoint of Segment n-1

Time

Example of the last segment

Setpoint

Program operation Reset operation

Last segment

Starting target setpoint (SSP)

Time
JC = CONT

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-31
9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller holds
the end-of-segment setpoint when the
segment is completed, to perform control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the
segment is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the
segment is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching
between segments.
Junction
JC STD W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment interval. PROG
code
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a local setpoint when
the segment is completed after release.) (5
groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a remote setpoint when
the segment is completed after release.) (5
groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the end of
a specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be deleted.

9-32 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

9.8.2 Hold-on switching (JC=HOLD)

Description
When segment hold (JC=HOLD) is selected as the segment end condition, the program
pauses (is placed on hold) at the end of the current segment. While the program is on
hold, the HOLD lamp is lit. The program is kept on hold until the hold state is released
either by key input or external contact input. When the hold state is released for the last
segment in the program, the program stops (resets). Executing the advance function
while the program is on hold releases the hold state.

An example of segment hold being used as the segment end condition is as

follows:

Setpoint n = 1 to 98

Segment n Segment n+1

9

Program Pattern Functions

Target setpoint of Segment n

Program operation Hold operation Prgram operation

Time
During HOLD operation

Example of the last segment

Setpoint

Program operation Hold operation Program operation stops

The program advances or

HOLD mode is cancelled.

Last segment

Starting target setpoint (SSP)

During HOLD operation Time

JC = HOLD

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-33
9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller holds
the end-of-segment setpoint when the
segment is completed, to perform control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the segment
is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the
segment is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching
between segments.
Junction
JC STD W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment interval. PROG
code
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a local setpoint when
the segment is completed after release.) (5
groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a remote setpoint when
the segment is completed after release.) (5
groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the end of
a specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be deleted.

9-34 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

9.8.3 Local-mode switching (JC=LOCAL)

Description
When the last segment of program operation ends, the state becomes the local operation
state. After the program operation ends, the action is performed by the on/off operation
of SP tracking (SPT) and junction code (JC) as follows. When zone PID selection is
selected, the action is controlled according to zone selection, and when segment PID
selection is selected, the action is controlled according to local PID number selection
(L.PID).

Local control (JC=LOCAL) can be set only for the last segment in the program pattern.
If set for a segment in the middle of the program, the program will act as if program
continue (JC=CONT) were set as the segment end condition.

When setpoint tracking is ON

At the end of the last segment in the program, the local (constant setpoint) mode is
engaged. In this case, the target setpoint of the last segment is used as the target
9
setpoint of the local mode. The local setpoint can be set in advance, but when setpoint
tracking is ON, the target setpoint of the last segment in the program will be tracked and

Program Pattern Functions

used regardless of the local target setpoint. Even in the local mode, the current PV event
continues to operate (but the time event is off). The contents that are set in advance as
local events are changed to PV events when in local mode. If no PV events are set in the
program, events set as local events in advance are all off.
Setpoint

Local operation

Local target
setpoint (LSP)
in Local mode.
SP tracking ON

Last segment

Program pattern operation stop (PRG→LOC) Time

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-35
9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

When setpoint tracking is OFF

At the end of the last segment in the program, the local (constant setpoint) mode is
engaged. In this case, a local setpoint that is set in advance is used as the target
setpoint. In the local mode, PV events will operate according to the contents of the preset
local events. The time events remain off.
Setpoint

Local operation

Local target
setpoint (LSP)
in Local mode.

SP tracking OFF

Last segment

Program pattern operation stop (PRG→LOC) Time

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller
holds the end-of-segment setpoint when
the segment is completed, to perform
control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the
segment is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the
segment is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching
between segments.
Junction W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment
JC STD PROG
code interval.
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a local setpoint
when the segment is completed after
release.) (5 groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a remote setpoint
when the segment is completed after
release.) (5 groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the
end of a specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be
deleted.
Tracking is performed when the mode
changes from Program or Remote to
SP tracking
SPT STD Local. (The local setpoint keeps track of SPS
selection
the program or remote setpoint.)
OFF, ON

9-36 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

9.8.4 Remote-mode switching (JC=REM)

Description
When the last segment of program operation ends, the state becomes the remote
operation state. After the program operation ends, the action is performed by the on/
off operation of SP tracking (SPT) and junction code (JC) as follows. When zone PID
selection is selected, the action is controlled according to zone selection, and when
segment PID selection is selected, the action is controlled according to local PID number
selection (L.PID).
Remote-mode switching (JC = REM) can be enabled only for the last segment. When
remote-mode switching is used for the segment in the middle of the program pattern, the
action is the same as that when the junction code (JC) is set to CONT.

When setpoint tracking is ON

The remote setpoint (RSP) is the target setpoint at the time when the program ends. The
PV event information at the time when the program ends is set in the local event type
and setpoint (L.TY1 to LTY8 and L.EV1 to L.EV8) and the PV event is enabled. The time
9
event is turned off.
With the retransmission program pattern, the final target setpoint is the target setpoint at

Program Pattern Functions

the time when program operation ends.
Setpoint

Remote operation

Remote
Program pattern
setpoint (RSP) for control
(for control)
SP tracking disabled
if SP tracking is ON.

SP tracking ON
Program pattern
Local target for retransmission
setpoint (LSP) in
Local mode.
Last segment
(for retransmission)
Time
Program pattern operation stop (PRG→REM)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-37
9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

When setpoint tracking is OFF

The remote setpoint (RSP) is the target setpoint at the time when the program ends. The
PV event is enabled according to the local event type and setpoint (L.TY1 to LTY8 and
L.EV1 to L.EV8). The time event turns off.
With the retransmission program pattern, the local setpoint (LSP) is the target setpoint at
the time when program operation ends.
Setpoint

Remote operation

Remote
setpoint (RSP) Program pattern
(for control) for control

SP tracking OFF

SP tracking OFF

Local target
setpoint (LSP) in Program pattern
Local mode. for retransmission
Last segment
(for retransmission)
Time
Program pattern operation stop (PRG→REM)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller holds
the end-of-segment setpoint when the
segment is completed, to perform control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the
segment is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the
segment is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching
between segments.
Junction W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment interval.
JC STD PROG
code W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a local setpoint when
the segment is completed after release.) (5
groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a remote setpoint
when the segment is completed after
release.) (5 groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the end
of a specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be
deleted.

9-38 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

9.8.5 Segment switching (the controller switches to a local setpoint when the
segment is completed after release) (JC=W.SL1 to W.SL5)

Description
The stand-by action is performed in the last segment of program operation and the state
becomes the local operation state after the stand-by state is released.
Setpoint

Local operation

Local target
Program pattern
setpoint (LSP)
for control
(for control)

The wait operation works.

Local operation starts after
releasing wait action. 9
Last segment

Program pattern operation stop Time

Program Pattern Functions

Setting Details
Parameter Display Menu
Name Setting range
symbol level symbol
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller holds the
end-of-segment setpoint when the segment is
completed, to perform control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller switches to
a local setpoint when the segment is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the segment
is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching between
segments.
JC Junction code STD
W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment interval.
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the segment is
completed after release.) (5 groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the segment
is completed after release.) (5 groups) PROG
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the end of a
specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be deleted.
WT.SW1 to Wait function OFF: Disable
STD
WT.SW5 ON/OFF 1 to 5 ON: Enable
WT.UP1 to Upper-side wait
STD
WT.UP5 zone 1 to 5
0.0 to 10.0% of PV input range (EU)
WT.LO1 to Lower-side wait
STD
WT.LO5 zone 1 to 5
OFF: No function
0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or “minute.
second”)
WT.TM1 to
Wait time 1 to 5 STD * Available only for the wait time at the segment
WT.TM5
switching.
* Use the parameter TMU to set the time unit.
(Common in the instrument.)
Program time HH.MM: hour.minute CTL
TMU EASY
unit MM.SS: minute.second

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-39
9.8 Setting the Operation in Segment Switching

9.8.6 Segment switching (the controller switches to a remote setpoint when

the segment is completed after release) (JC=W.SR1 to W.SR5)

Description
The stand-by action is performed in the last segment of program operation and the state
becomes the remote operation state after the stand-by state is released. However, the
controller is in local-mode when burnout occurs.
Setpoint
Remote operation

Local target Program pattern

setpoint (LSP) for control

(for control)
The wait operation works.
Remote operation starts after
releasing wait action.
Last segment

Program pattern operation stop Time

Setting Details
Parameter Display Menu
Name Setting range
symbol level symbol
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller holds the
end-of-segment setpoint when the segment is
completed, to perform control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller switches to
a local setpoint when the segment is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the segment
is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching between
segments.
JC Junction code STD
W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment interval.
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the segment is
completed after release.) (5 groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the segment
is completed after release.) (5 groups) PROG
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the end of a
specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be deleted.
WT.SW1 to Wait function OFF: Disable
STD
WT.SW5 ON/OFF 1 to 5 ON: Enable
WT.UP1 to Upper-side wait
STD
WT.UP5 zone 1 to 5
0.0 to 10.0% of PV input range (EU)
WT.LO1 to Lower-side wait
STD
WT.LO5 zone 1 to 5
OFF: No function
0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or “minute.
second”)
WT.TM1 to
Wait time 1 to 5 STD * Available only for the wait time at the
WT.TM5
segment switching.
* Use the parameter TMU to set the time unit.
(Common in the instrument.)
Program time HH.MM: hour.minute CTL
TMU EASY
unit MM.SS: minute.second

9-40 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.9 Setting Program Pattern-2 Retransmission

Description
The program pattern-2 retransmission function allows creating a program pattern other
than the program pattern used for control on the same timeline and retransmitting it.
With program pattern-2, the starting target setpoint (SSP) and the final target setpoint
(TSP) for each segment can be set and created in the same segment time as that for the
control program.
When coordinated operation is used, the program pattern can be retransmitted to the
slave controller.
The retransmission output types (RTS, O1RS, or O2RS) need to be set to SP2.
The program pattern-2 retransmission function cannot be used when the control mode is
set to cascade control.

Setpoint

9
Seg.1 Seg.2 Seg.3 Seg.4 Seg.5 Seg.6

Program Pattern Functions

Program pattern for
retransmission

Program pattern for

control

Time

Seg.: Segment

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Program pattern-2 OFF: Not used.
PT2.G STD CTL
retransmission ON: used.

Using Terminal Setting Parameter

RET terminals RTS, RTH, RTL
OUT terminals O1RS, O1RH, O1RL
OUT2 terminals O2RS, O2RH, O2RL

The retransmission output type should be set to SP2, irrespective to the terminal used.

► 10.11 Setting Retransmission Output Terminal, Type, and Scales

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-41
 9.10 Setting Starting time of program operation

Description
The starting time of program operation refers to the time from the start of the program
operation (RUN) to the start of the program pattern. The starting time of the program
operation (S.TM) can be delayed by the set amount of time. The time that is counted is
the time from the time when the operation mode is changed from non-program operation
to program operation up to the start of operation. The count-down time can be checked
in Remaining Segment-time Display (Operation Display).
State until program operation starts
Target setpoint Action according to the final target setpoint before the operation mode is
changed
PV event Off
Time event Off
Status lamp PRG lamp is lit

When the delay action up until program operations starts is cancelled, the operation
mode is changed to other than program operation. For example, when local operation
is switched to program operation and then the operation mode is switched to local
operation during the delay action, the state returns to the local operation state.

The following figure shows an example of changing local operation to program operation.
Setpoint

LSP
SP

The program operation is

not started before the time
set in “S.TM” is elapsed.

Program operation start

SSP

Time

Pressing the The time set in

RUN key. “S.TM” is elapsed.

Local operation Program operation

LOC lamp
PRG lamp is lit. PRG lamp is lit.
is lit.

Operation starts by the setting of the start code (STC).

The above example shows the case of STC=SSP.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or
Starting time of
S.TM STD “minute.second” (common use of SPS
program operation
instrument)
HH.MM: hour.minute
TMU Program time unit EASY CTL
MM.SS: minute.second
Parameter TMU is used commonly for all controllers.

9-42 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.11 Setting the Program Pattern Number Clearance

Description
This function allows resetting the program pattern number in Operation Display to 0 when
the program operation ends.

The controller resets

(clears) the program
pattern number on the
operating display to “0” at
the end of program
operation.

9
Setting Details

Program Pattern Functions

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Not cleared.
Program pattern ON: Cleared. (Set the program
PNC STD SPS
number clearance No. before restart program
operation)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-43
 9.12 Program Pattern End Signal

Description
A pattern end signal notifies the outside of the end of a program pattern when the
execution of the program pattern ends.
The pattern end signal can be output by contact output or via communication.
There are one-second, three-second, and five-second pattern end signals.
When the program is also forcibly terminated by key operation, contact input, or via
communication, the pattern end signal is output. When the pattern-link function is used,
the pattern end signal is output when the link destination program pattern ends.
Even if program operation starts while the pattern end signal is on, the pattern end signal
is not turned off.

Setting Details
► Pattern End Signal: 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

9-44 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.13 Editing the Prgram Pattern
9.13.1 Checking the Number of Remaining Segments

Description
This allows checking the number of the segments unused in the controller.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Number of
0 to 300
ALL.S remaining unused PRO EDIT
(Display only)
segments

9.13.2 Checking the Number of Segments in specified pattern

9

Program Pattern Functions

Description
This allows specifying the program pattern number to be displayed in the parameter
USE.S.
The parameter PTN.S is displayed when a program pattern number is specified in
the parameter USE.S. The number of segments for the specified program pattern is
displayed in USE.S.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Pattern number
designation for 0 to 300
PTN.S PRO
comfirming number (Display only)
of segments EDIT
Number of 0: disable
USE.S segments within a PRO 1 to 99
pattern (Display only)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-45
9.13 Editing the Program Pattern

9.13.3 Copying a Program Pattern

Description
This function allows copying a created program pattern and editing it as a new program
pattern.
Specify the source-of-copying pattern number in the parameter CPY.S and then press
the SET/ENTER key. Next, specify the destination-of-copying pattern number in the
parameter CPY.D and then press the SET/ETNTER key to perform copying.
At this point, an error may occur. Check the details of the error.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Source-of-copying
CPY.S pattern number PRO 1 to 30
designation
EDIT
Target-of-copying
CPY.D pattern number PRO 1 to 30
designation

9.13.4 Adding and Deleting Segment in Program Patterns

Description
This function allows adding or deleting a segment while or after a program pattern is
created.
When the junction code for a segment is set to INS. or DEL., the next segment is
editable. When INS. is set, the segment is added, and when DEL. is set, the segment is
deleted.
Addition and deletion of a segment cannot be done during program pattern operation.
► Clearing all program pattern data: 12.2 Initializing Parameter Settings to Factory Default Values

Setting Details
Parameter Display Menu
Name Setting range
symbol level symbol
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller holds the
end-of-segment setpoint when the segment is
completed, to perform control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller switches to
a local setpoint when the segment is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the segment is
completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching between
Junction segments. PROG
JC STD
code W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment interval.
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the segment is
completed after release.) (5 groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the controller
switches to a remote setpoint when the segment is
completed after release.) (5 groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the end of a
specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be deleted.

9-46 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.13 Editing the Program Pattern

9.13.5 Deleting the Program Pattern

Description
This allows specifying the program pattern number to delete.

This allows deleting all programs in the controller.

► Clearing all program pattern data: 12.2 Initializing Parameter Settings to Factory Default Values

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Program pattern
CLR.P PRO 1 to 30 EDIT
clearance

9.13.6 List of the Error Code 9

Program Pattern Functions

Description
Error Indication at Program Pattern Creation and Editing
Error code Error information Cause of error
ERR01 Pattern creation or editing Deleting or copying of the program pattern, or inserting
is disable during program or deleting of the segment was excuted during program
operation. operation.
ERR22 Segment write error The total number of segments exceeded 300.
ERR23 Segment insert error New segment cannot be inserted because the number
of segments in a pattern exceeded 99.
ERR32 Pattern source specification No pattern exists in the source.
error
ERR33 Pattern destination Patterns already exist in the destination.
specification error
ERR41 Pattern delete errror The pattern to be deleted does not exist.

Error Codes in Communication

Error code Error information Cause of error
0 No error Normal end.
1 Pattern creation or editing Deleting or copying of the program pattern, or inserting
is disable during program or deleting of the segment was excuted during program
operation. operation.
2 Pattern number error The specified pattern number does not exist.
1 to 30
3 Segment number error The specified segment number does not exist.
1 to 99
22 Segment write error The total number of segments exceeded 300.
31 Pattern copy error No pattern exists in the source, or patterns already
exist in the destination.
41 Pattern delete errror The pattern to be deleted does not exist.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-47
 9.14 Synchronized Program Pattern Operation
9.14.1 Synchronized Operation During Switching Between Segments

Description
A synchronized operation during switching between segments can be performed using a
wait during switching between segments and a contact I/O.
This function can be implemented by registering a wait due to a contact input (parameter
WAIT) and a control flag for segment transition (I relay: 4261) in the contact output and
using the respective contact I/Os.
The following parameters are available in wait operations using this function.
First group of wait parameters: WT.SW1, WZ.UP1, WZ.LO1, WT.TM1

The following shows an example of synchronized operation during switching between

segments.
Wire each contact I/O of controllers 1 to 3 as shown in the following figure.
When setting parameters, set “5027” in the Wait ON/OFF switch parameter “WAIT” of
each controller (DI function registration menu: DI.SL) and set “4261” in the AL3 function
selection parameter “AL3.S” of each controller (AL1-AL3 function registration menu: ALM).
Once controller 1 is put in the wait state, none of the controllers are allowed to transition
to the next segment and are forcibly put in the wait state. They are allowed to transit to
the next segment only when each control flag for segment transition (I relay: 4261) of all
the controllers is set to OFF.

AL3 DI3 AL3 DI3 AL3 DI3

No.1 No.2 No.3

Occurrence of wait Forcibly wait the operation Forcibly wait the operation
state by digital input by digital input

When each control flag for segment transition (I relay: 4261) of all the controllers
is set to OFF, each controller is allowed to transit to the next segment.

Control flag for segment transition (I relay: 4261)

When the control flag for segment transition is ON:
• The controller is in the wait state at segment transition (out of the first group of wait
zone) or the remaining segment time is not zero.
When the control flag for segment transition is OFF:
• The controller is not in the wait state and the remaining segment time is zero.
• Each control flag for segment transition (I relay: 4261) of all the controllers is set to OFF
and a one-second off state is caused immediately after segment transition takes place.
• The operation concerned is not program pattern operation.(Reset, Local, Remote)
• The wait function ON/OFF switch (WT.SW1) is OFF.

Note
• Turn on the power switches of all the controllers at the same time.
• Set each segment time to five seconds or more.
• Set JC=CONT usually because transition to the next segment may not take place depending
on the setting contents (wait switching or hold switching) of the junction code (JC).

9-48 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.14 Synchronized Program Pattern Operation
Controller No.1 Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2

TSP
Upper-side wait zone
Lower-side wait zone

The moment that the PV attains the wait zone,

the program advances to the next segment.

PV

Time
Segment transition is
inhibited for all the Wait time TSP: Final target setpoint
controllers. Wait operation Seg.: Segment

Off state for a second

On
AL3 contact
output Off
On
DI3 contact
input Off Segment transition to the next
segment takes place when each 9
Controller No.2 Setpoint DI3 of all the controllers goes OFF.

Program Pattern Functions

Seg.1 Seg.2

TSP
Upper-side wait zone
Lower-side wait zone

Because AL3 of controller 1

is ON, the wait state is
forcibly enabled.

PV

Time
TSP: Final target setpoint
Forcibly wait Seg.: Segment

Off state for a second

Controller No.3 Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2

TSP
Upper-side wait zone
Lower-side wait zone

Because AL3 of controller 1

PV is ON, the wait state is
forcibly enabled.

Time
TSP: Final target setpoint
Forcibly wait Seg.: Segment
Off state for a second
On
AL3 contact
output Off
On
DI3 contact
input Off

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-49
9.14 Synchronized Program Pattern Operation

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Set an I relay number of contact
input.
Set “OFF” to disable the function.

Standard terminals
DI1: 5025, DI2: 5026,
DI3: 5027
E1-terminal area
DI11: 5041, DI12: 5042,
DI13: 5043, DI14: 5044,
DI15: 5045, DI16: 5046
Wait ON/OFF
WAIT STD E2-terminal area DI.SL
switch
DI21: 5057, DI22: 5058,
DI23: 5059, DI24: 5060,
DI25: 5061, DI26: 5062
E3-terminal area
DI31: 5073, DI32: 5074,
DI33: 5075, DI34: 5076,
DI35: 5077
E4-terminal area
DI41: 5089, DI42: 5090,
DI43: 5091, DI44: 5092,
DI45: 5093, DI46: 5094
AL1 function
AL1.S
selection
AL2 function
AL2.S
selection
AL3 function Control flag for segment transition:
AL3.S STD ALM
selection 4261
OUT relay function
OR.S
selection
OUT2 relay function
OR2.S
selection
DOn1 function
DO1.S
selection
DOn2 function
DO2.S
selection
DOn3 function Control flag for segment transition:
DO3.S STD DO
selection 4261
DOn4 function
DO4.S
selection
DOn5 function
DO5.S
selection
n: Terminal area number (1 to 4)

9-50 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.14 Synchronized Program Pattern Operation

9.14.2 Synchronized Operation of Program Pattern Progression

Description
The synchronized operation of program pattern progression can be performed using a
wait within segment interval and a contact I/O.
This function can be implemented by registering a switch to HOLD for synchronized
program operation (parameter S.HLD) and a wait flag (I flag: 4190) in the contact output
and using the respective contact I/Os.
The following parameters are available in the wait operation using this function.
First group of wait parameters: WT.SW1, WZ.UP1, WZ.LO1

The following figure shows an example of synchronized operation of program pattern

progression.
Wire each contact I/O of controllers 1 to 3 as shown in the following figure.
When setting parameters, set “5027” in the switch to HOLD for synchronized program
operation parameter “S.HLD (DI function registration menu: DI.SL) and set “4190” in the
AL3 function selection parameter “AL3.S” (AL1-AL3 function registration menu: ALM) of
each controller. 9
Once controller 1 is put in the wait state, all the controllers are forcibly put in the hold
state. When each wait flag (WAIT) of all the controllers is set to OFF, the hold state is

Program Pattern Functions

reset to resume a program pattern operation.

AL3 DI3 AL3 DI3 AL3 DI3

No.1 No.2 No.3

Occurrence of wait Forcibly hold the operation Forcibly hold the operation
state → Hold by digital input by digital input

When each hold operation start flag (S.HLD) for synchronized program operation
of all the controllers is set to OFF, the hold state is reset to resume the operation.

Note
• Turn on the power switches of all the controllers at the same time.
• Set each segment time to five seconds or more.
• When the power switches are turned on at the same time, a time difference in the start of
operation occurs, depending on whether each controller uses this function. Specifically, the
controller using this function starts operation with a lag of about five seconds.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-51
9.14 Synchronized Program Pattern Operation
Controller No.1 Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2
Upper-side wait zone

Original target setpoint

Lower-side wait zone

PV

Seg.: Segment Time

Wait state → Hold state

On
AL3 contact output
(Wait flag) Off Program progression is
inhibited for all the controllers.
On When each AL3 of all the
DI3 contact input
(Hold flag) controllers goes OFF, the hold
Off
state is reset.
Controller No.2 Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2
Upper-side wait zone

Original target setpoint

Lower-side wait zone

PV

On Seg.: Segment Time

AL3 contact output Hold state
(Wait flag) Off
On
DI3 contact input
(Hold flag) Off

Controller No.3 Setpoint

Seg.1 Seg.2
Upper-side wait zone

Original target setpoint

Lower-side wait zone

PV

On Seg.: Segment Time

AL3 contact output Hold state
(Wait flag) Off
On
DI3 contact input
(Hold flag) Off

9-52 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 9.14 Synchronized Program Pattern Operation

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Set an I relay number of contact
input.
Set “OFF” to disable the function.

Standard terminals
DI1: 5025, DI2: 5026,
DI3: 5027
E1-terminal area
DI11: 5041, DI12: 5042,
DI13: 5043, DI14: 5044,
Switch to HOLD DI15: 5045, DI16: 5046
S.HLD for synchronized PRO E2-terminal area DI.SL
program operation DI21: 5057, DI22: 5058,
DI23: 5059, DI24: 5060,
DI25: 5061, DI26: 5062
E3-terminal area
DI31: 5073, DI32: 5074,
DI33: 5075, DI34: 5076, 9
DI35: 5077
E4-terminal area

Program Pattern Functions

DI41: 5089, DI42: 5090,
DI43: 5091, DI44: 5092,
DI45: 5093, DI46: 5094
AL1 function
AL1.S
selection
AL2 function
AL2.S
selection
AL3 function
AL3.S STD Wait flag: 4190 ALM
selection
OUT relay function
OR.S
selection
OUT2 relay function
OR2.S
selection
DOn1 function
DO1.S
selection
DOn2 function
DO2.S
selection
DOn3 function
DO3.S STD Wait flag: 4190 DO
selection
DOn4 function
DO4.S
selection
DOn5 function
DO5.S
selection
n: Terminal area number (1 to 4)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 9-53
Blank Page
Chapter 10 Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

10.1 Setting Control Output Type

Description

Time Proportional Relay Output / Triac Output / Time Proportional Voltage

Pulse Output
In time proportional output, the control computation result is output in the form of an
on/off signal pulse width proportional to the time. The pulse width is calculated as follows
with the cycle time (control output cycle) at 100%.
Control output pulse width = Control output (%) x Cycle time
The output type is selected as either the relay/triac output or the voltage pulse output.
PV

UP55A 100 ON
OFF
TC

On-time ratio

ON/OFF signal
Ristricted to the range
between output high
10
Heater pulse output limit and output low
limit values.
Tank ON

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

0 OFF
SSR
0.0 50.0 100.0
Displayed output value (%)

► Cycle time: 10.2 Setting Control Output Cycle Time

Current Output
In current output, the control computation result is output as a current signal. (Example of
4 to 20 mA)
PV
20 mA
TC UP55A
Control output

Ristricted to the range

Heater between output high
Control output limit and output low
Furnace limit values.

4 mA
0.0 100.0
Displayed output value (%)
Thyristor unit

ON/OFF Output
ON/OFF control compares the SP and PV and outputs an on or off signal according to
the positive or negative deviation (PV – SP).

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-1
10.1 Setting Control Output Type

Position Proportional Output

Position proportional output is equipped only with Position proportional type.
In position proportional output, valve opening is made proportional to the control
computation results. The controller outputs direct and reverse signals (relay) to control
motor movement and valve opening.
UP55A

H (direct) or L (reverse)
PV contact signal
Control motor

Position signal

TC
Air
Motor-operated valve

Furnace
Gas
Burner

Feedback-type Position Proportional Output

In feedback-type position proportional output, the controller obtains a valve position
signal from a feedback slide-wire resistor (overall resistance: 100 Ω to 2.5 kΩ) attached
to a valve or feedback current input (4 to 20 mA).
The following shows an example using feedback slide-wire resistor.
Controller

Control
computation

Control
Feedback
output Direct action
input
Comp-
arator
Valve position Reverse
signal action
M

Slide-wire resistor

Motor-operated
valve

When current is used for feedback input, only wiring is different

► Wiring for current: 17.4.5 Valve Position Output and Feedback Input Wiring

Estimating-type Position Proportional Output

In estimating-type position proportional output, set the operating time required for a
valve to change from the fully-closed position to the fully-open position beforehand. With
the preset operating time, the controller controls the valve by estimating its position.
Estimating-type position proportional output is used when feedback input signal cannot
be obtained. (Feedback input wiring is not necessary.)
Note: When the control output is: upper limit=direct signal, lower limit=reverse signal.
Heating/cooling Output
Heating/cooling output is equipped only with Heating/cooling type.
► Heating/cooling output: 8.2.3 Heating/cooling Control

10-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.1 Setting Control Output Type

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Control output or Heating-side
control output (Lower two digits)
00: OFF
01: OUT terminals (voltage pulse)
02: OUT terminals (current)
03: OUT terminals (relay/triac)
04: OUT2 terminals (voltage
pulse)
05: OUT2 terminals (current)
Output type 06: OUT2 terminals (relay/triac)
OT EASY OUT
selection Cooling-side control output (Upper
two digits)
00: OFF
01: OUT terminals (voltage pulse)
02: OUT terminals (current)
03: OUT terminals (relay/triac)
04: OUT2 terminals (voltage
pulse)
05: OUT2 terminals (current) 10
06: OUT2 terminals (relay/triac)

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

CAUTION
No output is generated even if the terminal which is not provided is selected.
Confirm that the terminal to be selected is provided.

For each output terminal number, see 17.4, “Wiring.”

Set a control mode, control type, and an input type before setting an output type.
► Control mode: 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
► Control type: 8.2 Setting Control Type (CNT)
► Input type: 7.1.1 Setting Input Type, Unit, Range, Scale, and Decimal Point Position

Control Output (PID Control, ON/OFF Control) of Standard type

The figure below shows an example of setting the current output of the OUT terminal to
the control output terminal and type. Set “02” to lower two digits and “00” to upper two
digits.

Symbol
Control output terminal and type
00

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-3
10.1 Setting Control Output Type

Heating/cooling Control Output of Heating/cooling Type

The figure below shows an example of setting the current output of the OUT terminal
to the heating-side control output terminal and type, and setting the relay output of the
OUT2 terminal to the cooling-side control output terminal and type.
Heating side: Set “02” to lower two digits. Cooling side: Set “06” to upper two digits.

Symbol
Heating-side control output terminal and type
Cooling-side control output terminal and type

Position Proportional Output (for Position Proportional Type Only)

When Position proportional type is specified, the output form is fixed to the position
proportional output and setting is not necessary. Adjustment of the valve position is
necessary.
► Valve position adjustment: 10.16 Adjusting Motor-operated Valve Position (Position Proportional
Output)

10-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.2 Setting Control Output Cycle Time

Description
Cycle time is the basic cycle period for a signal full cycle of ON/OFF operation for a
relay/triac or voltage pulse output. Reducing cycle time results in faster cycling and finer
control. In contrast, reducing the ON/OFF period also reduces relay life. For relay output,
set the control output cycle time to 30 to 200 seconds according to the process speed.
ON ON

On time On time

OFF OFF

Cycle time Cycle time

Comparison of operations for the same control output (50%)

Cycle time = 10 sec Cycle time = 20 sec Cycle time = 40 sec

ON ON ON 10
10 sec 20 sec

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

OFF OFF OFF
5 sec

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Control output cycle
time
Heating-side control
CT EASY
output cycle time
0.5 to 1000.0 s OUT
(in Heating/cooling
control)
Cooling-side control
CTc EASY
output cycle time

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-5
 10.3 Setting Limiter to Control Output

Description
Control output high and low limits can be set to restrict the control output to the operation
range between those limits.
The output limiter is prepared for each PID group, and works according to the selected
PID group.
This, however, excludes preset output in RESET mode.
► PID group: 6.3 Adjusting PID Manually
(%)
105.0

Output high limit

Actual output from the terminal

Actual output
variable range

Output low limit

Setting range

Low limit High limit

0
–5.0 105.0 (%)
Original setting range

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Control output high
limit
-4.9 to 105.0%, (OL<OH)
Heating-side control
OH EASY In Heating/cooling control: 0.1
output high limit
to 105.0% (OL<OH)
(in Heating/cooling
control)
Control output low limit
-5.0 to 104.9%, (OL<OH),
Heating-side control PID
SD: Tight shut
OL output low limit (in EASY
In Heating/cooling control: 0.0
Heating/cooling
to 104.9% (OL<OH)
control)
Cooling-side control
OHc EASY 0.1 to 105.0%, (OLc<OHc)
output high limit
Cooling-side control
OLc EASY 0.0 to 104.9%, (OLc<OHc)
output low limit
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, R) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
Note3: When the setting is low limit ≥high limit, the controller operates as low limit = high limit -1 digit.

10-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.4 Disabling Output Limiter in MAN mode

Description
Output limiter can be released when in MAN mode.
However, cannot be released when in Heating/cooling control.
Note that the output bump is caused if the operation mode is changed from MAN to
AUTO while the control output is out of the range between the control output high limit (OH)
and control output low limit (OL).
Control output bumps to OH in MAN mode when it is larger than OH.
Moreover, it bumps to OL when smaller than OL.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable output limiter in
MAN mode
OLMT Output limiter switch PRO TUNE
ON: Enable output limiter in
MAN mode
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
10

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-7
 10.5 Setting Velocity Limiter to Control Output

Description
Output velocity limiter prevents the control output signal from changing suddenly in order
to protect the control valves (or other actuators) and controlled process.
The output velocity limiter does not work in MAN or RESET mode or when input burnout
or A/D error occurs.
Note that setting an output velocity limit may cancel the effects of derivative action.
The following shows the operation example of output velocity limiter.
(%)
100

Actual output
change
Output

100%
Velocity limit = 2.0 (%/sec)

50 sec

Time (sec)

In Heating/cooling control, the output velocity limiter can be set to the control computation
result before split into heating-and cooling-side outputs.
In ON/OFF control, the setting is invalid even if the output velocity limiter is set.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
OPR Output velocity limiter STD TUNE
0.1 to 100.0%/s
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

10-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.6 Reducing 4-20 mA Current Output to 0 mA
(Tight Shut Function)
Description
Tight shut function fully closes the control valve (or other actuators) (i.e., so that output is
zero) beyond its positioner dead band.
When the output low limit is set to “SD,” the output is as follows in MAN or AUTO mode.

• In MAN mode
When the output is reduced with the Down arrow key and “SD” is displayed as the
output value, the output level reaches tight shut level. The control output delivers a
tight shut signal (about 0.0 mA).
• In AUTO mode
The output is limited by the output low limit (OL). It does not decrease to 0.0 mA.

Control output
20.0 mA

10

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

–5.0%
Displayed output value
4.0 mA 100.0%
3.2 mA

0.0 mA

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Control output low limit -5.0 to 104.9%, (OL<OH),
Heating-side control SD: Tight shut (0 mA
OL output low limit (in EASY output in MAN mode) PID
Heating/cooling In Heating/cooling control: 0.0
control) to 104.9% (OL<OH)
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, R) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-9
 10.7 Setting ON/OFF Control Hysteresis

Description
In ON/OFF control, since the only two possible output states are ON and OFF, the control
output cycles are as shown in the figure below. ON/OFF becomes quite narrow, so that if
relay output is used, chattering occurs. In this case, the hysteresis should be set wider to
prevent relay chattering and for the service life of the relay.

One Point of Hysteresis

For one point of hysteresis, set one point of hysteresis. In Heating/cooling control, set
heating-side ON/OFF control hysteresis and cooling-side ON/OFF control hysteresis.
Hysteresis
ON
Output
OFF

PV SP

Hysteresis

SP
Temperature
ON ON ON
Output OFF OFF

(Example of reverse action)

Two Points of Hysteresis

For two points of hysteresis, set two points of hysteresis (upper-side hysteresis and
lower-side hysteresis).
Two points of hysteresis cannot be used for Heating/cooling control.
Lower-side Upper-side
hysteresis hysteresis

ON
Output
OFF

PV SP

Upper-side hysteresis

SP
Temperature
ON ON ON
Output OFF OFF

(Example of reverse action) Lower-side hysteresis

10-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.7 Setting ON/OFF Control Hysteresis

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Hysteresis (in ON/OFF
In ON/OFF control: 0.0 to
control, or Position
100.0% of PV input range
proportional control)
span (EUS)
HYS Heating-side ON/OFF EASY
In Heating/cooling control
control hysteresis
or Position proportional
(in Heating/cooling PID
control: 0.0 to 100.0%
control)
Upper-side hysteresis
HY.UP EASY
(in ON/OFF control) 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input
Lower-side hysteresis range span (EUS)
HY.LO EASY
(in ON/OFF control)
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, R) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

10

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-11
 10.8 Canceling Offset of PV and SP (Manual Reset)

Description
Manual reset can be used when the integral action is disabled.
When the integral action is disabled, there will be an offset of PV and SP. Manual reset
cancels this offset.
The manual reset value equals the output value when PV = SP is true.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
MR Manual reset EASY -5.0 to 105.0% PID
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, or R) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is
displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

10-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.9 Setting Hysteresis and Dead Band for Heating/
cooling Control Output
Description
In Heating/cooling control, the positive dead band denotes the zone where none of the
heating-side and cooling-side outputs are presented. The negative dead band denotes
the zone where both of the heating-side and cooling-side outputs are presented.

The following shows the case when both the heating side and cooling side are ON/OFF
control.
Cooling-side hysteresis (HYSc) ON

Neutral (OFF)
50%

ON
Heating-side hysteresis (HYS)

10
Positive dead band

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

The following shows the case when both the heating side and cooling side are PID
control.
Output (%) Output (%)
100 100

Cooling-side Heating-side Cooling-side Heating-side

output output output output

0 0

0 50 100(%) 0 50 100(%)
Positive dead band Negative dead band
Value of control output before split into Value of control output before split into
heating- and cooling-side outputs heating- and cooling-side outputs

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-13
10.9 Setting Hysteresis and Dead Band for Heating/cooling Control Output

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Hysteresis (in ON/OFF
In ON/OFF control: 0.0 to
control, or Position
100.0% of PV input range
proportional control)
span (EUS)
HYS Heating-side ON/OFF EASY
In Heating/cooling control
control hysteresis
or Position proportional
(in Heating/cooling
control: 0.0 to 100.0%
control) PID
Cooling-side ON/OFF
HYSc EASY 0.0 to 100.0%
control hysteresis
Output dead band (in In Heating/cooling control:
Heating/cooling control -100.0 to 50.0%
DB EASY
or Position proportional In Position proportional
control) control: 1.0 to 10.0%
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, or R) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is
displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

10-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.10 Setting Hysteresis and Dead Band for Position
Proportional Control Output
Description
To prevent excessively frequent operation of the motor and relays, a dead band is
provided between two relay output operating points, and hysteresis is provided for each
relay output.
If position signal differs from the control computation output by less than the dead band
value, neither the “direct” nor “reverse” relay turns ON. If the difference is large enough
on the plus side, the direct relay turns ON; if on the minus side, the reverse relay turns
ON (in reverse action).
Position proportional
output relay hysteresis
Position proportional
output relay hysteresis Direct output (ON)

Neutral (OFF)

Reverse
10
output (ON)
Dead band

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

0

(Control computation output value – Position signal)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Hysteresis (in ON/OFF
In ON/OFF control: 0.0 to
control, or Position
100.0% of PV input range
proportional control)
span (EUS)
HYS Heating-side ON/OFF EASY
In Heating/cooling control
control hysteresis
or Position proportional
(in Heating/cooling PID
control: 0.0 to 100.0%
control)
Output dead band (in In Heating/cooling control:
Heating/cooling control -100.0 to 50.0%
DB EASY
or Position proportional In Position proportional
control) control: 1.0 to 10.0%
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, R) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-15
 10.11 Setting Retransmission Output Terminal, Type,
and Scales
Description
The retransmission output can be used when the control output is not assigned to
the analog output terminal. Confirm the output type selection (OT) before setting the
retransmission output. The range can be changed.
► Control output terminal: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type
► Current output range: 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

Minimum value of Maximum value of

PV input range PV input range
0.0°C 200.0°C
PV scale

50.0°C Retransmission scale 150.0°C

Output range
4 mA 20 mA (output signal)

To Recorder

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Disable
PV1: PV
SP1: SP
OUT1: OUT (Valve opening: 0 to 100
% in Position proportional control)
LPS: 15 V DC loop power supply
PV2: Loop-2 PV
SP2: Loop-2 SP
OUT2: Loop-2 OUT
TSP1: Target SP
Retransmission HOUT1: Heating-side OUT
RTS out type of EASY COUT1: Cooling-side OUT OUT
RET MV1: Position proportional output
(internal computed value)
TSP2: Loop-2 target SP
HOUT2: Loop-2 heating-side OUT
COUT2: Loop-2 cooling-side OUT
MV2: Loop-2 position proportional
output (internal computed value)
PV: PV terminals analog input
RSP: RSP terminals analog input
AIN2: AIN2 terminals analog input
AIN4: AIN4 terminals analog input

10-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.11 Setting Retransmission Output Terminal, Type, and Scales

(Continued)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Maximum When RTS = PV1, SP1, PV2, SP2,
value of TSP1, TSP2, PV, RSP, AIN2, or AIN4,
RTH retransmission STD RTL + 1 digit to 30000
output scale of -19999 to RTH - 1 digit
RET
Decimal point position:
When RTS=PV1, SP1, or TSP1,
decimal point position is same as
that of PV input.
When RTS=PV2, SP2, or TSP2,
decimal point position is same as
that of RSP input.
Minimum
When RTS=PV, decimal point position
value of
is same as that of PV input scale.
RTL retransmission STD
When RTS=RSP, decimal point
output scale of
position is same as that of RSP
RET
input scale.
When RTS=AIN2, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN2
scale.
When RTS=AIN4, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN4 10
scale.
Retransmission

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

output type of
O1RS STD Same as RTS
OUT current OUT
output
Maximum When O1RS = PV1, SP1, PV2, SP2,
value of TSP1, TSP2, PV, RSP, AIN2, or AIN4,
retransmission O1RL + 1 digit to 30000
O1RH STD
output scale of -19999 to O1RH - 1 digit
OUT current
output Decimal point position:
When O1RS=PV1, SP1, or TSP1,
decimal point position is same as
that of PV input.
When O1RS =PV2, SP2, or TSP2,
decimal point position is same as
that of RSP input.
Minimum When O1RS =PV, decimal point
value of position is same as that of PV input
retransmission scale.
O1RL STD
output scale of When O1RS =RSP, decimal point
OUT current position is same as that of
output RSP input scale.
When O1RS =AIN2, decimal point
position is same as that of
AIN2 scale.
When O1RS =AIN4, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN4
scale

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-17
10.11 Setting Retransmission Output Terminal, Type, and Scales

(Continued)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Retransmission
output type of
O2RS STD Same as RTS
OUT2 current
output
Maximum When O2RS = PV1, SP1, PV2, SP2,
value of TSP1, TSP2, PV, RSP, AIN2, or AIN4,
retransmission O2RL + 1 digit to 30000
O2RH STD
output scale of -19999 to O2RH - 1 digit
OUT2 current
output Decimal point position:
When O2RS=PV1, SP1, or TSP1,
decimal point position is same as
that of PV input.
When O2RS =PV2, SP2, or TSP2,
OUT
decimal point position is same as
that of RSP input.
Minimum When O2RS =PV, decimal point
value of position is same as that of PV input
retransmission scale.
O2RL STD
output scale of When O2RS =RSP, decimal point
OUT2 current position is same as that of RSP
output input scale.
When O2RS =AIN2, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN2
scale.
When O2RS =AIN4, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN4
scale.

Setpoints PV2, SP2 and OUT2: Can be used in Cascade control.

Setpoints HOUT1 and COUT1: Can be used in Heating/cooling control.
Setpoint MV1: Can be used in Position proportional control.
(When opening or closing a valve by key operation in manual mode opration, the transmission
output becomes -5.0 %.)
Setpoint TSP2: Can be used in Cascade control.
Setpoints HOUT2 and COUT2: Can be used in Cascade control of Heating/cooling type.
Setpoint MV2: Can be used in Cascade control of Position proportional type.
(When opening or closing a valve by key operation in manual mode opration, the transmission
output becomes -5.0 %.)
Setpoint RSP: Can be used when equipped with remote input.
Setpoints AIN2 and AIN4: Can be used when the UP55A suffix code: Type 2 = 4.

Parameters and Corresponding Terminals

RTS, RTH, RTL RET terminal
O1RS, O1RH, O1RL OUT terminal
O2RS, O2RH, O2RL OUT2 terminal

10-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.12 Setting Preset Output Value
10.12.1 Setting Output Value in RESET Mode (Preset Output)

Description
Preset output becomes the output when the operation mode is switched from RUN to
RESET.
The preset output is not limited by the output high and low limits.
The preset output is prepared for each PID parameter group, and works according to the
selected PID parameter group.
Control output
100%

Control output obtained by

computation based on
deviation between SP and PV.
The preset output (fixed) applies
according to the preset output.
50%
10

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

Preset output

0%
Time
RUN state RESET state

Point where the controller

enters RESET state

► Output limiter: 10.3 Setting Limiter to Control Output

Preset Output in Heating/cooling Control

The preset output can be set for both of the heating and cooling sides.
The computation starts from the value of 50% of internal computed value (value before
split into heating- and cooling-side outputs) when the operation mode is switched from
RESET to RUN.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Preset output In RESET mode, fixed control
Heating-side preset output can be generated.
PO EASY
output (in Heating/ In Position proportional
PID
cooling control) control, Valve opening can
Cooling-side preset be set;
POc EASY
output -5.0 to 105.0%
Note1: The PID number (1 to 8, R) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is displayed.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

For ON/OFF output (ON/OFF output or ON/OFF output in Heating/cooling control), 0.0%
is output when the setting value is 0.0% or less and 100.0% is output when 0.1% or
more.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-19
10.12 Setting Preset Output Value

10.12.2 Setting Output Value When Switched to MAN Mode (Manual Preset Output)

Description
When the operation mode is switched from AUTO to MAN, each of the following can be
selected.
• The control output takes over the control output as is.
• The control output bumps to the manual preset output.

When the manual preset output is output, the manual operation is possible after the
bump.
Manual preset output is limited by the output high and low limits. (when Output limiter
switch (OLMT) = ON)

Control output
100%

Manual preset output Output bump

Control output obtained by PID

50% computation based on
deviation between SP and PV. Output bumpless

0%
Time
AUTO state MAN state

Point where the controller

enters MAN state

When the operation mode is switched from MAN to AUTO, transferred without bump from
the manual output to the control output.

► Output limiter: 10.3 Setting Limiter to Control Output

► Output limiter switch: 10.4 Disabling Output Limiter in MAN mode

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Hold the control output
in AUTO mode (bumpless)
1: Use manual preset output 1
(output bump)
2: Use manual preset output 2
Manual preset output (output bump)
MPON STD
number selection 3: Use manual preset output 3
TUNE
(output bump)
4: Use manual preset output 4
(output bump)
5: Use manual preset output 5
(output bump)
MPO1 to Manual preset output 1
STD -5.0 to 105.0%
MPO5 to 5
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

10-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.12 Setting Preset Output Value

10.12.3 Setting Output Value When Error Occurs (Input Error Preset Output)

Description
The 0% control output, 100% control output, or input preset output can be selected and
output as input error preset output in the following conditions.

• The input burnout occurs during operation in AUTO or CAS mode and RUN mode.
• The ADC error occurs during operation in AUTO or CAS mode and RUN mode.

However, the manual output becomes the output when the input burnout occurs in MAN
mode and RUN mode.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Preset output
Input error preset
EPO STD 1: 0% output SYS
output
2: 100% output
10

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-21
 10.13 Setting 10-segment Linearizer for Output

Description
A total of up to four 10-segment linearizers can be used for the input unit and output unit.
For the position used by a 10-segment linearizer, see the function block diagram.
► Function block diagram: 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
► 10-segment linearizer input: 7.1.4 (3) Setting 10-segment Linearizer

10-segment Linearizer Biasing

This function is used to correct the control output by adding the corresponding bias
values to each of the 11 points of optionally set input values. When the 10-segment
linearizer input is A1 or less, B1 is added. Moreover, the input is A11 or more, B11 is
added.

10-segment Corrected value

linearizer output (Actual control output +
10-segment linearizer bias)

Actual control output

-5.0 to 105.0%

B6

10-segment linearizer bias

B5
B3 B4

A9 A10 A11 10-segment

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A8 linearizer input
A7
-5.0 to 105.0%

10-segment Linearizer Approximation

This function is used to correct the control output.
As shown in the figure below, the output values can be optionally set to 11 points of the
optionally set input values. When the 10-segment linearizer input is A1 or less, the value
of extended line between B1 and B2 is output. Moreover, when the input is A11 or more,
the value of extended line between B10 and B11 is output.

10-segment
linearizer output
B5 to B11 are equalized to B4.
B4
-5.0 to 105.0%

Output range
after
10-segment
B3
linearizer
approximation

B2

B1

A5 to A11 are
equalized to A4.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A11
10-segment
Actual control output range linearizer input

-5.0 to 105.0%

10-22 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.13 Setting 10-segment Linearizer for Output

Setting Details
Parameter
Name Display level Setting range Menu symbol
symbol
OFF: Disable
PV: PV analog input
RSP: RSP analog input
AIN2: AIN2 analog input
10-segment
Group 1, 2: STD AIN4: AIN4 analog input
PYS linearizer
Group 3, 4: PRO PVIN: PV input
selection
OUT: OUT analog output
OUT2: OUT2 analog
output
RET: RET analog output
-66.7 to 105.0% of input
10-segment
Group 1, 2: STD range (EU)
A1 to A11 linearizer PYS1
Group 3, 4: PRO Output linearizer: -5.0 to
input 1 PYS2
105.0%
PYS3
10-segment linearizer bias:
PYS4
-66.7 to 105.0% of input
range span (EUS)
10-segment 10-segment linearizer
Group 1, 2: STD
B1 to B11 linearizer approximation: -66.7 to
Group 3, 4: PRO
output 1 105.0% of input range 10
(EU)
Output linearizer: -5.0 to
105.0%

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

0: 10-segment linearizer
10-segment
Group 1, 2: STD bias
PMD linearizer
Group 3, 4: PRO 1: 10-segment linearizer
mode
approximation
Note1: The group number (1 to 4) is displayed on Group display while each parameter is displayed.

Set it in the following orders.

(1) PYS: Specifies where the 10-segment linearizer function is used.
Setpoint OUT functions before output to OUT terminal.
Setpoint OUT2 functions before output to OUT2 terminal. (for Heating/cooling type
only)
Setpoint RET functions before output to RET terminal.
(2) PMD: Specifies whether to use it as a 10-segment linearizer bias or a 10-segment
linearizer approximation.
(3) A1 to A11, B1 to B11: Sets the 10-segment linearizer input and 10-segment linearizer
output.

Note
• Set the 10-segment linearizer so that it increases monotonically.
• If the same setpoint is set for the two or more parameters of 10-segment linearizer selection
(PYS), a smaller group number is used.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-23
 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

Description
The analog output type can be selected from among 4 to 20, 0 to 20, 20 to 4, or 20 to 0
mA.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OUT current output
OU.A STD
range 4-20: 4 to 20 mA,
OUT2 current output 0-20: 0 to 20 mA,
OU2.A STD OUT
range 20-4: 20 to 4 mA,
RET current output 20-0: 20 to 0 mA
RET.A STD
range

Parameters and Corresponding Terminals

OU.A OUT terminal
OU2.A OUT2 terminal
RET.A RET terminal

10-24 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.15 Setting Split Computation Output Function

Description
Split computation output is useful for the case where multiple (up to 3) operating
units for switching, for example, hot and cool water are linked for control. There are
two characteristics of split computations: V-mode characteristics and Parallel-mode
characteristics. The current output range can be changed.
► Current output range: 10.14 Changing Current Output Range

V-mode Characteristics
The following explains an example of letting OUT terminal and RET terminal present the
V-mode characteristics of split computations.

Setting Example
OUT terminal RET terminal

Control output type/Retransmission output type OT = 00.02 (current) RTS=OUT1

Current output 100% segmental point OU.H=100.0% RET.H=0.0%

10
Current output 0% segmental point OU.L=25.0% RET.L=75.0%

Current output range OU.A=4-20 RET.A=4-20

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

RET current output
OUT current output
100% segmental point
100% segmental point
mA %
20 100
RET terminal

16 75
Output after computation

OUT terminal

12 50

8 25 RET current output

OUT current output 0% segmental point
0% segmental point
4 0
3.8
0 25 50 75 100 %
Output before split computation

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-25
10.15 Settisng Split Computation Output Function

Parallel-mode Characteristics
The following explains an example of letting OUT terminal and RET terminal present the
Parallel-mode characteristics of split computations.

Setting Example
OUT terminal RET terminal

Control output type/Retransmission output type OT = 00.02 (current) RTS=OUT1

Current output 100% segmental point OU.H=100.0% RET.H=75.0%

Current output 0% segmental point OU.L=25.0% RET.L=0.0%

Current output range OU.A=4-20 RET.A=4-20

RET terminal OUT terminal

100% segmental point 100% segmental point
mA %
0 100

RET terminal
Output after computation

5 75

OUT terminal

10 50

15 25
RET terminal OUT terminal
0% segmental point 0% segmental point

20 0

0 25 50 75 100 %
Output before split computation

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
100% segmental point
OU.H PRO
of OUT current output
0% segmental point of
OU.L PRO
OUT current output
100% segmental point
OU2.H PRO
of OUT2 current output
-100.0 to 200.0% OUT
0% segmental point of
OU2.L PRO
OUT2 current output
100% segmental point
RET.H PRO
of RET current output
0% segmental point of
RET.L PRO
RET current output

Parameters and Corresponding Terminals

OU.H, OU.L OUT terminal
OU2.H, OU2.L OUT2 terminal
RET.H, RET.L RET terminal

10-26 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.16 Adjusting Motor-operated Valve Position
(Position Proportional Output)
When performing control using the motor-operated valve position, adjustment of the
valve position is necessary.
Start of valve
position adjustment.

NO
Use the feedback input.

YES

Move to
the estimating type NO
if a feedback
input burnout
occurs.
10
YES

V.MOD = 1 V.MOD = 0 V.MOD = 2

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

Control by estimating type Control with Control by estimating type
at feedback input error. feedback input (no feedback input)

Control by
valve position estimating type.
Set TR.T.

Control by
valve position estimating type.
Set TR.T.
Adjust a valve position NO
automatically.

YES

V.AT Adjust a valve

position manually.
V.RS, V.L, V.H

End

When controlling by estimating type, set TR.T corresponding to the valve characteristic.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-27
10.16 Adjusting Motor-operated Valve Position (Position Proportional Output)

10.16.1 Setting Valve Operation Mode

Description
Position proportional control monitors the control output signals and the feedback signals
from the control valve and regulates to keep the valve opening and the control output
signal in agreement.
Position proportional control (output) operation mode has feedback type and estimating
type.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Valve position feedback type
1: Valve position feedback type
Valve adjusting (moves to the estimating type if
V.MOD STD OUT
mode a feedback input error or break
occurs.)
2: Valve position estimating type

10.16.2 Adjusting Valve Position Automatically

Description
The fully-closed and fully-opened positions of a valve can be set automatically by the
feedback input signal from a valve.
The following describes the procedure of adjusting the valve position automatically.
(1) Verify that the wirings are correct.
(2) Set the operation mode to MAN.
(3) Set the automatic valve position adjustment (V.AT) to ON. (V.AT blinks during the
automatic adjustment.)
(4) When the adjustment is completed, V.AT returns to OFF.
When the adjustment fails, VAT.E appears on PV display.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Automatic
OFF: Stop automatic adjustment
V.AT valve position EASY OUT
ON: Start automatic adjustment
adjustment

10-28 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.16 Adjusting Motor-operated Valve Position (Position Proportional Output)

10.16.3 Adjusting Valve Position Manually

Description
The following procedure describes how to adjust valve position manually.
(1) Verify that the wirings are correct.
(2) Set the operation mode to MAN.
(3) Reset the valve position (Set V.RS=ON).
(4) Display the fully-closed valve position setting (V.L), determine the fully-closed
position while holding down the Down arrow ( ) key, and press the SET/ENTER
key.
(5) Display the fully-opened valve position setting (V.H), determine the fully-opened
position while holding down the Up arrow ( ) key, and press the SET/ENTER key.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Setting V.RS to ON resets the
Valve position valve adjustment settings and
V.RS EASY
setting reset causes the indication “V.RS” to
blink.
10
Pressing the SET/ENTER key
with valve position set to the fully-

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

Fully-closed valve closed position by Down arrow
V.L EASY
position setting key causes the adjusted value to
OUT
be stored. When V.L adjustment is
complete, V.L stops blinking.
Pressing the SET/ENTER key
with valve position set to the fully-
Fully-opened valve opened position by Up arrow key
V.H EASY
position setting causes the adjusted value to be
stored. When V.H adjustment is
complete, V.H stops blinking

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-29
10.16 Adjusting Motor-operated Valve Position (Position Proportional Output)

10.16.4 Setting Valve Traveling Time (Estimating Type)

Description
In the estimating type, a traveling time required to fully open the valve from its fully-
closed position is set and valve positions are estimated according to the time consumed
for valve operation.
The valve position estimating type is used when the feedback input of valve positions
cannot be obtained.
(Wiring for feedback input is not necessary.)
The fully-opened side relay keeps ON-state when the output is 100%, and the fully-
closed side relay keeps ON-state when the output is 0%.

Operating Principles
In the estimating type, the valve position is obtained by calculating the virtual feedback
input based on the valve traveling time.
However, the virtual feedback input starts calculation from 50% at power-on.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
TR.T Valve traveling time STD 5 to 300 s OUT

10.16.5 Selecting Feedback Input (Resistor/Current)

Description
Only the wiring for resistor or current is necessary for feedback input. There is no setting.
► Wiring: 17.4.5 Valve Position Output and Feedback Input Wiring

10-30 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 10.17 Using 15 V DC Loop Power Supply

Description
The 15 V DC loop power supply is a function to supply DC power (14.5 to 18.0 V DC (21
mA DC)) to a 2-wire transmitter.
The loop power supply block is isolated from the controller’s internal circuitry. In addition,
the block is equipped with a current limiting circuit. Therefore, accidental short-circuits
that may occur in the field do not adversely affect the rest of the controller’s internal
circuitry.
Note that the loop power supply function cannot be used for digital communication where
the supply voltage is superposed on the signal line.

The following shows the examples of loop power supply connection to a 2-wire
transmitter.

2-wire transmitter
10
0.4-2 V DC
100 Ω

Output (Control and Retransmission) Functions

Controller

IM 05P02C41-01EN 10-31
10.17 Using 15 V DC Loop Power Supply

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Retransmission OFF: Disable
RTS EASY
output type of RET PV1: PV
Retransmission SP1: SP
O1RS output type of OUT EASY OUT1: OUT (Valve opening: 0 to
current output 100 % in Position proportional
control)
LPS: 15 V DC loop power supply
PV2: Loop-2 PV
SP2: Loop-2 SP
OUT2: Loop-2 OUT
TSP1: Target SP
HOUT1: Heating-side OUT
COUT1: Cooling-side OUT OUT
Retransmission MV1: Position proportional output
output type of (internal computed value)
O2RS EASY
OUT2 current TSP2: Loop-2 target SP
output HOUT2: Loop-2 heating-side OUT
COUT2: Loop-2 cooling-side OUT
MV2: Loop-2 position proportional
output (internal computed
value)
PV: PV terminals analog input
RSP: RSP terminals analog input
AIN2: AIN2 terminals analog input
AIN4: AIN4 terminals analog input

Parameters and Corresponding Terminals

RTS RET terminal
O1RS OUT terminal
O2RS OUT2 terminal

10-32 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 11 Alarm Functions

11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Description
These alarms work irrespective of the operation mode.
The alarm-related parameters consist of the alarm type (type, stand-by action, energized/
de-energized, and latch function), PV velocity alarm time setpoint, alarm hysteresis,
alarm (On-/Off-) delay timer, and alarm setpoint.
In Cascade control, both of Loop 1 and Loop 2 have these parameters.
Alarm-related parameter Number of settings

Alarm type 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)

PV velocity alarm time setpoint 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)

Alarm hysteresis 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)

Alarm (on-/off-) delay timer 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)

Alarm setpoint 8 (number of settings) x 2 (number of loops)

► Alarm hysteresis: 11.3 Setting Hysteresis to Alarm Operation
► Alarm delay timer: 11.4 Delaying Alarm Output (Alarm Delay Timer)
► Alarm setpoint: 6.4 Setting Alarm Setpoint

11
Both of Loop-1 and Loop-2 have eight groups of alarms.
Factory default: Only four groups of alarm-related parameters are displayed.

Alarm Functions
► Terminal function: 17.4.7 Contact Output Wiring

Alarm output can be assigned to the unused control relay output or contact output.
► Control relay output: 11.5 Setting Alarm Output to Control Relay Terminal
► Contact output: 12.2.1 Setting Function of Contact Output

Energized/de-energized of alarm output can be changed.

► Energized/de-energized: 12.2.2 Changing Contact Type of Contact Output

To read the conditions of alarms, outputs, or latches via communication, see

Communication Interface User's Manual.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-1
11.1 Setting Alarm Type

PV High Limit Alarm and PV Low Limit Alarm

PV high limit ON OFF

alarm output

PV high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

PV

Alarm hysteresis
PV low limit
alarm setpoint

PV low limit OFF ON

alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

SP High Limit Alarm and SP Low Limit Alarm

SP high limit ON OFF

alarm output

SP high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

SP

Alarm hysteresis
SP low limit
alarm setpoint

SP low limit OFF ON

alarm output

Time
Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

11-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Deviation High Limit Alarm and Deviation Low Limit Alarm

Deviation high limit OFF ON OFF

alarm output

Alarm hysteresis
Deviation high limit
alarm setpoint (positive setpoint)
Target setpoint
(SP) PV
Deviation low limit
alarm setpoint (negative setpoint)
Alarm hysteresis

Deviation low limit OFF ON OFF

alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

When a negative setpoint is set for the deviation high limit alarm setpoint, the deviation setpoint will be
lower than the SP.
Moreover, when a positive setpoint is set for the deviation low limit alarm setpoint, the deviation setpoint
will be higher than the SP.
11

Deviation High and Low Limits Alarm

Alarm Functions
Deviation OFF ON OFF ON OFF
high and low limits
alarm output

Alarm hysteresis
Deviation high and
PV
low limits alarm setpoint
Target setpoint
(SP)

Alarm hysteresis

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

Deviation within High and Low Limits Alarm

Deviation within
high and low limits ON OFF ON OFF ON
alarm output

Alarm hysteresis
Deviation within high PV
and low limits alarm setpoint
Target setpoint
(SP)

Alarm hysteresis

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-3
11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Target SP High Limit Alarm and Target SP Low Limit Alarm

Target SP high limit ON OFF
alarm output

Alarm hysteresis
Target SP high limit
alarm setpoint
SP in ramp rate setting
Taraget SP

Target SP low limit

alarm setpoint
Alarm hysteresis

Target SP low limit OFF ON

alarm output

Time
SP changing SP changing SP changing SP changing

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

Target SP Deviation High Limit Alarm and Target SP Deviation Low Limit Alarm

Deviation high limit OFF ON OFF

alarm output

Alarm hysteresis
Deviation high limit
Target SP alarm setpoint (positive setpoint)
(SP)
Deviation low limit PV
alarm setpoint (negative setpoint)
Alarm hysteresis

Deviation low limit OFF ON OFF

alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).
* Target SP: a set target setpoint. When the ramp-rate is set, it becomes a final target setpoint.

When a negative setpoint is set for the deviation high limit alarm setpoint, the deviation setpoint will be
lower than the target SP.
Moreover, when a positive setpoint is set for the deviation low limit alarm setpoint, the deviation setpoint
will be higher than the target SP.

11-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Target SP Deviation High and Low Limits Alarm

Deviation OFF ON OFF ON OFF

high and low limits
alarm output

Alarm hysteresis
Deviation high and
PV
Target SP low limits alarm setpoint
(SP)

Alarm hysteresis

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

Target SP Deviation within High and Low Limits Alarm

Deviation within
high and low limits ON OFF ON OFF ON
alarm output

Alarm hysteresis
11
Deviation within high PV
Target SP and low limits alarm setpoint

Alarm Functions
(SP)

Alarm hysteresis

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-5
11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Control Output High Limit Alarm and Control Output Low Limit Alarm
In Heating/cooling control, alarms are heating-side control output high limit alarm and
heating-side control output low limit alarm.

Control output high limit ON OFF

alarm output

Control output high limit

alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Control output (OUT)

Alarm hysteresis
Control output low limit
alarm setpoint

Control output low limit OFF ON

alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

Cooling-side Control Output High Limit Alarm and Cooling-side Control

Output Low Limit Alarm

Cooling-side
Control output high limit ON OFF
alarm output

Cooling-side
Control output high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Cooling-side control output (COUT)

Cooling-side Alarm hysteresis

Control output low limit
alarm setpoint

Cooling-side
Control output low limit OFF ON
alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

11-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Analog Input PV High Limit Alarm and Analog Input PV Low Limit Alarm
These alarms monitor the input value after the analog input computation process (entrance
to the input ladder calculation) is completed.

Analog input
ON OFF
PV high limit
alarm output

Analog input
PV high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Analog input

Analog input Alarm hysteresis

PV low limit
alarm setpoint

Analog input
OFF ON
PV low limit
alarm output

11
Time

Alarm Functions
Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

Analog Input RSP High limit Alarm and Analog Input RSP Low Limit Alarm
These alarms monitor the input value after the analog input computation process (entrance
to the input ladder calculation) is completed.

Analog input
ON OFF
RSP high limit
alarm output

Analog input
RSP high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Analog input

Analog input Alarm hysteresis

RSP low limit
alarm setpoint

Analog input
OFF ON
RSP low limit
alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-7
11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Analog Input AIN2 High Limit Alarm and Analog Input AIN2 Low Limit Alarm
These alarms monitor the input value after the analog input computation process (entrance
to the input ladder calculation) is completed.

Analog input
ON OFF
AIN2 high limit
alarm output

Analog input
AIN2 high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Aux. analog (AIN2) input

Analog input Alarm hysteresis
AIN2 low limit
alarm setpoint

Analog input
OFF ON
AIN2 low limit
alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

Analog Input AIN4 High Limit Alarm and Analog Input AIN4 Low Limit Alarm
These alarms monitor the input value after the analog input computation process (entrance
to the input ladder calculation) is completed.

Analog input
ON OFF
AIN4 high limit
alarm output

Analog input
AIN4 high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Aux. analog (AIN4) input

Analog input Alarm hysteresis
AIN4 low limit
alarm setpoint

Analog input
OFF ON
AIN4 low limit
alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

11-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Feedback Input High Limit Alarm and Feedback Input Low Limit Alarm
These alarms can be used only for Position proportional type..
These alarms monitor the feedback input (resistance or current) value.
The setting range for these alarms is 0.0 to 100.0%.
However, the setting range varies depending on whether the feedback input is a current
value (4 to 20 mA) or resistance value (100 Ω to 2.5 kΩ).
Current value: 4 mA corresponds to 0.0%, and 20 mA to 100.0%.
Resistance value (e.g., 1 kΩ): The resistance value when the valve is fully closed after
the valve position adjustment corresponds to 0.0%, and the resistance value when the
valve is fully opened corresponds to 100.0%. 0 Ω does not correspond to 0.0%, and 1
kΩ does not correspond to 100.0%.

Feedback input
ON OFF
high limit
alarm output

Feedback input
high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Feedback input

Feedback input
low limit
Alarm hysteresis 11
alarm setpoint

Alarm Functions
Feedback input
OFF ON
low limit
alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

PV Velocity Alarm

PV velocity OFF ON OFF ON OFF

alarm output

PV

Exceeds the velocity

Monitors the variation of the
measured value for 2 points by
VT the time interval set in VT. VT

Time

Velocity alarm Velocity alarm

setpoint setpoint

Velocity alarm Velocity alarm

time setpoint An alarm occurs if the velocity time setpoint
VT1 to VT8 exceeds this inclination. VT1 to VT8

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

The PV velocity alarm function does not work the alarm hysteresis, the stand-by action
and the alarm delay timer functions.
IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-9
11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Fault diagnosis Alarm

The function outputs an alarm signal in the following cases.
The corresponding event (EV) lamp is lit and the contact output turns on (when the
contact type is energized).
• Burnout of PV input, RSP remote input, or auxiliary analog input
• ADC failure of PV input, RSP remote input, or auxiliary analog input
• Reference junction compensation (RJC) error of PV input, RSP remote input
The fault diagnosis alarm does not work the stand-by action functions.

FAIL output
When the FAIL condition is caused (faulty MCU or system data error), DO (alarm output)
turned off regardless of contact type.
The FAIL output does not work the alarm latch, the energized/de-energized and the
stand-by action functions.

Stand-by Action
The stand-by action is a function for ignoring the alarm condition and keeps the alarm off
until the alarm condition is removed. Once the alarm condition is removed, the stand-by
action is cancelled.
It is effective in the following cases where;
• The power is turned on
• The alarm type is changed
• Forced stand-by via communication

The following shows the behavior of an alarm with the stand-by action at power ON.

ºC Normal Abnormal
Treated
as normal The alarm output
turns on.
PV low limit alarm setpoint

The alarm output does not turn on

in this region even if the PV valule
is below PV low limit alarm setpoint.

Power-on Time

11-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Alarm Latch Function

The alarm latch function is a function for keeping the alarm output (keeping the alarm
output on) after entering the alarm condition (alarm output is turned on) until an order to
release the alarm latch is received.

The alarm latch function has the following four types of action.
Latch 1
Cancels the alarm output when an order to release the alarm latch is received. (Alarm
output OFF.)
However, an order to release the alarm latch is ignored if the order is received during
alarm condition.
Latch 2
Always forces cancelling of the alarm output when an order to release the alarm latch
is received. (Alarm output OFF)
Latch 3
Cancels the alarm output when an order to release the alarm latch is received or when
the alarm condition is removed. (Alarm output OFF.)
Latch 4
Cancels the alarm output when an order to release the alarm latch is received. (Alarm
output OFF.)
However, cancels the alarm output for the duration of the sampling period (control
period) if an order to release the alarm latch is received during alarm condition. (Alarm
output OFF) 11

Alarm Functions
PV high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

PV

PV high limit Lit Unlit Lit Unlit

alarm indicator

PV high limit alarm output ON OFF ON OFF

(no latch action)

PV high limit alarm output ON OFF ON

of latch 1 action

Release order Release order

PV high limit alarm output ON OFF ON OFF
of latch 2 action
Release order Release order

PV high limit alarm output ON OFF ON OFF

of latch 3 action
Release order Release order
PV high limit alarm output ON OFF ON ON
of latch 4 action
OFF during the
Release order Release order
sampling period

Time
Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-11
11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Release of Alarm Latch

The alarm latch function can be cancelled by the user function key, via communication/
ladder program, or by contact input.
Cancelling the alarm latch function cancels all latched alarm outputs.
► Release by user function key: 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key
► Release by contact input: 12.1.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Release via communication: UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface User’s Manual

PV high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis

Alarm hysteresis
PV low limit
alarm setpoint PV

PV high limit alarm state Lit Unlit Lit Unlit

PV low limit alarm state

Unlit Lit Unlit Lit Unlit

PV high limit alarm output ON OFF ON OFF

of latch 1 action
Release order Release order Release order

PV low limit alarm output

of latch 2 action ON ON OFF ON OFF

Release order Release order Release order

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

Operation of Alarm Output and Display Lamp (ALM)

The contact output and display lamp (ALM) are usually output and displayed according
to the setpoint of the alarm type. However, the alarm conditions (operations) of the
normal action, and latch action can be assigned to the contact output and display lamp
(ALM), regardless of the setpoint of the alarm type. (Two operations can be assigned
simultaneously.)
► Display lamp action: 13.1 Setting Display Functions
► Contact output action: 12.2.1 Setting Function of Contact Output

11-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
AL1 to AL8 Alarm-1 to -8 type EASY See the table below.
PV velocity alarm time 00.01 to 99.59 ALRM
VT1 to VT8 EASY
setpoint 1 to 8 (minute.second)
Note1: The initial values of the parmeters AL1 to AL8 and VT1 to VT8 are "4".
Only AL1 to AL4 and VT1 to VT4 are displayed. The number of alarms can be changed using
the parameter ALNO.
Note2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

11

Alarm Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-13
11.1 Setting Alarm Type

The following shows the example of setting PV high limit (01), With stand-by action (1),
De-energized (1), and Latch 1 action (1).

Symbol Alarm type

Stand-by action
Energized/de-energized
Latch

Latch action Energized (0) / Stand-by action Alarm

Name
(Note 1) de-energized (1) Without (0) / with (1) type
Disable 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 00
PV high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 01
PV low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 02
SP high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 03
SP low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 04
Deviation high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 05
Deviation low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 06
Deviation high and low limits 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 07
Deviation within high and low
0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 08
limits
Target SP high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 09
Target SP low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 10
Target SP deviation high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 11
Target SP deviation low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 12
Target SP deviation high and
0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 13
low limits
Target SP deviation within
0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 14
high and low limits
Control output high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 15
Control output low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 16
Cooling-side Control output
0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 17
high limit
Cooling-side Control output
0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 18
low limit
Analog input PV high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 19
Analog input PV low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 20
Analog input RSP high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 21
Analog input RSP low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 22
Analog input AIN2 high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 23
Analog input AIN2 low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 24
Analog input AIN4 high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 25
Analog input AIN4 low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 26
Feedback input high limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 27
Feedback input low limit 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 0/1 28
PV velocity 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 - (Note 2) 29
Fault diagnosis 0/1/2/3/4 0/1 - (Note 2) 30
FAIL - (Note 2) - (Note 2) - (Note 2) 31
Note 1: 0: No latch function, 1: Latch 1, 2: Latch 2, 3: Latch 3, 4: Latch 4
Note 2: -: Alarm function doesn't work even if any value is set.

11-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.2 Setting Number of Alarm Groups to Use

Description
Up to eight alarm groups of alarm type, alarm hysteresis, alarm (On-/Off-) delay timer,
and alarm setpoint are available.
Unused alarm parameters can be hidden and their functions can be turned off.
The initial value of parameter ALNO. is “4.”
When ALNO. = 4, for example, only the four groups of alarm type, PV velocity alarm time
setpoint, alarm hysteresis, alarm delay timer, and alarm setpoint are displayed.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Number of alarm
ALNO. PRO 1 to 8 CTL
groups
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

11

Alarm Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-15
 11.3 Setting Hysteresis to Alarm Operation

Description
If the On/Off switch of the alarm output is too busy, you can alleviate the busyness by
increasing the alarm hysteresis.

Hysteresis for PV High Limit Alarm

Point of ON/OFF action

Output
(alarm setpoint)
ON

OFF Hysteresis

PV

When Setting Hysteresis of 5ºC and 15ºC for PV High Limit Alarm
HYS: 5ºC (example) HYS: 15ºC (example)

Closed (ON) Closed (ON)

Open Open
Alarm-1 setpoint: Alarm-1 setpoint:
100ºC (example) 100ºC (example)

PV PV
Alarm ON

OFF
ON
OFF Alarm ON

ON

OFF
OFF

Time Time

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Sets the hysteresis setpoint as a
display value.
Alarm-1 to -8 -19999 to 30000 (set it within the
HY1 to HY8 EASY ALRM
hysteresis input range)
The decimal point position
depends on the input type.
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

11-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.4 Delaying Alarm Output (Alarm Delay Timer)

Description
The alarm on-delay timer is a function for turning on the alarm when the alarm condition
occurs, and the timer starts and the set time elapses.
The timer is reset if the alarm condition is removed while the timer is running. No alarm is
generated.
The figure below shows the example of the On-delay timer

PV high limit
alarm setpoint Alarm hysteresis
PV

PV high limit Unlit Lit

alarm state 11
(without
delay timer) Elapsed time Elapsed time

Alarm Functions
On-delay timer time On-delay timer time

PV high limit OFF ON

alarm output

Time

Contact type in the figure above: Energized when an event occurs (factory default).

The alarm Off-delay timer is a function for turning off the alarm when the alarm condition
is removed (normal condition), and the timer starts and the set time elapses.
The timer is reset if the alarm condition occurs again while the timer is running. The
alarm is not cancelled.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
DYN1 to Alarm-1 to -8 On-delay
STD
DYN8 timer
0.00 to 99.59 (minute.second) ALRM
DYF1 to Alarm-1 to -8 Off-delay
PRO
DYF8 timer
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-17
 11.5 Setting Alarm Output to Control Relay Terminal

Description
The control relay terminal can be used for alarm output when it is not used for control
output.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Same as the setpoint for the
OUT relay function contact output function.
OR.S STD
selection See 12.2.1, “Setting Function of
Contact Output.”
0: Closes the contact when an
OUT relay contact event occurs
OR.D PRO ALM
type 1: Opens the contact when an
event occurs.
OUT2 relay
OR2.S STD Same as OR.S.
function selection
OUT2 relay contact
OR2.D PRO Same as OR.D
type

Parameters and Corresponding Terminals

OR.S, OR.D OUT terminal
OR2.S, OR2.D OUT2 terminal

11-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.6 Setting Alarm Action According to Operation
Mode
Description
The alarm action usually functions regardless of operation modes.
Setting the alarm mode allows the alarm action to be disabled in RESET or MAN mode.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Always active
1: Not active in RESET mode
AMD Alarm mode STD ALRM
2: Not active in RESET or MAN
mode
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

11

Alarm Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-19
 11.7 Setting Heater Break Alarm

Description
Either of heater break alarm function or heater current measurement function can be
selected.

Heater Break Alarm Function

The heater break alarm function measures the heater current, and outputs the heater
break alarm if the current is less than the heater break detecting point.
The heater break alarm function can be used only for ON/OFF output (relay output) or for
time proportional output (relay output, voltage pulse output). It cannot be used for current
output.

Timing which detects the heater break alarm is as follows.

• For ON/OFF output:
Heater break is detected when control output is in On-state. (Heater break is not
detected when control output is in Off-state.)
• For time proportional output:
When On-state time of control output is 130 ms or longer, heater break is detected.
Heater break is detected between 20 ms and 120 ms after control output turns on.
Heater current value is detected every 200 ms while control output turns on.

Cycle time Cycle time

Control ON ON OFF
output
Turn off the power
130 ms supply for heater
after the cycle time in
progress elapses.
Heater break alarm may
occur if turning off the
power supply for heater
here (On state).
Control
output 75% 0%

RUN→STOP
However, preset output = 0% in STOP.

Time

Heater break detecting point

Set a detecting point (setpoint) of heater break alarm.
The heater break alarm is output if the measured current is less than the detecting point
(setpoint).

Current Transformer Winding Number Ratio

The coil winding number ratio of current transformer (CT ratio) can be set.
Example: Set the CT ratio "800" for the CTL-6-S-H manufactured by U.R.D. Co., Ltd.

11-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 11.7 Setting Heater Break Alarm

Heater Current Measured Value

A measured heater current value can be confirmed by a displayed value on operation
display.
► Heater current measured value: 6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operaiotn Displays

Heater Break Alarm Delay Timer

The delay timer (On-delay timer, Off-delay timer) can be set for the heater break alarm
function.
► Delay timer: 11.4 Delaying Alarm Output (Alarm Delay Timer)

Heater Break Alarm Output Contact Type

The heater break alarm output contact type sets an action direction of contact output (ON/
OFF) when an event occurs.

Using a single-phase heater

Temperature input

CT1
Control output
CTL-6-S-H
(Current sensor)
TC 11

Alarm Functions
SSR Single-phase heater

Electric furnace

Using a three-phase heater

Temperature input

CT1
Control output CT2 CTL-6-S-H
(Current sensor)

TC

R
S
T
SSR Three-phase heater

Electric furnace

IM 05P02C41-01EN 11-21
11.7 Setting Heater Break Alarm

Heater Current Measurement Function

The heater current value can be confirmed by a displayed value on operation display.
► Heater current measured value: 6.1 Monitoring and Control of Operaiotn Displays

The heater break alarm function can be used only for ON/OFF output (relay output), for
time proportional output (relay output, voltage pulse output) or for current output.

Heater current value is detected every 200 ms.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Heater current
HB1.S, Heater break alarm
EASY measurement
HB2.S function selection
1: Heater break alarm
Heater break alarm
HB1, HB2 EASY OFF, 0.1 to 300.0 Arms
current setpoint
CT1.T, CT coil winding number
EASY 1 to 3300
CT2.T ratio
HDN1, Heater break alarm HBA
STD
HDN2 On-delay timer
0.00 to 99.59 (minute.second)
HDF1, Heater break alarm
PRO
HDF2 Off-delay timer
CLS: When the event occurs,
HB1.D, Heater break alarm the contact is closed.
PRO
HB2.D contact type OPN: When the event occurs,
the contact is opened.
Note1: In cases where the current transformer manufactured by U.R.D Co., Ltd. are used, set the
following value for the CT coil winding number ratio.
CTL-6-S-H: 800
CTL-12L-30: 3000

11-22 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 12 Contact Input/Output Functions

12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

12.1.1 Setting Contact Input Function

Description
The contact input function works by setting the contact input number (I relay) to functions
such as the operation mode.
This explanation assumes that the contact type is energized. (The function is executed
when the contact is turned on)

Switch to PRG (Start of program operation)

The mode can be switched to PROG (start of program operation) using contact input.
(Switch by the rising edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Switch to PROG (start of program operation) –
ON→OFF Maintains the current operation status –

Switch to RST (Stop of program operation)

The mode can be switched to RESET (stop of program operation) using contact input.
(Switch by the rising edge)
Contact status Operation Remark 12
OFF→ON Switch to RESET (stop of program operation) –

Contact Input/Output Functions

ON→OFF Maintains the current operation status –

Switch to LOC(LSP) (Start of local-mode operation)

The mode can be switched to LOCAL(LSP) (start of local-mode operation) using contact
input. (Switch by the rising edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Switch to LOCAL(LSP) (start of local-mode operation) –
ON→OFF Maintains the current operation status –

Switch to REM (Start of remote-mode operation)

The mode can be switched to REMOTE (start of remote-mode operation) using contact
input. (Switch by the rising edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Switch to REMOTE (start of remote-mode operation) –
ON→OFF Maintains the current operation status –

PROG/RESET Switch (P/R)

PROG/RESET mode can be switched using contact input. (Switch by the rising edge and
the falling edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON PROG –
ON→OFF RESET –

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-1
12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

PROG/HOLD Switch (P/H)

PROG/HOLD mode can be switched using contact input. (Switch by the rising edge and
the falling edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON PROG –
ON→OFF HOLD –

PROG/LOCAL(LSP) Switch (P/L)

PROG/LOCAL(LSP) mode can be switched using contact input. (Switch by the rising
edge and the falling edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON PROG –
ON→OFF LOCAL –

Switch to HOLD (Start of hold-mode operation)

The mode can be switched to HOLD (start of hold-mode operation) using contact input.
(Switch by the rising edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Switch to HOLD (start of hold-mode operation) –
ON→OFF Maintains the current operation status –

Advance of segment (ADV)

The mode can advance from the current segment to the next segment using contact
input. (Switch by the rising edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Advance from the current segment to the next segment –
ON→OFF Maintains the current operation status –

Wait ON/OFF switch (WAIT)

Wait ON/OFF in the segment switching can be switched using contact input. (Status
switch)
Contact status Operation Remark
ON Wait (switching between segments) –
OFF Wait release –
This function is available only for synchronized operation. Set "OFF" to the parameter for
operations except synchronized operation.

Switch to HOLD for synchronized program operation (S.HLD)

HOLD ON/OFF for synchronized program operation can be switched using contact
input.(Status switch)
Contact status Operation Remark
Wait (wait within a
ON Switch by keystroke or via communication is disabled.
segment interval.)
OFF Hold release Switch by keystroke or via communication is enabled.
This function is available only for synchronized operation. Set "OFF" to the parameter for
operations except synchronized operation.

12-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

AUTO/MAN Switch (A/M)

AUTO/MAN mode can be switched using contact input. (Status switch)
Contact status Operation Remark
ON AUTO Switch by keystroke or via communication is disabled.
OFF MAN Switch by keystroke or via communication is enabled.

LOCAL(LSP)/CAS switch (L/C)

In cascade control, LSP/CAS mode can be switched using contact input. (Status switch)
Contact status Operation Remark
ON LSP Switch by keystroke or via communication is disabled.
OFF CAS Switch by keystroke or via communication is enabled.

Auto-tuning START/STOP Switch (AT)

Auto-tuning START/STOP can be switched using contact input.
Auto-tuning is executed to the PID group currently specified. (Switch by the rising edge
and the falling edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Starts auto-tuning –
ON→OFF Stops auto-tuning –

12
Output Tracking Switch (TRK)
Output tracking can be switched using contact input. (Status switch)

Contact Input/Output Functions

Contact status Operation Remark
ON Turns the output tracking on –
OFF Turns the output tracking off –
Can be used in Cascade primary-loop control.

PV Switch (SW)
Two PV inputs can be switched using contact input. (Status switch)
Contact status Operation Remark
ON Switches to input 2 –
OFF Switches to input 1 –
Can be used in Loop control with PV switching.

Latch Release (LAT)

Latch can be released using contact input. (Switch by the rising edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Releases the latch –
ON→OFF Maintains the current operation status –
Releasing the latch function releases all latched contact (alarm) outputs.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-3
12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

LCD Backlight ON/OFF Switch (LCD)

LCD backlight ON/OFF can be switched using contact input. (Switch by the rising edge
and the falling edge)
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Turns off the LCD backlight –
ON→OFF Turns on the LCD backlight –

Message Display Interruption 1 to 4 (MG 1 to 4)

The message set using LL50A Parameter Setting Software can be interrupt-displayed on
PV display using contact input. The messages are limited to 20 alphanumeric characters.
A maximum of four displays can be registered. (Switch by the rising edge)
► Message: LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual
Contact status Operation Remark
OFF→ON Interrupt-displays the message Pressing the DISPLAY key erases the message.
ON→OFF Displays the current PV –

PV Red/white Switch (PVRW)

PV color can be switched using contact input. (Status switch)
Contact status Operation Remark
ON Red color –
OFF White color –
Set "10" to the parameter PCMD.

Bit-0 to Bit-5 of Program Pattern Number (PT.B0 to PT.B5)

The program pattern number can be switched using contact input. There are three
methods to specify program pattern number.
• Status switch 1 (Operation by keystroke or via communication is enabled depending
on the conditions.)
Program pattern Contact status
number PT.B4 PT.B3 PT.B2 PT.B1 PT.B0
1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
5 OFF OFF ON OFF ON
6 OFF OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF OFF ON ON ON
8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
9 OFF ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
A program pattern is selected with the combination of ON and OFF of a contact input. The pattern
11 or later can be selected similarly.
*1: “1” when the contact input is turned on and “0” when turned off.
*2: Program pattern number can be switched by keystroke or via communication when all contact
inputs of PT.B0 to PT.B4 are turned off.
*3: Program pattern number cannot be switched by keystroke or via communication when any
contact input of PT.B0 to PT.B4 is turned on.
*4: The contact input is turned off when the bit of program pattern number is not assigned to the
contact input.
*5: The immediately preceding program pattern number is held when all contact inputs are turned
off.

12-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

• Status switch 2 (Operation by keystroke or via communication is disabled.)

Program pattern Contact status
number PT.B3 PT.B2 PT.B1 PT.B0
1 OFF OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF OFF OFF ON
3 OFF OFF ON OFF
4 OFF OFF ON ON
5 OFF ON OFF OFF
6 OFF ON OFF ON
7 OFF ON ON OFF
8 OFF ON ON ON
9 ON OFF OFF OFF
10 ON OFF OFF ON
A program pattern is selected with the combination of ON and OFF of a contact input. The pattern
11 or later can be selected similarly.
*1: “1” when the contact input is turned on and “0” when turned off.
*2: Contact input is turned off when the bit of program pattern number is not assigned to the contact
input.

• BCD switch (Operation by keystroke or via communication is disabled.)

Contact status
Program pattern
High order digit (0 to 3) Low order digit (0 to 9)
number
PT.B5 PT.B4 PT.B3 PT.B2 PT.B1 PT.B0
12
1 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

Contact Input/Output Functions

2 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON
6 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF ON OFF ON ON ON
8 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF
9 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
11 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON
12 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
A program pattern is selected with the combination of ON and OFF of a contact input. The pattern
13 or later can be selected similarly.
*1: “1” when the contact input is turned on and “0” when turned off.
*2: Contact input is turned off when the bit of program patttern number is not assigned to the
contact input.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Bit changing method 0: Status switch 1
PT.BC of program pattern PRO 1: Status switch 2 DI.NU
number 2: BCD switch

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-5
12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

Bit-0 to Bit-3 of PID Number (PN.B0 to PN.B3)

The PID number can be switched using contact input. There are two methods to specify
a PID number.
Change the local PID number selection (L.PID) using in local or remote operation.
• Status switch 1 (Operation by keystroke or via communication is enabled depending
on the conditions.)
Contact status
PID number
PN.B3 PN.B2 PN.B1 PN.B0
1 OFF OFF OFF ON
2 OFF OFF ON OFF
3 OFF OFF ON ON
4 OFF ON OFF OFF
5 OFF ON OFF ON
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 OFF ON ON ON
8 ON OFF OFF OFF
*1: “1” when the contact input is turned on and “0” when turned off.
*2: PID number can be switched by keystroke or via communication when all contact inputs of
PN.B0 to PN.B3 are turned off.
*3: PID number cannot be switched by keystroke or via communication when any contact input of
PN.B0 to PN.B3 is turned on.
*4: The contact input is turned off when the bit of PID number is not assigned to the contact input.

• Status switch 2 (Operation by keystroke or via communication is disabled.)

Contact status
PID number
PN.B2 PN.B1 PN.B0
1 OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF OFF ON
3 OFF ON OFF
4 OFF ON ON
5 ON OFF OFF
6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON OFF
8 ON ON ON
*1: “1” when the contact input is turned on and “0” when turned off.
*2: Contact input is turned off when the bit of PID number is not assigned to the contact input.

In Cascade control, PID number selection is for Loop 1 and Loop 2.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Bit changing method of 0: Status switch 1
PN.BC PRO DI.NU
PID number 1: Status switch 2

12-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

Bit-0 to Bit-2 of Manual Preset Output Number (MP.B0 to MP.B2)

The manual preset output number can be switched using contact input. There are two
methods to specify a manual preset output number.
• Status switch 1 (Operation by keystroke or via communication is enabled depending
on the conditions.)
Manual preset Contact status
output number MP.B2 MP.B1 MP.B0
1 OFF OFF ON
2 OFF ON OFF
3 OFF ON ON
4 ON OFF OFF
5 ON OFF ON
*1: “1” when the contact input is turned on and “0” when turned off.
*2: Manual preset output number can be switched by keystroke via communication when all contact
inputs of MP.B0 to MP.B2 are turned off.
*3: Manual preset output number cannot be switched by keystroke or via communication when any
contact input of MP.B0 to MP.B2 is turned on.
*4: The contact input is turned off when the bit of manual preset output number is not assigned to
the contact input.

• Status Switch 2 (Operation by keystroke or via communication is disabled.)

Manual preset Contact status
output number MP.B2 MP.B1 MP.B0
12
1 OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF OFF ON

Contact Input/Output Functions

3 OFF ON OFF
4 OFF ON ON
5 ON OFF OFF
*1: “1” when contact input is turned on and “0” when turned off.
*2: The contact input is turned off when the bit of manual preset output number is not assigned to
the contact input.

In Cascade control, the manual preset output number selection is only for Loop 2.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Bit changing method of
0: Status switch 1
MP.BC manual preset output PRO DI.NU
1: Status switch 2
number
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-7
12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

Contact Action
Type Operation Description
ON Receiving a contact input signal changes
the status to the specified operation, and
Status
a release changes the status back to the
OFF OFF original action.
Rising edge
ON
Receiving an OFF-to-ON contact input
signal changes the status to the specified
OFF OFF operation. The minimum detection time is
Rising edge
the control period + 50 ms.

Pulse width is 50 ms or more.

Detection time:
Control period + 50 ms
Falling edge
ON
Receiving an ON-to-OFF contact input
signal changes the status to the specified
OFF OFF operation. The minimum detection time is
Falling edge
the control period + 50 ms.

Pulse width is 50 ms or more.

Detection time:
Control period + 50 ms

12-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Switch to PROG (Start of program
PRG STD
operation)
Switch to RESET (Stop of
RST STD
program operation)
Switch to LOCAL(LSP) (Start of
LOC STD
local-mode operation)
REM Switch to REMOTE STD
P/R PROG/RESET Switch STD
P/H PROG/HOLD Switch STD
P/L PROG/LOCAL(LSP) Switch STD
Switch to HOLD (Start of hold-
HOLD STD
mode operation)
ADV Advance of segment STD
WAIT Wait ON/OFF switch STD
Switch to HOLD for synchronized
S.HLD PRO DI.SL
program operation
A/M AUTO/MAN switch STD
L/C LOCAL(LSP)/CAS switch STD
AT Auto-tuning START/STOP switch STD
TRK Output tracking switch PRO
12
SW PV switch PRO
LAT Latch release STD

Contact Input/Output Functions

See the following
LCD LCD backlight ON/OFF switch STD section, "UP55A DI
PVRW PV red/white switch STD and Setpoint".

MG1 Message display interruption 1 PRO

MG2 Message display interruption 2 PRO
MG3 Message display interruption 3 PRO
MG4 Message display interruption 4 PRO
PT.B0 Bit-0 of program pattern number EASY
PT.B1 Bit-1 of program pattern number EASY
PT.B2 Bit-2 of program pattern number EASY
PT.B3 Bit-3 of program pattern number EASY
PT.B4 Bit-4 of program pattern number EASY
PT.B5 Bit-5 of program pattern number EASY
PN.B0 Bit-0 of PID number STD
DI.NU
PN.B1 Bit-1 of PID number STD
PN.B2 Bit-2 of PID number STD
PN.B3 Bit-3 of PID number STD
Bit-0 of manual preset output
MP.B0 STD
number
Bit-1 of manual preset output
MP.B1 STD
number
Bit-2 of manual preset output
MP.B2 STD
number

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-9
12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

UP55A (Standard mdel) DI and Setpoint (I relay number)

DI equipped as standard
DI symbol Setpoint
DI1 5025
DI2 5026
DI3 5027
Additional DI
DI symbol Setpoint DI symbol Setpoint DI symbol Setpoint
DI11 5041 – – DI41 5089
DI12 5042 – – DI42 5090
DI13 5043 – – DI43 5091
DI14 5044 – – DI44 5092
DI15 5045 – – DI45 5093
DI16 5046 DI26 5062 DI46 5094

UP55A (Detailed model) DI and Setpoint (I relay number)

DI equipped as standard
DI symbol Setpoint
DI1 5025
DI2 5026
DI3 5027
Additional DI
Optional suffix code Optional suffix code Optional suffix code Optional suffix code
/X1 /X2 /X3 /X4
DI symbol Setpoint DI symbol Setpoint DI symbol Setpoint DI symbol Setpoint
DI11 5041 DI21 5057 DI31 5073 DI41 5089
DI12 5042 DI22 5058 DI32 5074 DI42 5090
DI13 5043 DI23 5059 DI33 5075 DI43 5091
DI14 5044 DI24 5060 DI34 5076 DI44 5092
DI15 5045 DI25 5061 DI35 5077 DI45 5093
Additional DI
Optional suffix code Optional suffix code Optional suffix code
/R1 /A2 /A4 or /AC4
DI symbol Setpoint DI symbol Setpoint DI symbol Setpoint
DI16 5046 DI26 5062 DI46 5094

12-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

12.1.2 Changing Contact Type of Contact Input

Description
The contact type can set the action direction of contact input assigned to the function.

Setting Details
Contact Input Equipped as Standard
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
DI1.D DI1 contact type PRO 0: The assigned function is
enabled when the contact input
DI2.D DI2 contact type PRO is closed.
DI.D
1: The assigned function is
DI3.D DI3 contact type PRO enabled when the contact input
is opened.
Note1: Nothing is displayed on Group display when each parameter is displayed.

Additional Contact Input

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
DI1.D DIn1 contact type PRO
DI2.D DIn2 contact type PRO 0: The assigned function is
enabled when the contact input
DI3.D DIn3 contact type PRO DI.D
is closed.
DI4.D DIn4 contact type PRO 1: The assigned function is
DI5.D DIn5 contact type PRO
enabled when the contact input 12
is opened.
RSP, AIN2, or
DI6.D DIn6 contact type PRO
AIN4

Contact Input/Output Functions

Note1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code. “n” denotes the position of the
terminal area. (n = 1 to 4)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-11
 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function
12.2.1 Setting Function of Contact Output

Description
The contact output function works by setting a status such as an alarm to the contact
output.
This explanation assumes that the contact type is energized. (The contact is turned on
when an event occurs.)

Setting Details
Contact Output Equipped as Standard
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
AL1.S AL1 function selection STD
AL2.S AL2 function selection STD See the following section. ALM
AL3.S AL3 function selection STD
Note1: Nothing is displayed on Group display when each parameter is displayed.

Additional Contact Output

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
DO1.S DOn1 function selection STD
DO2.S DOn2 function selection STD
DO3.S DOn3 function selection STD See the following section. DO
DO4.S DOn4 function selection STD
DO5.S DOn5 function selection STD
Note1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code. “n” denotes the position of the
terminal area. (n = 1 to 4)

Contact Output for Control

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OUT relay function
OR.S STD
selection
See the following section. ALM
OUT2 relay function
OR2.S STD
selection
Note1: Nothing is displayed on Group display when each parameter is displayed.
Note2: OR.S and OR2.S can be used as status output when they are not used as control output.
OR2.S can be used for Heating/cooling type.

12-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

PV Event Status
PV event status can be output to the contact output. (The setpoints below are I relay
numbers.)
► I relay: UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface (RS-485, Ethernet) User's Manual

Setpoint
PV event PV event Function
status output status
4785 4801 PV event 1
4786 4802 PV event 2
4787 4803 PV event 3
4789 4805 PV event 4
4790 4806 PV event 5
4791 4807 PV event 6
4793 4809 PV event 7
4794 4810 PV event 8

• PV event status: The internal alarm status is turned on when an alarm occurs and
turned off in normal condition
• PV event output status: Contact output status when an alarm occurs (ON in alarm
condition and OFF in normal condition)

Time Event Status 12

Time event status can be output to the contact output. (The setpoints below are I relay
numbers.)

Contact Input/Output Functions

► I relay: UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface (RS-485, Ethernet) User's Manual

PV event status Function

4817 Time event 1
4818 Time event 2
4819 Time event 3
4821 Time event 4
4822 Time event 5
4823 Time event 6
4825 Time event 7
4826 Time event 8
4833 Time event 9
4834 Time event 10
4835 Time event 11
4837 Time event 12
4838 Time event 13
4839 Time event 14
4841 Time event 15
4842 Time event 16

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-13
12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

Alarm Status
The alarm status can be output to the contact output. (The setpoints below are I relay
numbers.)
► I relay: UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface (RS-485, Ethernet) User's Manual

Setpoint
Alarm output Function
Alarm status
status
4321 4353 Alarm 1
4322 4354 Alarm 2
4323 4355 Alarm 3
4325 4357 Alarm 4
4326 4358 Alarm 5
4327 4359 Alarm 6
4329 4361 Alarm 7
4330 4362 Alarm 8
4337 4369 Loop-2 alarm 1 (in Cascade control)
4338 4370 Loop-2 alarm 2 (in Cascade control)
4339 4371 Loop-2 alarm 3 (in Cascade control)
4341 4373 Loop-2 alarm 4 (in Cascade control)
4342 4374 Loop-2 alarm 5 (in Cascade control)
4343 4375 Loop-2 alarm 6 (in Cascade control)
4345 4377 Loop-2 alarm 7 (in Cascade control)
4346 4378 Loop-2 alarm 8 (in Cascade control)

• Alarm status: The internal alarm status is turned on when an alarm occurs and
turned off in normal condition
• Alarm output status: Contact output status when an alarm occurs (ON in alarm
condition and OFF in normal condition)

However, the output status depends on the settings of energized/de-energized of alarm,

latch action, and contact type.

The above assumes that the contact type is energized. (Then contact is turned on when
an event occurs.)
To output the normal alarm to the contact output, assign the alarm output status.

► Alarm action: 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

12-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

Alarm Latch Status

The alarm latch status can be output to another contact output irrespective of the setting
of alarm-1 to -8 type (AL1 to AL8). (The setpoints below are I relay numbers.)
► I relay: UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface (RS-485, Ethernet) User's Manual

Setpoint
Alarm output Alarm output Alarm output Alarm output Function
latch 1 status latch 2 status latch 3 status latch 4 status
4385 4417 4449 4481 Alarm 1
4386 4418 4450 4482 Alarm 2
4387 4419 4451 4483 Alarm 3
4389 4421 4453 4485 Alarm 4
4390 4422 4454 4486 Alarm 5
4391 4423 4455 4487 Alarm 6
4393 4425 4457 4489 Alarm 7
4394 4426 4458 4490 Alarm 8
4401 4433 4465 4497 Loop-2 alarm 1 (in Cascade control)
4402 4434 4466 4498 Loop-2 alarm 2 (in Cascade control)
4403 4435 4467 4499 Loop-2 alarm 3 (in Cascade control)
4405 4437 4469 4501 Loop-2 alarm 4 (in Cascade control)
4406 4438 4470 4502 Loop-2 alarm 5 (in Cascade control)
4407 4439 4471 4503 Loop-2 alarm 6 (in Cascade control) 12
4409 4441 4473 4505 Loop-2 alarm 7 (in Cascade control)

Contact Input/Output Functions

4410 4442 4474 4506 Loop-2 alarm 8 (in Cascade control)

• Alarm output latch 1, 2, 3, and 4 status: ON in the latch status of the contact output
when an alarm occurs and OFF in the latch release status of the contact output in
normal condition

However, the output status depends on the settings of contact type.

► Alarm latch action: 11.1 Setting Alarm Type

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-15
12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

Key and Display Status

The key and display status can be output to the contact output. (The setpoints below are
I relay numbers.)
Contact status
Setpoint Function
ON OFF
4705 PARAMETER key
4706 DISPLAY key
4707 Right arrow key
4708 Down arrow key
4709 SET/ENTER key
4710 Up arrow key Key is pressed Key is not pressed
4711 Left key
4716 PTN key
4717 RST key
4718 MODE key
4719 RUN key

Operation Mode and Status

Contact status
Setpoint Function
ON OFF
4177 AUTO/MAN (Loop 1) MAN AUTO
4225 AUTO/MAN (Loop 2) MAN AUTO
4233 LOCAL(LSP)/CASCADE LOCAL CASCADE
4181 Stop of program operation RESET (OFF→ON) –
4182 Start of program operation PROG (OFF→ON) –
4183 Start of local operation LOCAL (OFF→ON) –
REMOTE
4185 Start of remote operation –
(OFF→ON)
4189 Start of hold operation HOLD (OFF→ON) –
4186 Output tracking status Tracking ON Tracking OFF
Wait release
4190 Wait flag Wait command (ON)
command (OFF)
4191 During auto-tuning During AT –
4239 During auto-tuning (Loop 2) During AT –
4265 Pattern end signal (1 s.) Pattern end –
4266 Pattern end signal (3 s.) Pattern end –
4267 Pattern end signal (5 s.) Pattern end –
4257 Wait end signal (1 s.) Wait end –
4258 Wait end signal (3 s.) Wait end –
4259 Wait end signal (5 s.) Wait end –
Wait release
4261 Control flag for segment transition Wait command (ON)
command (OFF)
4209 During automatic valve adjustment During adjustment –
During operartion by the valve position During operation by During operation by
4210
estimating type estimating type feedback input
4213 Valve is open Open –
4214 Valve is closed Closed –
4256 FAIL output Normal status FAIL status

12-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

System Error Status

Contact status
Setpoint Function
ON OFF
4529 Heater break alarm 1 status Alarm occurs Normal
4530 Heater break alarm 2 status Alarm occurs Normal
4769 Message display interruption 1 status With interruption Without interruption
4770 Message display interruption 2 status With interruption Without interruption
4771 Message display interruption 3 status With interruption Without interruption
4773 Message display interruption 4 status With interruption Without interruption

Error Status
Contact status
Setpoint Function
ON OFF
4065 PV input ADC error
RSP input (E1-terminal area)
4066
ADC error
AIN2 input (E2-terminal area)
4067
ADC error
AIN4 input (E4-terminal area)
4069
ADC error
4073 PV input burnout error
RSP input (E1-terminal area)
4074
burnout error
AIN2 input (E2-terminal area)
4075
burnout error 12
AIN4 input (E4-terminal area)
4077
burnout error

Contact Input/Output Functions

4070 PV input RJC error
4071 RSP input RJC error Error occurs Normal
Feedback resistance/current
4081
burnout
Automatic valve position
4082
adjustment error
4097 PV input burnout error (Loop 1)
4098 RSP input burnout error (Loop 1)
4101 PV input over-scale (Loop 1)
4102 PV input under-scale (Loop 1)
4111 Auto-tuning time out (Loop 1)
4113 PV input burnout (Loop 2)
4117 PV input over-scale (Loop 2)
4118 PV input under-scale (Loop 2)
4127 Auto-tuning time out (Loop 2)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-17
12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

System Error Status

Contact status
Setpoint Function
ON OFF
4001 System data error
4002 Calibration value error
4003 User (parameter) default value error
4005 Setup parameter error
4006 Operation parameter error
4017 Corrupted ladder program Error occurs Normal
4018 Ladder calculation overflow
4019 Ladder program error
4021 Load factor over 100%
4022 Load factor over 200%
4009 Faulty FRAM

12-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

12.2.2 Changing Contact Type of Contact Output

Description
The contact type can set the action direction of contact output assigned to the function.

Setting Details
Contact Output Equipped as Standard
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
AL1.D AL1 contact type PRO 0: When the event of assigned
function occurs, the contact
AL2.D AL2 contact type PRO output is closed.
ALM
1: When the event of assigned
AL3.D AL3 contact type PRO function occurs, the contact
output is opened.
Note1: Nothing is displayed on Group display when each parameter is displayed.

Additional Contact Output

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
DO1.D DOn1 contact type PRO 0: When the event of assigned
DO2.D DOn2 contact type PRO function occurs, the contact
output is closed.
DO3.D DOn3 contact type PRO DO
1: When the event of assigned
DO4.D DOn4 contact type PRO function occurs, the contact
DO5.D DOn5 contact type PRO output is opened. 12
Note1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code. “n” denotes the position of the

Contact Input/Output Functions

terminal area. (n = 1 to 4)

Contact Output for Control

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OR.D OUT relay contact type PRO 0: When the event of assigned
function occurs, the contact
output is closed.
OUT2 relay contact ALM
OR2.D PRO 1: When the event of assigned
type function occurs, the contact
output is opened.
Note1: Nothing is displayed on Group display when each parameter is displayed.
Note2: OR.D and OR2.D can be used as status output when they are not used as control output.
OR2.D can be used for Heating/cooling type.

► Terminal arrangement: 17.4 Wiring

► Contact type of Heater break alarm output: 11.7 Setting Heater Break Alarm

IM 05P02C41-01EN 12-19
Blank Page
Chapter 13 Display, Key, and Security Functions

13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.1 Setting Active Color PV Display Function

The active color PV display function changes the PV display color when an event occurs.

Description

Link to Alarm
The PV display color changes by linking to the alarm 1 or alarm 2.

The following is an example of operation linking to alarm 1.

Set the alarm-1 type to “PV high limit alarm” and alarm-1 setpoint to “80°C.”
When the active color PV display switch is set to”2,” PV display color changes from white
to red if PV exceeds the alarm-1 setpoint.
The red-to-white switching action can be set.
°C

Alarm-1 hysteresis

Alarm-1 setpoint
A1 = 80°C
75°C

PV 13
Time

Display, Key, and Security Functions

PV color: white PV color: red PV color: white

Change by Deviation
The PV display color changes by deviation (PV – SP).

Set the PV color change high limit to “10°C” and the PV color change low limit to “5°C”
as deviation band for the current target setpoint “50°C.” PV display color changes from
white to red if PV is out of the deviation.
The red-to-white switching action can be set. There is no hysteresis.
°C

Parameter “PCH” (PV color change high limit) = 10°C

60°C

Target setpoint
SP = 50°C
45°C

Parameter “PCL” (PV color change low limit) = 5°C

PV

Time
PV color: red PV color: white PV color: red PV color: red
PV color: white

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-1
13.1 Setting Display Functions

Link to PV
The PV display color changes by linking to PV.

Set the PV color change high limit to “70°C” and the PV color change low limit to “20°C.”
PV display color changes from white to red if PV is out of the range.
The red-to-white switching action can be set. There is no hysteresis.
°C

Parameter “PCH” (PV color change high limit) = 70°C

70°C

Parameter “PCL” (PV color change low limit) = 20°C

20°C

PV

Time
PV color: red PV color: white PV color: red PV color: white

Use in Fixed Color

PV display color can be fixed in red. It can also be fixed in white.

PV color: red

SP color: orange
(SP color cannot be changed.)

Link to DI
The PV display color changes by linking to DI (ON/OFF).

The following is an example for changing the display color by a state of DI1.
Set the parameter PCMD=10, and PVRW=5025.
PV display color is red when DI1=ON, and is white when DI1=OFF.

PVRW: PV red/white switch (Menu: DI.SL)

13-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.1 Setting Display Functions

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
0: Fixed in white
1: Fixed in red
2: Link to alarm 1 (Alarm OFF:
white, Alarm ON: red)
3: Link to alarm 1 (Alarm OFF:
red, Alarm ON: white)
4: Link to alarm 1 or 2 (Alarm
OFF: white, Alarm ON: red)
5: Link to alarm 1 or 2 (Alarm
Active color PV OFF: red, Alarm ON: white)
PCMD EASY
display switch 6: PV limit (Within range: white,
Out of range: red)
7: PV limit (Within range: red, Out
of range: white) DISP
8: SP deviation (Within deviation:
white, Out of deviation: red)
9: SP deviation (Within deviation:
red, Out of deviation: white)
10: Link to DI (ON: red, OFF:
white)
PV color change Set a display value when in PV
PCH EASY
high limit limit or SP deviation.
-19999 to 30000 (Set a value
PV color change within the input range.)
PCL EASY
low limit Decimal point position depends on
the input type.
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
13

Display, Key, and Security Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-3
13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.2 Masking Arbitrary Display Value in Operation Display

Description
Display/non-display of the PV display, Setpoint display, and Status display in the
Operation Display can be set.
Items that you do not want to display can be set to non-display. For example, when the
Setpoint display is set to non-display, SP of the SP Display and OUT of the OUT Display
are not displayed.
When an error at power-on or hardware malfunction error occurs, Operation display
cannot be set to non-display.

PV display

Setpoint display

Status display

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PV display area ON/
PV.D PRO
OFF
Setpoint display area OFF: Nondisplay
SP.D PRO DISP
ON/OFF ON: Display
Status display area
STS.D PRO
ON/OFF

13-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.3 Registering SELECT Display (Up to 5 Displays)

Description
Registering frequently changed-operation parameters in the SELECT Display of the
Operation Displays will allow you to change parameter settings easily. A maximum of five
Displays can be registered.
Set the D register number of the parameter you wish to register for the registration to the
SELECT Display.
However, the parameters in the following menu cannot be set:
CTL, PV, RSP, AIN2, AIN4, MPV, OUT, HBA, R485, ETHR, DNET, PROF, DNET, CC-L,
KEY, DISP, CSEL, KLOC, MLOC, DI.SL, DI.NU, DI.D, ALM, DO, I/O, SYS, INIT, VER,
and LVL.
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.
Ordinary Operation Displays SELECT Display

•••• ••••

SP Display OUT Display Example: Alarm Setpoint Setting Display

Setting Details 13
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level

Display, Key, and Security Functions

SELECT Display-1 to OFF: No registration D register
CS1 to CS5 STD CSEL
-5 registration number (2201 to 5000)
For D register numbers, see the UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface User’s Manual.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-5
13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.4 Changing Event Display

Description
The UP55A has eight event (EV) lamps.
PV events are assigned to EV1 to EV8 lamps on the front of the controller.

Setting Details
Parameter Display Menu
Name Setting range
symbol level symbol
Setting range: 4001 to 6304
OFF: Disable
4785: Link to PV event 1 (Lit when the PV
event-1 occurs)
4786: Link to PV event 2 (Lit when the PV
event-2 occurs)
4787: Link to PV event 3 (Lit when the PV
event-3 occurs)
4789: Link to PV event 4 (Lit when the PV
event-4 occurs)
4790: Link to PV event 5 (Lit when the PV
event-5 occurs)
4791: Link to PV event 6 (Lit when the PV
event-6 occurs)
4793: Link to PV event 7 (Lit when the PV
event-7 occurs)
4794: Link to PV event 8 (Lit when the PV
event-8 occurs)

4529: Heater break alarm 1 (Lit when the alarm occurs)

4530: Heater break alarm 2 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
EV1 to EV8
5025 to 5027: Link to DI1-DI3 (Lit when the
EV1 to display DISP
PRO contact is closed)
EV8 condition
5041 to 5046: Link to DI11-DI16 (E1-terminal
registration
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5057 to 5062: Link to DI21-DI26 (E2-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5073 to 5077: Link to DI31-DI35 (E3-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5089 to 5094: Link to DI41-DI46 (E4-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)

5153 to 5155: Link to AL1-AL3 (Lit when the

contact is closed)
5169 to 5173: Link to DO11-DO15 (E1-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5185 to 5189: Link to DO21-DO25 (E2-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5201 to 5205: Link to DO31-DO35 (E3-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5217 to 5221: Link to DO41-DO45 (E4-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)

For other functions, see the UTAdvanced

Series Communication Interface User’s
Manual.
Note1: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.

13-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.5 Registering SELECT Parameter Display (Up to 10 Displays)

Description
Registering frequently changed operation parameters (change frequency is lower than
SELECT Display) in the SELECT Parameter Display will allow you to change parameter
settings easily. A maximum of ten Displays can be registered.
Set the D register number of the parameter you wish to register for the registration to the
SELECT Parameter Display.
However, the parameters in the following menus cannot be set:
CTL, PV, RSP, AIN2, AIN4, MPV, OUT, HBA, R485, ETHR, PROF, DNET, CC-L, KEY,
DISP, CSEL, KLOC, MLOC, DI.SL, DI.NU, DI.D, ALM, DO, I/O, SYS, INIT, VER, and
LVL.
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.
Ordinary Operation Display

CS Menu is not displayed if

SELECT parameter is not
registered.

•••• MODE Menu Display CS Menu Display ••••

13

Display, Key, and Security Functions

Registered
SELECT Parameter Display
••••

Parameter Setting Displays

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: No registration
CS10 to SELECT parameter-10
PRO D register number (2201 to CSEL
CS19 to -19 registration
5000)
For D register numbers, see the UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface User’s Manual.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-7
13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.6 Setting Bar-graph Display Function

Description
The upper and lower bar-graph displays are provided on the front of the controller.
PV or OUT can be displayed. Data which can be displayed on Bar-graph display are as
follows.

OUT, Output

Displayed by 10% increment of output

0% 100%

Less than 0% More than 100%

For relay, OFF is equivalent to 0% and ON is equivalent to 100%.

PV, SP, and Analog Input

Displayed by 10% increment of

analog input/PV input range
0% 100%

Less than 0% More than 100%

Deviation
When the deviation display band (BDV) is 10%:

Deviation negative side Deviation positive side

0% 100%
Deviation is more than -60%. Deviation is more than +60%.

Deviation negative side and deviation positive side are displayed by 10% increment of deviation.
Indication is unlit when SP – (deviation display band (BDV)) ≤ PV ≤ SP + (deviation display band (BDV)).

IN = TC Type K -270.0 to 1370.0ºC

BDV = 82ºC (5%), SP = 500.0ºC, PV = 800.0ºC

Deviation negative side Deviation positive side

992.1ºC or more
910.1 to 992.0ºC
828.1 to 910.0ºC
746.1 to 828.0ºC
664.1 to 746.0ºC
582.1 to 664.0ºC
356.0 to 417.9ºC
254.0 to 355.9ºC
172.0 to 253.9ºC
90.0 to 171.9ºC
8.0 to 89.9ºC
to 7.9ºC All indications are unlit when the deviation is 418 ≤ PV ≤ 582ºC.

Valve Opening

Displayed by 10% increment

of valve opening.
0% 100%

L side H side

13-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.1 Setting Display Functions

Degree of Segment
Upper bargraph: tenths place digit, lower bargraph: ones place digit

Segment 1

Segment 15

Segment 57

Time Event and Alarm Status

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
TME AL
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 4

Alarm-1 to -4
Time event-1 to -16

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Upper bar-graph 0: Disable
BAR1 STD
display registration 1:OUT, Heating-side OUT, Internal
value in Position proportional 13
control
2: Cooling-side OUT

Display, Key, and Security Functions

3: PV
4: SP
5: Deviation
6: Loop-2 OUT, Loop-2 heating-side OUT
7: Loop-2 cooling-side OUT
8: Loop-2 PV
Lower bar-graph
BAR2 STD 9: Loop-2 SP
display registration DISP
10: Loop-2 deviation
11 to 16: Disable
17: Feedback input (valve opening)
18: PV terminals analog input
19: RSP terminals analog input
20: AIN2 terminals analog input
21: AIN4 terminals analog input
22: Degree of segment
23: Time event and alarm status
Bar-graph
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
BDV deviation display STD
span (EUS)
band
Note 1: The bar-graph deviation display band (BDV) is enabled when the deviation is set to the
BAR1 or BAR2.
Note 2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
Note 3: Setting values "22" and "23" can be set to the parameter BAR1 only. If the value of "22" or
"23" is set to the parameter BAR1, the setting of BAR2 is disabled. The display of parameter
BAR2 depends on the setting value of BAR1.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-9
13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.7 Masking Least Significant Digit of PV Display

Description
With and without least significant digit of the PV in the Operation Display can be set.
When without least significant digit is set, the value of the least significant digit is
truncated and not displayed.
The internal value is not changed depending on whether with or without least significant
digit (the value is for display only). This parameter does not function for the PV without
decimal point.
Least significant digit Least significant digit
is displayed. is not displayed.

The following shows the example of with and without least significant digit
PV display
With least significant digit Without least significant digit
1.4999 1.499
1.5000 1.500
1.9999 1.999
2.0000 2.000
3000.0 3000
3000.9 3000
3001.0 3001

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Least significant digital OFF: With least significant digit
MLSD STD DISP
mask of PV display ON: Without least significant digit

13-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.8 Setting Economy Mode

Description
The LCD backlight ON/OFF can be set in the following methods.
Setting the LCD backlight to OFF saves energy.

User Function Keys

The LCD backlight ON/OFF switch can be assigned to the user function key.
► User function key: 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key

Backlight OFF timer

The backlight OFF timer sets the economy mode parameter to ON.
If no keys are pressed for 30 minutes, the LCD backlight goes off automatically.
The backlight OFF can be set to turn off the backlight for the whole display or a
display other than the PV display.
To turn on the LCD backlight, press any key.

Contact Input
The LCD backlight ON/OFF switch can be assigned to the contact input
► Contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

In the following cases, the LCD backlight does not go off.

• when an alarm occurs
• When an error at power-on or a hardware malfunction error occurs

Setting Details
13
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol

Display, Key, and Security Functions

symbol level
OFF: Disable
1: Economy mode ON (All
indications except PV display
ECO Economy mode STD OFF) DISP
2: Economy mode ON (All
indications OFF)
3: Brightness 10 % (all indications)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-11
13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.9 Selecting the Initial Operation Display that Appears at Power ON

Description
The initial Operation Display that appears when the power is turned on can be set.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SP1: SP Display
SP2: Loop-2 SP Display
OUT1: OUT Display
OUT2: Loop-2 OUT Display
HCO: Heating/cooling OUT Display
VP: Valve Position Display
MV: Position Proportional Computation
Output Display
PID1: PID Number Display
PID2: Loop-2 PID Number Display
HC1: Heater Break Alarm-1 Current
Display
HC2: Heater Break Alarm-2 Current
Display
PV1: PV2/PV1 Display
Home Operation
HOME PRO PV2: PV1/PV2 Display DISP
Display setting
PV: PV Analog Input Display
RSP: RSP Analog Input Display
AIN2: AIN2 Analog Input Display
AIN4: AIN4 Analog Input Display
CS1 to CS5: SELECT Display 1 to 5
TSP1: TSP Display
TSP2: Loop-2 TSP Display
R.TIM: Remaining Segment-tim
Display
SEG.N: Segment Number Dispaly
R.CYC: Remaining Repetition Display
PTN: Program Pattern Display
AL5.8.1: Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display
AL5.8.2: Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status
Display

13-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.10 Setting Message Function

Description
Using the message function and turning the contact input on/off, the message registered
beforehand can be displayed on PV display by interrupt.
The message is registered using LL50A Parameter Setting Software.
The messages are limited to 20 alphanumeric characters. A maximum of four messages
can be registered.
If a number of messages occur simultaneously, the priority is as follows:
(high) MG1>MG2>MG3>MG4 (low)
► Message registration: LL50A Parameter Setting Software User’s Manual
► Registration of contact input: 12.1.1 Setting Contact Input Function
► Registration symbols: 3.3 List of Display Symbols

Operation Display

When the contact input is 13

turned on, the scrolling
message registered

Display, Key, and Security Functions

beforehand is displayed
on PV Display.

13.1.11 Switching Guide Display Language

Description
The guide display language that appears when the parameter or the menu is displayed
can be switched.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
ENG: English
Guide display FRA: French
LANG EASY SYS
language GER: German
SPA: Spanish

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-13
13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.12 Changing Guide Scroll Speed

Description
The scroll speed can be changed when the guide for the parameter or menu is displayed.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
SPD Scroll speed PRO (Slow) 1 to 8 (Quick) DISP

13.1.13 Turning Guide Display ON/OFF

Description
The guide display that appears when the parameter or the menu is displayed can be
switched.
The guide display can be turned on and off by the MODE key in the Menu Display and
Parameter Setting Display.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
OFF: Nondisplay
GUID Guide display ON/OFF STD DISP
ON: Display

13.1.14 Setting Automatic Return to Operation Display

Description
The Display will automatically revert to the Operation Display if no keys are pressed for 5
minutes in Menu Display or Parameter Setting Display.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
ON: Automatically returned to
the Operation Display.
Automatic return to
OP.JP PRO OFF: Not automatically DISP
Operation Display
returned to the Operation
Display.

13-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.1 Setting Display Functions

13.1.15 Setting Brightness and Contrast Adjustment of LCD and Display

Update Cycle

Description
The brightness and contrast for PV, Setpoint, Bar-graph, and Status indicator can be
adjusted.
Brightness ranges for each display can be set.
The LCD has a characteristic that the display action becomes late at the low temperature.
This can be solved by adjusting the display update cycle (D.CYC).

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
BRI Brightness EASY (Dark) 1 to 5 (Bright)
White brightness Adjusts the white brightness
B.PVW adjustment of PV PRO of PV display.
display (Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
Red brightness Adjusts the red brightness of
B.PVR adjustment of PV PRO PV display.
display (Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
Adjusts the brightness of SP
Brightness adjustment
B.SP PRO display.
of Setpoint display
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
Adjusts the brightness of SP DISP
Brightness adjustment
B.BAR PRO display.
of Bar-graph display
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
Adjusts the brightness of
13
Brightness adjustment
B.STS PRO Status indicator.
of Status indicator
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)

Display, Key, and Security Functions

1: 100 ms
2: 200 ms
D.CYC Display update cycle PRO 3: 500 ms
4: 1 s
5: 2 s

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-15
 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function

Description
The UP55A has three user function keys on the front panel.
Various functions (operation mode switch etc.) can be assigned to the user function key.
Press the user function key to perform the assigned function.

User function keys

13-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
RUN RUN key action setting PRO
RST RST key action setting PRO See the table
KEY
PTN PTN key action setting PRO below

MODE MODE key action setting PRO

Availability
Setpoint Function Action
RST RUN PTN MODE
OFF Unassigned – √ √ √ √
A program pattern starts if the user function key
Switch to PROG (Start of is pressed for one second.
PROG √ √√ √ √
program operation) If program operation starts in hold-mode, hold-
mode operation is disabled.
Switch to RESET (Stop of A program pattern stops if the user function key
RESET √√ √ √ √
program operation) is pressed for one second.
Switch to LOCAL(LSP) (Start of Local-mode operation starts if the user function
LOCAL √ √ √ √
local-mode operation) key is pressed for one second.
Remote-mode operation starts if the user function
REM Switch to REMOTE √ √ √ √
key is pressed for one second.
PROG and RESET switches every time the user
P/R PROG/RESET Switch √ √ √ √
function key is pressed for one second.
PROG and HOLD switches every time the user
P/H PROG/HOLD Switch √ √ √ √
function key is pressed for one second.
PROG and LOCAL switches every time the user
P/L PROG/LOCAL(LSP) Switch √ √ √ √
function key is pressed for one second.
L/C LOCAL(LSP)/CAS switch
LSP and CASCADE switches every time the user
√ √ √ √
13
function key is pressed for one second.
Switch to HOLD (Start of hold- Hold-mode operation starts if the user function
HLD √ √ √ √

Display, Key, and Security Functions

mode operation) key is pressed once.
Program advance if the user function key is
ADV Advance of segment √ √ √ √
pressed for one second.
AUTO and MAN switches every time the user
A/M1 AUTO/MAN switch (Loop 1) √ √ √ √
function key is pressed.
AUTO and MAN switches every time the user
A/M2 AUTO/MAN switch (Loop 2) √ √ √ √
function key is pressed.
Switch to PROG (Start of Starts program pattern-1 if the user function key
PRG1 √ √ √ √
program-1 operation) is pressed for one second.
Switch to PROG (Start of Starts program pattern-2 if the user function key
PRG2 √ √ √ √
program-2 operation) is pressed for one second.
Pressing the user function key executes auto-
AT Auto-tuning √ √ √ √
tuning
The current brightness gradually increases every
LTUP LCD brightness UP √ √ √ √
time the function key is pressed.
The current brightness gradually decreases every
LTDN LCD brightness DOWN √ √ √ √
time the function key is pressed.
The current brightness gradually increases every
time the function key is pressed.
Pressing the function key after reaching the
BRI Adjust LCD brightness maximum brightness changes to the minimum √ √ √ √
brightness.
Thereafter, minimum brightness→maximum
brightness→maximum brightness is repeated.
The LCD backlight turns on and off every time
LCD LCD Backlight ON/OFF switch √ √ √ √
the user function key is pressed.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-17
13.2 Assigning Function to User Function Key

(Continued)
Availability
Setpoint Function Action
RST RUN PTN MODE
Latch 1 to latch 4 are released every time the user
LAT Latch release √ √ √ √
function key is pressed.
Pressing the function key during operation
displays the first parameter (proportional band) of
the currently selected PID parameter group and
enables the setting to be changed.
As with the operation to change the parameter
PID PID Tuning switch setpoint, the sequence is P→I→D→…→P→…. √ √ √ √
Pressing the function key again, or pressing the
DISPLAY key or DISP key returns to the initial
Operation Display.
The PARAMETER key or PARA key does not
switch to the Menu Display.
Program pattern number Program pattern is selected every time the user
PTN √ √ √√ √
selection function key is pressed.
The operation mode parameters are displayed
MODE Operation mode √ √ √ √√
every time the user function key is pressed.
Note 1: √ indicates available, – indicates unavailable, and √√ indicates initial value.
► Contact input: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

Status of user function key

The status of the user function key can be identified by communication.
“1” can be read while the user function key is held down, and “0” can be read when the
user function key is released. (Initial value: 0)
► Reading via communication: UTAdvanced Series Communication Interface User’s Manual

MODE key operation in the Parameter Setting Display

In the Menu Display and Parameter Setting Display, the guide is displayed on PV display.
At this time, use the MODE key to turn on and off the guide display on PV display. A
measured input value (PV) is displayed in the ON state.

13-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.3 Setting Security Functions
13.3.1 Setting a Password

Description
The password function can prevent inadvertent changes to the parameter settings.
If a password is set, the checking is required when moving to the Setup Parameter
Setting Display. When the password is verified, can be changed to the Setup Parameter
Setting Display. The parameters in the following menus can be set only when the
password is verified.
CTL, PV, RSP, AIN2, AIN4, MPV, OUT, HBA, R485, ETHR, PROF, DNET, CC-L, KEY,
DISP, CSEL, KLOC, MLOC, DI.SL, DI.NU, DI.D, ALM, DO, I/O, SYS, INIT, VER, and
LVL.
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.

Always remember your password when using the password function.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
PASS Password setting EASY 0 (No password) to 65535 SYS

13
13.3.2 Setting Parameter Display Level

Display, Key, and Security Functions

Description
Parameter display level can be set according to the setting level.
► Parameter display level: Chapter 18 Parameters

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
EASY: Easy setting mode
Parameter display
LEVL EASY STD: Standard setting mode LVL
level
PRO: Professional setting mode

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-19
13.3 Setting Security Functions

13.3.3 Locking (Hiding) Parameter Menu Display

Description
The parameter menu display lock function hides the following Parameter Menu Displays.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CTL [CTL] menu lock PRO
PV [PV] menu lock PRO
RSP [RSP] menu lock PRO
AIN2 [AIN2] menu lock PRO
AIN4 [AIN4] menu lock PRO
MPV [MPV] menu lock PRO
OUT [OUT] menu lock PRO
HBA [HBA] menu lock PRO
R485 [R485] menu lock PRO
ETHR [ETHR] menu lock PRO
PROF [PROF] menu lock PRO
DNET [DNET] menu lock PRO
CC-L [CC-L] menu lock PRO
OFF: Display
KEY [KEY] menu lock PRO MLOC
ON: Nondisplay
DISP [DISP] menu lock PRO
CSEL [CSEL] menu lock PRO
KLOC [KLOC] menu lock PRO
DI.SL [DI.SL] menu lock PRO
DI.NU [DI.NU] menu lock PRO
DI.D [DI.D] menu lock PRO
ALM [ALM] menu lock PRO
DO [DO] menu lock PRO
I/O [I/O] menu lock PRO
SYS [SYS] menu lock PRO
INIT [INIT] menu lock PRO
VER [VER] menu lock PRO
LVL [LVL] menu lock PRO
Note1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.

13-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.3 Setting Security Functions

(Continued)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
MODE [MODE] menu lock PRO
CS [CS] menu lock PRO
PROG [PROG] menu lock PRO
LOC [LOC] menu lock PRO
EDIT [EDIT] menu lock PRO
AL [AL] menu lock PRO
SPS [SPS] menu lock PRO
ALRM [ALRM] menu lock PRO
OFF: Display
PVS [PVS] menu lock PRO MLOC
ON: Nondisplay
PID [PID] menu lock PRO
TUNE [TUNE] menu lock PRO
ZONE [ZONE] menu lock PRO
PPAR [PPAR] menu lock PRO
PYS1 [PYS1] menu lock PRO
PYS2 [PYS2] menu lock PRO
PYS3 [PYS3] menu lock PRO
PYS4 [PYS4] menu lock PRO
Note 1: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.
Note 2: In Cascade control, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter is displayed.
13

Display, Key, and Security Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-21
13.3 Setting Security Functions

13.3.4 Key Lock

Description
The key lock function locks the key on the front panel to prohibit key operation.
It can prohibit the operation mode switch or parameter setting change.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
DATA Front panel parameter data key lock STD
RUN Front panel RUN key lock STD
OFF: Unlock
RST Front panel RST key lock STD KLOCK
ON: Lock
PTN Front panel PTN key lock STD
MODE Front panel MODE key lock STD

13.3.5 Setting Display/Non-display of Operation Display

Description
Display/non-display of the Operation Display can be set.
► Operation Display: Chapter 6 Monitoring and Control of Regular Operations

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
U.SP SP Display lock PRO
U.TSP TSP Display lock PRO
Remaining Segmen-time Display
U.TM PRO
lock
U.OUT OUT Display lock PRO
U.HCO Heating/cooling OUT Display lock PRO
U.VP Valve Position Display lock PRO
Position Proportional Computation
U.MV PRO
Output Display lock
U.PID PID Number Display lock PRO
U.SEG Segment Number Display lock PRO
OFF: Display
U.RCY Remaining Repetition Display lock PRO KLOC
ON: Nondisplay
U.PTN Program Pattern Display lock PRO
U.AL Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display lock PRO
Heater Break Alarm Current Value
U.HC PRO
Display lock
U.PV1 PV2/PV1 Display lock PRO
U.PV2 PV1/PV2 Display lock PRO
U.PV PV Analog Input Display lock PRO
U.RSP RSP Analog Input Display lock PRO
U.AI2 AIN2 Analog Input Display lock PRO
U.AI4 AIN4 Analog Input Display lock PRO
Note1: In Cascade control or parameter PT2.G=ON, the LP2 lamp is lit while the Loop-2 parameter
is displayed.

13-22 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.3 Setting Security Functions

13.3.6 Prohibiting Writing via Communication

Description
Writing data to each register via all communication methods can be permitted or
prohibited. However, writing data via light-loader (front) or maintenance port (upper) is
possible using LL50A Parameter Setting Software.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
Communication write enable/ OFF: Enable
COM.W STD KLOC
disable ON: Disable

13

Display, Key, and Security Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-23
 13.4 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition and
Version
13.4.1 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition

Description
Can be confirm the Key and I/O condition.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
KEY Key status PRO
X000 DI1-DI3 status (equipped as standard) PRO
X100 DI11-DI16 status (E1-terminal area) PRO
X200 DI21-DI26 status (E2-terminal area) PRO
X300 DI31-DI35 status (E3-terminal area) PRO
X400 DI41-DI46 status (E4-terminal area) PRO Read only. I/O
Y000 AL1-AL3 status (equipped as standard) PRO
Y100 DO11-DO15 status (E1-terminal area) PRO
Y200 DO21-DO25 status (E2-terminal area) PRO
Y300 DO31-DO35 status (E3-terminal area) PRO
Y400 DO41-DO45 status (E4-terminal area) PRO
Note: When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group display
according to the suffix code and optional suffix code.

Key confirmation parameters are displayed in hexadecimal.

When the error occurs, "1" is set on the bit of corresponding error , and the bit data is
displayed in hexadecimal.

Data display

Symbol display 1st digit (hexadecimal)
2nd digit (hexadecimal)
3rd digit (hexadecimal)
4th digit (hexadecimal)

13-24 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.4 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition and Version

Parameter KEY
Displayed digit bit Description
0 PARAMETER (or PARA) key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DISPLAY (or DISP) key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 RIGHT arrow key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DOWN arrow key (0: OFF 1: ON)
4 SET/ENTER key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 UP arrow key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
2nd digit
6 LEFT arrow key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 PTN key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
12 RST key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
13 MODE key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4th digit
14 RUN key (0: OFF, 1: ON)
15 –

Parameter X000
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DI1 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DI2 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DI3 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 –
4 –
5 –
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 – 13
9 –
3rd digit
10 –

Display, Key, and Security Functions

11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

Parameter X100
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DI11 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DI12 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DI13 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DI14 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DI15 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 DI16 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-25
13.4 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition and Version
Parameter X200
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DI21 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DI22 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DI23 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DI24 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DI25 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 DI26 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

Parameter X300
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DI31 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DI32 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DI33 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DI34 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DI35 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 –
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

Parameter X400
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DI41 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DI42 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DI43 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DI44 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DI45 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 DI46 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

13-26 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.4 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition and Version
Parameter Y000
Displayed digit bit Description
0 AL1 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 AL2 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 AL3 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 –
4 –
5 –
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

Parameter Y100
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DO11 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DO12 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DO13 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DO14 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DO15 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 –
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 – 13
9 –
3rd digit
10 –

Display, Key, and Security Functions

11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

Parameter Y200
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DO21 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DO22 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DO23 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DO24 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DO25 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 –
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-27
13.4 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition and Version

Parameter Y300
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DO31 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DO32 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DO33 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DO34 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DO35 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 –
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

Parameter Y400
Displayed digit bit Description
0 DO41 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1 DO42 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
1st digit
2 DO43 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
3 DO44 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
4 DO45 status (0: OFF, 1: ON)
5 –
2nd digit
6 –
7 –
8 –
9 –
3rd digit
10 –
11 –
12 –
13 –
4th digit
14 –
15 –

13-28 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 13.4 Confirmation of Key and I/O Condition and Version

13.4.2 Confirmation of Version

Description
Can be confirm the version of the controller.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
MCU MCU version EASY
DCU DCU version EASY
ECU1 ECU-1 version EASY
ECU2 ECU-2 version EASY
ECU3 ECU-3 version EASY
ECU4 ECU-4 version EASY
PARA Parameter version EASY Read only. VER
H.VER Product version EASY
SER1 Serial number 1 EASY
SER2 Serial number 2 EASY
MAC1 MAC address 1 EASY
MAC2 MAC address 2 EASY
MAC3 MAC address 3 EASY

13

Display, Key, and Security Functions

IM 05P02C41-01EN 13-29
Blank Page
Chapter 14 Parameter Initialization

14.1 Initializing Parameter Settings to Factory

Default Values
Description
Parameter settings can be initialized to the factory default values.
The ladder program is also initialized to the factory default.
All program patterns can not be cleared during program pattern operation. Can be
cleared in RESET mode.
Use the key or LL50A Parameter Setting Software to execute it.

Note
The user setting values (defaults) are not initialized even if the parameter setting values are
initialized to the factory default values.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
-12345: Initialization,
Initialization to factory
F.DEF PRO automatically returned to "0"
default value
after initialization.
INIT
13579: Initialization,
Clearing all program
P.DEF PRO automatically returned to "0"
pattern data
after initialization.

14

Parameter Initialization

IM 05P02C41-01EN 14-1
 14.2 Registering and Initializing User Default Values
14.2.1 Registering as User Setting (Default) Values

Description
The user default values can be registered as parameter default values.
The ladder program, the program pattern, and parameter "SEG.T" can not be registered
as user default values.
Use the LL50A Parameter Setting Software to register user setting (default) values.

CAUTION
Before registering the user default value, make sure that the user setting value is set to
the parameter.

14.2.2 Initializing to User Setting (Default) Values

Description
Parameter settings can be initialized to the user setting (default) values.
The ladder program, the program pattern, and parameter "SEG.T" are not initialized to
the factory default.
Use the LL50A Parameter Setting Software to execute it.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
12345: Initialization,
Initialization to user
U.DEF PRO automatically returned to "0" INIT
default value
after initialization.

14-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 15 Power Failure Recovery Processing / Power Frequency Setting / Other Settings

15.1 Remedies if Power Failure Occurs during

Operations
Description
The operation status and remedies after a power failure differ with the length of power
failure time:
Regardless of the length of power failure time, all functions of the controller cannot be
operated for about 10 seconds after recovery. However, the case of instantaneous power
failure is excepted.

• 100–240 V AC: Instantaneous power failure of 20 ms or less

• 24 V AC/DC: Instantaneous power failure of 1 ms
A power failure is not detected. Normal operation continues.

• Power failure of about less than 5 seconds

The following shows effects caused in “settings” and “operation status.”
Does not continue. Alarm with stand-by function will enter stand-by status.
Alarm action
Alarm latch will be initialized.
Setting parameter Set contents of each parameter are retained.
Auto-tuning Cancelled.
Control action Action before power failure continues.
Timer, counter (ladder
Initialized.
program)

• Power failure of about 5 seconds or more

The following shows effects caused in “settings” and “operation status.”
Does not continue. Alarm with stand-by function will enter stand-by status.
Alarm action
Alarm latch will be initialized.
Setting parameter Set contents of each parameter are retained.
Auto-tuning Cancelled. 15
Differs with setting of the parameter “R.MD” (restart mode).
R.MD setting Control action after recovery from power failure

Power Failure Recovery Processing / Setting Power Frequency / Other Settings

Continues action (control output and operation mode)
CONT
before power failure. (Factory default)
Outputs the preset output value (PO) of the PID group
used as control output and continues action in MAN
MAN (*)
Control action mode. Continues operation mode (RESET, PROG,
LOCAL, or REM)
The control computation is executed in RESET mode
RESET (*) based on the preset output value (PO) of the PID group
used as control output.
* In Heating/cooling control, starts action from 50% of control computation
output.
Timer, counter (ladder
Initialized.
program)

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
CONT: Continue action set before
power failure.
MAN: Start from MAN.
R.MD Restart mode STD RESET: Contnues action set SYS
before power failure and starts
computation from the preset
output value.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 15-1
 15.2 Power Frequency Setting

Description
The power frequency can be set by automatic detection or manually.
However, when the /DC option is specified, only manual setting is available.

Setting Details
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Menu symbol
symbol level
AUTO
FREQ Power frequency EASY 60: 60 Hz SYS
50: 50 Hz

15-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 16 Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

16.1 Troubleshooting
16.1.1 Troubleshooting Flowchart

If the Operation Display does not appear after turning on the controller’s power, follow
the measures in the procedure below.
If a problem appears complicated, contact our sales representative.
Is the controller
defective?
Yes

No Key No No No
Completely Display I/O signal Communication
operation
inactive? failure? failure? failure?
failure? *
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Check wiring on the Check the key lock Turn off power, and Check the I/O specifications Check the specifications
power terminals. setting. then turn it on again. of the controller. of the controller.

Check the Check the No With

supply voltage. specifications and polarity communi-
of connected devices. cation?

No No communication Check the communication-

Normal? capability related parameters.
No Is the
key locked?
Yes
Correct the error(s). Check the
communication wiring.

No
Correct?
Check the specifications
Yes Yes of communication
Cancel the setting. devices.

Contact us for repair. Problem solved.

*: The LCD (a liquid crystal display) is used for a display portion of this product. The LCD has
a characteristic that the display action becomes late at the low temperature. Additionally, 16
the luminance and contrast degradation are caused due to aged deterioration. However, the
control function is not affected.

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

IM 05P02C41-01EN 16-1
 16.1 Troubleshooting
16-2
16.1.2 Errors at Power On
The errors shown below may occur in the fault diagnosis when the power is turned on.
PV display Parameter
Setpint display Status indicator
(Operation that displays Error description Cause and diagnosis Remedy
(Operation Display) (Operation Display)
Display) error details
Faulty.
Indication off Indication off – – Faulty MCU RAM / MCU ROM MCU RAM / MCU ROM are failed.
Contact us for repair.
Faulty.
SYS ----- – System data error System data is corrupted.
Contact us for repair.
PAR 0004
User (parameter) default User parameter is corrupted.
(for user default value error
value error Initialized to factory default value.
only)
PAR 0010 (for setup Setup parameter data is corrupted.
Setup parameter error
parameter error only) Initialized to factory default value. Check and reconfigure the initialized
Setup
PAR 0020 (for operation Operation parameter data is corrupted. parameters.
parameter Operation parameter error
parameter error only) Initialized to user default value. Error indication is erased when the power
(PA.ER)
ERR PAR 0040 (for program – Program pattern data is corrupted. is turned on again.
Program pattern error
pattern error only) All program patterns are deleted.
Control parameter
PAR 0400 (for control Control parameter data is corrupted.
(operation mode, output)
parameter error only) Initialized to user default value.
error
Inconsistence of system data and hardware
SLOT 0017 (0017: Error Setup Non responding hardware of extended function.
Faulty.
occurs to all hardware of parameter of extended function (E1 to Non responding communication between
Contact us for repair.
E1 to E4-terminal areas.) (OP.ER) E4-terminal areas) hardware of extended function (E1 to E4-
terminal areas).
Rightmost decimal
Initialized to calibrated default value
point on PV Calibration value error
because of corrupted factory default value.
display blinks. Setup
Normal Faulty.
Normal indication Right most parameter
indication Contact us for repair.
decimal point on (PA.ER) Writing (storing) data to FRAM is
Faulty FRAM
Symbol display impossible.
blinks.
Setup
Normal LADDER lamp Ladder program is corrupted.
Normal indication parameter Corrupted ladder program Download the ladder program again.
indication blinks. Operates without ladder program.
(LA.ER)
0.000 00000 Setup
Normal
(Decimal point on the left of – parameter User profile error User profile is corrupted. Download the user profile again.
indication
IM 05P02C41-01EN

the Symbol display blinks) (OP.ER)

IM 05P02C41-01EN

Errors at Power On (Input/output Action)

Analog out- Relay output Feedback
PV input,
Control Retrans- put (control Voltage pulse (control out- input (for Contact
Error RSP input, Ladder Control Alarm Contact Communi-
computa- mission output, re- output (con- put, position Position (alarm)
description and aux. calculation output action input cation
tion output transmission trol output) proportional proportional output
analog input
output) output) type)
Faulty MCU
RAM
Undefined Stopped Stopped Undefined Undefined Stopped 0% or less OFF OFF Undefined OFF OFF Stopped
Faulty MCU
ROM
System data Normal
Undefined Stopped Stopped Undefined Undefined Stopped 0% or less OFF OFF Undefined OFF OFF
error action
User
(parameter)
default value
error
Setup
parameter error Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action
Operation action action action action action action action
parameter error
Program
parameter error
Control
parameter error
Non responding
hardware
of extended Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Undefined Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action
function (E1 action action action action action action action
to E4-terminal
areas)
Normal Normal
Calibration
action (out of Normal Normal Normal Normal action (out of Normal Normal Normal
value error Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action
accuracy) action action action action accuracy) action action action
Faulty FRAM Normal action Normal action
Normal action

16.1 Troubleshooting
Corrupted (without Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action
ladder program ladder action action action action action action action
program)
PROFIBUS-DP/
User profile Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal DeviceNet/CC-Link
Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action Normal action
error action action action action action action communication is
disabled
16-3

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

16
 16.1 Troubleshooting
16-4
16.1.3 Errors during Operation
Errors during Operation (1)
The errors shown below may occur during operation.
Setpoint
PV display Status indicator
display Parameter that
(Operation (Operation Error description Cause and diagnosis Remedy
(Operation displays error details
Display) Display)
Display)
Analog input terminal ADC error
Normal • PV input
Setup parameter Faulty
AD.ERR indication – • RSP input (E1-terminal area) Analog input terminal AD value error
(AD1.E) Contact us for repair.
(Note) • AIN2 input (E2-terminal area)
• AIN4 input (E4-terminal area)
RJC.E
Faulty
(Displays Normal Universal input terminal RJC error
Setup parameter Contact us for repair.
RJC.E indication – • PV input Universal input terminal RJC error
(AD1.E) Set the parameter RJC to OFF to erase
and PV (Note) • RSP input (E1-terminal area)
error indication.
alternately.)
Analog input terminal burnout
error
Check wiring and sensor.
Setup parameter • PV input
Analog input terminal sensor burnout Error indication is erased in normal
(AD1.E) • RSP input (E1- terminal area)
Normal operation.
• AIN2 input (E2-terminal area)
B.OUT indication –
• AIN4 input (E4-terminal area)
(Note)
Check wiring and sensor of connected
Setup parameter PV input burnout error analog input terminal.
Burnout of analog input connected to PV
(PV1.E/PV2.E) (Loop1, Loop2) Error indication is erased in normal
operation.
PV input over-scale
PV input is out of -5 to 105%. Also occurs
OVER Normal Setup parameter PV input under-scale Check analog input value or ladder
– when the data out of range which is the
-OVER indication (PV1.E/PV2.E) (PV values out of -5 to 105%) program.
ladder computation result is input.
(Loop1, Loop 2)
Normal Normal Setup parameter RSP input burnout error Burnout of analog input connected to Check wiring and sensor. Error indication
–
indication indication (PV1.E) (Loop 1) RSP is erased in normal operation.
Note: When an error occurs in input shown in Analog input display (Operation display).
Setpoint display shows the same symbol as the PV display.
IM 05P02C41-01EN
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Errors during Operation (Input/output Action)

Analog out- Relay output Feedback
Voltage
Ladder Control Retrans- put (control (control out- input Contact Com-
Error PV input, RSP input, Control Alarm pulse output Contact
calcula- compu- mission output, put, position (for Position (alarm) munica-
description and aux. analog input output action (control input
tion tation output retransmis- proportional proportional output tion
output)
sion output) output) type)
When
Analog input terminal ADC error in AUTO
• PV input and RUN
Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
• RSP input (E1-terminal area) 105% modes:
action action action action action action action action action action action
• AIN2 input (E2-terminal area) Error
• AIN4 input (E4-terminal area) preset
output
Universal input terminal RJC
Normal action
error Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
(without reference
• PV input action action action action action action action action action action action action
junction compensation)
• RSP input (E1-terminal area)
Analog input terminal burnout
error Depends on the
• PV input parameter BSL. Normal
• RSP input (E1- terminal area) Upscale: 105% action
• AIN2 input (E2-terminal area) Downscale: -5%
• AIN4 input (E4-terminal area)
Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Depends on the setting
action action When in action action action action action action action action action
of the parameter BSL
AUTO
of the analog terminal
PV input burnout error and RUN
connected to the PV
(Loop1, Loop2) modes:
where the error occurs.
Error preset
Upscale: 105%
output
Downscale: -5%
PV input over-scale
PV input under-scale Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action
(PV values out of -5 to 105%) action action action action action action action action action action action action
(Loop1, Loop 2)
Depends on the setting
of the parameter BSL

16.1 Troubleshooting
of the analog terminal
RSP input burnout error Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
connected to the RSP
(Loop 1) action action action action action action action action action action action action
where the error occurs.
Upscale: 105%
Downscale: -5%
16-5

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

16
 16.1 Troubleshooting
16-6
Errors during Operation (2)
The errors shown below may occur during operation.
Parameter
PV display Setpoint display Status indicator
that
(Operation (Operation (Operation Error description Cause and diagnosis Remedy
displays error
Display) Display) Display)
details
Setup Burnout error when RSP
Normal Burnout error of analog input connected to Check wiring and sensor.
RSP B.OUT – parameter input is used for control
indication RSP when RSP is used for control computation Error indication is erased in normal operation.
(PV1.E) (Loop 1)
Setup
Normal Feedback input resistor/ Check wiring of feedback input resistor/current.
OUT ----- – parameter Feedback input burnout
indication current burnout Error indication is erased in normal operation.
(AD2.E)
Floating point computation in ladder calculation
Ladder calculation overflow Check the ladder program.
is infinite.
Computation does not end within the control
period. (When the load factor is 100% or more, Change the control period or reduce the
Load factor over 100%
Setup and the computation does not end within the number of steps for the ladder program.
Normal LADDER lamp
Normal indication parameter control period.)
indication blinks
(LA.ER) Load factor over 200%. Computation does not end within the control Change the control period or reduce the
(Forced end) period (load factor is 200% or more). number of steps for the ladder program.
Download the ladder program again. If the
Ladder program error Ladder program is corrupted. error indication is still not erased, there is a
fault. Contact us for repair.
IM 05P02C41-01EN
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Errors during operation (Input/output Action)

Analog out- Relay out-
Feedback
put (control Voltage put (control
Ladder Control Retrans- input (for Contact
Error PV input, RSP input, Alarm output, pulse out- output, Contact Commu-
calcula- compu- Control output mission Position (alarm)
description and aux. analog input action retrans- put (control position input nication
tion tation output proportion- output
mission output) proportion-
al type)
output) al output)
Depends on the setting
of the parameter BSL
Burnout error when of the analog terminal When in AUTO and
Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
RSP input is used for connected to the RSP RUN modes: Error
action action action action action action action action action action action
control (Loop 1) where the error occurs. preset output
Upscale: 105%
Downscale: -5%
Position
Feedback input Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action Normal action - proportional 105%
resistor/current burnout action action action action action action action action
output: OFF
Undefined
Ladder calculation (calculation Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action Normal action
overflow with max. action action action action action action action action action action
value)
Does Does Does
Does
not work not work not work
not work Does not work
Load factor is over according according according Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action according to according to the
100% to the to the to the action action action action action action
the control control period. The
control control control
period. response
period. period. period.
from the
Does Does Does
main unit
not work not work not work
Load factor is over Does not work slows.
Forced end according according according Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
200%. (Forced Normal action according to the
at 200% to the to the to the action action action action action action
termination) control period.
control control control
period. period. period.
Undefined
(Stopped Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Ladder program error Normal action Normal action
at the error action action action action action action action action action action

16.1 Troubleshooting
detection)
16-7

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

16
 16.1 Troubleshooting
16-8
Errors during Operation (3)
The errors shown below may occur during operation.
Parameter
PV display Setpoint display Status indicator
that
(Operation (Operation (Operation Error description Cause and diagnosis Remedy
displays error
Display) Display) Display)
details
0.000 00000
(Decimal point Setup Check that the target devices are connected
Normal Peer-to-peer
on the left of the – parameter Peer-to-peer communication error correctly.
indication communication error
Symbol display (OP.ER) Recovery at normal receipt.
blinks)
Setup
Auto-tuning time-out Auto-tuning does not end even when 24 hours Check the process. Hold down any key to
AT,E Normal indication – parameter
(Loop 1, Loop 2) have elapsed after the start of tuning. erase the error indication
(PV1.E/PV2.E)
Fully-closed valve position is equal to or
Setup
Automatic valve position larger than the fully-open valve position Check wiring and valve. Hold down any key to
VAT,E Normal indication – parameter
adjustment error after automatic valve position adjustment is erase the error indication.
(AD2.E)
performed.
Framing parity error
0.000 00000 Buffer overflow
(Decimal point Setup Inter-character time-out Check the communication parameters.
Normal Communication error
on the left of the – parameter Checksum error (PC link communication with Recovery at normal receipt.
indication (RS-485 communication)
Symbol display (OP.ER) checksum) Hold down any key to stop blinking.
blinks) CRC check error (Modbus/RTU)
LRC check error (Modbus/ASCII)
0.000 00000
(Decimal point Setup
Normal
on the left of the – parameter User profile error User profile is corrupted. Download the user profile again.
indication
Symbol display (OP.ER)
blinks)
Rightmost decimal Setup
Normal
Normal indication point on Symbol parameter Faulty FRAM Writing (storing) data to FRAM is impossible. Faulty. Contact us for repair.
indication
display blinks. (PA.ER)
IM 05P02C41-01EN
IM 05P02C41-01EN

Errors during Operation (Input/output Action)

Analog out- Relay out-
Feedback
put (control Voltage put (control
PV input, RSP Control Retrans- input (for Contact Com-
Error Ladder calcu- Control Alarm output, pulse out- output, Contact
input, and aux. compu- mission Position (alarm) munica-
description lation output action retrans- put (control position input
analog input tation output proportion- output tion
mission output) proportion-
al type)
output) al output)
Normal action
(However, the
Peer-to-peer communication peer-to-peer Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action
error communication action action action action action action action action action action action
register is not
updated.)
Auto- Auto-
tuning tuning
Auto-tuning time-out Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action Normal action stopped, stopped,
(Loop 1, Loop 2) action action action action action action action action action
normal Normal
action action
Automatic valve position Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action Normal action – 105%
adjustment error action action action action action action action action action
Communication error Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Normal action Normal action
(RS485 communication) action action action action action action action action action action action
PROFIBUS-
DP/DeviceNet/
Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
User profile error Normal action Normal action CC-Link
action action action action action action action action action action
communication
is disabled
Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal
Faulty FRAM Normal action Normal action
action action action action action action action action action action action

16.1 Troubleshooting
16-9

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

16
 16.1 Troubleshooting
16-10
Errors during Operation (4)
The errors shown below may occur during operation.
Parameter
Data display Status indicator
PV display (Op- that
(Operation (Operation Error description Cause and diagnosis Remedy
eration Display) displays er-
Display) Display)
ror details
Faulty
Undefined Undefined – – Faulty MCU MCU is corrupted.
Contact us for repair.
Faulty DCU (ROM/RAM Faulty
Undefined Undefined – – DCU is corrupted.
error, corrupted) Contact us for repair.

Errors during Operation On (Input/output Action)

Analog out- Relay out-
Feedback
put (control Voltage put (control
PV input, RSP input, Ladder Control Retrans- input (for Contact Com-
Error Control Alarm output, pulse out- output, Contact
and aux. analog calcula- compu- mission Position (alarm) munica-
description output action retrans- put (control position input
input tion tation output proportion- output tio
mission output) proportion-
al type)
output) al output)
Faulty MCU Undefined Stopped Stopped Undefined Undefined Stopped 0% or less OFF OFF Undefined OFF OFF Stopped
Faulty DCU (ROM/RAM error,
Undefined Stopped Stopped Undefined Undefined Stopped 0% or less OFF OFF Undefined OFF OFF Stopped
corrupted)
IM 05P02C41-01EN
 16.1 Troubleshooting

Hexadecimal Display on Setpoint Display (Operation Display)

Some error codes are displayed in hexadecimal.
When the error occurs, "1" is set on the bit of corresponding error , and the bit data is
displayed in hexadecimal.

If the setup parameter error or the operation parameter errors occur, it is displayed as
follows:
Data display

Symbol display 1st digit (hexadecimal)
2nd digit (hexadecimal)
3rd digit (hexadecimal)
4th digit (hexadecimal)

Displayed digit bit Description

1st digit 0 System data error
1 Calibration value error
2 User (parameter) default value error
3 –
2nd digit 4 Setup parameter error
5 Operation parameter error
6 Program parameter error
7 –
3rd digit 8 Faulty FRAM
9 –
10 Control parameter error
11 –
4th digit 12 –
13 –
14 –
15 –

If the hardware in E1-terminal area does not respond, it is displayed as follows:

Data display

16

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

Symbol display 1st digit (hexadecimal)
2nd digit (hexadecimal)
3rd digit (hexadecimal)
4th digit (hexadecimal)

Displayed digit bit Description

1st digit 0 Non responding hardware in E1-terminal area
1 Non responding hardware in E2-terminal area
2 Non responding hardware in E3-terminal area
3 –
2nd digit 4 Non responding hardware in E4-terminal area
5 –
6 –
7 –
3rd digit 8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
4th digit 12 –
13 –
14 –
15 –

IM 05P02C41-01EN 16-11
16.1 Troubleshooting

Hexadecimal Display of the Parameter which Shows the Error Details

Error confirmation parameters are displayed in hexadecimal.
When the error occurs, "1" is set on the bit of corresponding error.
Data display

Symbol display 1st digit (hexadecimal)
2nd digit (hexadecimal)
3rd digit (hexadecimal)
4th digit (hexadecimal)

Parameter PA.ER
Displayed digit bit Description
1st digit 0 System data error
1 Calibration value error
2 User (parameter) default value error
3 –
2nd digit 4 Setup parameter error
5 Operation parameter error
6 Program parameter error
7 –
3rd digit 8 Faulty FRAM
9 –
10 Control parameter error
11 –
4th digit 12 –
13 –
14 –
15 –

Parameter LA.ER
Displayed digit bit Description
1st digit 0 Ladder program corruption
1 Ladder calculation overflow
2 Ladder program error
3 –
2nd digit 4 Load factor over 100%
5 Load factor over 200%
6 –
7 –
3rd digit 8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
4th digit 12 –
13 –
14 –
15 –

16-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 16.1 Troubleshooting

Parameter OP.ER
Displayed digit bit Description
1st digit 0 Non responding hardware in E1-terminal area
1 Non responding hardware in E2-terminal area
2 Non responding hardware in E3-terminal area
3 –
2nd digit 4 Non responding hardware in E4-terminal area
5 –
6 –
7 –
3rd digit 8 –
9 –
10 Communication error in E3-terminal area
11 –
4th digit 12 Communication error in E4-terminal area
13 –
14 –
15 –

Parameter AD1.E
Displayed digit bit Description
1st digit 0 ADC error of PV input
1 ADC error of RSP input (E1-terminal area)
2 ADC error of AIN2 input (E2-terminal area)
3 –
2nd digit 4 ADC error of AIN4 input (E4-terminal area)
5 RJC error of PV input
6 RJC error of RSP input
7 –
3rd digit 8 PV input burnout error
9 RSP input (E1-terminal area) burnout error
10 AIN2 input (E2-terminal area) burnout error
11 –
4th digit 12 AIN4 input (E4-terminal area) burnout error
13 –
14 –
15 – 16

Parameter AD2.E

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

Displayed digit bit Description
1st digit 0 Feedback input resistor/current burnout
1 Automatic valve position adjustment error
2 –
3 –
2nd digit 4 –
5 –
6 –
7 –
3rd digit 8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
4th digit 12 –
13 –
14 –
15 –

IM 05P02C41-01EN 16-13
16.1 Troubleshooting

Parameter PV1.E
Displayed digit bit Description
1st digit 0 Loop-1 PV input burnout error
1 Loop-1 RSP input burnout error
2 Burnout error when Loop-1 RSP input is used for control
3 –
2nd digit 4 Loop-1 PV input over-scale
5 Loop-1 PV input under-scale
6 –
7 –
3rd digit 8 –
9 –
10 –
11 –
4th digit 12 –
13 –
14 Loop-1 auto-tuning time-out
15 –

Parameter PV2.E
Displayed digit bit Description
1st digit 0 Loop-2 PV input burnout error
1 –
2 –
3 –
2nd digit 4 Loop-2 PV input over-scale
5 Loop-2 PV input under-scale
6
7 –
3rd digit 8
9
10
11 –
4th digit 12
13 –
14 Loop-2 auto-tuning time-out
15 –

16-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 16.2 Maintenance
16.2.1 Cleaning
The front panel and operation keys should be gently wiped with a cloth soaked with water
and squeezed firmly.

CAUTION
In order to prevent LCD from static electricity damage, do not wipe with dry cloth.
(When LCD is electrified, it returns to normal in several minutes.)
Do not use alcohol, benzene, or any other solvents.

16.2.2 Packaging when Shipping the Product for Repair

Should the instrument break down and need to be shipped to our sales representative for
repair, handle it as noted below:

CAUTION
Write down the settings of parameters for a repair request.

WARNING
Prior to shipping the instrument, put it into an antistatic bag and repackage it using
the original internal packaging materials and packaging container.

16
16.2.3 Replacing Parts

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

Do not replace any parts inside the unit.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 16-15
 16.3 Periodic Maintenance
Check the operating condition periodically to use this instrument with good condition.

16-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 16.4 Disposal
When disposing of this instrument, arrange for appropriate disposal as industrial waste
according to the rules of a country, the area, or a local government.

16

Troubleshooting, Maintenance, and Inspections

IM 05P02C41-01EN 16-17
Blank Page
Chapter 17 Installation and Wiring

17.1 Installation Location

The instrument should be installed in indoor locations meeting the following conditions:
• Instrumented panel
This instrument is designed to be mounted in an instrumented panel. Mount the
instrument in a location where its terminals will not inadvertently be touched.
• Well ventilated locations
Mount the instrument in well ventilated locations to prevent the instrument’s internal
temperature from rising. However, make sure that the terminal portions are not
exposed to wind. Exposure to wind may cause the temperature sensor accuracy to
deteriorate. To mount multiple indicating controllers, see the external dimensions/
panel cutout dimensions which follow. If mounting other instruments adjacent to the
instrument, comply with these panel cutout dimensions to provide sufficient clearance
between the instruments.
• Locations with little mechanical vibration
Install the instrument in a location subject to little mechanical vibration.
• Horizontal location
Mount the instrument horizontally and ensure that it is level, with no inclination to the
right or left.

Front panel Keep this angle

of controller within 30°

30° Rear of
controller

Note
If the instrument is moved from a location with low temperature and low humidity to a place with
high temperature and high humidity, or if the temperature changes rapidly, condensation will
result. Moreover, in the case of thermocouple inputs, measurement errors will result. To avoid
such a situation, leave the instrument in the new environment under ambient conditions for
more than 1 hour prior to using it.

17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-1
17.1 Installation Location

Do not mount the instrument in the following locations:

• Outdoors
• Locations subject to direct sunlight, ultrared rays, ultraviolet rays, or close to a heater
Install the instrument in a location with stable temperatures that remain close to an
average temperature of 23°C. Do not mount it in locations subject to direct sunlight or
close to a heater. Doing so adversely affects the instrument and LCD.
• Locations with substantial amounts of oily fumes, steam, moisture, dust, or corrosive
gases
The presence of oily fumes, steam, moisture, dust, or corrosive gases adversely
affects the instrument. Do not mount the instrument in locations subject to any of
these substances.
• Areas near electromagnetic field generating sources
Do not place magnets or tools that generate magnetism near the instrument. If the
instrument is used in locations close to a strong electromagnetic field generating
source, the magnetic field may cause measurement errors.
• Locations where the display is difficult to see
The instrument uses an LCD for the display unit, and this can be difficult to see from
extremely oblique angles. Mount the instrument in a location where it can be seen as
much as possible from the front.
• Areas close to flammable articles
Absolutely do not place the instrument directly on flammable surfaces. If such a
circumstance is unavoidable and the instrument must be placed close to a flammable
item, provide a shield for it made of 1.43 mm thick plated steel or 1.6 mm thick
unplated steel with a space of at least 150 mm between it and the instrument on the
top, bottom and sides.

150 mm

150 mm 150 mm
150 mm

• Areas subject to being splashed with water

17-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.2 Mounting Method

WARNING
Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the controller before installing it on the
panel to avoid an electric shock.

Mounting the Instrument Main Unit

Provide an instrumented panel steel sheet of 1 to 10 mm thickness.

After opening the mounting hole on the panel, follow the procedures below to install the
controller:
1. Insert the controller into the opening from the front of the panel so that the terminal
board on the rear is at the far side.
2. Set the brackets in place on the top and bottom of the controller as shown in the
figure below, then tighten the screws of the brackets. Take care not to overtighten
them.

Bracket
Panel (top mounting hardware)

Direction to insert the

Terminal board
controller
Insert the controller
into the opening at Insert a screwdriver into the
the front of the panel. brackets to tighten the screws.

Bracket
(bottom mounting hardware) Appropriate
tightening torque:
0.25 N•m
17
To uninstall the controller, perform the procedure in the reverse order.

CAUTION Installation and Wiring

1) Tighten the screws with appropriate tightening torque within 0.25 N•m. Otherwise
it may cause the case deformation or the bracket damage.
2) Make sure that foreign materials do not enter the inside of the instrument
through the case's slit holes.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-3
 17.3 External Dimensions and Panel Cutout Dimensions
Unit: mm
UP55A 11 (approx. inch)
96 (3.78) (0.43) 65 (2.56) Bracket
Terminal cover
20 (0.79)

105.2 (4.14)
91.6 (3.61)
94.6 (3.72)
96 (3.78)
Bracket
1 to 10 mm (0.04 to 0.39 inch) (panel thickness)
General mounting Side-by-ide close mounting
117 (4.61) min. [(N–1)×96+92] +0.8
0
([(N-1)×3.78+3.62] +0.03
0 )

92 +0.8
0
(3.62 +0.03
0 )

(53) (2.09) 145 min.

(5.71) “N” stands for the number of controllers to be installed.
92+0.8 However, the measured value applies if N≥5.
0
(3.62 +0.03
0 )
Normal tolerance:
92+0.8
0 (25) ±(value of JIS B 0401-1998 tolerance class IT18)/2
(3.62 +0.03
0 ) (0.98)

17-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring
17.4.1 Important Information on Wiring

WARNING
1) Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the controller before wiring to avoid an
electric shock. Use a tester or similar device to ensure that no power is being
supplied to a cable to be connected.
2) Wiring work must be carried out by a person with basic electrical knowledge and
practical experience.

UP55A Terminal Block Diagram

E4-terminal area E1-terminal area
101 501 401 301 201
-112 -512 -412 -312 -212
101 501 401 301 201
102 502 302 202
103 503 303 203
104 504 304 204
105 505 305 205
106 506 306 206
107 507 407 307 207
108 508 408 308 208
109 509 409 309 209
110 510 410 310 210
111 511 411 311 211
112 512 412 312 212

E3-terminal area E2-terminal area

17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-5
17.4 Wiring

CAUTION
Do not use an unassigned terminal as the relay terminal.

Recommended Crimp-on Terminal Lugs

(ød )

(A)

(F)

Recommended tightening torque: 0.6 N·m

Applicable wire size: Power supply wiring 1.25 mm2 or more

Applicable terminal lug Applicable wire size mm2 (AWG#) (ød) (A) (F)

M3 0.25 to 1.65 (22 to 16) 3.3 5.5 4.2

5.5 3.3

Cable Specifications
Purpose Name and Manufacturer
Power supply, relay contact 600 V Grade heat-resistant PVC insulated wires, JIS C 3317(HIV), 0.9
output to 2.0 mm2
Thermocouple Shielded compensating lead wire JISC1610
RTD Shielded wire (three/four conductors) UL2482 (Hitachi Cable)
Other signals (other than
Shielded wires
contact input/output)
Other signals (contact
Non shielded wires
input/output)
RS485 communication Shielded wires
Ethernet communication 100 BASE-TX (CAT-5) / 10 BASE-T
PROFIBUS-DP
Dedicated cable for PROFIBUS-DP (Shielded two-wires)
communication
DeviceNet communication Dedicated cable for DeviceNet (Shielded five-wires)
CC-Link communication Dedicated cable for CC-Link (Shielded three-wires)
PROFIBUS-DP/CC-Link Connector (wiring side) (Part number: A1987JT)
DeviceNet Connector (wiring side) (Part number: L4502BW)
Recommended tightening torque: 0.5 to 0.6 N·m

Note
Communication wires of cross-sectional area less than or equal to 0.34 mm2 may not be
secured firmly to the terminals.
Check that the wire is firmly connected to the terminal by folding the conductor of the wire
connected to the climp-on lug.
Recommended length of the stripped wire: 7 mm

Note
If the UP is located at the end of a segment for the PROFIBUS communication wiring,
terminating resistors are separately needed. These are to be prepared by users. (390 Ω: 2 pcs.
220 Ω: 1 pc., or an active terminator.)

17-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

17.4.2 PV Input Wiring

CAUTION
1) Be careful of polarity when wiring inputs. Reversed polarity can damage the UP.
2) Keep the PV input signal line as far away as possible from the power supply
circuit and ground circuit.
3) For TC input, use shielded compensating lead wires for wiring. For RTD input,
use shielded wires that have low conductor resistance and cause no significant
differences in resistance between the three wires.
4) If there is a risk of external lightning surges, use a lightning arrester etc.

TC Input RTD Input (3-wire system)

Compensating lead wire Shield

A
201
TC RTD
+
202 b
202 PV
PV
– 203 A B
B 203
Shield b

Class D grounding
Class D grounding (grounding resistance
(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)
of 100 Ω or less)
Lead wire resistance per wire of
10 Ω or less. Make the resistance
of the three wires equal.

DC Voltage (mV, V) Input DC Current (mA) Input

+ –
+ 202 – 203
DC voltage PV DC current PV
+ 204
– – 203 +
Shield Shield

17
Class D grounding Class D grounding
(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less) (grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)

Use Installation and Wiring

In Single-loop control or Cascade primary-loop control, PV input is used for PV input.
In Loop control with PV switching or Loop control with PV auto-selector, PV input is used
for PV input 1. Remote input (E1-terminal area) is used for PV input 2. In Loop control
with PV auto-selector for 3 inputs or 4 inputs, auxiliary analog inputs are used for PV
input 3 and PV input 4.
In Cascade control, PV input is used for Loop-1 PV input. Remote input (E1-terminal
area) is used for Loop-2 PV input.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-7
17.4 Wiring

17.4.3 Remote (Auxiliary Analog) Input Wiring

CAUTION
1) Be careful of polarity when wiring inputs. Reversed polarity can damage the UP.
2) Keep the remote (auxiliary analog) input signal line as far away as possible from
the power supply circuit and ground circuit.
3) For TC input (remote input with direct input), use shielded compensating lead
wires for wiring. For RTD input, use shielded wires that have low conductor
resistance and cause no significant differences in resistance between the three
wires.
4) If there is a risk of external lightning surges, use a lightning arrester etc.

Remote input (E1-terminal area)

+
+ 305
DC voltage RSP
– – 306
Shield

Class D grounding
(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)

Auxiliary analog input (E2-terminal area) Auxiliary analog input (E4-terminal area)

+ +
+ 311 + 505
DC voltage AIN2 DC voltage AIN4
– 312 –
– – 506
Shield Shield

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less) (grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)

Use
RSP Remote Input (E1-terminal area)
In Single-loop control, used for remote input.
In Cascade primary-loop control, remote input is used for output tracking input.
In Cascade control, remote input is used for Loop-2 PV input.
In Loop control with PV switching or Loop control with PV auto-selector, remote input is
used for PV input 2.

AIN2 Auxiliary Analog Input (E2-terminal area)

In Loop control with PV auto-selector for 3 inputs or 4 inputs, auxiliary analog input (E-2
terminal area) is used for PV input 3.

AIN4 Auxiliary Analog Input (E4-terminal area)

In Loop control with PV auto-selector for 4 inputs, auxiliary analog input (E4-terminal
area) is used for PV input 4.

17-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Remote Input with Direct Input (Optional suffix code /DR or /U1) (E1-terminal area)
TC input

Compensating lead wire

TC +
302
RSP/DR
– 303
Shield

Class D grounding
(grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less)

RTD input (3-wire system) RTD input (4-wire system)

Shield
A A
301 301
RTD RTD
b a
302 RSP/DR 302
RSP/DR
A B A B
303 b 303
B
b a B b
304
Class D grounding Shield
(grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) Class D grounding
(grounding resistance
Lead wire resistance per wire of of 100 Ω or less)
150 Ω or less. Make the resistance Lead wire resistance per wire of
of the three wires equal. 150 Ω or less.

DC voltage (mV, V) input DC current (mA) input

+ –
–
+
DC voltage
302
RSP/DR DC current
303
RSP/DR
17
– 303 + 304
– +
Shield Shield

Installation and Wiring

Class D grounding Class D grounding
(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less) (grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-9
17.4 Wiring

17.4.4 Control Output (Relay, Triac, Current, and Voltage Pulse) Wiring

CAUTION
1) The use of inductance (L) loads such as auxiliary relays, motors and solenoid
valves causes malfunction or relay failure; always insert a CR filter for use with
alternating current or a diode for use with direct current, as a spark-removal
surge suppression circuit, into the line in parallel with the load.
2) If there is a risk of external lightning surges, use a lightning arrester etc.
3) Relays cannot be used for a small load of 10 mA or less.
4) Since the insulation provided to each relay output terminal is Functional
insulation, provide Reinforced insulation to the external of the device as
necessary. (Refer to the drawing below.)

This product This product

A safety A safety A safety
voltage circuit voltage circuit voltage circuit

Functional Functional
insulation Reinforced insulation
insulation
A safety A hazardous A hazardous
voltage circuit voltage circuit voltage circuit

Reinforced insulation

This product
A hazardous A hazardous
voltage circuit voltage circuit
Functional
insulation Reinforced insulation
A hazardous A hazardous
voltage circuit voltage circuit

Reinforced insulation

DC Relay Wiring
UP55A
External DC power supply
O.C Relay

R

Diode
(Mount it directly
UP’s contact Relay to the relay coil
(Use one with a relay coil rating terminal (socket).)
less than the UP’s contact rating.)

AC Relay Wiring
UP55A External AC power supply

UP’s contact Relay CR filter

(Use one with a relay coil (Mount it directly
rating less than the UP’s to the relay coil
contact rating.) terminal (socket).)

17-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Relay Output
Standard type output or Heating/cooling type
Heating/cooling type cooling-side output
heating-side output

NC 101 OUT NC 507 OUT2

NO 102 NO 508

COM 103 COM 509

Contact rating: 250 V AC, 3 A Contact rating: 250 V AC, 3 A

30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load) 30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)

Note: Cannot be used for a small load of 10 mA or less.

Triac Output (for Detailed model)

Suffix code of Output 1 = “-T” Suffix code of Output 2 = “T”

101 507

NO 102 NO 508
OUT OUT2
COM 103 COM 509

Contact rating: 75-250 V AC Contact rating: 75-250 V AC

Allowable load current: 0.8 A Allowable load current: 0.8 A

Current and Voltage Pulse Output

Standard type or Heating/cooling type
Heating/cooling type cooling-side output
heating-side output

Shield Shield
+ 207 + 511
OUT OUT2
208 512
– –
Control valves Class D grounding Control valves Class D grounding
(or other (grounding resistance of (or other (grounding resistance of
actuators) 100 Ω or less) actuators) 100 Ω or less)
Current:
4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC
Current:
4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC
17
(resistance load: 600 Ω or less) (resistance load: 600 Ω or less)
Voltage pulse: Voltage pulse:

Installation and Wiring

On-voltage: 12 V DC or more On-voltage: 12 V DC or more
(load resistance: 600 Ω or more) (load resistance: 600 Ω or more)
Off-voltage: 0.1 V DC or less Off-voltage: 0.1 V DC or less

Use
When current/voltage pulse output is not used for control output, it can be used for
retransmission output.
When retransmission output terminal is not used for retransmission output, it can be used
for optional control output. The current output range can be changed.
For control output setting, set the control mode (CTLM) and the control type (CNT), then
set the output terminal and output type in the output type selection (OT).
► Control output type: 10.1 Setting Control Output Type

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-11
17.4 Wiring

17.4.5 Valve Position Output and Feedback Input Wiring

CAUTION
1) Use an auxiliary relay for load-switching if the contact rating is exceeded.
2) Keep the relay output wires and the feedback input wires at least 30 cm apart.
3) The output relay has a limited service life. Be sure to connect a CR filter (for AC)
or diode (for DC) to the load.
4) If there is a risk of external lightning surges, use a lightning arrester etc.
5) Relays cannot be used for a small load of 10 mA or less.

► When using auxiliary relay: 17.4.4 Control Output (Relay, Current, and Voltage Pulse) Wiring

Relay contact output

HIGH 507
(direct)

LOW 508 VALV

(reverse)

COM 509
Contact rating: 250 V AC, 3 A
30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)

Note: Cannot be used for a small load of 10 mA or less.

Feedback input (resistor)

100%
Shield
510

Resistance:
511 VALV
100 Ω to 2.5 kΩ

512
0%

Class D grounding
(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)

Feedback input (current)

Shield +
510

4 to 20 mA DC VALV

512
–

Class D grounding
*: Always set the terminal 511 in open state.

17-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

17.4.6 Contact Input Wiring

CAUTION
1) Use a no-voltage contact (relay contact etc.) for external contacts.
2) Use a no-voltage contact which has ample switching capacity for the terminal's
OFF voltage (approx. 5V) and ON current (approx 1mA).
3) When using a transistor contact, the voltage at both terminals must be 2 V or
less when the contact is ON and the leakage current must be 100 µA or less
when it is OFF.
4) If there is a risk of external lightning surges, use a lightning arrester etc.

Contact Input Equipped as Standard

No-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI +5 V DI
+ DI3
209 DI3 209
+5 V
+ DI2
210 DI2 210
+5 V
+ DI1
211 DI1 211

– COM
212 COM 212

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Suffix code (for Standard model): Type 2≠2 or 4

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model):/X4
No-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI – DI
COM
501 COM 501
+5 V
+ DI41
502 DI41 502
+5 V
503 DI42
+
503
DI42 17
+5 V
+ DI43
504 DI43 504

Installation and Wiring

+5 V
+ DI44
505 DI44 505
+5 V
+ DI45
506 DI45 506

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-13
17.4 Wiring

Additional Contact Input According to the UP55A Suffix Codes

Suffix codes (for Standard model): Type 2=1 or 4; however, without optional suffix code /DR
Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /R1
Non-voltage contact Transistor contact

RSP RSP
– COM
303 COM 303
+5 V
+ DI16
304 DI16 304

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Suffix code (for Standard model): Type 2=2

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /X1
Non-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI DI
– COM
301 COM 301
+5 V
+ DI11
302 DI11 302
+5 V
+ DI12
303 DI12 303
+5 V
+ DI13
304 DI13 304
+5 V
+ DI14
305 DI14 305
+5 V
+ DI15
306 DI15 306

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Suffix code (for Standard model): Type 2=4

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /A2
Non-voltage contact Transistor contact

AIN2 AIN2
309 COM – 309 COM
+5 V
+ DI26
310 DI26 310

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Suffix code (for Standard model): Type 2=4

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /A4
No-voltage contact Transistor contact

AIN4 AIN4
– COM
503 COM 503
+5 V
+ DI46
504 DI46 504

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

17-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /X2

Non-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI DI
– COM
307 COM 307
+5 V
+ DI21
308 DI21 308
+5 V
+ DI22
309 DI22 309
+5 V
+ DI23
310 DI23 310
+5 V
+ DI24
311 DI24 311
+5 V
+ DI25
312 DI25 312

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /X3

Non-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI DI
– COM
407 COM 407
+5 V
+ DI31
408 DI31 408
+5 V
+ DI32
409 DI32 409
+5 V
+ DI33
410 DI33 410
+5 V
+ DI34
411 DI34 411
+5 V
+ DI35
412 DI35 412

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W1

17
No-voltage contact Transistor contact

Installation and Wiring

DI – COM DI
301 COM 301
+5 V
+ DI11
302 DI11 302
+5 V
+ DI12
303 DI12 303

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-15
17.4 Wiring

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W2

No-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI – COM DI
307 COM 307
+5 V
+ DI21
308 DI21 308
+5 V
+ DI22
309 DI22 309

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W3

No-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI – COM DI
407 COM 407
+5 V
+ DI31
408 DI31 408
+5 V
+ DI32
409 DI32 409

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W4

No-voltage contact Transistor contact

DI – COM DI
501 COM 501
+5 V
+ DI41
502 DI41 502
+5 V
+ DI42
503 DI42 503

Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more Contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more

The function is assigned to contact inputs for each control mode and control type.
► Initial value of Contact input function: 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
► Contact input function registration: 12.1 Setting Contact Input Function

Note
If the /DR option is additionally specified to the remote input, the remote Input with direct input
can be used as remote input.
However, DI16 is to be deleted. (See 17.4.3 Remote (Auxiliary Analog) Input Wiring)

17-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

17.4.7 Contact Output Wiring

CAUTION
1) Use an auxiliary relay for load-switching if the contact rating is exceeded.
2) Connect a bleeder resistor when a small current is used, so that a current
exceeding 10 mA can be supplied.
3) The output relay has a limited service life. Be sure to connect a CR filter (for AC)
or diode (for DC) to the load.
4) If there is a risk of external lightning surges, use a lightning arrester etc.
5) Since the insulation provided to each relay output terminal is Functional
insulation, provide Reinforced insulation to the external of the device as
necessary. (Refer to the drawing below.)

This product This product

A safety A safety A safety
voltage circuit voltage circuit voltage circuit

Functional Functional
insulation Reinforced insulation
insulation
A safety A hazardous A hazardous
voltage circuit voltage circuit voltage circuit

Reinforced insulation

This product
A hazardous A hazardous
voltage circuit voltage circuit
Functional
insulation Reinforced insulation
A hazardous A hazardous
voltage circuit voltage circuit

Reinforced insulation

► When using auxiliary relay: 17.4.4 Control Output (Relay, Current, and Voltage Pulse) Wiring

Contact Output Equipped as Standard

Relay contact

ALM
AL3 104

COM 105 17
AL2 106

Installation and Wiring

COM 107

AL1 108

COM 109

Contact rating: 240 V AC, 1 A

30 V DC, 1 A (resistance load)

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-17
17.4 Wiring

Suffix code (for Standard model): Type 2≠2

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /Y2

DO
DO25 307

DO24 308

DO23 309

DO22 310

DO21 311

COM 312

Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA

Additional Contact Output According to the Suffix Codes

Suffix code (for Standard model): Type 2=3
Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /Y1

DO
DO15 301

DO14 302

DO13 303

DO12 304

DO11 305

COM 306

Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA

Suffix code (for Standard model): Type 2=3

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /Y3

DO
DO35 407

DO34 408

DO33 409

DO32 410

DO31 411

COM 412

Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA

17-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Optional suffix code (for Standard model): /Y4

DO
DO45 501

DO44 502

DO43 503

DO42 504

DO41 505

COM 506

Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W1 Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W2

DO DO
DO12 304 DO22 310

DO11 305 DO21 311

COM 306 COM 312

Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA

Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W3 Optional suffix code (for Detailed model): /W4

DO DO
DO32 410 DO42 504

DO31 411 DO41 505

COM 412 COM 506

Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA Transistor contact rating: 24 V DC, 50 mA 17

Installation and Wiring

The function is assigned to contact outputs for each control mode and control type.
► Initial value of Contact output function: 8.1 Setting Control Mode (CTLM)
► Contact output function registration: 12.2 Setting Contact Output Function

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-19
17.4 Wiring

17.4.8 Retransmission Output Wiring

When retransmission output is not used for retransmission output, it can be used for 15 V
DC loop power supply.
The current output range can be changed.

RET OUT OUT2

Shield terminals terminals terminals
+
205 207 511

206 208 512

–

Receiver
(Recorder etc.)
Receiving resistor: Class D grounding
600 Ω or less (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less)

17.4.9 15 V DC Loop Power Supply Wiring

This can be used when it is not used for retransmission output.
The controller is equipped with a non-isolated loop power supply (14.5 to 18.0 V DC) for
connecting a 2-wire transmitter.
+
202
PV input
100 Ω
0.4-2 V DC
203
–
Shield
2-wire transmitter
205
RET terminals
4-20 mA DC
14.5-18.0 V DC
206

Class D grounding
(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)

OUT terminal and OUT2 terminal also can be used.

17.4.10 24 V DC Loop Power Supply Wiring (for Detailed model)

This can be used when the optional suffix code /LP, /LCH1, /L4, or /LC4 is specified.
The controller with the optional suffix code above is equipped with an isolated loop power
supply (21.6 to 28.0 V DC) for connecting a 2-wire transmitter.
+
204
PV input
4-20 mA DC
203
–
Shield
2-wire transmitter
505
LPS terminals
4-20 mA DC
21.6-28.0 V DC
506

Class D grounding
(grounding resistance of 100 Ω or less)

17-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

17.4.11 Heater Break Alarm Wiring

Heater break alarm can be used for the UP55A with the optional suffix code /HA.
Heater break alarm Heater break detection

Shield HBA
HBA 510
HAL1 507 CT1
Class D grounding
HAL2 508 511
CT2
COM 509 Shield
Class D grounding 512
Contact raging: 24 V DC, 50 mA (grounding resistance COM
of 100 Ω or less)

17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-21
17.4 Wiring

17.4.12 RS-485 Communication Interface Wiring

Wire as follows for Modbus communication, PC link communication, or ladder
communication.
Always connect a terminating resistor to the station at the end of the communication line.
► Details of communication parameter settings and communication functions: UTAdvanced Series
Communication Interface (RS-485, Ethernet) User's Manual

4-wire Wiring

ML2-□ UP UP
(External)
SDB (+) RDB (+) Terminating
(External) 2 A A
PC resistor
Terminating resistor SDA (–) RDA (–)
220 Ω 1 B B 220 Ω
RDB (+) SDB (+)
4 C C (External)
RDA (–) SDA (–) Terminating
3 D D
resistor
SG SG
5 E E 220 Ω
RS-232C
Straight cable 6
Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

2-wire Wiring of 4-wire Terminal

ML2-□ UP UP

B (+) RDB (+) (External)

(External) 4 A A Terminating
PC Terminating resistor A (–) RDA (–) resistor
220 Ω 3 B B
220 Ω
C SDB (+) C

D SDA (–) D
SG SG
5 E E
RS-232C
Straight cable 6
Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

Applicable to suffix code (for

Applicable to suffix code (for Standard
Terminal Standard model): Type 3 = 1;
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol however, Type 2 = 3 excluded
Applicable to optional suffix code (for
above. Applicable to optional suffix code
Detailel model): /C4
(for Detailed model): /CH3
A 410 504
B 411 505
C 407 501
D 408 502
E 409 503

17-22 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

2-wire Wiring

ML2-□ UP UP

B (+) RSB (+) (External)

(External) 4 A A Terminating
PC
Terminating resistor A (–) RSA(–) resistor
220 Ω 3 B B
220 Ω

SG SG
5 C C
RS-232C
Straight cable 6 Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

Applicable to suffix code (for Standard

Terminal
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol
Applicable to optional suffix code (for
above.
Detailed model): /C4
A 501
B 502
C 503

Note
ML2-x indicates a converter of YOKOGAWA. Other than this, RS232C/RS485 converters
can also be used. If another converter is to be used, check the electrical specifications of the
converter before using it.

17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-23
17.4 Wiring

17.4.13 Coordinated Operation Wiring

4-wire Wiring

UP (Master) UT (Slave) UT (Slave)

(External) SDB (+) RDB (+) (External)

C A A
Terminating resistor SDA (–) RDA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω D B B 220 Ω
(External) RDB (+) SDB (+) (External)
A C C
Terminating resistor RDA (–) SDA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω B D D 220 Ω
SG SG
E E E

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

2-wire Wiring of 4-wire Terminal (1)

UP (Master) UT (Slave) UT (Slave)

SDB (+) RDB (+)

(External) A A A (External)
Terminating resistor SDA (–) RDA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω B B B 220 Ω
C
RDB (+) SDB (+)
C C
RDA (–) SDA (–)
D D D
SG SG
E E E

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

2-wire Wiring of 4-wire Terminal (2)

UP (Master) UT (Slave) UT (Slave)

SDB (+) RDB (+)

(External) A A A (External)
Terminating resistor SDA (–) RDA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω B B B 220 Ω
C
RDB (+) SDB (+)
C C
RDA (–) SDA (–)
D D D
SG SG
E E E

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

17-24 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Applicable to suffix code (for

Applicable to suffix code (for Standard
Terminal Standard model): Type 3 = 1;
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol however, Type 2 = 3 excluded
Applicable to optional suffix code (for
above. Applicable to optional suffix code
Detailed model): /C4
(for Detailed model): /CH3
A 410 504
B 411 505
C 407 501
D 408 502
E 409 503

2-wire Wiring

UP (Master) UT (Slave) UT (Slave)

RSB (+) RSB (+)

(External) A A A (External)
Terminating resistor RSA (–) RSA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω B B B 220 Ω

SG SG
E E E

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

Applicable to suffix code (for Standard

Terminal
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol
Applicable to suffix code (for Detailed
above.
model): /C4
A 501
B 502
E 503 17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-25
17.4 Wiring

17.4.14 Peer-to peer Communication Wiring

Peer-to-peer communication can be used on ladder program of UP55A.

2-wire Wiring of 4-wire Terminal

UP UP UP

SDB (+) RDB (+)

(External) A A A (External)
Terminating resistor SDA (–) RDA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω B B B 220 Ω
RDB (+)
C C SDB (+) C
RDA (–)
D D SDA (–) D
SG SG
E E E

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

Applicable to suffix code (for

Applicable to suffix code (for Standard
Terminal Standard model): Type 3 = 1;
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol however, Type 2 = 3 excluded
Applicable to optional suffix code (for
above. Applicable to optional suffix code
Detailed model): /C4
(for Detailed model): /CH3
A 410 504
B 411 505
C 407 501
D 408 502
E 409 503

17-26 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

2-wire Wiring
UP UP UP

RSB (+) RSB (+)

(External) A A A (External)
Terminating resistor RSA (–) RSA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω B B B 220 Ω

SG SG
E E E

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

Applicable to suffix code (for Standard

Terminal
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol
Applicable to optional suffix code (for
above.
Detailed model): /C4
A 501
B 502
E 503
► Details of communication parameter settings and communication functions: UTAdvanced Series
Communication Interface (RS-485, Ethernet) User's Manual
► Details of Peer-to-peer communication: LL50A Parameter Setting Software User's Manual

17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-27
17.4 Wiring

17.4.15 Ethernet Communication Interface Wiring

*Devices that can be *Devices that can be

connected via Ethernet connected via Ethernet
HUB Ethernet

Straight cable Crossing cable

UP55A UP55A UP55A

Upper side LED (baud rate) Lower side LED (link activity)
Color Amber Color Green
Lit 100M bps Lit Linked
Unlit 10M bps Blink Active
Unlit Link failure

CAUTION
Be sure to connect a lightning arrester for Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) in an
environment where a surge voltage may be induced by a lightning discharge.

17-28 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

RS-485 communication wiring for the serial gateway function is as follows.

2-wire Wiring of 4-wire Terminal

Serial gateway
UP UP

(External) RSB (+) RDB (+) (External)

407 A A
Terminating resistor RSA (–) RDA (–) Terminating resistor
220 Ω 408 B B 220 Ω
C SDB (+) C

D SDA (–) D
SG SG
409 E E

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

Slave terminals
Applicable to suffix code (for
Applicable to suffix code (for Standard
Terminal Standard model): Type 3 = 1;
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol however, Type 2 = 3 excluded
Applicable to optional suffix code (for
above. Applicable to optional suffix code
Detailed model): /C4
(for Detailed model): /CH3
A 410 504
B 411 505
C 407 501
D 408 502
E 409 503

2-wire Wiring

Serial gateway
UP UP

(External) RSB (+) RSB (+) (External)

407 A A
Terminating resistor Terminating resistor
220 Ω 408
RSA (–)
B
RSA (–)
B 220 Ω 17

Installation and Wiring

SG C
SG C
409

Communication Communication
cable cable

Class D grounding Class D grounding

(grounding resistance (grounding resistance
of 100 Ω or less) of 100 Ω or less)

Slave terminals
Applicable to suffix code (for Standard
Terminal
model): Type 2 = 2
symbol
Applicable to optional suffix code (for
above.
Detailed model): /C4
A 501
B 502
C 503

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-29
17.4 Wiring

17.4.16 PROFIBUS-DP Communication Interface Wiring

(1) Remove the terminal block

Hold both ends of the terminal block and pull straight.

(2) Connect the wires

Recommended length of stripped wire: 7mm

Flat-blade screwdriver

(3) Connect the terminal block

Hold both ends of the terminal block, align with the connector
on the UT side, and push the terminal block into the connector.

17-30 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Number of Pin Singnal name Description

1 VP +5V bus power
2 RxD/TxD-P Data signal (positive data receive/transmit)
3 RxD/TxD-N Data signal (negative data recive/transmit)
4 DGND Signal ground
5 SHIELD Shield ground

Terminating Resister of Bus

VP

390Ω

Data line
RxD/TxD-P

220Ω

Data line
RxD/TxD-N

390Ω

DGND

PROFIBUS-DP communication connector and LED

1
CHK
2
RDY
3
ERR
4
5

LED Lit Unlit

CHK (red) User profile error Normal
Normal. No electricity, or Communication
RDY (green)
Communicating successfully. failure
Not connected, or communication
ERR (red) Normal
failure (flashing) 17

Installation and Wiring

Modbus master wiring
Modbus master wiring is same as RS-485 communication wiring for Ethernet-serial
gateway function.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-31
17.4 Wiring

17.4.17 DeviceNet Communication Interface Wiring

(1) Remove the terminal block

Hold both ends of the terminal block and pull straight.

(2) Connect the wires

Recommended length of stripped wire: 7mm

Flat-blade screwdriver

(3) Connect the terminal block

Hold both ends of the terminal block, align with the connector
on the UT side, and push the terminal block into the connector.

17-32 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Number of Pin Singnal name Description

1 V+ Power supply 24V for DeviceNet
2 CAN_H RX/TX + signal
3 DRAIN Shield/drain
4 CAN_L RX/TX - signal
5 V- Power supply COM for DeviceNet

Terminating Resister of Bus (both ends of the trunk line)

CAN_H

121Ω

CAN_L

DeviceNet communication connector and LED

(Red) 1
(White) 2
CHK
3
(Blue) 4
MNS
(Black) 5

LED Lit / flashing Unlit

CHK (red) User profile error Normal
Normal. Communicating successfully (green, lit).
Not connected (green, flashing).
Critical link failure (red, lit).
MNS (green/red) No electricity,
Connection timeout (red, flashing)
At power-on/Communication faulted (green/red,
flashing)

Modbus master wiring

Modbus master wiring is same as RS-485 communication wiring for Ethernet-serial
gateway function. 17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-33
17.4 Wiring

17.4.18 CC-Link Communication Interface Wiring

(1) Remove the terminal block

Hold both ends of the terminal block and pull straight.

(2) Connect the wires

Recommended length of stripped wire: 7mm

Flat-blade screwdriver

(3) Connect the terminal block

Hold both ends of the terminal block, align with the connector
on the UT side, and push the terminal block into the connector.

17-34 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.4 Wiring

Number of Pin Singnal name Description

1 FG Frame ground
2 SLD Shield
3 DG TX/RX signal ground
4 DB RX/TX - signal
5 DA RS/TX + signal

Terminating Resister of Bus (both ends of the trunk line)

DA

110Ω

DB

CC-Link communication connector and LED

1
CHK
2
3
L ERR
4
L RUN
5

LED Lit Unlit

CHK (red) User profile error / address error Normal
L ERR (red) Communication failure (CRC error) Normal
L RUN (green) Normal. Communicating successfully. No carrier detected. / Connection timeout.

Modbus master wiring

Modbus master wiring is same as RS-485 communication wiring for Ethernet-serial
gateway function.

17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-35
17.4 Wiring

17.4.19 Power Supply Wiring

WARNING
1) Wiring work must be carried out by a person with basic electrical knowledge and
practical experience.
2) Be sure to turn OFF the power supply to the controller before wiring to avoid an
electric shock. Use a tester or similar device to ensure that no power is being
supplied to a cable to be connected.
3) As a safety measure, always install a circuit breaker (an IEC 60947-compatible
product, 5 A, 100 V or 220 V AC) in an easily accessible location near the
instrument. Moreover, provide indication that the switch is a device for turning off
the power to the instrument.
4) Install the power cable keeping a distance of more than 1 cm from other signal
wires.
5) The power cable is required to meet the IEC standards concerned or the
requirements of the area in which the instrument is being installed.
6) Wiring should be installed to conform to NEC (National Electrical Code: ANSI/
NFPA-70) or the wiring construction standards in countries or regions where
wiring will be installed.
7) Be sure to use a heat-resistant cable for control output, alarm output, and power
wiring.

CAUTION
1) Provide electricity from a single-phase power supply. If the power is noisy,
install an isolation transformer on the primary side, and use a line filter on the
secondary side. When measures against noise are taken, do not install the
primary and secondary power cables close to each other.
2) If there is a risk of external lightning surges, use a lightning arrester etc.

Primary side Secondary side

Circuit
Line filter
Insulation transformer breaker

110 N
Controller
power
111 L

G 112

Class D grounding

17-36 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 17.5 Attaching and Detaching Terminal Cover
After completing the wiring, the terminal cover is recommended to use for the instrument.

Attaching Method
(1) Attach the terminal cover to the rear panel (2) The following figure is a mounting image.
of the main unit horizontally.

When Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet or CC-Link communication is specified, cut

and use a terminal cover as follows.
Cut the cover carefully using nippers etc. so that sharp edge does not remain.

Detaching Method
(1) Slide the terminal cover to the direction of the printed arrow.
17

Installation and Wiring

IM 05P02C41-01EN 17-37
Blank Page
Chapter 18 Parameters

18.1 Parameter Map

Brief Description of Parameter Map

Group Display
"E1 to E4" and "1 to 8, R" appearing in the parameter map are displayed on Group
display (7 segments, 2 digits) while the menu or parameter is displayed.

E1: indicates the parameter in E1-terminal area

E2: indicates the parameter in E2-terminal area
E3: indicates the parameter in E3-terminal area
E4: indicates the parameter in E4-terminal area
1 to 8, R: indicate the group numbers

► E1 to E4: Terminal assignments in 17.4 Wiring

Loop-2 Display
"LP2" appearing in the parameter map indicates that the LP2 lamp (green) is lit.

LP2: indicates that the parameter is for Loop 2. Loop 2 is used when the control mode is
Cascade control.

Parameter Display Level

The marks below appearing next to the menu symbol and parameter symbol in the
parameter map indicate the display/non-display level.
Mark Display Display level Description
Easy setting mode: Displays Corresponding parameters are displayed
None EASY
the minimum parameters. in all modes.
Corresponding parameters are displayed
only in Standard setting mode and
Standard setting mode: Professional setting mode.
S Displays a wider range of Parameter display level indicators
STD
parameters than displayed in "EASY" and "PRO" are unlit in Standard
the Easy setting mode. setting mode.
*: "STD" is the symbol used in this
manual only.

P Professional setting mode: Corresponding parameters are displayed

PRO
Displays all parameters. only in Professional setting mode.
18
Professional setting mode
Parameters
Standard setting mode

Easy setting mode

► Display level: 13.3.2 Setting Parameter Display Level

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-1
18.1 Parameter Map

Function of Each Menu

Menu symbol Function

Operation mode (PROG/RESET/LOCAL/REM switch, Auto-tuning switch,
MODE
etc.)

The parameters in the menu of the following table indicate the parameters to set the
functions necessary for operation. The symbol in parentheses are shown on Group
display.
Menu symbol Function
CS SELECT parameter
PROG Program pattern setting function
LOC Local setting function
EDIT Editing function
AL Alarm setpoint
SPS SP-related function
ALRM Alarm function
PVS PV-related function
PID PID setting
Super, Super 2, Sample PI control, non-linear PID control, anti-reset windup,
TUNE
output velocity limiter, and manual preset output
ZONE Zone control
AL (LP2) Alarm setpoint (Loop 2)
ALRM (LP2) Alarm function (Loop 2)
PVS (LP2) PV-related function (Loop 2)
PID (LP2) PID setting (Loop 2)
Super, Super 2, non-linear PID control, anti-reset windup, output velocity
TUNE (LP2)
limiter, manual preset output (Loop 2)
ZONE (LP2) Zone control (Loop 2)
PPAR P parameter (for ladder program)
PYS1 (1) 10-segment linearizer 1
PYS2 (2) 10-segment linearizer 2
PYS3 (3) 10-segment linearizer 3
PYS4 (4) 10-segment linearizer 4

18-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.1 Parameter Map

The parameters in the menu of the following table indicate the parameters to set the
basic functions of the controller. The symbol in parentheses are shown on Group display.
Menu symbol Functions
PASS Password setting (Displayed only when the password has been sent.)

Menu symbol Functions

CTL Control mode, control type, sampling period, segment setting method, program time unit, etc
PV PV input type, range, scale, etc
RSP RSP remote input type, scale, etc
AIN2 AIN2 aux. analog input type, scale, etc
AIN4 AIN4 aux. analog input type, scale, etc
Input function in Loop control with PV switching and Loop control with PV auto-selector, SP limiters,
MPV
etc.
MPV (LP2) Loop-2 input function, SP limiters (Loop 2), etc in Cascade control.
OUT Control output type, valve position adjustment, retransmission output, etc.
HBA Heater break alarm
R485 (E3) RS-485 communication (E3-terminal area)
R485 (E4) RS-485 communication (E4-terminal area)
ETHR (E3) Ethernet communication, gateway setting, IP access restriction, etc. (E3-terminal area)
PROF (E3) PROFIBUS-DP communication (E3-terminal area)
DNET (E3) DeviceNet communication (E3-terminal area)
CC-L (E3) CC-Link communication (E3-terminal area)
KEY Function of User function key
DISP Display functions
CSEL SELECT Display, SELECT parameter registration
KLOC Key lock
MLOC Parameter menu lock
DI.SL Contact input function
DI.NU Contact input function (bit selection)
DI.D Contact input type (equipped as standard)
DI.D (E1) Contact input type (E1-terminal area)
DI.D (E2) Contact input type (E2-terminal area)
18
DI.D (E3) Contact input type (E3-terminal area)
DI.D (E4) Contact input type (E4-terminal area) Parameters
ALM Alarm output function, contact output type (equipped as standard)
DO (E1) Contact output function, contact output type (E1-terminal area)
DO (E2) Contact output function, contact output type (E2-terminal area)
DO (E3) Contact output function, contact output type (E3-terminal area)
DO (E4) Contact output function, contact output type (E4-terminal area)
I/O Input / output data display
SYS Action setting when recovering from a power failure, guide display language, password setting, etc
INIT Initialization of parameter
VER Error status, version, MAC address, etc
LVL Parameter display level

Note
Some parameters are not displayed according to the setting such as control mode, control type,
or input and output.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-3
18.1 Parameter Map

Operation Setting parameters for the functions necessary for operations.

display

Press the key CS menu is displayed when the SELECT parameter has been registered.
for 3 seconds.
END MODE CS PROG LOC EDIT P AL SPS S
1 to 30 The parameter in PROG is
PTNO. displayed in the PV Display.
HOLD CS10 LSP ALL.S A1 RMS
ADV CS11 SEGNO. LSP(LP2) PTN.S A2 RFL
MODE 1 to 99 … L.PID USE.S A3
CS12 0 RT
1 99
L.TY1 S CPY.S A4
A.M CS13 RBS
SSP TSP(1) TSP(99) L.EV1 S CPY.D A5
A.M(LP2) CS14 SPT
SSP(LP2) TSP(1)(LP2) TSP(99)(LP2) L.TY2 S CLR.P A6
L.C CS15 L.EV2 S END A7 S.TM
STC TIME(1) TIME(99)
PTNO. CS16 WT.SW1 S TM.RT(1) TM.RT(99) L.TY3 S A8 PNC
SST L.EV3 S ALL P END
CS17 WZ.UP1 S S.PID(1) S.PID(99) END
P.FWD CS18 WZ.LO1 S JC(1) S JC(99) S L.TY4 S
… L.EV4 S ALL S
AT CS19 WT.TM1 S PV.TY1(1) S PV.TY1(99) S
WT.SW2 S PV.EV1(1) S PV.EV1(99) S L.TY5 S
AT(LP2) END
WZ.UP2 S L.EV5 S
…

…
PID L.TY6 S
WZ.LO2 S PV.TY8(1) S PV.TY8(99) S
PID(LP2) WT.TM2 S PV.EV8(1) S PV.EV8(99) S L.EV6 S
END TME1(1) S TME1(99) S L.TY7 S
…

WT.SW5 S T.ON1(1) S T.ON1(99) S L.EV7 S

WZ.UP5 S T.OF1(1) S T.OF1(99) S L.TY8 S
WZ.LO5 S L.EV8 S
…

WT.TM5 S TME16(1) S TME16(99) S END

R.CYCL S T.ON16(1) S T.ON16(99) S
R.STRT S T.OF16(1) S T.OF16(99) S
R.END S END END
END

LP2 LP2 LP2 LP2

AL ALRM PVS PID

A1 AL1 BS P(1) P(8) P(R)

A2 AL2 FL I(1) I(8) I(R)
D(1) D(8) D(R)
…

A3 END
AL8 OH(1) OH(8) OH(R)
A4
VT1 OL(1) OL(8) OL(R)
A5
MR(1) MR(8) MR(R)
A6 VT2
HYS(1) HYS(8) HYS(R)
…

A7
VT8
DR(1) S DR(8) S DR(R) S
A8 Pc(1) Pc(8) Pc(R)
END HY1
Ic(1) Ic(8) Ic(R)
HY2 Dc(1) … Dc(8) Dc(R)
…

OHc(1) OHc(8) OHc(R)

HY8 OLc(1) OLc(8) OLc(R)
DYN1 S HYSc(1) HYSc(8) HYSc(R)
DYN2 S DB(1) DB(8) DB(R)
PO(1) PO(8) PO(R)
…

DYN8 S POc(1) POc(8) POc(R)

DYF1 P END END END

DYF2 P
…

DYF8 P
AMD S
END

18-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.1 Parameter Map

ALRM PVS PID TUNE ZONE S

EHY1 S BS P(1) P(8) P(R) SC RP1

EHY2 S FL I(1) I(8) I(R) AT.TY S RP2
…

END D(1) D(8) D(R) AT.OH P RP3

EHY8 S
AL1 OH(1) OH(8) OH(R) AT.OL P RP4
AL2 OL(1) OL(8) OL(R) AT.BS P RP5
…

MR(1) MR(8) MR(R) GW P RP6

AL8
VT1
HYS(1) HYS(8) HYS(R) GG P RP7
VT2 HY.UP(1) HY.UP(8) HY.UP(R) AR S RHY
…

HY.LO(1) … HY.LO(8) HY.LO(R) OPR S RDV

VT8
DR(1) S DR(8) S DR(R) S OLMT P END
HY1
HY2 Pc(1) Pc(8) Pc(R) MPON S
Ic(1) Ic(8) Ic(R) MPO1 S
ALL S
…

HY8

…
Dc(1) Dc(8) Dc(R)
DYN1 S
OHc(1) OHc(8) OHc(R) MPO5 S
DYN2 S
OLc(1) OLc(8) OLc(R) END
…

DYN8 S HYSc(1) HYSc(8) HYSc(R)

DYF1 P DB(1) DB(8) DB(R)
DYF2 P
PO(1) PO(8) PO(R)
…

DYF8 P POc(1) POc(8) POc(R)

AMD S END END END
END

LP2 LP2 1 2 3 4
TUNE ZONE S PPAR S PYS1 S PYS2 S PYS3 P PYS4 P END MODE

SC RP1 P01 PYS(1) PYS(2) PYS(3) PYS(4)

AT.TY S RP2 P02 A1(1) A1(2) A1(3) A1(4)
B1(1) B1(2) B1(3) B1(4)
AT.OH P RP3 P03
A2(1) A2(2) A2(3) A2(4)
AT.OL P RP4 P04 B2(1) B2(2) B2(3) B2(4)
AT.BS P RP5 P05 A3(1) A3(2) A3(3) A3(4)
GW P RP6 P06 B3(1)
A4(1)
B3(2)
A4(2)
B3(3)
A4(3)
B3(4)
A4(4) 18
GG P RP7 P07
B4(1) B4(2) B4(3) B4(4)
AR S RHY P08 A5(1) A5(2) A5(3) A5(4)
B5(1) B5(2) B5(3) B5(4)
Parameters
OPR S RDV P09
A6(1) A6(2) A6(3) A6(4)
OLMT P END P10
B6(1) B6(2) B6(3) B6(4)
MPON S ALL S
END A7(1) A7(2) A7(3) A7(4)
MPO1 S B7(1) B7(2) B7(3) B7(4)
ALL S
MPO2 A8(1) A8(2) A8(3) A8(4)
S
B8(1) B8(2) B8(3) B8(4)
MPO3 S A9(1) A9(2) A9(3) A9(4)
MPO4 S B9(1) B9(2) B9(3) B9(4)
MPO5 S A10(1) A10(2) A10(3) A10(4)
B10(1) B10(2) B10(3) B10(4)
END
A11(1) A11(2) A11(3) A11(4)
B11(1) B11(2) B11(3) B11(4)
PMD(1) PMD(2) PMD(3) PMD(4)
END END END END
ALL S ALL S ALL P ALL P

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-5
18.1 Parameter Map

Operation Setting parameters for the basic functions of the controller

display
+
Press the keys
for 3 seconds. E1 E2 E4 LP2
END PASS CTL PV RSP AIN2 AIN4 MPV S MPV S
Displayed
when
a password
has been set. CTLM S IN IN IN IN P.UNI P.UNI
CNT UNIT UNIT UNIT UNIT P.DP P.DP
CNT(LP2) RH RH RH RH P.RH P.RH
ALG P RL RL RL RL P.RL P.RL
ALG(LP2) P SDP SDP SDP SDP PV.HL SPH
ALNO. P SH SH SH SH PV.LL SPL
ALNO.(LP2) P SL SL SL SL PV.2C END
ZON S BSL S BSL S BSL S BSL S PV.AS ALL S
SEG.T RJC P RJC P A.BS P A.BS P PV.NU
TMU ERJC P ERJC P A.FL P A.FL P SPH
PT2.G S A.BS P RTD.S S A.SR P A.SR P SPL
SMP S A.FL P A.BS P A.LC P A.LC P END
END A.SR P A.FL P DI6.D P DI6.D P ALL S
A.LC P A.SR P END END
END A.LC P
DI6.D P
END

E1 E2
KEY P DISP CSEL KLOC MLOC P DI.SL DI.NU DI.D P DI.D P DI.D P
ALL P

RUN PCMD CS1 S U.SP P CTL DO(E4) PRG S PT.B0 DI1.D DI1.D DI1.D
RST PCH CS2 S U.SP(LP2) P PV I/O RST S PT.B1 DI2.D DI2.D DI2.D
PCL U.TSP P RSP(E1) SYS LOC S
PTN CS3 S PT.B2 DI3.D DI3.D DI3.D
AIN2(E2) INIT
PCMD(LP2) U.TSP(LP2) P REM S PT.B3
MODE CS4 S AIN4(E4) VER END DI4.D DI4.D
PCH(LP2) U.TM P P/R S PT.B4
END CS5 S MPV LVL DI5.D DI5.D
PCL(LP2) U.OUT P MPV(LP2) MODE P/H S PT.B5 ALL P
PTSL S
CS10 P U.OUT(LP2) P P/L S
END END
ALL P OUT CS PN.B0 S
BAR1 S CS11 P U.HCO P HBA PROG HOLD S ALL P ALL P
PN.B1 S
BAR2 S CS12 P U.VP P R485(E3) LOC ADV S
PN.B2 S
BDV S CS13 P U.MV P R485(E4) EDIT WAIT S
ETHR(E3) AL PN.B3 S
BDV(LP2) S CS14 P U.PID P S.HLD P
PROF(E3) SPS MP.B0 S
EV1 P CS15 P U.PID(LP2) P A/M S
DNET(E3) ALRM MP.B1 S
A/M(LP2) S
…

U.SEG P
CS16 P CC-L(E3) PVS MP.B2 S
EV8 P U.RCY P KEY PID L/C S
CS17 P MP.B0(LP2) S
EV1(LP2) P U.PTN P DISP TUNE AT S
CS18 P U.AL P TRK P
MP.B1(LP2) S
…

CSEL ZONE
CS19 P MP.B2(LP2) S
P
EV8(LP2) U.AL(LP2) P KLOC AL(LP2) SW P
PV.D P END DI.SL ALRM(LP2) PT.BC P
U.HC P LAT S
SP.D P DI.NU PVS(LP2) PN.BC P
U.PV1 P LCD S
DI.D PID(LP2) MP.BC P
STS.D P U.PV2(LP2) P PVRW S
B.SP P RUN S DI.D(E1) TUNE(LP2)
SPD P U.PV P PVRW(LP2) S MP.BC(LP2) P
B.BAR P RST S DI.D(E2) ZONE(LP2)
GUID S U.RSP P MG1 P END
B.STS P PTN S DI.D(E3) PPAR
HOME P U.AI2 P DI.D(E4) PYS1(1) MG2 P
D.CYC P MODE S
ECO S U.AI4 P ALM PYS2(2) MG3 P
OP.JP P END
BRI COM.W S DO(E1) PYS3(3) MG4 P
MLSD S DO(E2) PYS4(4)
B.PVW P DATA S END
END DO(E3) END
B.PVR P

18-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.1 Parameter Map

E3 E4 E3 E3 E3 E3
OUT HBA R485 R485 ETHR PROF DNET CC-L

OT HB1.S PSL PSL HSR BR BR BR

CT HB2.S BPS BPS BPS ADR ADR ADR
CTc HB1 PRI PRI PRI BPS BPS BPS
V.AT IP1
HB2 STP STP FILE FILE FILE
V.RS
IP2
V.L CT1.T DLN DLN SCAN P SCAN P SCAN P
IP3
V.H CT2.T ADR ADR END END END
IP4
TR.T S HDN1 S RP.T P RP.T P
SM1
V.MOD S HDN2 S END END
SM2
RTS HDF1 P
RTH S SM3
HDF2 P SM4
RTL S
HB1.D P
O1RS S DG1
HB2.D P 1.IP3
O1RH S OU2.H P DG2
1.IP4
O1RL S OU2.L P END DG3
O2RS S 2.IP1
RET.H P DG4
O2RH S 2.IP2
RET.L P PRT
O2RL S 2.IP3
OU.A S IPAR
OU.H P OU2.A S 1.IP1
2.IP4
OU.L P RET.A S 1.IP2
ESW
END END

PASS

END
E3 E4 E1 E2 E3 E4
DI.D P DI.D P ALM DO DO DO DO I/O P SYS INIT P VER LVL

DI1.D DI1.D AL1.S S DO1.S S DO1.S S DO1.S S DO1.S S KEY R.MD S U.DEF PA.ER LEVL
DI2.D DI2.D AL2.S S DO2.S S DO2.S S DO2.S S DO2.S S X000 R.TM S F.DEF OP.ER
DI3.D DI3.D AL3.S S DO3.S S DO3.S S DO3.S S DO3.S S X100(E1) EPO S P.DEF AD1.E
DI4.D DI4.D OR.S S DO4.S S DO4.S S DO4.S S DO4.S S X200(E2) C.GRN P END AD2.E
DI5.D DI5.D OR2.S S DO5.S S DO5.S S DO5.S S DO5.S S X300(E3) FREQ ALL P PV1.E
END END AL1.D P DO1.D P DO1.D P DO1.D P DO1.D P X400(E4) QSM PV2.E

ALL P ALL P
AL2.D P DO2.D P DO2.D P DO2.D P DO2.D P Y000 LANG LA.ER
AL3.D P DO3.D P DO3.D P DO3.D P DO3.D P Y100(E1) PASS MCU
OR.D P DO4.D P DO4.D P DO4.D P DO4.D P Y200(E2) SMEC P DCU
18
OR2.D P DO5.D P DO5.D P DO5.D P DO5.D P Y300(E3) END ECU1(E1)
END END END END END Y400(E4) ECU2(E2)
END ECU3(E3)
Parameters
ECU4(E4)
ALL P
PARA
H.VER
SER1
SER2
MAC1(E3)
MAC2(E3)
MAC3(E3)
END

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-7
 18.2 List of Parameters
18.2.1 Operation Parameters
Operation Mode Menu (Menu: MODE)
Parameter Display Initial
Name Setting range
symbol level value
ON: Pause
Pause/cancel
OFF: Cancel release (Program
HOLD release of program EASY OFF
operation restart)
operation
Display during program operation.
OFF: -
Display during program operation.
Advance of
ADV EASY Set as “ADV = ON” to advance from OFF
segment
the current segment to the next
segment.
RESET: Stop of program operation
PROG: Start of program operation
MODE Operation mode EASY RESET
LOCAL: Start of local-mode operation
REM: Start of remote-mode operation
AUTO: Automatic mode
A.M AUTO/MAN switch EASY MAN
MAN: Manual mode
LOCAL(LSP)/CAS LSP: Local (LSP)
L.C EASY CAS
switch CAS: Cascade
Program pattern 0: Not select program pattern
PTNO. EASY 0
number selection 1 to 30
1 to 99
Start-of-program
The setting value returns to “1” when
SST segment EASY 1
the program operation (PROG)
number
changes into RESET, LOCAL, or REM.
1: Normal, 2: Twice, 5: Five times, 10:
Ten times, 20: Twenty times
* Use this function when checking
Fast-forwarding of the program pattern setting. Only
P.FWD EASY 1
program operation Segment time and Time event can
be faster.
* The operation returns to the normal
speed after fast-forwarding.
OFF: Disable
1 to 8: Perform auto-tuning. Tuning
result is stored in the specified
AT Auto-tuning switch EASY OFF
numbered PID.
R: Tuning result is stored in the PID for
reference deviation.
The PID group number being selected
is displayed. (display only)
PID PID number EASY 1
1 to 8, R: PID group for reference
deviation
In Cascade control, the following operation modes are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2
lamp is lit)
• Operation mode: A.M, AT, PID

18-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

SELECT Parameter Menu (Menu: CS)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
CS10 to SELECT parameter Setting range of a registered
EASY -
CS19 10 to 19 parameter.

Program Pattern Setting Menu (Menu: PROG>PTNO. (=01 to 30) > SEGNO. (=00))
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Starting target 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
SSP EASY P.RL
setpoint (EU) (Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
SSP: Program operation begins
with the starting target setpoint.
RAMP: Ramp-prioritized PV start
TIME: Time-prioritized PV start
STC Start code EASY LSP: Local-mode start SSP
RSP: Remote-mode start
* STC=TIME cannot be selected
when the parameter SEG.T is
TM.RT.
WT.SW1 to Wait function ON/ OFF: Disable
STD OFF
WT.SW5 OFF 1 to 5 ON: Enable
WZ.UP1 to Upper-side wait 0.5% of PV
STD
WZ.UP5 zone 1 to 5 input range
0.0 to 10.0% of PV input range (EU)
WZ.LO1 to Lower-side wait 0.5% of PV
STD
WZ.LO5 zone 1 to 5 input range
OFF: No function
0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or
“minute.second”)
WT.TM1 to * Available only for the wait time
Wait time 1 to 5 STD OFF
WT.TM5 at the segment switching.
* Use the parameter TMU to set
the time unit. (Common in the
instrument.)
0 to 999, CONT (The controller
Number of repeat indefinitely repeats the segment
R.CYCL STD 0
cycles specified by the R.STRT and
R.END parameters.)
Repeat cycle start
R.STRT STD 1
segment number 1 to 99
Repeat cycle end 1 ≤ R.STRT ≤ R.END ≤ 99
R.END STD 1
segment number
When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is also
displayed for the parameter SSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)
18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-9
18.2 List of Parameters

Program Pattern Setting Menu (Menu: PROG>PTNO. (=01 to 30) > SEGNO. (=01 to
99))
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Final target 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range (EU)
TSP EASY P.RL
setpoint (Setting range: P.RL to P.RH)
-: Unregistered
0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or “minute.
second”)
* Setting available for the parameter
Segment time SEG.T=TIME.
TIME EASY -
setting * Use the parameter TMU to set
the time unit. (Common in the
instrument.)
* If the setting is 0.00, TSP changes in
stepwise after one control period.
-: Unregistered
Ramp: 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
span (EUS) / 1 hour or 1 minute
Soak: 0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or
“minute.second”)
* Setting available for the parameter
SEG.T=TM.RT.
Segment
* Use the parameter TMU to set
TM.RT ramp-rate EASY -
the time unit. (Common in the
setting
instrument.)
Per 1 hour: TMU=HH.MM,
Per 1 minute: TMU=MM.SS
* If it is set to 0.0% of the input range
span, or the segment time 0.00, the
program moves to the next segment
after one control period.
Segment 1 to 8
S.PID PID number EASY * PID number can be set when the 1
selection parameter “ZON = 0.”
CONT: Switching for continuation
HOLD: Hold-on switching (the controller
holds the end-of-segment setpoint when
the segment is completed, to perform
control).
LOC: Local-mode switching (the controller
switches to a local setpoint when the
segment is completed).
REM: Remote-mode switching (the
controller switches to a remote setpoint
when the segment is completed).
W.SW1 to W.SW5: Wait during switching
between segments.
W.IV1 to W.IV5: Wait within a segment
JC Junction code STD CONT
interval.
W.SL1 to W.SL5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a local setpoint
when the segment is completed after
release.) (5 groups)
W.SR1 to W.SR5: Segment switching (the
controller switches to a remote setpoint
when the segment is completed after
release.) (5 groups)
PLK.1 to PLK.30: Linked to patterns 1 to 30.
INS.: Allows a segment to be added to the
end of a specified segment.
DEL.: Allows a specified segment to be
deleted.
When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is also
displayed for the parameter TSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

18-10 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Program Pattern Setting Menu (Menu: PROG>PTNO. (=01 to 30) > SEGNO. (=01 to
99))
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
OFF: Disable
(Energized)
1: PV high limit,
2: PV low limit,
3: SP high limit,
4: SP low limit,
5: Deviation high limit,
6: Deviation low limit,
7: Deviation high and low limits,
8: Deviation within high and low
limits,
9: Target SP high limit,
10: Target SP low limit,
PV.TY1 to PV event-1 to -8
EASY 11: Target SP deviation high limit, OFF
PV.TY8 type
12: Target SP deviation low limit,
13: Target SP deviation high and
low limits,
14: Target SP deviation within high
and low limits,
15: OUT high limit,
16: OUT low limit,
17: Cooling-side OUT high limit,
18: Cooling-side OUT low limit
* Add 100 for "de-energized". For
example, when the PV high limit
is de-energized, the setting is
101.
Set a display value of setpoint of
PV alarm, SP alarm, deviation
alarm, or output alarm.
PV.EV1 to PV event-1 to -8
EASY -19999 to 30000 (Set a value 0
PV.EV8 setpoint
within the input range.)
Decimal point position depends on
the input type.
TME1 to Start condition of ON: Start ON state
EASY OFF
TME16 time event 1 to 16 OFF: Start OFF state
T.ON1 to On time of time -: Unregistered
EASY -
TON16 event 1 to 16 0.01 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or
“minute.second”)
* Available only within the
segment time.
* OFF when the operation mode 18
T.OF1 to Off time of time
STD is changed to the mode except -
T.OF16 event 1 to 16
the program operation. Parameters
* Use the parameter TMU to set
the time unit. (Common in the
instrument.)
PV event and Time event are available only during the program operation.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-11
18.2 List of Parameters

Local Setting Menu (Menu: LOC)

Parameter Display Initial
Name Setting range
symbol level value
Local target 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range (EU) (Setting
LSP EASY P.RL
setpoint range: P.RL to P.RH)
PID number Set a PID group number to use.
selection 1 to 8
L.PID for local- EASY * Available only for the L.PID when ZON = 0 or 5. 1
mode * If set to “Local PID selection,” local PID is
operation selected irrespective of the operation modes.
OFF: Disable
(Energized)
1: PV high limit,
2: PV low limit,
3: SP high limit,
4: SP low limit,
5: Deviation high limit,
6: Deviation low limit,
7: Deviation high and low limits,
8: Deviation within high and low limits,
9: Target SP high limit,
Local
L.TY1 to 10: Target SP low limit,
event-1 to -8 STD OFF
L.TY8 11: Target SP deviation high limit,
type
12: Target SP deviation low limit,
13: Target SP deviation high and low limits,
14: Target SP deviation within high and low
limits,
15: OUT high limit,
16: OUT low limit,
17: Cooling-side OUT high limit,
18: Cooling-side OUT low limit
* Add 100 for "de-energized". For example,
when the PV high limit is de-energized, the
setting is 101.
Set a display value of setpoint of PV alarm, SP
Local alarm, deviation alarm, or output alarm.
L.EV1 to
event-1 to -8 STD -19999 to 30000 (Set a value within the input 0
L.EV8
setpoint range.)
Decimal point position depends on the input type
When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is also
displayed for the parameter LSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

Program Editing Menu (Menu: EDIT)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Number of remaining 0 to 300
ALL.S PRO 300
unused segments (Display only)
Pattern number Specify the numbers of program
designation for pattern to display in parameter
PTN.S PRO 0
comfirming number USE.S.
of segments 1 to 30
Can be displayed when the
parameter number specify in
Number of segments
USE.S PRO parameter PTN.S. (Display only) -
within a pattern
0: disable
1 to 99
Source-of-copying Specify the number of the source-
CPY.S pattern number PRO of-copying program pattern. (1 to 0
designation 30)
Target-of-copying
Specify the target-of-copying
CPY.D pattern number PRO 0
program pattern. (1 to 30)
designation
Program pattern Specify the number of the program
CLR.P PRO 0
clearance pattern to be cleared. (1 to 30)

18-12 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Alarm Setpoint Setting Menu (Menu: AL)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
These alarms work irrespective of
the operation mode.
Set a display value of setpoint of
PV alarm, SP alarm, deviation
Alarm-1 to -8 alarm, output alarm, or velocity
A1 to A8 EASY 0
setpoint alarm.
-19999 to 30000 (Set a value
within the input range.)
Decimal point position depends on
the input type.
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: A1 to A8

SP-related Setting Menu (Menu: SPS)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
RSP: Via remote (aux. analog)
Remote input
RMS STD input RSP
method
COM: Via communication
RFL Remote input filter STD OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF
RT Remote input ratio STD 0.001 to 9.999 1.000
0.0 % of PV
-100.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
RBS Remote input bias STD input range
span (EUS)
span
OFF, ON
Tracking is performed when the
SP tracking mode changes from Program
SPT STD OFF
selection or Remote to Local. (The local
setpoint keeps track of the remote
setpoint.)
0.00 to 999.59 (“hour.minute” or
“minute.second” (common use of
Starting time of
S.TM STD instrument) 0.00
program operation
* Use the parameter TMU to set
the time unit.
OFF: Not cleared.
ON: Cleared. (Set the program
No. before restart program
Program pattern operation)
PNC
number clearance
STD
* The controller resets (clears) the
OFF
18
program pattern number on the
operating display to “0” at the
end of program operation. Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-13
18.2 List of Parameters

Alarm Function Setting Menu (Menu: ALRM)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
The hysteresis setpoint of PV event or
Local event is set to the parcentage of
EHY1 to Event-1 to -8
STD 0.0 to 100.0%. 0
EHY8 hysteresis
The setting value (%) is for the PV input
range span or output span.
These alarms work irrespective of the
operation mode.
Set a 5-digit value in the following order.
[Alarm type: 2 digits (see below)] +
[Without (0) or With (1) Stand-by action]
+ [Energized (0) or De-energized (1)] +
[Latch action (0/1/2/3/4)]
For latch action, see chapter 11.

Alarm type: 2 digits

00: Disable
01: PV high limit
AL1, AL3: PV
02: PV low limit
high limit (01)
03: SP high limit
Without Stand-
04: SP low limit
by action (0)
05: Deviation high limit
Energized (0)
06: Deviation low limit
Latch action
07: Deviation high and low limits
(0)
08: Deviation within high and low limits
09: Target SP high limit
AL2, AL4: PV
10: Target SP low limit
Alarm-1 to -8 low limit (02)
AL1 to AL8 EASY 11: Target SP deviation high limit
type Without Stand-
12: Target SP deviation low limit
by action (0)
13: Target SP deviation high and low limits
Energized (0)
14: Target SP deviation within high and
Latch action
low limits
(0)
15: OUT high limit
16: OUT low limit
AL5 to AL8:
17: Cooling-side OUT high limit
not displayed
18: Cooling-side OUT low limit
for factory
19: Analog input PV high limit
default
20: Analog input PV low limit
21: Analog input RSP high limit
22: Analog input RSP low limit
23: Analog input AIN2 high limit
24: Analog input AIN2 low limit
25: Analog input AIN4 high limit
26: Analog input AIN4 low limit
27: Feedback input high limit
28: Feedback input low limit
29: PV velocity
30: Fault diagnosis
31: FAIL
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: AL1 to AL8

18-14 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Alarm Function Setting Menu (Menu: ALRM) (Continued from previous page)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
PV velocity
VT1 to VT8 alarm time EASY 0.01 to 99.59 (minute.second) 1.00
setpoint 1 to 8
Set a display value of setpoint of
hysteresis.
-19999 to 30000 (Set a value within the
input range.)
Alarm-1 to -8
HY1 to HY8 EASY Decimal point position depends on the 10
hysteresis
input type.
When the decimal point position for the
input type is set to "1", the initial value
of the hysteresis is "1.0".
DYN1 to Alarm-1 to -8
STD 0.00
DYN8 On-delay timer
0.00 to 99.59 (minute.second)
DYF1 to Alarm-1 to -8
PRO 0.00
DYF8 Off-delay timer
0: Always active
AMD Alarm mode STD 1: Not active in RESET mode 0
2: Not active in RESET or MAN mode
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: VT1 to VT8 HY1 to HY8, DYN1 to DYN8, DYF1 to DYF8, AMD

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-15
18.2 List of Parameters

PV-related Setting Menu (Menu: PVS)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.0 % of PV
-100.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
BS PV input bias EASY input range
span (EUS)
span
FL PV input filter EASY OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
Parameter: BS, FL

PID Setting Menu (Menu: PID)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.0 to 999.9%
Proportional band
When 0.0% is set, it operates
Heating-side
as 0.1%.
P proportional band EASY 5.0%
Heating-side ON/OFF control
(in Heating/cooling
applies when 0.0% in Heating/
control)
cooling control
Integral time
Heating-side integral OFF: Disable
I EASY 240 s
time (in Heating/ 1 to 6000 s
cooling control)
Derivative time
Heating-side derivative OFF: Disable
D EASY 60 s
time (in Heating/ 1 to 6000 s
cooling control)
Control output high
limit
-4.9 to 105.0%, (OL<OH)
Heating-side control
OH EASY In Heating/cooling control: 0.1 100.0%
output high limit
to 105.0% (OL<OH)
(in Heating/cooling
control)
Control output low limit
-5.0 to 104.9%, (OL<OH), SD:
Heating-side control
Tight shut
OL output low limit (in EASY 0.0%
In Heating/cooling control: 0.0
Heating/cooling
to 104.9% (OL<OH)
control)
Enabled when integral time is
OFF.
The manual reset value
MR Manual reset EASY 50.0%
equals the output value when
PV = SP.
-5.0 to 105.0%
Hysteresis (in ON/OFF In ON/OFF control:
In ON/OFF control: 0.0 to
control, or Position 0.5 % of PV input
100.0% of PV input range
proportional control) range span
span (EUS)
HYS Heating-side ON/OFF EASY In Heating/cooling
In Heating/cooling control or
control hysteresis control or Position
Position proportional control:
(in Heating/cooling proportional
0.0 to 100.0%
control) control: 0.5 %
Upper-side hysteresis 0.5 % of PV input
HY.UP EASY
(in ON/OFF control) 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range span
Lower-side hysteresis range span (EUS) 0.5 % of PV input
HY.LO EASY
(in ON/OFF control) range span
Direct/reverse action RVS: Reverse action, DIR:
DR STD RVS
switch Direct action
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: P, I, D, OH, OL, MR, HYS, DR

18-16 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

PID Setting Menu (Menu: PID) (Continued from previous page)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.0 to 999.9%
Cooling-side (Cooling-side ON/OFF control
Pc EASY 5.0%
proportional band applies when 0.0% in Heating/
cooling control)
Cooling-side OFF: Disable
Ic EASY 240 s
integral time 1 to 6000 s
Cooling-side OFF: Disable
Dc EASY 60 s
derivative time 1 to 6000 s
Cooling-side control
OHc EASY 0.1 to 105.0%, (OLc<OHc) 100.0%
output high limit
Cooling-side control
OLc EASY 0.0 to 104.9%, (OLc<OHc) 0.0%
output low limit
Cooling-side
HYSc ON/OFF control EASY 0.0 to 100.0% 0.5%
hysteresis
Output dead band In Heating/cooling control: -100.0
(in Heating/cooling to 50.0%
DB EASY 3.0%
control or Position In Position proportional control: 1.0
proportional control) to 10.0%
-5.0 to 105.0%
Preset output
In RESET mode, fixed control
Heating-side preset
PO EASY output can be generated. In 0.0%
output (in Heating/
Position proportional control, Valve
cooling control)
opening can be set
-5.0 to 105.0%
Cooling-side preset
POc EASY In RESET mode, cooling-side fixed 0.0%
output
control output can be generated.
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: Pc, Ic, Dc, OHc, OLc, HYSc, DB, PO, POc

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-17
18.2 List of Parameters

Tuning Menu (Menu: TUNE)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
OFF: Disable
1: Overshoot suppressing function
(normal mode)
2: Hunting suppressing function
(stable mode)
Enables to answer the wider
characteristic changes
SC Super function EASY compared with response mode. OFF
3: Hunting suppressing function
(response mode)
Enables quick follow-up and
short converging time of PV for
the changed SP.
4: Overshoot suppressing function
(strong suppressing mode)
0: Normal
AT.TY Auto-tuning type STD 0
1: Stability
Output high limit in
AT.OH PRO 100.0%
auto-tuning -5.0 to 105.0% (Disabled in
Output low limit in Heating/cooling control)
AT.OL PRO 0.0%
auto-tuning
0.0 % of PV
SP bias in auto- -100.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
AT.BS PRO input range
tuning span (EUS)
span
Non-linear control OFF, 0.0%+1digit to 50.0% of PV
GW PRO OFF
gap width input range span (EUS)
Non-linear control
GG PRO 0.001 to 1.000 1.000
gain
Anti-reset windup
AR (excess integration STD AUTO, 50.0 to 200.0% AUTO
prevention)
Output velocity OFF: Disable
OPR STD OFF
limiter 0.1 to 100.0%/s
OFF: Disable output limiter in MAN
Output limiter mode
OLMT PRO ON
switch ON: Enable output limiter in MAN
mode
OFF: Hold the control output in
AUTO mode (bumpless)
1: Use manual preset output 1
(output bump)
2: Use manual preset output 2
Manual preset
(output bump)
MPON output number STD OFF
3: Use manual preset output 3
selection
(output bump)
4: Use manual preset output 4
(output bump)
5: Use manual preset output 5
(output bump)
-5.0 to 105.0%
MPO1 to Manual preset
STD * However, output is limited to the 0.0%
MPO5 output 1 to 5
output high limit and low limit.
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: SC, AT.TY, AT.OH, AT.OL, AT.BS, GW, GG, AR, OPR, OLMT, MPON, MPO1 to MPO5

18-18 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Zone Control Menu (Menu: ZONE)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range
(EU)
(RP1 ≤ RP2 ≤ RP3 ≤ RP4 ≤ RP5 ≤
RP6 ≤ RP7)
Reference point 1 100.0 % of PV
RP1 to RP7 STD * Set reference points at which
to 7 input range
switching is carried out between
groups of PID constants
according to the given
temperature zone.
0.0 to 10.0% of PV input range
0.5 % of PV
Zone PID switching span (EUS)
RHY STD input range
hysteresis * Hysteresis can be set for
span
switching at a reference point.
OFF: Disable
0.0 + 1 digit to 100.0% of PV input
range span (EUS)
RDV Reference deviation STD * Set a deviation from SP. The PID OFF
for reference deviation is used if
there is a larger deviation than
the preset reference deviation.
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: RP1 to RP7, RHY, RDV

P Parameter Menu (Menu: PPAR)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
-19999 to 30000 (Set a decimal
P01 to P10
P01 to P10 STD point position using LL50A 0
parameter
Parameter Setting Software.)

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-19
18.2 List of Parameters

10-segment Linearizer Setting Menu (Menu: PYS1 to PYS4)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
OFF: Disable
PV: PV analog input
RSP: RSP analog input
Group 1, 2:
AIN2: AIN2 analog input
10-segment STD PV
PYS AIN4: AIN4 analog input
linearizer selection Group 3, 4: (CTLM: SGL)
PVIN: PV input
PRO
OUT: OUT analog output
OUT2: OUT2 analog output
RET: RET analog output
Group 1, 2:
10-segment
STD -66.7 to 105.0% of input range (EU)
A1 to A11 linearizer input 1 to 0.0%
Group 3, 4: Output linearizer: -5.0 to 105.0%
11
PRO
10-segment linearizer bias: -66.7
to 105.0% of input range span
Group 1, 2:
10-segment (EUS)
STD
B1 to B11 linearizer output 1 10-segment linearizer 0.0%
Group 3, 4:
to 11 approximation: -66.7 to 105.0%
PRO
of input range (EU)
Output linearizer: -5.0 to 105.0%
Group 1, 2:
0: 10-segment linearizer bias
10-segment STD
PMD 1: 10-segment linearizer 0
linearizer mode Group 3, 4:
approximation
PRO
10-segment linearizer parameters are four groups, the group number (1 to 4) is displayed on Group
display.

Initial value of each control mode

Control mode Group-1 PYS Goup-2 PYS Group-3 and -4 PYS
Single-loop control PV OFF OFF
Cascade primary-loop control PV OFF OFF
Cascade control PV RSP OFF
Loop control with PV switching PV OFF OFF
Loop control with PV auto-selector PVIN OFF OFF

18-20 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

18.2.2 Setup Parameters

Control Function Setting Menu (Menu: CTL)
Parameter Display Initial
Name Setting range
symbol level value
SGL: Single-loop control
CAS1: Cascade primary-loop control
CAS: Cascade control
PVSW: Loop control with PV switching
CTLM Control mode STD PVSEL: Loop control with PV auto- SGL
selector

* When using the ladder program, the

control mode cannot be changed.
PID: PID control
ONOF: ON/OFF control (1 point of
hysteresis)
CNT Control type EASY PID
ONOF2: ON/OFF control (2 points of
hysteresis)
H/C: Heating/cooling control
0: Standard PID control mode
ALG PID control mode PRO 0
1: Fixed-point control mode
ALNO. Number of alarms PRO 1 to 8 4
0: Segment PID selection
1: Zone PID selection (selection by PV)
2: Zone PID selection (selection by
target SP)
4: Zone PID selection (selection by SP)
5: Local PID selection
* If set to “Segment PID selection,”
allows PID constants to be selected
ZON Zone PID selection STD 1
for each segments.
* If set to “Zone PID selection,”
automatically selects PID constants
according to the range set in the
Reference point.
* If set to “Local PID selection,” local
PID is selected irrespective of the
operation modes.
TIME: Segment time setting
Segment setting TM.RT: Segment ramp-rate setting
SEG.T EASY TIME
method Note: A change of setting deletes a
program pattern.
HH.MM: hour.minute
TMU Program time unit EASY
MM.SS: minute.second
HH.MM
18
OFF: Not used.
ON: used.
Parameters
* The controller can serve as a
Program pattern-2
PT2.G STD program pattern generator. OFF
retransmission
* Retransmission output types (RTS,
O1RS, or O2RS) need to be set to
SP2.
Input sampling
100: 100 ms
SMP period (control STD 200
200: 200 ms
period)
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: CNT, ALG, ALNO.
The parameter CNT of Loop 2 displays PID and H/C.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-21
18.2 List of Parameters

PV Input Setting Menu (Menu: PV)

Parameter Display Initial
Name Setting range
symbol level value
OFF: Disable
K1: -270.0 to 1370.0 (°C) / -450.0 to 2500.0 (°F)
K2: -270.0 to 1000.0 (°C) / -450.0 to 2300.0 (°F)
K3: -200.0 to 500.0 (°C) / -200.0 to 1000.0 (°F)
J: -200.0 to 1200.0 (°C) / -300.0 to 2300.0 (°F)
T1: -270.0 to 400.0 (°C) / -450.0 to 750.0 (°F)
T2: 0.0 to 400.0 (°C) / -200.0 to 750.0 (°F)
B: 0.0 to 1800.0 (°C) / 32 to 3300 (°F)
S: 0.0 to 1700.0 (°C) / 32 to 3100 (°F)
R: 0.0 to 1700.0 (°C) / 32 to 3100 (°F)
N: -200.0 to 1300.0 (°C) / -300.0 to 2400.0 (°F)
E: -270.0 to 1000.0 (°C) / -450.0 to 1800.0 (°F)
L: -200.0 to 900.0 (°C) / -300.0 to 1600.0 (°F)
U1: -200.0 to 400.0 (°C) / -300.0 to 750.0 (°F)
U2: 0.0 to 400.0 (°C) / -200.0 to 1000.0 (°F)
W: 0.0 to 2300.0 (°C) / 32 to 4200 (°F)
PL2: 0.0 to 1390.0 (°C) / 32.0 to 2500.0 (°F)
P2040: 0.0 to 1900.0 (°C) / 32 to 3400 (°F)
IN PV input type EASY WRE: 0.0 to 2000.0 (°C) / 32 to 3600 (°F) OFF
JPT1: -200.0 to 500.0 (°C) / -300.0 to 1000.0 (°F)
JPT2: -150.00 to 150.00 (°C) / -200.0 to 300.0 (°F)
PT1: -200.0 to 850.0 (°C) / -300.0 to 1560.0 (°F)
PT2: -200.0 to 500.0 (°C) / -300.0 to 1000.0 (°F)
PT3: -150.00 to 150.00 (°C) / -200.0 to 300.0 (°F)
0.4-2V: 0.400 to 2.000 V
1-5V: 1.000 to 5.000 V
4-20: 4.00 to 20.00 mA
0-2V: 0.000 to 2.000 V
0-10V: 0.00 to 10.00 V
0-20: 0.00 to 20.00 mA
-1020: -10.00 to 20.00 mV
0-100: 0.0 to 100.0 mV

Note:
W: W-5% Re/W-26% Re (Hoskins Mfg. Co.),
ASTM E988
WRE: W97Re3-W75Re25
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
-: No unit
UNIT PV input unit EASY C
--: No unit
---: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
Maximum Depends on the input type. Depends
RH value of PV EASY - For temperature input - on the
input range Set the temperature range that is actually input type
controlled. (RL<RH)
- For voltage / current input -
Set the range of a voltage / current signal
Minimum that is applied. Depends
RL value of PV EASY The scale across which the voltage / current on the
input range signal is actually controlled should be set input type
using the maximum value of input scale (SH)
and minimum value of input scale (SL).
(Input is always 0% when RL = RH.)

18-22 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

PV Input Setting Menu (Menu: PV) (Continued from previous page)

Parameter Display Initial
Name Setting range
symbol level value
0: No decimal place
PV input scale 1: One decimal place Depends
SDP decimal point EASY 2: Two decimal places on the
position 3: Three decimal places input type
4: Four decimal places
Maximum Depends
SH value of PV EASY on the
input scale -19999 to 30000, (SL<SH), | SH - SL | ≤ input type
Minimum value 30000 Depends
SL of PV input EASY on the
scale input type
OFF: Disable Depends
PV input
BSL STD UP: Upscale on the
burnout action
DOWN: Downscale input type
PV input
reference OFF: RJC OFF
RJC PRO ON
junction ON: RJC ON
compensation
PV input
ERJC external RJC PRO -10.0 to 60.0 (°C) 0.0
setpoint
0.0 % of
PV analog -100.0 to 100.0% of PV input range span PV input
A.BS PRO
input bias (EUS) range
span
PV analog
A.FL PRO OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF
input filter
OFF: No square root extraction.
PV analog 1: Compute the square root. (The slope
A.SR input square PRO equals “1.”) OFF
root extraction 2: Compute the square root. (The slope
equals “0.”)
PV analog
A.LC input low signal PRO 0.0 to 5.0% 1.0%
cutoff

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-23
18.2 List of Parameters

RSP Setting Menu (Menu: RSP) (E1 terminal area)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.4-2V: 0.400 to 2.000 V
1-5V: 1.000 to 5.000 V
0-2V: 0.000 to 2.000 V
RSP remote input
IN EASY 0-10V: 0.00 to 10.00 V 1-5V
type
0-125: 0.000 to 1.250 V
For option /DR, RSP remote input
type is same as PV input type.
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
RSP remote input -: No unit
UNIT EASY C
unit --: No unit
---: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
Maximum value of Depends on the input type.
Depends on
RH RSP remote input EASY - For temperature input (with /DR
the input type
range option) -
Set the temperature range that
is actually controlled. (RL<RH)
- For voltage / current (with /DR
option) input -
Set the range of a voltage /
current signal that is applied.
Minimum value of
The scale across which the Depends on
RL RSP remote input EASY
voltage / current signal is the input type
range
actually controlled should be
set using the maximum value of
input scale (SH) and minimum
value of input scale (SL).
(Input is always 0% when RL =
RH.)
0: No decimal place
RSP remote input 1: One decimal place
Depends on
SDP scale decimal point EASY 2: Two decimal places
the input type
position 3: Three decimal places
4: Four decimal places
Maximum value of
Depends on
SH RSP remote input EASY
the input type
scale -19999 to 30000, (SL<SH), | SH -
Minimum value of SL | ≤ 30000
Depends on
SL RSP remote input EASY
the input type
scale
OFF: Disable
RSP remote input Depends on
BSL STD UP: Upscale
burnout action the input type
DOWN: Downscale
RSP remote input
reference junction OFF: RJC OFF
RJC PRO ON
compensation (for ON: RJC ON
/DR option)
RSP remote input
external RJC
ERJC PRO -10.0 to 60.0 (°C) 0.0
setpoint (for /DR
option)
3-W: 3-wire system
RTD.S RTD wiring system STD 3-W
4-W: 4-wire system
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1) is displayed on Group display.

18-24 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

RSP Input Setting Menu (Menu: RSP) (Continued from previous page)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.0 % of RSP
RSP aux. analog -100.0 to 100.0% of RSP input
A.BS PRO input range
input bias range span (EUS)
span
RSP aux. analog
A.FL PRO OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF
input filter
OFF: No square root extraction.
RSP aux. analog 1: Compute the square root. (The
A.SR input square root PRO slope equals “1.”) OFF
extraction 2: Compute the square root. (The
slope equals “0.”)
RSP aux. analog
A.LC input low signal PRO 0.0 to 5.0% 1.0%
cutoff
0: The assigned function is enabled
when the contact is closed.
DI6.D DI16 contact type PRO 0
1: The assigned function is enabled
when the contact is opened.
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1) is displayed on Group display.

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-25
18.2 List of Parameters

AIN2 Aux. Analog Input Setting Menu (Menu: AIN2) (E2 terminal area)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.4-2V: 0.400 to 2.000 V
1-5V: 1.000 to 5.000 V
AIN2 aux. analog
IN EASY 0-2V: 0.000 to 2.000 V 1-5V
input type
0-10V: 0.00 to 10.00 V
0-125: 0.000 to 1.250 V
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
AIN2 aux. analog -: No unit
UNIT EASY C
input unit --: No unit
---: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
Maximum value of Depends on the input type.
Depends on
RH AIN2 aux. analog EASY Set the range of a voltage signal
the input type
input range that is applied.
The scale across which the voltage
signal is actually controlled should
Minimum value of be set using the maximum value
Depends on
RL AIN2 aux. analog EASY of input scale (SH) and minimum
the input type
input range value of input scale (SL).
(Input is always 0% when RL =
RH.)
0: No decimal place
AIN2 aux. analog 1: One decimal place
Depends on
SDP input scale decimal EASY 2: Two decimal places
the input type
point position 3: Three decimal places
4: Four decimal places
Maximum value of
Depends on
SH AIN2 aux. analog EASY
the input type
input scale -19999 to 30000, (SL<SH), | SH -
Minimum value of SL | ≤ 30000
Depends on
SL AIN2 aux. analog EASY
the input type
input scale
OFF: Disable
AIN2 aux. analog Depends on
BSL STD UP: Upscale
input burnout action the input type
DOWN: Downscale
0.0 % of AIN2
AIN2 aux. analog -100.0 to 100.0% of AIN2 input
A.BS PRO input range
input bias range span (EUS)
span
AIN2 aux. analog
A.FL PRO OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF
input filter
OFF: No square root extraction.
AIN2 aux. analog 1: Compute the square root. (The
A.SR input square root PRO slope equals “1.”) OFF
extraction 2: Compute the square root. (The
slope equals “0.”)
AIN2 aux. analog
A.LC input low signal PRO 0.0 to 5.0% 1.0%
cutoff
0: The assigned function is enabled
when the contact is closed.
DI6.D DI26 contact type PRO 0
1: The assigned function is enabled
when the contact is opened.
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E2) is displayed on Group display.

18-26 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

AIN4 Aux. Analog Input Setting Menu (Menu: AIN4) (E4 terminal area)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0.4-2V: 0.400 to 2.000 V
1-5V: 1.000 to 5.000 V
AIN4 aux. analog
IN EASY 0-2V: 0.000 to 2.000 V 1-5V
input type
0-10V: 0.00 to 10.00 V
0-125: 0.000 to 1.250 V
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
AIN4 aux. analog -: No unit
UNIT EASY C
input unit --: No unit
---: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
Maximum value of Depends on the input type.
Depends on
RH AIN4 aux. analog EASY Set the range of a voltage signal
the input type
input range that is applied.
The scale across which the voltage
signal is actually controlled should
Minimum value of be set using the maximum value
Depends on
RL AIN4 aux. analog EASY of input scale (SH) and minimum
the input type
input range value of input scale (SL).
(Input is always 0% when RL =
RH.)
0: No decimal place
AIN4 aux. analog 1: One decimal place
Depends on
SDP input scale decimal EASY 2: Two decimal places
the input type
point position 3: Three decimal places
4: Four decimal places
Maximum value of
Depends on
SH AIN4 aux. analog EASY
the input type
input scale -19999 to 30000, (SL<SH), | SH -
Minimum value of SL | ≤ 30000
Depends on
SL AIN4 aux. analog EASY
the input type
input scale
OFF: Disable
AIN4 aux. analog Depends on
BSL STD UP: Upscale
input burnout action the input type
DOWN: Downscale
0.0 % of AIN4
AIN4 aux. analog -100.0 to 100.0% of AIN4 input
A.BS PRO input range
input bias range span (EUS)
span
AIN4 aux. analog
A.FL PRO OFF, 1 to 120 s OFF
input filter
OFF: No square root extraction.

A.SR
AIN4 aux. analog
input square root PRO
1: Compute the square root. (The
slope equals “1.”) OFF
18
extraction 2: Compute the square root. (The
slope equals “0.”) Parameters
AIN4 aux. analog
A.LC input low signal PRO 0.0 to 5.0% 1.0%
cutoff
0: The assigned function is enabled
when the contact is closed.
DI6.D DI46 contact type PRO 0
1: The assigned function is enabled
when the contact is opened.
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E4) is displayed on Group display.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-27
18.2 List of Parameters

Input Range/SP Limiter/Input Switch/Input Auto-selector Setting Menu (Menu: MPV)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
-: No unit
C: Degree Celsius
Control PV input -: No unit Same as PV
P.UNI STD
unit --: No unit input unit
---: No unit
F: Degree Fahrenheit
0: No decimal place
Control PV input 1: One decimal place
P.DP decimal point STD 2: Two decimal places 1
position 3: Three decimal places
4: Four decimal places
Maximum value of
Depends on
P.RH control PV input STD
the input type
range -19999 to 30000, (P.RL<P.RH), |
Minimum value of P.RH - P.RL | ≤ 30000
Depends on
P.RL control PV input STD
the input type
range
Input switching PV
100.0 % of
high limit (in Loop
PV.HL STD control PV
control with PV
input range
switching) 0.0 to 100.0% of control PV input
Input switching PV range (EU), (PV.HL>PV.LL)
0.0 % of
low limit (in Loop
PV.LL STD control PV
control with PV
input range
switching)
0: Switch based on low limit of
temperature range
Input switching
1: Switch using the parameter
action (in Loop
PV.2C STD PV.HL 0
control with PV
2: Switch using DI
switching)
3: Switch based on high limit of
temperature range
0: Max. value
Input computation
1: Min. value
selection (in Loop
PV.AS STD 2: Ave. value 0
control with PV
3: Input 1 - Input 2
auto-selector)
4: Input 2 - Input 1
Number of inputs (in 2: Use Input 1 and Input 2
PV.NU Loop control with STD 3: Use Input 1, Input 2, and Input 3 2
PV auto-selector) 4: Use 4 inputs
0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range 100.0 % of PV
SPH SP high limit STD
(EU), (SPL<SPH) input range
Place limits on the program
setpoints or the local setpoints
when the controller is in program
operation.
* Places the limit on the program
setpoint, local setpoint, or 0.0 % of PV
SPL SP low limit STD
remote setpoint during program input range
operation.
* When LP2 lamp is on, SPH
and SPL limit the program
setpoint for program pattern 2
retransmission.
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: P.UNI, P.DP, P.RH, P.RL, SPH, SPL

18-28 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Output Setting Menu (Menu: OUT)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Control output or Heating-side
control output (Lower two digits)
00: OFF
01: OUT terminals (voltage pulse)
02: OUT terminals (current)
03: OUT terminals (relay/triac)
04: OUT2 terminals (voltage pulse)
Standard type:
05: OUT2 terminals (current)
00.03
06: OUT2 terminals (relay/triac)
Output type
OT EASY
selection Heating/
Cooling-side control output (Upper
cooling type:
two digits)
06.03
00: OFF
01: OUT terminals (voltage pulse)
02: OUT terminals (current)
03: OUT terminals (relay/triac)
04: OUT2 terminals (voltage pulse)
05: OUT2 terminals (current)
06: OUT2 terminals (relay/triac)
Control output cycle
time
Heating-side control
CT EASY 30.0 s
output cycle time
0.5 to 1000.0 s
(in Heating/cooling
control)
Cooling-side control
CTc EASY 30.0 s
output cycle time
Automatic valve OFF: Stop automatic adjustment
V.AT EASY OFF
position adjustment ON: Start automatic adjustment
Setting V.RS to ON resets the
Valve position valve adjustment settings and
V.RS EASY OFF
setting reset causes the indication “V.RS” to
blink.
Pressing the SET/ENTER key
with valve position set to the fully-
Fully-closed valve closed position by Down arrow
V.L EASY -
position setting key causes the adjusted value to
be stored. When V.L adjustment is
complete, V.L stops blinking.
Pressing the SET/ENTER key
with valve position set to the fully-
Fully-open valve opened position by Up arrow key
V.H
position setting
EASY
causes the adjusted value to be
- 18
stored. When V.H adjustment is
complete, V.H stops blinking. Parameters
TR.T Valve traveling time STD 5 to 300 s 60 s
0: Valve position feedback type
1: Valve position feedback type
Valve adjusting (moves to the estimating type if
V.MOD STD 0
mode a feedback input error or break
occurs.)
2: Valve position estimating type

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-29
18.2 List of Parameters

Output Setting Menu (Menu: OUT) (Continued from previous page)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
OFF: Disable
PV1: PV
SP1: SP
OUT1: OUT (Valve opening: 0 to
100 % in Position proportional
control)
LPS: 15 V DC loop power supply
PV2: Loop-2 PV
SP2: Loop-2 SP
OUT2: Loop-2 OUT
TSP1: Target SP
HOUT1: Heating-side OUT
Retransmission
RTS EASY COUT1: Cooling-side OUT PV1
output type of RET
MV1: Position proportional output
internal computed value)
TSP2: Loop-2 target SP
HOUT2: Loop-2 heating-side OUT
COUT2: Loop-2 cooling-side OUT
MV2: Loop-2 position proportional
output (internal computed
value)
PV: PV terminals analog input
RSP: RSP terminals analog input
AIN2: AIN2 terminals analog input
AIN4: AIN4 terminals analog input
Maximum value When RTS = PV1, SP1, PV2, SP2,
100 % of PV
RTH of retransmission STD TSP1, TSP2, PV, RSP, AIN2, or
input range
output scale of RET AIN4,
RTL + 1 digit to 30000
-19999 to RTH - 1 digit

Decimal point position:

When RTS=PV1, SP1, or TSP1,
decimal point position is same
as that of PV input.
When RTS=PV2, SP2, or TSP2,
decimal point position is same
as that of RSP input.
Minimum value
When RTS=PV, decimal point 0 % of PV
RTL of retransmission STD
position is same as that of PV input range
output scale of RET
input scale.
When RTS=RSP, decimal point
position is same as that of RSP
input scale.
When RTS=AIN2, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN2
scale.
When RTS=AIN4, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN4
scale.

18-30 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Output Setting Menu (Menu: OUT) (Continued from previous page)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Retransmission
O1RS output type of OUT STD Same as RTS OFF
current output
Maximum value When O1RS = PV1, SP1, PV2,
of retransmission SP2, TSP1, TSP2, PV, RSP, AIN2,
O1RH STD -
output scale of OUT or AIN4,
current output O1RL + 1 digit to 30000
-19999 to O1RH - 1 digit

Decimal point position:

When O1RS=PV1, SP1, or TSP1,
decimal point position is same
as that of PV input.
When O1RS =PV2, SP2, or TSP2,
decimal point position is same
as that of RSP input.
Minimum value
When O1RS =PV, decimal point
of retransmission
O1RL STD position is same as that of PV -
output scale of OUT
input scale.
current output
When O1RS =RSP, decimal point
position is same as that of RSP
input scale.
When O1RS =AIN2, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN2
scale.
When O1RS =AIN4, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN4
scale.
Retransmission
O2RS output type of OUT2 STD Same as RTS OFF
current output
Maximum value When O2RS = PV1, SP1, PV2,
of retransmission SP2, TSP1, TSP2, PV, RSP, AIN2,
O2RH output scale of STD or AIN4, -
OUT2 current O2RL + 1 digit to 30000
output -19999 to O2RH - 1 digit

Decimal point position:

When O2RS=PV1, SP1, or TSP1,
decimal point position is same
as that of PV input.
When O2RS =PV2, SP2, or TSP2,
decimal point position is same 18
as that of RSP input.
Minimum value
When O2RS =PV, decimal point
of retransmission Parameters
position is same as that of PV
O2RL output scale of STD -
input scale.
OUT2 current
When O2RS =RSP, decimal point
output
position is same as that of RSP
input scale.
When O2RS =AIN2, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN2
scale.
When O2RS =AIN4, decimal point
position is same as that of AIN4
scale.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-31
18.2 List of Parameters

Output Setting Menu (Menu: OUT) (Continued from previous page)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
100% segmental
OU.H point of OUT PRO 100.0%
current output
0% segmental point
OU.L of OUT current PRO 0.0%
output
100% segmental
OU2.H point of OUT2 PRO 100.0%
current output
-100.0 to 200.0%
0% segmental point
OU2.L of OUT2 current PRO 0.0%
output
100% segmental
RET.H point of RET current PRO 100.0%
output
0% segmental point
RET.L of RET current PRO 0.0%
output
OUT current output
OU.A PRO 4-20
range 4-20: 4 to 20 mA
OUT2 current 0-20: 0 to 20 mA
OU2.A PRO 4-20
output range 20-4: 20 to 4 mA
RET current output 20-0: 20 to 0 mA
RET.A PRO 4-20
range

Heater Break Alarm Setting Menu (Menu: HBA)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Heater break
HB1.S, 0: Heater current measurement
alarm-1, -2 function EASY 1
HB2.S 1: Heater break alarm
selection
Heater break
HB1, HB2 alarm-1, -2 current EASY OFF, 0.1 to 300.0 Arms OFF
setpoint
CT1, CT2 coil
CT1.T, CT2.T winding number EASY 1 to 3300 800
ratio
Heater break
HDN1, HDN2 alarm-1, -2 On- STD 0.00
delay timer
0.00 to 99.59 (minute.second)
Heater break
HDF1, HDF2 alarm-1, -2 Off- PRO 0.00
delay timer
CLS: When the event occurs, the
Heater break
HB1.D, contact is closed.
alarm-1, -2 contact PRO CLS
HB2.D OPN: When the event occurs, the
type
contact is opened.

18-32 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

RS-485 Communication Setting Menu (Menu: R485) (E3 and E4 terminal area)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
PCL: PC link communication
PCLSM: PC link communication
(with checksum)
LADR: Ladder communication
CO-M: Coordinated master station
PSL Protocol selection EASY MBRTU
MBASC: Modbus (ASCII)
MBRTU: Modbus (RTU)
CO-M2: Coordinated master
station (2-loop mode)
P-P: Peer-to-peer communication
600: 600 bps
1200: 1200 bps
2400: 2400 bps
4800: 4800 bps
BPS Baud rate EASY 9600: 9600 bps 19200
19200: 19.2k bps
38400: 38.4k bps (except for
communication of E4 terminal
area)
NONE: None
PRI Parity EASY EVEN: Even EVEN
ODD: Odd
STP Stop bit EASY 1: 1 bit, 2: 2 bits 1
DLN Data length EASY 7: 7 bits, 8: 8 bits 8
ADR Address EASY 1 to 99 1
Minimum response
RP.T PRO 0 to 10 (x10ms) 0
time
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E3 or E4) is displayed on Group display.
• Parameter: PSL, BPS, STP, DLN, ADR, RP.T

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-33
18.2 List of Parameters

Ethernet Communication Setting Menu (Menu: ETHR) (E3 terminal area)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
High-speed
HSR EASY OFF, 1 to 8 1
response mode
9600: 9600 bps
BPS Baud rate EASY 19200: 19.2k bps 38400
38400: 38.4k bps
NONE: None
PRI Parity EASY EVEN: Even EVEN
ODD: Odd
0 to 255
IP1 to IP4 IP address 1 to 4 EASY See left
Initial value: 192.168.1.1
0 to 255
SM1 to SM4 Subnet mask 1 to 4 EASY See left
Initial value: 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 1 0 to 255
DG1 to DG4 EASY See left
to 4 Initial value: 0.0.0.0
PRT Port number EASY 502, 1024 to 65535 502
IPAR IP access restriction EASY OFF: Disable, ON: Enable OFF
1.IP1 to Permitted IP 0 to 255
EASY See left
1.IP4 address 1-1 to 1-4 Initial value: 255.255.255.255
2.IP1 to Permitted IP 0 to 255
EASY See left
2.IP4 address 2-1 to 2-4 Initial value: 255.255.255.255
Ethernet setting
ESW EASY OFF, ON OFF
switch
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E3) is displayed on Group display.

PROFIBUS-DP Communication Setting Menu (Menu: PROF) (E3 terminal area)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
9.6K: 9.6k bps
19.2K: 19.2k bps
93.75K: 93.75k bps
187.5K: 187.5k bps
0.5M: 0.5M bps
BR Baud rate EASY 1.5M: 1.5M bps AUTO
3M: 3M bps
6M: 6M bps
12M: 12M bps
AUTO
45.45K: 45.45k bps
ADR Address EASY 0 to 125 3
9600: 9600 bps
BPS Baud rate EASY 19200: 19.2k bps 38400
38400: 38.4k bps
FILE Profile number EASY 0, 11 to 15 0
OFF
1M: 1 minute
Automatic rescan
SCAN PRO 10M: 10 minutes OFF
time
30M: 30 minutes
60M: 60 minutes
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E3) is displayed on Group display.

18-34 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

DeviceNet Communication Setting Menu (Menu: DNET) (E3 terminal area)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
125K: 125k bps
BR Baud rate EASY 250K: 250k bps 125K
500K: 500k bps
ADR Address EASY 0 to 63 63
9600: 9600 bps
BPS Baud rate EASY 19200: 19.2k bps 38400
38400: 38.4k bps
FILE Profile number EASY 0, 11 to 15 0
OFF
1M: 1 minute
Automatic rescan
SCAN PRO 10M: 10 minutes OFF
time
30M: 30 minutes
60M: 60 minutes
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E3) is displayed on Group display.

CC-Link Communication Setting Menu (Menu: CC-L) (E3 terminal area)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
156K: 156k bps
625K: 625k bps
BR Baud rate EASY 2.5M: 2.5M bps 10M
5M: 5M bps
10M: 10M bps
ADR Address EASY 1 to 64 1
9600: 9600 bps
BPS Baud rate EASY 19200: 19.2k bps 38400
38400: 38.4k bps
0, 11 to 15
FILE Profile number EASY (0, 11: Ver.1.10) (12 to 15: 0
Ver.2.00)
OFF
1M: 1 minute
Automatic rescan
SCAN PRO 10M: 10 minutes OFF
time
30M: 30 minutes
60M: 60 minutes
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E3) is displayed on Group display.

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-35
18.2 List of Parameters

Key Action Setting Menu (Menu: KEY)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
RUN key action OFF: Disable
RUN PRO PROG
setting PROG: Switch to PROG (Start of
RST key action program operation)
RST PRO RESET
setting RESET: Switch to RESET (Stop of
PTN key action program operation)
PTN PRO LOCAL: Switch to LOCAL(LSP) PTN
setting
(Start of local-mode operation)
REM: Switch to REMOTE
P/R: PROG/RESET Switch
P/H: PROG/HOLD Switch
P/L: PROG/LOCAL(LSP) Switch
L/C: LOCAL(LSP)/CAS switch
HLD: Switch to HOLD (Start of
hold-mode operation)
ADV: Advance of segment
A/M1: Loop-1 AUTO/MAN switch
A/M2: Loop-2 AUTO/MAN switch
PRG1: Switch to PROG1 (Start of
MODE key action program-1 operation)
MODE PRO PRG2: Switch to PROG2 (Start of MODE
setting
program-2 operation)
AT: Auto-tuning
LTUP: LCD brightness UP
LTDN: LCD brightness DOWN
BRI: Adjust LCD brightness
LCD: LCD backlight ON/OFF
switch
LAT: Latch release
PID: PID tuning switch
PTN: Program pattern number
switch
MODE: Operation mode

18-36 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Display Function Setting Menu (Menu: DISP)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
0: Fixed in white
1: Fixed in red
2: Link to alarm 1 (Alarm OFF:
white, Alarm ON: red)
3: Link to alarm 1 (Alarm OFF: red,
Alarm ON: white)
4: Link to alarm 1 or 2 (Alarm OFF:
white, Alarm ON: red)
5: Link to alarm 1 or 2 (Alarm OFF:
Active color PV red, Alarm ON: white)
PCMD EASY 0
display switch 6: PV limit (Within range: white,
Out of range: red)
7: PV limit (Within range: red, Out
of range: white)
8: SP deviation (Within deviation:
white, Out of deviation: red)
9: SP deviation (Within deviation:
red, Out of deviation: white)
10: Link to DI (ON: red, OFF:
white)
PV color change Set a display value when in PV
PCH EASY 0
high limit limit or SP deviation.
-19999 to 30000 (Set a value
PV color change within the input range.)
PCL EASY 0
low limit Decimal point position depends on
the input type.
Program display PTN: Pattern display
PTSL STD PTN
pattern selection SK.RP: Ramp and soak display
Upper bar-graph 0: Disable
BAR1 STD 23
display registration 1:OUT, Heating-side OUT, Internal
value in Position proportional
control
2: Cooling-side OUT
3: PV
4: SP
5: Deviation
6: Loop-2 OUT, Loop-2 heating-
side OUT
7: Loop-2 cooling-side OUT
Lower bar-graph 8: Loop-2 PV
BAR2 STD 0
display registration 9: Loop-2 SP
10: Loop-2 deviation
11 to 16: Disable 18
17: Feedback input (valve opening)
18: PV terminals analog input
19: RSP terminals analog input
Parameters
20: AIN2 terminals analog input
21: AIN4 terminals analog input
22: Segment progress
23: Time event and alarm status
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: PCMD, PCH, PCL

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-37
18.2 List of Parameters

Display Function Setting Menu (Menu: DISP) (Continued from previous page)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Bar-graph 10.0 % of PV
BDV deviation STD 0.0 to 100.0% of PV input range span (EUS) input range
display band span
Setting range: 4001 to 6304
OFF: Disable
4785: Link to PV event-1/local event-1 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4786: Link to PV event-2/local event-2 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4787: Link to PV event-3/local event-3 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4789: Link to PV event-4/local event-4 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4790: Link to PV event-5/local event-5 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4791: Link to PV event-6/local event-6 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4793: Link to PV event-7/local event-7 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4794: Link to PV event-8/local event-8 (Lit
when the event occurs)
4817: Link to time event-1 (Lit when the event occurs)
4818: Link to time event-2 (Lit when the event occurs)
4819: Link to time event-3 (Lit when the event occurs) EV1: 4785
4821: Link to time event-4 (Lit when the event occurs) EV2: 4786
EV1 to EV8 4822: Link to time event-5 (Lit when the event occurs) EV3: 4787
EV1 to display 4823: Link to time event-6 (Lit when the event occurs) EV4: 4789
PRO
EV8 condition 4825: Link to time event-7 (Lit when the event occurs) EV5: 4790
registration 4826: Link to time event-8 (Lit when the event occurs) EV6: 4791
4833: Link to time event-9 (Lit when the event occurs) EV7: 4793
4834: Link to time event-10 (Lit when the event occurs) EV8: 4794
4835: Link to time event-11 (Lit when the event occurs)
4837: Link to time event-12 (Lit when the event occurs)
4838: Link to time event-13 (Lit when the event occurs)
4839: Link to time event-14 (Lit when the event occurs)
4841: Link to time event-15 (Lit when the event occurs)
4842: Link to time event-16 (Lit when the event occurs)
4321: Link to alarm-1 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
4322: Link to alarm-2 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
4323: Link to alarm-3 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
4325: Link to alarm-4 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
4326: Link to alarm-5 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
4327: Link to alarm-6 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
4329: Link to alarm-7 (Lit when the alarm occurs)
4330: Link to alarm-8 (Lit when the alarm occurs)

4529: Heater break alarm 1 (Lit when the alarm occurs)

4530: Heater break alarm 2 (Lit when the alarm occurs)

* For other functions, see the UTAdvanced Series

Communication Interface User’s Manual.
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: BDV, EV1 to EV8

18-38 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Display Function Setting Menu (Menu: DISP) (Continued from previous page)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Setting range: 4001 to 6304
OFF: Disable

5025 to 5027: Link to DI1-DI3 (Lit when the

contact is closed)
5041 to 5046: Link to DI11-DI16 (E1-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5057 to 5062: Link to DI21-DI26 (E2-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5073 to 5077: Link to DI31-DI35 (E3-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed)
5089 to 5094: Link to DI41-DI46 (E4-terminal
area) (Lit when the contact is closed) EV1: 4785
EV2: 4786
EV1 to EV8 5153 to 5155: Link to AL1-AL3 (Lit when the EV3: 4787
EV1 to display contact is closed) EV4: 4789
PRO
EV8 condition 5169 to 5173: Link to DO11-DO15 (E1- EV5: 4790
registration terminal area) (Lit when the contact is EV6: 4791
closed) EV7: 4793
5185 to 5189: Link to DO21-DO25 (E2- EV8: 4794
terminal area) (Lit when the contact is
closed)
5201 to 5205: Link to DO31-DO35 (E3-
terminal area) (Lit when the contact is
closed)
5217 to 5221: Link to DO41-DO45 (E4-
terminal area) (Lit when the contact is
closed)

* For other functions, see the UTAdvanced

Series Communication Interface User’s
Manual.
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: EV1 to EV8

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-39
18.2 List of Parameters

Display Function Setting Menu (Menu: DISP) (Continued from previous page)
Parameter Display Initial
Name Setting range
symbol level value
PV display area
PV.D PRO ON
ON/OFF
Setpoint display
SP.D PRO OFF: Nondisplay, ON: Display ON
area ON/OFF
Status display
STS.D PRO ON
area ON/OFF
SPD Scroll speed PRO (Slow) 1 to 8 (Quick) 4
Guide display ON/ OFF: Nondisplay
GUID STD ON
OFF ON: Display
SP1: SP Display
SP2: Loop-2 SP Display
OUT1: OUT Display
OUT2: Loop-2 OUT Display
HCO: Heating/cooling OUT Display
VP: Valve Position Display
MV: Position Proportional Computation Output
Display
PID1: PID Number Display
PID2: Loop-2 PID Number Display
HC1: Heater Break Alarm-1 Current Display
HC2: Heater Break Alarm-2 Current Display
PV1: PV2/PV1 Display
Home Operation
HOME PRO PV2: PV1/PV2 Display SP1
Display setting
PV: PV Analog Input Display
RSP: RSP Analog Input Display
AIN2: AIN2 Analog Input Display
AIN4: AIN4 Analog Input Display
CS1 to CS5: SELECT Display 1 to 5
TSP1: TSP Display
TSP2: Loop-2 TSP Display
R.TIM: Remaining Segment-tim Display
SEG.N: Segment Number Dispaly
R.CYC: Remaining Repetition Display
PTN: Program Pattern Display
AL5.8.1: Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display
AL5.8.2: Loop-2 Alarm-5 to -8 Status Display
OFF: Disable
1: Economy mode ON (All indications
ECO Economy mode STD except PV display OFF) OFF
2: Economy mode ON (All indications OFF)
3: Brightness 10 % (All indications)
BRI Brightness EASY (Dark) 1 to 5 (Bright) 3
White brightness
Adjusts the white brightness of PV display.
B.PVW adjustment of PV PRO 0
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
display
Red brightness
Adjusts the red brightness of PV display.
B.PVR adjustment of PV PRO 0
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
display
Brightness
Adjusts the brightness of SP display.
B.SP adjustment of PRO 0
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
Setpoint display
Brightness
Adjusts the brightness of SP display.
B.BAR adjustment of Bar- PRO 0
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
graph display
Brightness
Adjusts the brightness of Status indicator.
B.STS adjustment of PRO 0
(Dark) -4 to 4 (Bright)
Status indicator
1: 100 ms
2: 200 ms
Display update
D.CYC PRO 3: 500 ms 2
cycle
4: 1 s
5: 2 s

18-40 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Display Function Setting Menu (Menu: DISP) (Continued from previous page)
Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Automatically returned to the
Operation Display when there has
Autoreturn to
OP.JP PRO been no keystroke operation for 5 ON
operation display
minutes.
OFF, ON
Least significant
OFF: With least significant digit
MLSD digital mask of PV STD OFF
ON: Without least significant digit
display

SELECT Display Setting Menu (Menu: CSEL)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
SELECT Display-1
CS1 to CS5 STD OFF
to -5registration
SELECT OFF, 2201 to 5000
CS10 to
parameter-10 to -19 PRO OFF
CS19
registration

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-41
18.2 List of Parameters

Key Lock Setting Menu (Menu: KLOC)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
U.SP SP Display lock PRO OFF
U.TSP TSP Display lock PRO OFF
Remaining
U.TM Segment-tim PRO OFF
Display lock
OFF
U.OUT OUT Display lock PRO
(Cascade control: ON)
Heating/cooling
U.HCO PRO OFF
OUT Display lock
Valve Position
U.VP PRO OFF
Display lock
Position
Proportional
U.MV PRO ON
Computation Output
Display lock
PID Number
U.PID PRO ON
Display lock
Segment Number
U.SEG PRO OFF
Display lock
Remaining OFF: Display
U.RCY Repetition Display PRO ON: Nondisplay OFF
lock
Program Pattern
U.PTN PRO OFF
Display lock
Alarm-5 to -8 Status
U.AL PRO OFF
Display lock
Heater Break Alarm
U.HC Current Value PRO OFF
Display lock
U.PV1 PV2/PV1 Display lock PRO OFF
U.PV2 PV1/PV2 Display lock PRO OFF
PV Analog Input ON
U.PV PRO
Display lock (Loop control with PV
switching and Loop
RSP Analog Input
U.RSP PRO control with PV auto-
Display lock
selector: OFF)
AIN2 Analog Input
U.AI2 PRO ON
Display lock
(Loop control with PV
AIN4 Analog Input
U.AI4 PRO auto-selector: OFF)
Display lock
Communication
COM.W STD OFF: Enable, ON: Disable OFF
write enable/disable
Front panel
DATA parameter data key STD OFF
lock
Front panel RUN
RUN STD OFF
key lock
OFF: Unlock
Front panel RST
RST STD ON: Lock OFF
key lock
Front panel PTN
PTN STD OFF
key lock
Front panel MODE
MODE STD OFF
key lock
The following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp is lit)
• Parameter: U.SP, U.OUT, U.PID, U.AL, U.PV2
When the program pattern-2 retransmission is selected (PT2.G=ON), the second loop is also
displayed for the parameters UT.SP, U.TSP. (LP2 lamp is lit.)

18-42 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

Menu Lock Setting Menu (Menu: MLOC)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
CTL [CTL] menu lock PRO
PV [PV] menu lock PRO
RSP [RSP] menu lock PRO
AIN2 [AIN2] menu lock PRO
AIN4 [AIN4] menu lock PRO
MPV [MPV] menu lock PRO
OUT [OUT] menu lock PRO
HBA [HBA] menu lock PRO
R485 [R485] menu lock PRO
ETHR [ETHR] menu lock PRO
PROF [PROF] menu lock PRO
DNET [DNET] menu lock PRO
CC-L [CC-L] menu lock PRO
OFF: Display
KEY [KEY] menu lock PRO OFF
ON: Nondisplay
DISP [DISP] menu lock PRO
CSEL [CSEL] menu lock PRO
KLOC [KLOC] menu lock PRO
DI.SL [DI.SL] menu lock PRO
DI.NU [DI.NU] menu lock PRO
DI.D [DI.D] menu lock PRO
ALM [ALM] menu lock PRO
DO [DO] menu lock PRO
I/O [I/O] menu lock PRO
SYS [SYS] menu lock PRO
INIT [INIT] menu lock PRO
VER [VER] menu lock PRO
LVL [LVL] menu lock PRO
When each parameter is displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group display.
• Parameter: RSP, AIN2, AIN4, R485, ETHR, PROF, DNET, CC-L, DI.D, DO
18
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit) Parameters
• Parameter: MPV

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-43
18.2 List of Parameters

Menu Lock Setting Menu (Menu: MLOC)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
MODE [MODE] menu lock PRO
CS [CS] menu lock PRO
PROG [PROG] menu lock PRO
LOC [LOC] menu lock PRO
EDIT [EDIT] menu lock PRO
AL [AL] menu lock PRO
SPS [SPS] menu lock PRO
ALRM [ALRM] menu lock PRO
OFF: Display
PVS [PVS] menu lock PRO OFF
ON: Nondisplay
PID [PID] menu lock PRO
TUNE [TUNE] menu lock PRO
ZONE [ZONE] menu lock PRO
PPAR [PPAR] menu lock PRO
PYS1 [PYS1] menu lock PRO
PYS2 [PYS2] menu lock PRO
PYS3 [PYS3] menu lock PRO
PYS4 [PYS4] menu lock PRO
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter: AL, SPS, ALRM, PVS, PID, TUNE, ZONE

18-44 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

DI Function Registration Menu (Menu: DI.SL)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Switch to PROG (Start of
PRG STD 5025
program operation)
Switch to RESET (Stop
RST STD 5026
of program operation)
Switch to LOCAL(LSP)
LOC (Start of local-mode STD 5027
operation)
REM Switch to REMOTE STD 5046
P/R PROG/RESET Switch STD OFF
Set an I relay number of
P/H PROG/HOLD Switch STD contact input. OFF
PROG/LOCAL(LSP) Set “OFF” to disable the
P/L STD OFF
Switch function.
Switch to HOLD (Start of
HOLD STD Standard terminals OFF
hold-mode operation)
DI1: 5025, DI2: 5026,
ADV Advance of segment STD OFF
DI3: 5027
WAIT Wait ON/OFF switch STD E1-terminal area OFF
Switch to HOLD for DI11: 5041, DI12: 5042,
S.HLD synchronized program PRO DI13: 5043, DI14: 5044, OFF
operation DI15: 5045, DI16: 5046
E2-terminal area
A/M AUTO/MAN switch STD OFF
DI21: 5057, DI22: 5058,
L/C LOCAL(LSP)/CAS switch STD DI23: 5059, DI24: 5060, OFF
Auto-tuning START/ DI25: 5061, DI26: 5062
AT STD E3-terminal area OFF
STOP switch
DI31: 5073, DI32: 5074,
TRK Output tracking switch PRO OFF
DI33: 5075, DI34: 5076,
SW PV switch PRO DI35: 5077 OFF
E4-terminal area
LAT Latch release STD OFF
DI41: 5089, DI42: 5090,
LCD backlight ON/OFF DI43: 5091, DI44: 5092,
LCD STD OFF
switch DI45: 5093, DI46: 5094
PVRW PV red/white switch STD OFF
Message display
MG1 PRO OFF
interruption 1
Message display
MG2 PRO OFF
interruption 2
Message display
MG3 PRO OFF
interruption 3
Message display
MG4
interruption 4
PRO OFF 18
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit) Parameters
• Parameter: A/M, PVRW

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-45
18.2 List of Parameters

DI Function Numbering Menu (Menu: DI.NU)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Bit-0 of Program
PT.B0 EASY 5089
pattern number
Bit-1 of Program Set an I relay number of contact
PT.B1 EASY 5090
pattern number input.
Bit-2 of Program Set “OFF” to disable the function.
PT.B2 EASY 5091
pattern number
Bit-3 of Program Standard terminals
PT.B3 EASY 5092
pattern number DI1: 5025, DI2: 5026,
Bit-4 of Program DI3: 5027
PT.B4 EASY 5093
pattern number E1-terminal area
Bit-5 of Program DI11: 5041, DI12: 5042,
PT.B5 EASY OFF
pattern number DI13: 5043, DI14: 5044,
PN.B0 Bit-0 of PID number STD DI15: 5045, DI16: 5046 OFF
E2-terminal area
PN.B1 Bit-1 of PID number STD DI21: 5057, DI22: 5058, OFF
PN.B2 Bit-2 of PID number STD DI23: 5059, DI24: 5060, OFF
DI25: 5061, DI26: 5062
PN.B3 Bit-3 of PID number STD E3-terminal area OFF
Bit-0 of manual DI31: 5073, DI32: 5074,
MP.B0 preset output STD DI33: 5075, DI34: 5076, OFF
number DI35: 5077
Bit-1 of manual E4-terminal area
MP.B1 preset output STD DI41: 5089, DI42: 5090, OFF
number DI43: 5091, DI44: 5092,
Bit-2 of manual DI45: 5093, DI46: 5094
MP.B2 preset output STD OFF
number
Bit changing 0: Status switch 1
PT.BC method of program PRO 1: Status switch 2 0
pattern number 2: BCD switch
Bit changing
0: Status switch 1
PN.BC method of PID PRO 0
1: Status switch 2
number
Bit changing
method of manual 0: Status switch 1
MP.BC PRO 0
preset output 1: Status switch 2
number
In Cascade control, the following parameters are also displayed for secondary loop. (the LP2 lamp
is lit)
• Parameter MP.B0, MP.B1, MP.B2, MP.BC

DI1-DI3 Contact Type Setting Menu (Menu: DI.D)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
DI1.D DI1 contact type PRO 0: The assigned function is 0
enabled when the contact input
DI2.D DI2 contact type PRO is closed. 0
1: The assigned function is
DI3.D DI3 contact type PRO enabled when the contact input 0
is opened.

DI Setting Menu (Menu: DI.D) (E1 and E4 terminal area)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
DI1.D DIn1 contact type PRO 0
0: The assigned function is
DI2.D DIn2 contact type PRO enabled when the contact input 0
is closed.
DI3.D DIn3 contact type PRO 0
1: The assigned function is
DI4.D DIn4 contact type PRO enabled when the contact input 0
is opened.
DI5.D DIn5 contact type PRO 0
n: Terminal area number (1, 3 or 4)

18-46 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

AL1-AL3 Function Registration Menu (Menu: ALM)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
AL1 function Set an I relay number.
AL1.S STD 4801
selection Setting range: 4001 to 6304
AL2 function
AL2.S STD 4802
selection No function: OFF
AL3 function PV event 1: 4801, PV event 2: 4802,
AL3.S STD PV event 3: 4803, PV event 4: 4805, 4803
selection
OUT relay function PV event 5: 4806, PV event 6: 4807,
OR.S STD PV event 7: 4809, PV event 8: 4810, OFF
selection
Time event 1: 4817,
Time event 2: 4818,
Time event 3: 4819,
Time event 4: 4821,
Time event 5: 4822,
Time event 6: 4823,
Time event 7: 4825,
Time event 8: 4826,
Time event 9: 4833,
Time event 10: 4834,
Time event 11: 4835,
Time event 12: 4837,
Time event 13: 4838,
Time event 14: 4839,
Time event 15: 4841,
Time event 16: 4842,
Alarm 1: 4353, Alarm 2: 4354,
OUT2 relay function Alarm 3: 4355, Alarm 4: 4357,
OR2.S STD Alarm 5: 4358, Alarm 6: 4359, OFF
selection
Alarm 7: 4361, Alarm 8: 4362,
AUTO (ON ) / MAN (OFF) status: 4177,
Program RESET status: 4181,
Program RUN status: 4182,
Local operation status: 4183,
Remote operation status: 4185,
HOLD mode status: 4189,
Program advance status: 4187,
Pattern end signal (1 second): 4265,
Pattern end signal (3 seconds): 4266,
Pattern end signal (5 seconds): 4267,
Wait end signal (1 second) : 4257,
Wait end signal (3 seconds) : 4258,
Wait end signal (5 seconds) : 4259,
Output tracking (ON) switching
signal: 4186, 18
FAIL (Normally ON) output: 4256
AL1.D AL1 contact type PRO 0
Parameters
0: When the event of assigned
AL2.D AL2 contact type PRO 0
function occurs, the contact
AL3.D AL3 contact type PRO output is closed. 0
OUT relay contact 1: When the event of assigned
OR.D PRO function occurs, the contact 0
type
OUT2 relay contact output is opened.
OR2.D PRO 0
type

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-47
18.2 List of Parameters

DO Setting Menu (Menu: DO) (E1 to E4 terminal area)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
DOn1 function Same as AL1.S.
DO1.S STD See left
selection
DOn2 function DO11=4805, DO12=4806,
DO2.S STD See left
selection DO13=4807, DO14=4809,
DOn3 function DO15=4810,
DO3.S STD DO21=4817, DO22=4818, See left
selection
DOn4 function DO23=4819, DO24=4821,
DO4.S STD DO25=4822 See left
selection
DO31=4823, DO32=4825,
DO33=4826, DO34=4833,
DOn5 function DO35=4834
DO5.S STD DO41=OFF, DO42=OFF, See left
selection
DO43=OFF, DO44=OFF,
DO45=OFF
DO1.D DOn1 contact type PRO 0
0: When the event of assigned
DO2.D DOn2 contact type PRO function occurs, the contact 0
output is closed.
DO3.D DOn3 contact type PRO 0
1: When the event of assigned
DO4.D DOn4 contact type PRO function occurs, the contact 0
output is opened.
DO5.D DOn5 contact type PRO 0
n: Terminal area number (1 to 4)

I/O Display Menu (Menu: I/O)

Parameter Display
Name Read only
symbol level
KEY Key status PRO
X000 DI1-DI3 status (equipped as standard) PRO
X100 DI11-DI16 status (E1-terminal area) PRO
X200 DI21-DI26 status (E2-terminal area) PRO
X300 DI31-DI35 status (E3-terminal area) PRO
X400 DI41-DI46 status (E4-terminal area) PRO See Chapter 13.
Y000 AL1-AL3 status (equipped as standard) PRO
Y100 DO11-DO15 status (E1-terminal area) PRO
Y200 DO21-DO25 status (E2-terminal area) PRO
Y300 DO31-DO35 status (E3-terminal area) PRO
Y400 DO41-DO45 status (E4-terminal area) PRO

18-48 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 18.2 List of Parameters

System Setting Menu (Menu: SYS)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
CONT: Continue action set before
power failure.
MAN: Start from MAN.
RESET: Continues action set
before power failure and starts
R.MD Restart mode STD CONT
computation from the preset
output value.
* Set how the controller should
recover from a power failure of
5 seconds or more.
0 to 10 s
* Set time between power on and
R.TM Restart timer STD 0
the instant where controller
starts computation.
0: Preset output
1: 0% output
2: 100% output
Input error preset * Set preset output value when
EPO STD 0
output the input burnout or ADC
error occurs. Manual output
is prioritized when the input
burnout occurs in MAN.
OFF: Works as UP55A in
communication of device
information response or
Response as broadcasting.
C.GRN PRO OFF
GREEN Series ON: Works as GREEN Series
in communication of device
information response or
broadcasting.
FREQ Power frequency EASY AUTO, 60: 60 Hz, 50: 50 Hz AUTO
OFF: Disable
QSM Quick setting mode EASY ON
ON: Enable
ENG: English
Depends on
Guide display FRA: French
LANG EASY the Model and
language GER: German
Suffix Codes
SPA: Spanish
PASS Password setting EASY 0 (No password) to 65535 0
Sampling period 0 when power
SMEC PRO 0 to 65536 (display only)
error counter is turned on.

18
Parameters

IM 05P02C41-01EN 18-49
18.2 List of Parameters

Initialization Menu (Menu: INIT)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
Initialization to user 12345: Initialization, automatically
U.DEF PRO 0
default value returned to "0" after initialization.
Initialization to -12345: Initialization, automatically
F.DEF PRO 0
factory default value returned to "0" after initialization.
13579: Initialization, automatically
Clearing all program
P.DEF PRO returned to "0" after initialization. 0
pattern data
* Data all deletions in menu [PROG]

Error and Version Confirmation Menu (Menu: VER)

Parameter Display
Name Read only
symbol level
PA.ER Parameter error status EASY
OP.ER Option error status EASY
AD1.E A/D converter error status 1 EASY
AD2.E A/D converter error status 2 EASY See Chapter 16.
PV1.E Loop-1 PV input error status EASY
PV2.E Loop-2 PV input error status EASY
LA.ER Ladder error status EASY
MCU MCU version EASY
DCU DCU version EASY
ECU1 ECU-1 version EASY
ECU2 ECU-2 version EASY
ECU3 ECU-3 version EASY
ECU4 ECU-4 version EASY
PARA Parameter version EASY See Chapter 13.
H.VER Product version EASY
SER1 Serial number 1 EASY
SER2 Serial number 2 EASY
MAC1 MAC address 1 EASY
MAC2 MAC address 2 EASY
MAC3 MAC address 3 EASY
When the following parameters are displayed, the terminal area (E1 to E4) is displayed on Group
display.
• Parameter: ECU1, ECU2, ECU3, ECU4, MAC1, MAC2 and MAC3

Parameter Display Level Menu (Menu: LVL)

Parameter Display
Name Setting range Initial value
symbol level
EASY: Easy setting mode
Parameter display
LEVL EASY STD: Standard setting mode STD
level
PRO: Professional setting mode

18-50 IM 05P02C41-01EN
Chapter 19 Specifications

19.1 Hardware Specifications

WARNING
This instrument is for Measurement Category I (CAT.I). Do not use it for
measurements in locations falling under Measurement Categories II, III, and IV.

Internal Wiring
II
III T
Entrance IV I
Cable
Outlet

Measurement
Category Description Remarks
category
For measurements performed on circuits not
I CAT.I -
directly connected to MAINS.
For measurements performed on circuits
Appliances, portable
II CAT.II directly connected to the low-voltage
equipments, etc.
installation.
For measurements performed in the building Distribution board,
III CAT.III
installation. circuit breaker, etc.
For measurements performed at the source Overhead wire, cable
IV CAT.IV
of the low-voltage installation. systems, etc.

19
Specifications

IM 05P02C41-01EN 19-1
19.1 Hardware Specifications

19.1.1 Input Specifications

Universal Input
• Number of inputs: 1
• Input type, instrument range, and measurement accuracy: See the table below.
Input Type Instrument Range (°C) Instrument Range (°F) Accuracy
-270.0 to 1370.0°C -450.0 to 2500.0°F
K -270.0 to 1000.0°C -450.0 to 2300.0°F ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit for 0°C or more
±0.2% of instrument range ±1 digit for less than 0°C
-270.0 to 500.0°C -200.0 to 1000.0°F ±2% of instrument range ±1 digit for less than
J -200.0 to 1200.0°C -300.0 to 2300.0°F -200.0°C of thermocouple K
±1% of instrument range ±1 digit for less than
-270.0 to 400.0°C -450.0 to 750.0°F -200.0°C of thermocouple T
T
0.0 to 400.0°C -200.0 to 750.0°F
±0.15% of instrument range ±1 digit for 400°C or
more
B 0.0 to 1800.0°C 32 to 3300°F
±5% of instrument range ±1 digit for less than
400°C
S 0.0 to 1700.0°C 32 to 3100°F
±0.15% of instrument range ±1 digit
R 0.0 to 1700.0°C 32 to 3100°F
Thermo-
couple ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
N -200.0 to 1300.0°C -300.0 to 2400.0°F
±0.25% of instrument range ±1 digit for less than 0°C
E -270.0 to 1000.0°C -450.0 to 1800.0°F
±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit for 0°C or more
L -200.0 to 900.0°C -300.0 to 1600.0°F ±0.2% of instrument range ±1 digit for less than 0°C
-200.0 to 400.0°C -300.0 to 750.0°F ±1.5% of instrument range ±1 digit for less than
U -200.0°C of thermocouple E.
0.0 to 400.0°C -200.0 to 1000.0°F
W 0.0 to 2300.0°C 32 to 4200°F ±0.2% of instrument range ±1 digit (Note 2)
Platinel 2 0.0 to 1390.0°C 32.0 to 2500.0°F ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
±0.5% of instrument range ±1 digit for 800°C or
PR20-40 0.0 to 1900.0°C 32 to 3400°F more
Accuracy is not guaranteed for less than 800°C.
W97Re3-
0.0 to 2000.0°C 32 to 3600°F ±0.2% of instrument range ±1 digit
W75Re25
-200.0 to 500.0°C -300.0 to 1000.0°F ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit (Note 1)
JPt100
-150.00 to 150.00°C -200.0 to 300.0°F ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
RTD -200.0 to 850.0°C -300.0 to 1560.0°F
±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit (Note 1)
Pt100 -200.0 to 500.0°C -300.0 to 1000.0°F
-150.00 to 150.00°C -200.0 to 300.0°F ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
0.400 to 2.000 V
Standard signal 1.000 to 5.000 V
4.00 to 20.00 mA
0.000 to 2.000 V
±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
0.00 to 10.00 V
DC voltage/current 0.00 to 20.00 mA
-10.00 to 20.00 mV
0.0 to 100.0 mV
The accuracy is that in the standard operating conditions: 23±2°C, 55±10%RH, and power
frequency at 50/60 Hz.
Note 1: ±0.3°C ±1 digit in the range between 0 and 100°C, ±0.5°C ±1 digit in the range between
-100 and 200°C.
Note 2: W: W-5% Re/W-26% Re(Hoskins Mfg.Co.). ASTM E988

19-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 19.1 Hardware Specifications

• Input sampling (control) period: Select from among 100 and 200 ms
• Burnout detection:
Functions at TC, RTD, and standard signal
Upscale, downscale, and off can be specified.
For standard signal, burnout is determined to have occurred if it is 0.1 V or 0.4 mA
or less.
• Input bias current: 0.05 µA (for TC or RTD)
• Measurement current (RTD): About 0.16 mA
• Input resistance:
TC or mV input: 1 MΩ or more
V input: About 1 MΩ
mA input: About 250 Ω
• Allowable signal source resistance:
TC or mV input: 250 Ω or less
Effects of signal source resistance: 0.1 µV/Ω or less
DC voltage input: 2 kΩ or less
Effects of signal source resistance: About 0.01%/100 Ω
• Allowable wiring resistance:
RTD input: Max. 150 Ω/wire (The conductor resistance between the three wires
shall be equal.)
Wiring resistance effect: ±0.1ºC/10 Ω
• Allowable input voltage/current:
TC, mV, mA or RTD input: ±10 V DC
V input: ±20 V DC
mA input: ±40 mA
• Noise rejection ratio:
Normal mode: 40 dB or more (50/60 Hz)
Common mode: 120 dB or more (50/60 Hz)
For 100-240 V AC, the power frequency can be set manually. Automatic detection
is also available.
For 24 V AC/DC, the power frequency can be set manually.
• Reference junction compensation error:
±1.0ºC (15 to 35ºC)
±1.5ºC (-10 to 15ºC, 35 to 50ºC)
• Applicable standards: JIS/IEC/DIN (ITS-90) for TC and RTD

Auxiliary Analog Input

• Use: Remote setpoint setting, external compensating input, auxiliary input for
computation, etc.
• Number of inputs: See the table of Model and Suffix Codes
• Input type, instrument range, and measurement accuracy: See the table below. 19
Input Type Instrument Range Accuracy
Specifications

0.400 to 2.000 V ±0.2% of instrument range ±1 digit

Standard Signal
1.000 to 5.000 V ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
0.000 to 2.000 V ±0.2% of instrument range ±1 digit
DC Voltage
0.00 to 10.00 V ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
DC voltage for high-input
0.000 to 1.250 V ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit
impedance

• Input sampling (control) period: Same as universal input

• Input resistance: About 1 MΩ
However, 10 MΩ or more for DC voltage for high-input impedance range
• Burnout detection: Functions at standard signal
Burnout is determined to have occurred if it is 0.1 V or less.

IM 05P02C41-01EN 19-3
19.1 Hardware Specifications

Remote Input with Direct Input

• Number of inputs: See the table of Model and Suffix Codes.
• Input type, instrument range, and measurement accuracy: Same as universal input
except the table below.
Input Type Instrument Range (°C) Instrument Range (°F) Accuracy
-200.0 to 500.0°C -300.0 to 1000.0°F ±0.5°C ±1 digit
JPt100
-150.00 to 150.00°C -200.0 to 300.0°F ±0.2°C ±1 digit
4-wire RTD -200.0 to 850.0°C -300.0 to 1560.0°F ±0.1% of instrument range ±1 digit (Note 1)
Pt100 -200.0 to 500.0°C -300.0 to 1000.0°F ±0.5°C ±1 digit
-150.00 to 150.00°C -200.0 to 300.0°F ±0.2°C ±1 digit
Note 1: ±0.5°C ±1 digit in the range between -200.0 and 500.0°C/-300.0 and 1000.0°F.

• Input sampling (control) period: Same as universal input

• Burnout detection: Same as universal input

19.1.2 Analog Output Specifications

• Number of outputs:
Control output: 1
Cooling-side control output of Heating/cooling type: 1
• Output type: Current output or voltage pulse output
• Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC/load resistance of 600 Ω or less
• Current output accuracy: ±0.1% of span (±5% of span for 1 mA or less.)
The accuracy is that in the standard operating conditions: 23±2°C, 55±10%RH, and
power frequency at 50/60 Hz.
• Voltage pulse output:
Use: Time proportional output
On-voltage: 12 V or more/load resistance of 600 Ω or more
Off-voltage: 0.1 V DC or less
Time resolution: 10 ms or 0.1% of output, whichever is larger

19.1.3 Step Response Time Specifications

Within 500 ms (when the control period is 100 ms)
Within 1 s (when the control period is 200 ms)
(63% of analog output response time when a step change of 10 to 90% of input span is
applied)

19.1.4 Relay Contact Output Specifications

• Contact type and number of outputs:
Control output: contact point 1c; 1 point
Cooling-side control output of Heating/cooling type: contact point 1c; 1 point
Event output: contact point 1a; 3 points (common is independent)
• Contact rating:
Contact point 1c (control output): 250 V AC, 3 A or 30 V DC, 3A (resistance load)
Contact point 1a (event output): 240 V AC, 1A or 30 V DC, 1 A (resistance load)
• Use: Time proportional output, event output, alarm output, FAIL output, etc.
• Time resolution of control output: 10 ms or 0.1% of output, whichever is larger
Note: Cannot be used for a small load of 10 mA or less.

19-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 19.1 Hardware Specifications

19.1.5 Triac Output Specifications (for Detailed model)

• Contact type and number of output: zero cross; 1 point
Load voltage: 75 to 250 V
Allowable load current: 0.8 A when the ambient temperature is 20°C, 0.3 A when
the ambient temperature is 50°C.
• Minimum load current: 20 mA (*)
*: Unusable for a small load of 10 mA or less.
*: If there is a risk of surge current, connect a current-limiting reactor, a current-
limiting fuse or a breaker in series to the load power supply.
• Use: Time proportional output, Alarm output
• Time resolution of control output: 1/commercial frequency (s) or 0.1% of output,
whichever is larger.

19.1.6 Position Proportional Output Specifications

• Position signal input:
Slide resistance: 100 Ω to 2.5 kΩ of total resistance
100% side and slide line: with disconnection detection
0% side: without disconnection detection
Current input: 4 to 20 mA (with disconnection detection)
• Sampling period: 50 ms
• Measurement resolution: 0.1% of input span
• Position proportional relay output:
contact point 1a; 2 points, 250 V AC, 3 A or 30 V DC, 3 A (resistance load)
Note: Cannot be used for a small load of 10 mA or less.

19.1.7 Retransmission Output Specifications

• Number of outputs: Retransmission output; 1, shared with 15 V DC loop power supply
• Current output: 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC/ load resistance of 600 Ω or less
• Current output accuracy: ±0.1% of span (±5% of span for 1 mA or less.)
The accuracy is that in the standard operating conditions: 23±2°C, 55±10%RH, and
power frequency at 50/60 Hz.

19.1.8 15 V DC Loop Power Supply Specifications

(Shared with retransmission output)
• Power supply: 14.5 to 18.0 V DC
• Maximum power supply: About 21 mA (with short-circuit current limiting circuit)

19.1.9 Contact Input Specifications

• Number of inputs: See the table of Model and Suffix Codes. 19
• Input type: No-voltage contact input or transistor contact input
• Input contact rating: 12 V DC, 10 mA or more
Specifications

Use a contact of a minimum on-current of 1 mA or more

• ON/OFF detection:
No-voltage contact input:
Contact resistance of 1 kΩ or less is determined as “ON” and contact resistance
of 50 kΩ or more as “OFF.”
Transistor contact input:
Input voltage of 2 V or less is determined as “ON” and leakage current must not
exceed 100 µA when “OFF.”
• Minimum status detection hold time: Control period +50 ms
• Use: PTNO. switch, operation mode switch, and event input

IM 05P02C41-01EN 19-5
19.1 Hardware Specifications

19.1.10 Transistor Contact Output Specifications

• Number of outputs: See the table of Model and Suffix Codes.
• Output type: Open collector (SINK current)
• Output contact rating: Max. 24 V DC, 50 mA
• Output time resolution: Min. 100 ms

19.1.11 Heater Break Alarm Specifications

• Number of inputs: 2
• Number of outputs: 2 (transistor contact output)
• Use: Measures the heater current using an external current transformer (CT) and
generates a heater break alarm when the measured value is less than the break
detection value.
• Current transformer input resistance: About 9.4 Ω
• Current transformer input range: 0.0 to 0.1 Arms (0.12 Arms or more cannot be
applied.)
• Heater current setting range: OFF, 0.1 to 300.0 Arms
Heater current measured value display range: 0.0 to 360.0 Arms
Note: The CT ratio can be set. CT ratio setting range: 1 to 3300
• Recommended CT: CT from U.R.D., Ltd.
CTL-6-S-H: CT ratio 800, measurable current range: 0.1 to 80.0 Arms
CTL-12L-30: CT ratio 3000, measurable current range: 0.1 to 180.0 Arms
• Heater current measurement period: 200 ms
• Heater current measurement accuracy: ±5% of current transformer input range span ±
1 digit (CT error is not included.)
Ex.: CTL-12L-30
0.1 (Max. of current transformer input range) × 3000 (CT ratio) × ±0.05 (±5%) ±
1digit = ±15 Arms ± 1 digit
• Heater current detection resolution: Within 1/250 of current transformer input range
span
Ex.: CTL-12L-30
0.1 (Max. of current transformer input range) × 3000 (CT ratio) / 250 = 1.2 Arms
• Break detection On-time: Min. 0.2 second. (for time proportional output)

19.1.12 24 V DC Loop Power Supply Specifications (for Detailed model)

• Use: Power is supplied to a 2-wire transmitter.
• Power supply: 21.6 to 28.0 V DC
• Rated current: 4 to 20 mA DC
• Maximum power supply: About 30 mA (with short circuit current limiting circuit)

19-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 19.1 Hardware Specifications

19.1.13 Safety and EMC Standards

• Safety: Compliant with IEC/EN61010-1 (CE), approved by CAN/CSA C22.2
No.61010-1 (CSA). UL61010-1: Pending approval
Installation category: CAT. II Pollution degree: 2
Measurement category: I (CAT. I)
Rated measurement input voltage: Max. 10 V DC
Rated transient overvoltage: 1500 V (Note)
Note: This is a reference safety standard value for Measurement Category I of IEC/EN/CSA/
UL61010-1. This value is not necessarily a guarantee of instrument performance.

• EMC Conformity standards:

CE marking
EN61326-1 Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial locations)
EN61326-2-3
EN 55011 Class A, Group1
EN 61000-3-2 Class A
EN 61000-3-3
C-tick mark
EN 55011 Class A, Group1
The instrument continues to operate at a measurement accuracy of within ±20% of the
range during testing

19.1.14 Construction, Installation, and Wiring

• Dust-proof and drip-proof: IP56 (for front panel) (Not available for side-by-side close
mounting.)
• Material: Polycarbonate (Flame retardancy: UL94V-0)
• Case color: White (Light gray) or black (Light charcoal gray)
• Weight: 0.5 kg or less
• External dimensions (mm): 96 (W) × 96 (H) × 65 (depth from the panel face)
(Depth except the projection on the rear panel)
• Installation: Direct panel mounting; mounting bracket, one each for upper and lower
mounting
• Panel cutout dimensions (mm): 92+0.8/0 (W) × 92+0.8/0 (H)
• Mounting attitude: Up to 30 degrees above the horizontal. No downward titling
allowed.
• Wiring: M3 screw terminal with square washer (for signal wiring and power wiring)

19
Specifications

IM 05P02C41-01EN 19-7
19.1 Hardware Specifications

19.1.15 Power Supply Specifications and Isolation

• Power supply:
Rated voltage: 100 – 240 V AC (+10%/-15%), 50/60 Hz
24 V AC/DC (+10%/-15%) (for /DC option)
• Power consumption: 18 VA (DC:9 VA, AC: 14 VA if /DC option is specified)
• Data backup: Nonvolatile memory
• Power holdup time: 20 ms (for 100 V AC drive)
• Withstanding voltage
- Between primary terminals and secondary terminals: 2300 V AC for 1 minute
- Between primary terminals: 1500 V AC for 1 minute
- Between secondary terminals: 500 V AC for 1 minute
(Primary terminals: Power (*) and relay output terminals; Secondary terminals: Analog
I/O signal terminals, contact input terminals, communication terminals, and functional
grounding terminals.)
(*): Power terminals for 24V AC/DC models are the secondary terminals.
• Insulation resistance
Between power supply terminals and a grounding terminal: 20 MΩ or more at 500 V
DC

• Isolation specifications
PV (universal ) input terminals

Remote (universal) input terminals with direct input / Remote input terminals

Aux. analog (AIN2) input terminals

Aux. analog (AIN4) input terminals

Control, retransmission (analog) output terminals

(not isolated between the analog output terminals)
Valve position (feedback) input terminals

Control relay (contact point c) / triac output terminals

PV event-1 relay (contact point a) output terminals

PV event-2 relay (contact point a) output terminals Internal Power

`
PV event-3 relay (contact point a) output terminals circuits supply

Position proportional relay output terminals

Contact input terminals (All)

RS-485 communication terminals (2 ports)

24 V DC loop power supply terminals

Contact output (transistor) terminals

Ethernet communication terminal

PROFIBUS-DP/DeviceNet/CC-Link communication terminals

Current transformer input terminals

The circuits divided by lines are insulated multually.

19-8 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 19.1 Hardware Specifications

19.1.16 Environmental Conditions

Normal Operating Conditions
• Ambient temperature: -10 to 50ºC (-10 to 40ºC for side-by-side close mounting)
For the CC-Link option, 0 to 50 ºC (0 to 40 ºC for side-by-side close mounting)
• Ambient humidity: 20 to 90% RH (no condensation allowed)
• Magnetic field: 400 A/m or less
• Continuous vibration at 5 to 9 Hz: Half amplitude of 1.5 mm or less, 1oct/min for 90
minutes each in the three axis directions
Continuous vibration at 9 to 150 Hz: 4.9 m/s2 or less, 1oct/min for 90 minutes each in
the three axis directions
• Short-period vibration: 14.7 m/s2, 15 seconds or less
• Shock: 98 m/s2 or less, 11 ms
• Altitude: 2000 m or less above sea level
• Warm-up time: 30 minutes or more after the power is turned on
• Startup time: Within 10 seconds
*: The LCD (a liquid crystal display) is used for a display portion of this product.
The LCD has a characteristic that the display action becomes late at the low temperature.
However, the control fuction is not affected.

Transportation and Storage Conditions

• Temperature: -25 to 70ºC
• Temperature change rate: 20ºC/h or less
• Humidity: 5 to 95% RH (no condensation allowed)

Effects of Operating Conditions

• Effect of ambient temperature:
Voltage or TC input: ±1 µV/ºC or ±0.01% of F.S./ºC, whichever is larger
Current input: ±0.01% of F.S./ºC
RTD input: ±0.05ºC/ºC (ambient temperature) or less
Analog output: ±0.02% of F.S./ºC or less
• Effect of power supply voltage fluctuation
Analog input: ±0.05% of F.S. or less
Analog output: ±0.05% of F.S. or less
(Each within rated voltage range)

19
Specifications

IM 05P02C41-01EN 19-9
Blank Page
Appendix Input and Output Table

Appendix 1 Input and Output Table (for Standard

model)

See the next page.

App
Input and Output Table

IM 05P02C41-01EN App-1
Appendix 1 Input and Output Table (for Standard model)

UP55A Model and Suffix Codes

Optional INPUT OUTPUT
Model Suffix code
suffix code PV RSP AIN2 AIN4 OUT OUT2 VALV RET
UP55A -x x x -xx -00 /x ● ●
-0 ●
Type 1: Basic
-1 ●
control
-2 ● ●
0
1 ●
Type 2: Functions 2
3
4 ● ● ●
Type 3: Open networks x
Display language/Case color -xx
Fixed code -00
/DR ♦1
Optional suffix codes
/HA

●: Equipped
♦1: If the /DR option is additionally specified to the remote input, RSP terminal can be used as
universal input. However, DI16 is deleted.
♦2: If the suffix code type 2 = 2, DI41 to DI45 are deleted.
♦3: If the suffix code type 2 = 4, DI41 to DI45 and DO21 to DO25 are deleted.

App-2 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Appendix 1 Input and Output Table (for Standard model)

UP55A (Continued)
DI
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI11 DI12 DI13 DI14 DI15 DI16 DI26 DI31 DI32 DI33 DI34 DI35 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45 DI46
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

♦1
● ● ● ● ● ♦2 ♦2 ♦2 ♦2 ♦2

♦3 ♦3 ♦3 ♦3 ♦3

UP55A (Continued)
DO
AL1 AL2 AL3 DO11 DO12 DO13 DO14 DO15 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25 DO31 DO32 DO33 DO34 DO35 HAL1 HAL2
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
♦3 ♦3 ♦3 ♦3 ♦3

● ●

App
Input and Output Table

IM 05P02C41-01EN App-3
 Appendix 2 Input and Output Table (for Detailed
model)
UP55A Model and Suffix Codes
INPUT OUTPUT RET
Optional OUT OUT2
Model Suffix code OUT OUT OUT2 OUT2
suffix code PV RSP AIN2 AIN4 (mA/ VALV (mA/ RET
(relay) (triac) (relay) (triac)
pulse) pulse)
UP55A -xxx -xx -x x /x ●
Fixed code -NNN
Display language/
-xx
Case color
-A ●
-R ●
Output 1 -U ● ●
-T ●
-P ●
A ●
R ●
Output 2 U ● ●
T ●
N
Retransmission output /RT ●
Heater break alarm /HA
/R1 ●
/U1 ●
E1 terminal area /X1
/Y1
/W1
/A2 ●
/X2
E2 terminal area
/Y2
/W2
/CH3
/CC3

/PD3

/DN3
E3 terminal area
/ET3
/X3
/Y3
/W3
/A4 ●
/C4
/L4
/AC4 ●
E4 terminal area
/LC4
/X4
/Y4
/W4
Power supply /DC
Additional treatment /CT

●: Equipped

App-4 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Appendix 2 Input and Output Table (for Detailed model)

UP55A (Continued)
DI

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI11 DI12 DI13 DI14 DI15 DI16 DI21 DI22 DI23 DI24 DI25 DI26 DI31 DI32 DI33 DI34 DI35 DI41 DI42 DI43 DI44 DI45 DI46

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

● ●
●
● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ●

● ●
●

● ● ● ● ● App
● ●
Input and Output Table

●: Equipped

IM 05P02C41-01EN App-5
Appendix 2 Input and Output Table (for Detailed model)

UP55A (Continued)
Optional
Model Suffix code
suffix code
UP55A -NNN -xx -x x /x
Fixed code -NNN
Display language/
-xx
Case color
-A
-R
Output 1 -U
-T
-P
A
R
Output 2 U
T
N
Retransmission output /RT
Heater break alarm /HA
/R1
/U1
E1 terminal area /X1
/Y1
/W1
/A2
/X2
E2 terminal area
/Y2
/W2
/CH3
/CC3
/PD3
/DN3
E3 terminal area
/ET3
/X3
/Y3
/W3
/A4
/C4
/L4
/AC4
E4 terminal area
/LC4
/X4
/Y4
/W4
Power supply /DC
Additional treatment /CT

App-6 IM 05P02C41-01EN
 Appendix 2 Input and Output Table (for Detailed model)

UP55A (Continued)
DO
AL1 AL2 AL3 DO11 DO12 DO13 DO14 DO15 DO21 DO22 DO23 DO24 DO25 DO31 DO32 DO33 DO34 DO35 DO41 DO42 DO43 DO44 DO45 HAL1 HAL2
● ● ●

● ●

● ● ● ● ●
● ●

● ● ● ● ●
● ●

● ● ● ● ●
● ●

● ● ● ● ●
● ●

●: Equipped
App
Input and Output Table

IM 05P02C41-01EN App-7
Blank Page
 

Revision Information
 Title : UP55A Program Controller User’s Manual
 Manual No. : IM 05P02C41-01EN

Aug. 2010/1st Edition

Newly published
Sep. 2010/2nd Edition
Error correction

n Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation

n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN
Blank Page
YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION
Headquarters
2-9-32, Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo, 180-8750 JAPAN
Branch Sales Offices
Nagoya, Osaka, Hiroshima, Fukuoka, Sendai, Ichihara, Toyota,
Kanazawa, and Kitakyusyu.

YOKOGAWA CORPORATION OF AMERICA

2 Dart Road, Newnan, Georgia 30265-1094, U.S.A.
Phone : 1-800-888-6400
Fax : 1-770-254-0928

YOKOGAWA EUROPE B. V.
Euroweg 2, 3825 HD Amersfoort, THE NETHERLANDS
Phone : 31-88-4641000 Fax : 31-88-4641111
Branch Sales Offices / Wien (Austria), Zaventem (Belgium),
Ratingen (Germany), Madrid (Spain), Runcorn (United Kingdom), Milano (Italy),
Velizy-Villacoublay (France), Budapest (Hungary), Stockholm (Sweden),
Sola (Norway), Warszawa (Poland), Vila Nova de Gaia (Portugal),
Bucharest (Romania), Dublin (Ireland)

YOKOGAWA AMERICA DO SUL LTDA.

Praca Acapulco, 31 - Santo Amaro. Sao Paulo/SP - BRAZIL
Phone : 55-11-5681-2400 Fax : 55-11-5681-4434

YOKOGAWA ENGINEERING ASIA PTE. LTD.

5 Bedok South Road, 469270 SINGAPORE
Phone : 65-6241-9933 Fax : 65-6241-2606

YOKOGAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CO., LTD.

14-1, Yangpyongdong-4Ga, Youngdeungpo-Gu, Seoul, 150-866 KOREA
Phone : 82-2-2628-6000 Fax : 82-2-2628-6400

YOKOGAWA AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

Tower A, 112-118 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park,
N.S.W.2113, AUSTRALIA
Phone : 61-2-8870-1100 Fax : 61-2-8870-1111

YOKOGAWA INDIA LTD.

Plot No.96 Electronic City Complex, Hosur Road, Bangalore 560100, INDIA
Phone : 91-80-4158-6000 Fax : 91-80-2852-1442

YOKOGAWA CHINA CO., LTD.

3F TowerD Cartelo Crocodile Building
No.568 West Tianshan Road, Shanghai 200335, CHINA
Phone : 86-21-62396262 Fax : 86-21-62387866

Aug. '10

Printed in Korea